JBL My TI Nspire / CAS Teacher Software Guidebook (English) TS EN

User Manual: JBL TI-Nspire / TI-Nspire CAS Teacher Software Guidebook (English) TI-Nspire™ / TI-Nspire™ CAS Teacher Software Guidebook

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 644 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Teacher Software Guidebook
This guidebook applies to TI-Nspire™ software version 3.9. To obtain the latest
version of the documentation, go to
education.ti.com/guides
.
2
Important Information
Except as otherwise expressly stated in the License that accompanies a
program, Texas Instruments makes no warranty, either express or implied,
including but not limited to any implied warranties of merchantability and
fitness for a particular purpose, regarding any programs or book materials and
makes such materials available solely on an "as-is" basis. In no event shall
Texas Instruments be liable to anyone for special, collateral, incidental, or
consequential damages in connection with or arising out of the purchase or
use of these materials, and the sole and exclusive liability of Texas
Instruments, regardless of the form of action, shall not exceed the amount set
forth in the license for the program. Moreover, Texas Instruments shall not be
liable for any claim of any kind whatsoever against the use of these materials
by any other party.
License
Please see the complete license installed in
C:\ProgramFiles\TIEducation\<TI-Nspire™ Product Name>\license.
Adobe®, Adobe® Flash®, Apple®, Blackboard™, Chrome®, Excel®, Google®,
Firefox®, Internet Explorer®, Java™, JavaScript®, Mac®, Microsoft®, Mozilla®,
OSX®, PowerPoint®, Safari®, Vernier DataQuest™, Vernier EasyLink®,
Vernier EasyTemp®, VernierGo!Link®, VernierGo!Motion®, VernierGo!Temp®,
Windows®, and Windows® XP are trademarks of their respective owners.
© 2006 - 2014 Texas Instruments Incorporated
Contents
Important Information 2
Getting Started with TI-Nspire™ Teacher Software 13
Using the Welcome Screen 13
Exploring the Content Workspace 15
Exploring the Documents Workspace 16
Changing Language 18
Using the Content Workspace 20
Exploring the Content Workspace 20
Exploring the Resources Pane 21
Using the Preview Pane 23
Accessing Computer Content 24
Using Shortcuts 27
Working with Links 27
Using Web Content 30
Working with Connected Handhelds 35
Viewing Content on Connected Handhelds 35
Managing Files on a Connected Handheld 38
Sending Files to Handhelds 40
Checking for an OS Update 43
Installing an OS Update 44
Renaming Handhelds 46
Using Identify Selected to Locate Handhelds 47
Using the Transfer Tool 49
Transfer Tool Interface 49
Opening the Transfer Tool 52
Adding Files or Folders to the Transfer List 52
Removing Files or Folders from the Transfer List 53
Editing the Destination Folder 54
Deleting All Handheld Files and Folders 55
Starting a Transfer 56
Stopping File Transfers 57
Closing the Transfer Tool 58
Using the Documents Workspace 59
3
4
Exploring the Documents Workspace 59
Using the Documents Toolbox 60
Exploring Document Tools 60
Exploring the Page Sorter 61
Exploring the TI-SmartView™ Feature 62
Exploring Utilities 64
Exploring Content Explorer 66
Using the Work Area 68
Changing Document Settings 69
Changing Graphs & Geometry Settings 71
Working with TI-Nspire™ Documents 75
Creating a New TI-Nspire™ Document 75
Opening an Existing Document 76
Saving TI-Nspire™ Documents 77
Deleting Documents 78
Closing Documents 79
Formatting Text in Documents 79
Using Colors in Documents 81
Setting Page Size and Document Preview 81
Working with Multiple Documents 83
Working with Applications 84
Selecting and Moving Pages 87
Working with Problems and Pages 89
Printing Documents 91
Viewing Document Properties and Copyright Information 92
Working with PublishView™ Documents 95
Creating a New PublishView™ Document 96
Saving PublishView™ Documents 100
Exploring the Documents Workspace 102
Working with PublishView™ Objects 106
Working with TI-Nspire™ Applications 114
Working with Problems 118
Organizing PublishView™ Sheets 121
Using Zoom 127
Adding Text to a PublishView™ Document 127
Using Hyperlinks in PublishView™ Documents 130
Working with Images 137
Working with Video Files 140
Converting Documents 141
Printing PublishView™ Documents 144
Working with Lesson Bundles 145
Creating a New Lesson Bundle 145
Adding Files to a Lesson Bundle 147
Opening a Lesson Bundle 149
Managing Files in a Lesson Bundle 150
Managing Lesson Bundles 152
Packaging Lesson Bundles 154
Emailing a Lesson Bundle 155
Sending Lesson Bundles to Connected Handhelds 156
Capturing Screens 157
Accessing Screen Capture 157
Using Capture Page 158
Using Capture Selected Handheld 159
Viewing Captured Screens 160
Saving Captured Pages and Screens 161
Copying and Pasting a Screen 163
Capturing Images in Handheld Mode 163
Working with Images 167
Working with Images in the Software 167
Using Question in the Teacher Software 171
Understanding the Question Tools 172
Using the Teacher Tool Palette 173
Understanding the Configuration Tool 174
Formatting Text and Objects 175
Adding Images to Questions 176
Adding Questions 176
Responding to Questions 195
Understanding the Question Toolbar 195
Types of Questions 195
Responding to Quick Poll Questions 196
Submitting Responses 199
5
6
Calculator Application 201
Entering and Evaluating Math Expressions 202
CAS: Working with Measurement Units 209
Working with Variables 211
Creating User-defined Functions and Programs 212
Editing Calculator Expressions 216
Financial Calculations 217
Working with the Calculator History 219
Using Variables 223
Linking Values on Pages 223
Creating Variables 223
Using (Linking) Variables 228
Naming Variables 231
Locking and Unlocking Variables 233
Removing a Linked Variable 236
Graphs Application 237
What You Must Know 238
Graphing Functions 240
Manipulating Functions by Dragging 240
Specifying a Function with Domain Restrictions 243
Finding Points of Interest on a Function Graph 244
Graphing a Family of Functions 247
Graphing Equations 248
Graphing Conic Sections 248
Graphing Parametric Equations 251
Graphing Polar Equations 252
Using the Text Tool to Graph Equations 253
Graphing Scatter Plots 255
Plotting Sequences 256
Graphing Differential Equations 259
Viewing Tables from the Graphs Application 263
Editing Relations 263
Accessing the Graph History 265
Zooming/Rescaling the Graphs Work Area 266
Customizing the Graphs Work Area 267
Hiding and Showing Items in the Graphs Application 269
Conditional Attributes 270
Calculating Area Between Curves 272
Tracing Graphs or Plots 273
Introduction to Geometric Objects 275
Creating Points and Lines 277
Creating Geometric Shapes 282
Basics of Working with Objects 287
Measuring Objects 290
Transforming Objects 295
Exploring with Geometric Construction Tools 298
Animating Points on Objects 303
Adjusting Variable Values with a Slider 304
Labeling (Identifying) the Coordinates of a Point 306
Displaying the Equation of a Geometric Object 307
Using the Calculate Tool 308
3D Graphs 311
Graphing 3D Functions 311
Graphing 3D Parametric Equations 312
Rotating the 3D View 313
Editing a 3D Graph 314
Accessing the Graph History 314
Changing the Appearance of a 3D Graph 315
Showing and Hiding 3D Graphs 317
Customizing the 3D Viewing Environment 317
Tracing in the 3D View 318
Example: Creating an Animated 3D Graph 319
Geometry Application 321
What You Must Know 322
Introduction to Geometric Objects 324
Creating Points and Lines 326
Creating Geometric Shapes 331
Basics of Working with Objects 336
Measuring Objects 339
Transforming Objects 344
Exploring with Geometric Construction Tools 347
Using Geometry Trace 352
Conditional Attributes 353
Hiding Objects in the Geometry Application 355
7
8
Customizing the Geometry Work Area 355
Animating Points on Objects 356
Adjusting Variable Values with a Slider 357
Using the Calculate Tool 360
Lists&Spreadsheet Application 363
Creating and Sharing Spreadsheet Data as Lists 364
Creating Spreadsheet Data 366
Navigating in a Spreadsheet 369
Working with Cells 370
Working with Rows and Columns of Data 374
Sorting Data 378
Generating Columns of Data 379
Graphing Spreadsheet Data 382
Exchanging Data with Other Computer Software 386
Capturing Data from Graphs&Geometry 388
Using Table Data for StatisticalAnalysis 391
Statistics Input Descriptions 392
Statistical Calculations 394
Distributions 399
Confidence Intervals 405
Stat Tests 407
Working with Function Tables 412
Data&Statistics Application 415
Basic Operations in Data&Statistics 416
Overview of Raw and Summary Data 420
Working with Numeric Plot Types 421
Working with Categorical Plot Types 431
Exploring Data 440
Using Window/Zoom Tools 450
Graphing Functions 451
Using Graph Trace 456
Customizing Your Workspace 457
Adjusting Variable Values with a Slider 458
Inferential Statistics 461
Notes Application 463
Using Templates in Notes 464
Formatting Text in Notes 465
Using Color in Notes 466
Inserting Images 467
Inserting Items on a Notes Page 468
Inserting Comments in Notes Text 468
Inserting Geometric Shape Symbols 469
Entering Math Expressions in Notes Text 469
Evaluating and Approximating Math Expressions 471
Inserting Chemical Equations in Notes 473
Deactivating Math Expression Boxes 474
Changing the Attributes of Math Expression Boxes 475
Using Calculations in Notes 476
Exploring Notes with Examples 478
Data Collection 485
What You Must Know 486
About Collection Devices 487
Connecting Sensors 493
Setting Up an Offline Sensor 493
Modifying Sensor Settings 494
Collecting Data 496
Using Data Markers to Annotate Data 500
Collecting Data Using a Remote Collection Unit 503
Setting Up a Sensor for Automatic Triggering 505
Collecting and Managing Data Sets 507
Analyzing Collected Data 510
Displaying Collected Data in Graph View 515
Displaying Collected Data in Table View 517
Customizing the Graph of Collected Data 522
Striking and Restoring Data 530
Replaying the Data Collection 531
Adjusting Derivative Settings 533
Drawing a Predictive Plot 534
Using Motion Match 534
Printing Collected Data 535
Libraries 539
Creating Libraries and Library Objects 540
Private and Public Library Objects 540
9
10
Using Library Objects 541
Creating Shortcuts to Library Objects 542
Included Libraries 543
Restoring an Included Library 543
Getting Started with the Program Editor 545
Defining a Program or Function 546
Viewing a Program or Function 549
Opening a Function or Program for Editing 550
Importing a Program from a Library 550
Creating a Copy of a Function or Program 551
Renaming a Program or Function 551
Changing the Library Access Level 552
Finding Text 552
Finding and Replacing Text 552
Closing the Current Function or Program 553
Running Programs and Evaluating Functions 553
Getting Values into a Program 556
Displaying Information from a Function or Program 558
Using Local Variables 559
Differences Between Functions and Programs 561
Calling One Program from Another 562
Controlling the Flow of a Function or Program 563
Using If, Lbl, and Goto to Control Program Flow 564
Using Loops to Repeat a Group of Commands 566
Changing Mode Settings 570
Debugging Programs and Handling Errors 571
Using the TI-SmartView™ Emulator 573
Opening the TI-SmartView™ Emulator 573
Choosing a Keypad 575
Choosing Display Options 575
Working with the Emulated Handheld 576
Using the Touchpad 577
Using the Clickpad 577
Using Settings and Status 578
Changing TI-SmartView™ Options 579
Working with Documents 580
Using Screen Capture 581
Writing Lua Scripts 583
Overview of the Script Editor 583
Exploring the Script Editor Interface 584
Using the Toolbar 585
Inserting New Scripts 587
Editing Scripts 587
Changing View Options 588
Setting Minimum API Level 589
Saving Script Applications 589
Managing Images 590
Setting Script Permissions 592
Debugging Scripts 592
Using the Help Menu 595
Activating Your Software License 595
Registering Your Product 597
Downloading the Latest Guidebook 597
Exploring TI Resources 598
Running TI-Nspire™ Diagnostics 598
Updating the TI-Nspire™ Software 599
Updating the OS on a Connected Handheld 600
Viewing Software Version and Legal Information 601
Helping Improve the Product 602
Support and Service 603
Texas Instruments Support and Service 603
Service and Warranty Information 603
Index 605
11
12
Getting Started with TI-Nspire™ Teacher
Software
TI-Nspire™ Teacher Software enables teachers to use PC and Mac®
computers to perform the same functions as on a handheld. This document
covers:
• TI-Nspire™ Teacher Software
• TI-Nspire™ CAS Teacher Software
Note: When there are differences between the software, those differences are
described.
Using the Welcome Screen
By default, the Welcome Screen opens the first time you start the software after
installation is complete. To begin working with documents, click an icon or link,
or close this screen manually. Any normal action that takes place automatically,
such as upgrade prompts or the ability to begin using connected handhelds,
appears after you close the Welcome Screen.
Note: Depending on how your software was installed, you might see a Product
Improvement screen the first time you start the software.
ÀTI-Nspire™ applications. Click one of these icons to create a new
Getting Started with TI-Nspire™ Teacher Software 13
14 Getting Started with TI-Nspire™ Teacher Software
document with the selected application active. The applications are
Calculator, Graphs, Geometry, Lists&Spreadsheet, Data&Statistics,
Notes, Question, and the Vernier DataQuest™ application. When you
click an icon, the Welcome Screen closes and the selected
application opens in the Documents Workspace.
ÁQuick Start links. Click one of these options to:
• Create a new document with the application you select as the
first page.
• Create a new, blank document.
• Find and open an existing document.
Use the following links to:
•View content. Find content on your computer, the web, or
connected handhelds.
•Manage handhelds. Use the Content Workspace to see every
handheld connected to your computer as well as the status of
each handheld.
•Transfer documents. Use the Content Workspace to send
documents, folders, or new handheld OS files to connected
handhelds.
ÂAlways show this at startup. Clear this check box to skip this screen
when you open your software.
Closing the Welcome Screen
To access the default workspace and begin working with documents, click
to close the Welcome Screen. To open the Welcome screen again, click Help >
Welcome Screen.
• In the TI-Nspire™ Teacher Software, the Content Workspace is displayed
when you open the software for the first time.
• In the TI-Nspire™ Student Software, the Documents Workspace is the
default workspace.
Note: The next time you open the software, the last workspace used is
displayed.
Exploring the Content Workspace
The Content Workspace provides access to folders and files on your local
drive, network drives, external drives, to files on connected handhelds, and
links to web resources. Teachers can also use this workspace to create and
manage lesson bundles.
Note: TI-Nspire™ Student Software users will not see the Content workspace.
ÀTitle bar. Shows the name of the software. The minimize, maximize, and
close buttons are located in the right corner.
ÁMenu bar. Contains options used to work with files and to modify system
settings. In the Content Workspace these are File, Edit, View, Tools,
Window, and Help.
ÂWorkspace Selector. Click these tabs to switch from the Content
Workspace to the Documents Workspace.
ÃToolbar. Contains shortcuts to tools used to create folders, save files,
create lesson bundles, send files to handhelds, and copy/paste. Options
available from the toolbar change depending on which workspace is
open. In the Content Workspace, the forward and back arrows function as
they do in a web browser enabling you to go back and forth between
locations.
ÄResources pane. Enables you to locate and view files on your computer,
access web links, and access files on connected handhelds. When you
select a resource, the details for that resource are displayed in the content
Getting Started with TI-Nspire™ Teacher Software 15
16 Getting Started with TI-Nspire™ Teacher Software
pane.
ÅNavigation bar. Navigate to a location on your computer by clicking an item
in the breadcrumb trail. When you select a resource, the options available
are specific to that resource.
ÆContent pane. Shows the content for the resource selected. Use the
content pane as you would a file manager to locate and view folders,
lesson bundles, and TI-Nspire™ and PublishView™ documents on your
computer or on connected handhelds. Click to access options
applicable to the selected folder or TI-Nspire™ document.
ÇPreview pane. Details about the selected file or folder are displayed in the
bottom half of the space.
Exploring the Documents Workspace
Use the Documents Workspace to create or edit TI-Nspire™ and PublishView™
documents and work with applications and problems. The tools in the
workspace are specific to working with open documents.
ÀWorkspace Selector. Click a tab to switch between the Documents
Workspace and the Content Workspace.
Note: These tabs are not shown in the TI-Nspire™ Student Software. The
Document Workspace is the only available workspace.
ÁToolbar. Contains shortcuts to frequently performed tasks such as creating
new documents, opening existing documents, saving documents, inserting
applications, inserting variables, and taking screen captures. The cut,
copy, and paste icons are also located in the toolbar. At the right side, a
Document Preview button lets you select Handheld or Computer preview.
ÂDocuments Toolbox. Contains tools needed to work with TI-Nspire™ and
PublishView™ documents. Use these tools to insert applications, use the
page sorter to view TI-Nspire™ documents, open the TI-SmartView™
emulator, open Content Explorer, insert utilities such as math templates
and the symbols from the catalog, and insert text and images into
PublishView™ documents. Click each icon to access the available tools.
ÃToolbox pane. Options for the selected tool are displayed in this area. For
example, click the Document Tools icon to access tools needed to work
with the active application. The tool for configuring questions opens in this
space when you insert a question.
ÄWork area. Shows the current page of the active (selected) document. Lets
you perform calculations, add applications, and add problems and pages.
Only one document at a time is active. Multiple documents appear as tabs.
ÅStatus bar. Provides information about the active document.
Understanding the Status Bar
The status bar provides information about the current document, and provides
options that enable you to toggle between Handheld and Computer view and
adjust how the document appears in the work area.
ÀPage Size. Shows the document's page size as Handheld or
Computer. You can use the TI-Nspire™ File menu to convert a
document from one page size to the other.
ÁProblem/Page counter. The first value represents the problem
number of the active page, and the second value tells you the page
Getting Started with TI-Nspire™ Teacher Software 17
18 Getting Started with TI-Nspire™ Teacher Software
number within the problem. In the example, the counter reads 1.2,
indicating Problem 1, Page 2.
ÂSettings. Double-click to view or change the Document Settings for
the active document or to change the default Document Settings.
ÃZoom. Enabled in Handheld preview only (click DocumentPreview
on the toolbar and select Handheld). Click ▼and select a
magnification value for the preview.
ÄBoldness. Enabled in Computer preview only (click Document
Preview on the toolbar and select Computer). Click ▼and select a
value to increase or decrease the boldness of text and other items.
Changing Language
Use this option to select a preferred language. You must restart the software for
the language to take effect.
1. Click File >Settings >Change Language.
The Choose a Language dialog box opens.
2. Click ¤to open the Choose language drop-down list.
3. Select the desired language.
4. Click Quit Now to close the software immediately. You will be prompted to
save any open documents. When you restart the software, the language
change is effective.
—or—
Click Quit Later to continue your work. The language change is not applied
until you close and restart the software at a later time.
Note: If you select Simplified Chinese or Traditional Chinese as the language
in the TI-Nspire™ software, you should see Chinese characters in the menus
and dialogs. If your computer uses the Windows® XP operating system and
you do not see Chinese characters, you may need to install the Windows® XP
East Asian Language Support package.
Getting Started with TI-Nspire™ Teacher Software 19
20 Using the Content Workspace
Using the Content Workspace
The Content Workspace provides access and navigation to folders and files
stored on your computer, network, and external drives, allowing you to open,
copy, and transfer files to students.
Exploring the Content Workspace
ÀResources pane. Select content here. You can select folders and
shortcuts on your computer, network drives, external drives, or web
content. If you are using software that supports TI-Nspire™
handhelds, the Connected Handhelds heading is visible when
handhelds are connected.
Note: You can add new links to your favorite Web sites in the Links
section. You can access these new links in the Content pane. New
links may not be added to the Web content section.
ÁNavigation bar. Navigate to any location on your computer by clicking
an item in the breadcrumb trail. When you select a resource, the
options shown are specific to that resource.
ÂContent pane. By default, the folders on your desktop are displayed.
Use this space to locate and view files on your computer. You can
locate and access files on a connected handheld if using software
that supports handhelds. Use the top half of the space as you would
a file manager. The Content pane is able to display the contents of
only one selected item at a time. Avoid selecting more than one item
at a time.
ÃPreview pane. Shows details about the selected file or folder.
Exploring the Resources Pane
Use the Resources pane to locate documents on a computer, access web
content, and communicate with connected handhelds if using TI-Nspire™
software that supports connected handhelds.
ÀComputer Content. Enables navigation to all files on a computer,
network drives, and external drives. Computer Content expands and
collapses to provide access to the following default shortcuts:
• Local Disk
• External drives
• Network drives
• Desktop
• Documents or My Documents
When you select an item in Computer Content, the file structure
appears in the Content pane. When you select a folder or supported
Using the Content Workspace 21
22 Using the Content Workspace
file, the detail is displayed in the Preview pane.
ÁLinks. By default, links to Texas Instruments sites are listed. When
you click Links, it shows a list of links in the Content pane. Then when
you click a link there, it launches in your web browser. You can add
your own links to this section. Links from the latest version of the
TI-Nspire™ software are added when you upgrade.
Users located in the United States can search U.S. standards or
textbooks by selecting the search option from Links.
ÂWeb Content. Lists links to Texas Instruments sites that contain
TI-Nspire™-supported activities. Web Content is available if you are
connected to the Internet. You can save material you find on these
sites to your computer and share items through the Computer
Content pane or Connected Handhelds if using software that
supports handhelds. You cannot save links to websites in the Web
Content section.
Note: The web content that is available varies depending on region. If
there is no online content, this section is not visible in the Resources
pane.
When you select an item in Web Content, the list of activities is
displayed in the Content pane, and a preview of the selected activity
is displayed in the Preview pane.
ÃConnected Handhelds. Lists handhelds connected to your computer.
Click the Connected Handhelds label to view information about each
handheld in the Content pane. To see folders and files on a specific
handheld, click the handheld name. A warning sign next to a
handheld name indicates that the OS on the handheld does not
match the software version. The handheld OS release version must
match the TI-Nspire™ software release version to work in a classroom
environment. Move your mouse over the warning sign to open a tool
tip for more information.
Note:Connected Handhelds are not shown if there are no handhelds
connected or if you are using TI-Nspire™ Navigator™ NC Teacher
Software.
Using the Preview Pane
ÀA thumbnail preview of the selected folder, .tns file, file-type icon, or
lesson bundle. Double-click a file-type icon to open the file in its
associated application.
Note: If a lesson bundle is empty and this space is blank, you have
the option to add files.
ÁIf a TI-Nspire™ document has multiple pages, use the forward arrow
to preview the next page. The backward arrow becomes active so
you can move backward through the pages. If working with a lesson
bundle, you can choose to preview a TI-Nspire™ document within the
bundle by this method.
ÂIf a lesson bundle is selected, the Files dialog box opens above the
Details window listing the files in the lesson bundle. Double-click any
file in a lesson bundle to open the file in its associated application.
ÃIf a folder is selected, the Details window shows the name of the
folder, the path where the folder is located, and the date modified.
Using the Content Workspace 23
24 Using the Content Workspace
For document files and lesson bundle files, the Details window shows
the name, the date the file was modified, the file size, and whether or
not the file is read only.
Accessing Computer Content
Computer Content provides access to all information stored on your computer,
network, and external drives.
Using the Navigation bar
The Content pane Navigation bar provides tools needed to locate folders and
files.
ÀOptions. Click ¤to open the menu to access options for working
with files and folders.
ÁCurrent path: Contains a clickable breadcrumb trail of the current
location. Click a breadcrumb to navigate to any section in the path.
ÂSearch. Enter a search keyword and press Enter to find all files within
the selected folder containing that word.
Filtering Computer Content
Use this filtering option for easy access and selection of your teaching content.
You can select show TI-Nspire™ content only or to show all content.
1. Select a folder in Computer Content in the Resources pane.
2. From the Menu bar, select View > Filter by.
3. Choose one of the following options.
•Show TI-Nspire™ content only
•Show all content
Mapping a Network Drive
Complete the following steps to map a network drive.
1. Select Computer Content from the Resources list.
2. Click , and then click Create Shortcut.
The Add Shortcut location to Content dialog box opens.
3. Click Browse.
Note: You can also type the full path name for the network drive.
The Select Shortcut Folder dialog box opens.
Using the Content Workspace 25
26 Using the Content Workspace
4. Navigate to the network drive.
5. Click Select.
6. Click Add Location.
The Please enter network drive credentials dialog box opens.
7. Type the username and password given to you by your system
administrator.
8. Click Accept.
The network drive is added to the list of folders under the Computer
Content heading in the Resources pane.
Accessing a Secured Network Drive
If access to a network drive requires authentication, complete the following
steps to access secured network.
1. Click the drive you want to access in the Resources pane.
The Please enter network drive credentials dialog box opens.
2. Type your username and password.
3. Click Accept.
Using Shortcuts
Use this option to add folders or lesson bundles containing frequently used
files to the Computer Content list.
Adding a Shortcut
To add a shortcut to a folder containing files you access often:
1. Navigate to the folder where the files are located.
2. Click , and then click Create Shortcut.
The folder is added to the list of folders under Computer Content in the
Resources pane.
Deleting a Shortcut
To delete a shortcut:
1. From the Computer Content list, select the folder to be deleted.
2. Right-click the selected folder, and then click Remove Shortcut.
The folder is removed from the list of shortcuts.
Note: You cannot remove default shortcuts.
Working with Links
By default, the Links list contains a list of links to Texas Instruments websites.
Click a link to launch your web browser and access the website.
Using the Content Workspace 27
28 Using the Content Workspace
Using the Links Toolbar
When you select Links in the Resources pane, the tools on the navigation bar
are specific to working with links. Use these tools to add, edit, or delete links
from the list. You can also move a link up or down in the list.
Options. Click ¤to open the menu to access options for
working with links.
Click this icon to add a link to the list.
Select an existing link, and then click this icon to edit the link’s
attributes. You cannot edit a default link.
Click this icon to delete a link. You cannot delete a default
link.
Select a link and click this icon to move the link up in the list.
Select a link and click this icon to move the link down in the
list.
Adding a Link
Complete the following steps to add a link to the list of Links in the Resource
pane.
1. Click .
The Add Link dialog box opens.
2. Type the name of the link.
3. Type the URL in the Address field.
4. Click Add Link.
The link is added to the bottom of the list of existing links.
Editing an Existing Link
Complete the following steps to edit an existing link.
1. Select the link you want to change.
2. Click .
The Edit Link dialog box opens.
3. Make needed changes to the name of the link or to the URL.
4. Click Edit Link.
The changes are applied to the link.
Removing a Link
Complete the following steps to delete a link.
1. Select the link you want to delete.
Using the Content Workspace 29
30 Using the Content Workspace
2. Click .
The confirmation dialog box opens.
3. Click Remove.
The link is removed from the list.
Note: You cannot delete a default link.
Moving Links Up or Down in the List
You can change the order of the links in the list to suit your needs.
▶Click to move a selected link up one place in the list.
▶Click to move a selected link down one place in the link.
▶Click , and then select Move to Top of List to relocate a selected link to
the top of the list.
▶Click , and then select Move to Bottom of List to relocate a selected link
to the bottom of the list.
Using Web Content
Web Content provides links to online materials on Texas Instruments websites.
You can save material found on these websites to your computer and share
them using the Computer Content pane and Connected Handhelds.
Information provided for each activity includes the name of the activity, the
author, the date the activity was posted, the size of the file, and the source.
ÀNavigation toolbar.
ÁColumn headings.
ÂList of available activities.
ÃList of the files contained in the activity.
ÄDetails about the selected activity.
Note: An Internet connection is required to access Texas Instruments websites.
Sorting the List of Activities
Use the column headings to sort the information in the list of activities. By
default the list is displayed in alphabetical order by Name.
• Click the Name heading to list activities in reverse alphabetical order. Click
the heading again to return to A to Z order.
• Click the Author heading to list the activities in alphabetical order by author
name.
• Click the Date Posted heading to list the activities in order from newest to
oldest or from oldest to newest.
• Click the Size heading to list the activities according to file size.
• Click the Source heading to list the activities in order by source.
• Right-click the column heading row to customize displayed column
headings.
Using the Content Workspace 31
32 Using the Content Workspace
Filtering the List of Activities
By default, all available activities are listed in the Content pane. Options on the
Navigation bar enable you to filter the activities by subject, topic, and category.
You can also search for an activity using a keyword search.
To find all activities related to a particular subject:
1. In the Subject field, click ¤to open the drop-down list.
2. Select a subject.
All activities related to the selected subject are listed.
3. To narrow the search, click ¤in the Topic field to view and select a topic
related to the subject selected.
4. Use the Category field to narrow the search even further. Click ¤to select
a category related to the selected subject and topic.
Using Keywords to Search for an Activity
Complete the following steps to search for an activity using a keyword or
phrase.
1. Type a keyword or phrase in the Filter by Keyword field.
2. Press Enter.
All activities that contain the keyword or phrase are listed.
Opening an Activity
1. Select the activity you want to open.
2. Click , and then select Open.
The Open Activity dialog box opens with a list of all documents related to
the selected activity.
You can open a .tns or .tsnp file in the TI-Nspire™ software. Other files such
as Microsoft® Word and Adobe® PDF files open in their respective
applications.
3. Select the file and click ¢, and then select Open.
• The .tns file opens in the Documents Workspace.
• The .doc or .pdf file opens in its associated application.
Saving an Activity to Your Computer
Complete the following steps to save an activity to your computer.
1. Select the activity you want to save. The file details are displayed in the
bottom half of the window.
2. Click Save this Activity to Computer in Preview pane, above Files.
Note: You can also right-click on the selected activity and choose Save to
Computer.
The Save Selected files dialog box opens.
3. Navigate to the folder where you want to save the file.
4. Click Save.
The activity is saved to your computer as a lesson bundle.
Using the Content Workspace 33
34 Using the Content Workspace
Copying an Activity
Complete the following steps to copy an activity. Once the activity is copied to
the Clipboard, you can paste the activity into a folder on your computer, and
then drag the activity to your list of shortcuts in the Local Content pane.
1. Click the activity you want to copy to select it.
2. Use one of the following methods to copy the activity to the Clipboard:
• Select the activity and drag it to a folder in the Local Content list.
• Click , and then click Copy.
• Right-click on a file in the Files list, and then click Copy.
• Click (Copy icon), which is located in the toolbar.
The activity is copied to the Clipboard.
3. Open a folder on your computer, and then click Edit > Paste to copy the
activity to the selected folder.
Working with Connected Handhelds
The TI-Nspire™ software enables you to view content, manage files, and install
operating system updates on handhelds connected to the computer.
To use the features described in this chapter, handhelds must be turned on
and connected by one of these means:
• TI-Nspire™ Docking Station or TI-Nspire™ CXDocking Station
• TI-Nspire™ Navigator™ Cradle and access point
• TI-Nspire™ CX Wireless Network Adapter and access point
• TI-Nspire™ CX Wireless Network Adapter -
v2
and access point
• A direct connection through a standard USB cable
Note: The tasks in this section can only be performed using TI-Nspire™
handhelds. In order to enable wireless connectivity, the TI-Nspire™ Navigator™
Teacher Software for Handhelds and the OS installed on the TI-Nspire™
handhelds must be version 3.9 or later.
Viewing Content on Connected Handhelds
When you select a handheld in the Resources pane in the Content Workspace,
all files and folders on the handheld appear in the Content pane. To preview
the document contents, select Click here to preview document in the Preview
pane.
Working with Connected Handhelds 35
36 Working with Connected Handhelds
ÀConnected Handhelds - Lists all handhelds that are connected and turned
on.
Note:A warning symbol next to the handheld name indicates that the OS
installed on the handheld does not match the software version installed on
the computer and that an OSupdate is needed.
ÁOptions - Available options vary depending on the task you select under
Resources.
ÂContent pane - When Connected Handhelds is selected, the Content pane
shows details about handhelds that are connected and turned on:
•Name
•Battery (Li-ion) - Li-ion (rechargeable) battery charge (Critical 2%,
25%, 50%, 75%, 100%, or "--" to indicate no battery is present).
•Battery (AAA) - AAA battery charge (Critical 2%, 25%, 50%, 75%,
100%, or "--" to indicate no battery is present).
•Storage Size
•OS Version
ÃPreview pane - Provides information on a handheld when you click
Connected Handhelds in the Resources pane and then a handheld in the
Content pane. If you select a TI-Nspire™ file in the Content pane, the
Preview pane shows a preview available for that file.
•Handheld Type: Names of handhelds.
•Product ID: Handheld product identification.
•Boot 1: Internal bootstrap that performs lower level operation for
booting up device.
•Boot 2: External bootstrap that performs lower level operation for
booting up device.
•Operating System: The operating system in use.
•Available Space: The amount of space left and available on the
handheld.
When you select a handheld, all files and folders on the handheld appear in
the Content pane. When a file or folder is selected, the details are displayed in
the Preview pane. Click the icon to preview the document.
Details about the selected folder or file are shown in the Preview pane.
Details for selected folder
Details for selected file
▶To view the files in a folder, double-click the folder name in the Content
pane. The files in the folder are listed in the Content pane.
▶To preview the contents of a .tns file, select Click here to preview document
in the Preview pane.
Working with Connected Handhelds 37
38 Working with Connected Handhelds
Managing Files on a Connected Handheld
When working with files on connected handhelds in the Content Workspace,
use the Options menu or the context menu to manage files.
Note: If you select a file type that is not supported on the handheld, some
selections in Options menu are not active.
Option How it Works
Open Open a file on a connected handheld:
• Click the file you want to open.
• Click Open. The document opens in the Documents
Workspace.
Save to
Computer
Save a copy of the selected file on your computer:
• Click the file you want to save.
• Click Save to Computer. The Save Selected Files dialog
box opens.
• Navigate to the folder where you want to save the file.
• Click Save.
Copy/Paste Create a copy of a file:
• Click the file you want to copy.
• Click Options > Copy to copy the file to the Clipboard.
• To paste the file in another location, navigate to the new
location, and then click Options > Paste.
Note: If you don’t select a new location, the copied file is
pasted with a new name "Copy of ..."
Delete Delete a file on a connected handheld:
• Click the file you want to delete.
• Click Delete.
• Click Yes when the Warning dialog box opens. Click No
to cancel.
Refresh To refresh the list of files, click Options > Refresh.
Option How it Works
Rename To rename a file on a connected handheld:
• Click the file you want to rename.
• Click Options > Rename.
• Type the new name and press Enter.
Up a Level Go up a level in the folder hierarchy. This option is available
when you select a file inside a folder.
New Folder Create a new folder:
• Click New Folder.
• Type a name for the new folder.
• Press Enter.
Opening Documents on a Connected Handheld
To open a document on a connected handheld in the TI-Nspire™ software:
1. Ensure the handheld is connected to your computer.
2. Click to open Content Explorer.
The connected handheld name is listed in the Connected Handhelds
pane.
3. Double-click the handheld name.
The folders and documents on the handheld are listed.
4. Navigate to the document you want to open, and then double-click the file
name.
The document opens in the Documents Workspace.
Saving Files to a Connected Handheld
When you save a file from your computer to a handheld, files are converted to
TI-Nspire™ documents (.tns files). (See
Sending Files to Handhelds
)
To save a file on your computer to a connected handheld:
1. Ensure the handheld is connected to your computer.
2. Click to open Content Explorer.
Working with Connected Handhelds 39
40 Working with Connected Handhelds
The folders and files on your computer are listed in the Computer pane.
3. Navigate to the folder or file you want to save to the handheld.
4. Click the file to select it.
5. Drag the file to a connected handheld listed in the Connected Handheld
pane.
The file is saved to the connected handheld.
Note: To save the file in a folder on the handheld, double-click the
handheld name to list the folders and files, and then drag the file to a folder
on the handheld.
If the file already exists on the handheld, a dialog box opens asking if you
want to replace the file. Click Replace to overwrite the existing file. Click No
or Cancel to abandon the save.
Sending Files to Handhelds
You can transfer activities, folders, lesson bundles, and supported files from a
computer to connected handhelds, from one connected handheld to another,
or from one connected handheld to all connected handhelds.
Items you can transfer include:
• Folders
• Supported files
.tcc
.tco
.tilb
.tnc
.tno
.tns
Sending an Activity to a Connected Handheld
In the Content Workspace, you can send an activity from the Web Content link
to connected handhelds.
1. Use the Workspace selector to select the Content Workspace.
2. Click Web Content in the Resources pane.
3. Click the activity you want to send to connected handhelds.
4. Use one of the following options to send the file to the selected handhelds:
• Drag the file to the Selected Handhelds label to transfer to the file to
all connected handhelds. To transfer the file to a specific handheld,
drag the file to a specific handheld name.
• To transfer the file using Transfer Tool:
Note: You cannot use the Transfer Tool to transfer files to handhelds
while a class is in session.
5. From the toolbar, click , and then select Send to Connected Handhelds.
—or—
Click , and then select Send to Connected Handhelds.
The Transfer Tool opens.
6. Select the file, and then click Start Transfer.
The selected files and folders are transferred to the selected handhelds.
7. When the transfer is complete, close the Transfer Tool.
Sending Files to all Connected Handhelds
You can send a file to all connected handhelds when a class is not in session.
To transfer files or folders from a connected handheld or from the computer to
all connected handhelds, complete the following steps:
1. Use the Workspace selector to select the Content Workspace.
2. Select the files or folders you want to transfer from the Resources pane.
Working with Connected Handhelds 41
42 Working with Connected Handhelds
Note: You can choose files from Computer Content, Web Content, or
Connected Handhelds.
3. Click , and then click Send to Connected Handhelds.
The Transfer Tool window opens.
4. Click Start Transfer.
Note: To add additional files to the transfer list, click Add to Transfer List.
The selected files and folders are transferred to the connected handhelds.
By default, the files are transferred to a folder on the handheld titled
Transfers-mm-dd-yy
.
Transferring Files Between Handhelds
If multiple handhelds are connected, you can send a folder or file from one
handheld to another handheld in the Connected Handhelds list in the
Resources pane.
1. Use the Workspace selector to select the Content Workspace.
2. In the Resources pane, click the handheld that contains the files you want
to transfer. The files on the handheld are listed in the Content pane.
3. Click the folder or file you want to send.
4. Drag the file to another handheld in the Connected Handhelds list.
Note: You can also copy and paste a file from one handheld to another.
Checking for an OS Update
When handhelds are connected, you can check for OS updates from the
Content Workspace or from the Documents Workspace.
Note: Your computer must be connected to the Internet.
1. Show all connected handhelds.
• In the Content Workspace, click Connected Handhelds in the
Resources pane.
• In the Documents Workspace, open the Content Explorer and click
Connected Handhelds.
2. Click the handheld you want to check, and then right-click and select
Check for OSUpdate.
• If the operating system is current, the Check for Handheld OS Update
dialog box opens indicating that the operating system on the
handheld is current.
• If the operating system is not current, the TI-Nspire™ software prompts
you to install the latest OS now, with the option to download the OS to
your computer.
Working with Connected Handhelds 43
44 Working with Connected Handhelds
3. Click Close to close the dialog box, or click Continue and follow the
prompts to install the OS on the handheld.
Installing an OS Update
Note: To avoid losing unsaved data, close all documents on the handheld
before updating its operating system (OS). Updating the OS does not replace
or remove previously saved documents.
The OS on a new handheld comes bundled with the installer, which places the
OS in a default location such as: C:\mydocuments\TI-Nspire\downloads.
Go to education.ti.com/latest to download the latest OS files.
Note: You can install OS updates on connected handhelds from the Content
Workspace at any time.
Updating the OS on a Single Handheld
1. Ensure that your computer is connected to the internet.
2. Show all connected handhelds by clicking the arrow next to TI-Nspire™
Connected Handhelds in the Resources pane.
Note: The symbol indicates either:
• A student's handheld needs an OS update.
—or—
• A student's handheld has a newer OS than the teacher's.
3. Hover your mouse over the TI-Nspire™ handheld you want to update, and
then right-click.
4. Click Check for OS Update.
The Check for OS Update dialog box opens.
5. Click Close to cancel the installation, or click Continue and follow the
prompts to install the OS on the handheld.
When the update is complete, the handheld restarts automatically.
Updating the OS on Multiple Handhelds
Note: To avoid losing unsaved data, close all documents on the handheld
before updating its operating system (OS). Updating the OS does not replace
or remove previously saved documents.
1. Click TI-Nspire™ Connected Handhelds in the Resources pane.
2. Select all handhelds you want to update in the Content Pane.
3. Click Tools > Install OS.
The OS Installation dialog box opens.
4. Click Add OS file.
The Add to Transfer List dialog box opens.
Working with Connected Handhelds 45
46 Working with Connected Handhelds
5. Select the applicable OS files.
• To upgrade a TI-Nspire™ CX handheld, select TI-Nspire.tco.
• To upgrade a TI-Nspire™ CX CAS handheld, select TI-Nspire.tcc.
• To upgrade a TI-Nspire™ handheld, select TI-Nspire.tno.
• To upgrade a TI-Nspire™ CAS handheld, select TI-Nspire.tnc.
6. Click Select.
The OS Installation redisplays with your selected OS files.
7. Click Install OS.
The OS version information updates, and the Select OS Handheld File
dialog redisplays for further selection.
Renaming Handhelds
You can rename the handhelds from the Content Workspace.
Note: Renaming a handheld does not affect student login information.
1. Right-click the handheld name in the Content pane.
2. Click Rename.
3. Type the new name.
4. Press Enter to go to the next name to change.
5. To exit the Edit mode, click an area of the screen outside the handheld
names. You will also leave the Edit mode after you press Enter on the last
name you edit.
Using Identify Selected to Locate Handhelds
If you are using the TI-Nspire™ Docking Station or the TI-Nspire™ CX Docking
Station, use this feature to locate handhelds.
1. Be sure that the handhelds are turned on and that the docking station is
connected to your computer.
2. Use the Workspace selector to select the Content Workspace.
3. Click Tools > Identify Selected Handheld/Lab Cradle.
Note:Youcan also right-click the handheld name in the Content pane, and
then select Identify Selected Handheld/Lab Cradle.
Both LED lights on the docking station under the slot where the handheld
is located will blink for 30 seconds.
Working with Connected Handhelds 47
48
Using the Transfer Tool
When a class is not in session, you can transfer files or folders containing files
from your computer to connected TI-Nspire™ handhelds using the Transfer
Tool. With the Transfer Tool, you can transfer one or more files or documents to
one or more handhelds without requiring students to log in.
Files File Extensions
Operating systems (OS) .tcc (TI-Nspire™ CX CAS handhelds)
.tco (TI-Nspire™ CX handhelds)
.tnc (TI-Nspire™ CAS handhelds)
.tno (TI-Nspire™ handhelds)
Documents .tilb (TI-Nspire™ Lesson Bundle)
.tns (TI-Nspire™ document)
Notes:
• You can transfer more than one operating system file at a time; however,
you can only transfer one operating system file with the same file
extension at a time. For example, you can transfer a .tcc and a .tco file at
the same time, but only one .tcc file at that time.
Transfer Tool Interface
The Transfer Tool dialog box contains a Setup tab and a Status tab.
Setup Tab
The Setup tab allows you to select files to transfer and a destination folder.
Using the Transfer Tool 49
50 Using the Transfer Tool
The Setup tab includes the following features:
Feature Description
Add to
Transfer
List
Click to add files or folders with files to the Transfer List. The
Transfer List displays the File Name (or folder name), the
DestinationFolder, and the Size (in KB) of the file or folder you
want to transfer.
Remove
Selected
Click to remove selected files and folders from the Transfer
List. This option becomes active when you add files to the
Transfer List.
Delete all
files and
folders
before
transfer
Select to clear all files and folders on a handheld before a file
transfer.
Edit
Destination
Folder
Select to change the destination folder for the files you want to
transfer.
Status Tab
The Status tab is only active when a transfer is in progress.
When you start a transfer, the Transfer Tool automatically switches to the Status
tab. The Status tab allows you to view the progress and status of files as they
transfer and provides the following information:
Information Description
File Name Indicates the file name and extension.
Folder/Handheld
ID
Indicates the destination folder and the handheld ID.
Status Indicates the completion status, the progress bar, or any
error message. Error messages include:
• Low battery
• Wrong handheld type
• Memory full
• Lost connectivity
Notes:
• If no transfers are active, the following message is displayed: “
No transfers
are active. Use the Setup tab to configure and start the transfer
.”
• During a transfer, no options are available on the Setup tab.
Using the Transfer Tool 51
52 Using the Transfer Tool
Opening the Transfer Tool
Before you can use the Transfer Tool, you must end any running class
sessions.
To open the Transfer Tool, use one of these methods:
▶Click Tools >Transfer Tool.
▶Click , and then select Send to Connected Handhelds.
The Transfer Tool opens the Setup tab.
Adding Files or Folders to the Transfer List
You must add files or folders to the Transfer List before you can start a transfer.
Note: You can only add a folder that contains files to the Transfer List.
To add files or folders to the Transfer List:
1. In the Transfer Tool dialog box, click Add to Transfer List.
The Add to Transfer List dialog box opens.
2. To add files to the Transfer List, navigate to the folder or folders that
contain the files you want to transfer.
3. Click Select to add highlighted files to the Transfer list.
• On the Files tab, you can see both files and folders, but you cannot
select folders. You must drill down and select a file.
• To select multiple files within a folder, press and hold the Ctrl key
(Mac®:“) while selecting files.
4. To add folders containing files, click the Folders tab and navigate to the
folder you want to select.
5. Click Select to add the highlighted folders.
Note: To select multiple folders, press and hold the Ctrl key (Mac®:“)
while selecting folders.
Selected files and folders are displayed in the Transfer Tool dialog box.
Note: You can only add one operating system file type to the Transfer List.
If you attempt to add more than one operating system file type, the
following error message is displayed.
Removing Files or Folders from the Transfer List
You can remove files or folders that you no longer want to transfer.
Using the Transfer Tool 53
54 Using the Transfer Tool
To remove files or folders from the Transfer List, complete the following steps:
1. In the Transfer Tool dialog box, select files or folders you want to remove.
Note: To select multiple files or folders, press and hold the Ctrl key
(Mac®:“) while selecting each file or folder.
2. Click Remove Selected.
The files or folders are removed from the Transfer List.
Editing the Destination Folder
Except for an operating system file, you can change the destination folder for
any file or folder in the Transfer List.
By default, the Transfer Tool creates the destination folder “
Transfer-date
.” The
date format is based on the user’s preferred language setting and location. For
example, the default date format for the United States is
mm-dd-yy
. If you
change your preferred language setting, this default date format changes.
To change the destination folder:
1. Click a file or folder.
2. Complete one of the following actions:
• From the Edit Destination Folder drop-down list, select the top level
folder for any available handheld or any available folder.
• In the Edit Destination Folder drop-down list, type a new destination
folder name.
Note: Folder names can contain alphanumeric characters and can include
slashes (/ and \ ). You cannot use double slashes (// and \\ ) and these
special characters (? | : * " " < > | ).
3. Click Change.
The destination folder in the Transfer List changes for the files or folders
you selected.
Deleting All Handheld Files and Folders
You can use the Transfer Tool to delete all files and folders on a connected
handheld. Use this feature to delete existing files and folders to ensure that
only the files you want students to work with are on the handhelds.
By default, the Transfer Tool disables this setting. If selected, the new setting
becomes the default the next time you open Transfer Tool.
To delete all files and folders from a connected handheld:
1. In the Transfer Tool dialog box, select Delete all files and folders before
transfer.
Using the Transfer Tool 55
56 Using the Transfer Tool
2. Click Start Transfer.
The Confirm dialog box opens.
3. Click Yes.
The Transfer Tools displays the Status tab. This tab displays the status and
progress as files are deleted.
Starting a Transfer
After you have added all files and folders to the Transfer List and selected other
options as necessary, you can start the transfer. You can transfer operating
system files and documents at the same time.
To start a transfer:
1. Connect one or more TI-Nspire™ handhelds.
If handhelds are not connected, the Status tab indicates “
No Active
Connected Handhelds
” when you start a transfer.
2. From the Resources pane, complete one of the following actions:
• To transfer files to one or more TI-Nspire™ handhelds, select the
individual handhelds.
• To transfer files to all connected TI-Nspire™ handhelds, select
Connected Handhelds (top level).
3. In the Transfer Tool dialog box, click Start Transfer.
The Transfer Tool dialog box switches to the Status tab and displays the
transfer information.
• The progress bar disappears when a transfer is complete.
• During a transfer, the Transfer Tool indicates which handhelds are
connected and successfully received files.
• If a handheld disconnects and then reconnects during a transfer, the
Transfer Tool indicates the status of completed transfers, and resumes
transferring other files as necessary.
Stopping File Transfers
You can stop a file transfer at any time.
To stop a file transfer:
1. In the Transfer Tool, click Stop Transfer.
The Confirm dialog box opens.
2. Click Yes.
The Transfer Tool stops transferring and displays the Setup tab.
• If a connected handheld has already received files, those files remain
on the handhelds.
• Files remain in the Setup tab until you close the Transfer Tool, or until
you delete them.
Using the Transfer Tool 57
58 Using the Transfer Tool
Closing the Transfer Tool
When you have completed transferring files and folders, close the Transfer
Tool.
▶To close the Transfer Tool, click Close.
• You cannot close the Transfer Tool if a transfer is active.
• When closed, the Transfer Tool clears files and folders you added to
the Transfer List.
• When closed, the Transfer Tool keeps the last Delete all files and
folders before transfer setting.
Using the Documents Workspace
Use this workspace to create, modify, and view TI-Nspire™ and PublishView™
documents, and to demonstrate mathematical concepts.
Exploring the Documents Workspace
ÀDocuments Toolbox. Contains tools such as the Document Tools
menu, Page Sorter, TI-SmartView™ emulator, Utilities, and Content
Explorer. Click each icon to access the available tools. When you are
working in a TI-Nspire™ document, the tools available are specific to
that document. When you are working in a PublishView™ document,
the tools are specific to that document type.
ÁToolbox pane. Options for the selected tool are displayed in this area.
For example, click the Document Tools icon to access tools needed
to work with the active application.
Note: In the TI-Nspire™ Teacher Software, the tool for configuring
questions opens in this space when you insert a question. For more
information, see
Using Question in the TI-Nspire™ Teacher Software
.
ÂWork area. Shows the current document and enables you to perform
calculations, add applications, and add pages and problems. Only
one document at a time is active (selected). Multiple documents
appear as tabs.
ÃDocument information. Shows the names of all open documents.
Using the Documents Workspace 59
60 Using the Documents Workspace
When there too many open documents to list, click the forward and
backward arrows to scroll through the open documents.
Using the Documents Toolbox
The Documents Toolbox, located on the left side of the workspace, contains
tools needed for working with both TI-Nspire™ documents and PublishView™
documents. When you click a toolbox icon, the associated tools appear in the
Toolbox pane.
Exploring Document Tools
In the following example, the Document Tools menu is open showing the
options for the Calculator application. In TI-Nspire™ documents, the Document
Tools menu contains tools available for working with an application. The tools
are specific to the active application.
In PublishView™ documents, the Document Tools menu contains tools needed
to insert TI-Nspire™ applications and TI-Nspire™ documents, as well as
multimedia objects such as text boxes, images, and links to websites and files.
For more information, see
Working with PublishView™ Documents
.
ÀThe Documents Toolbox menu.
ÁTools available for the Calculator application. Click ¢to open the
submenu for each option.
ÂClick to close and click to open Document Tools.
Exploring the Page Sorter
The following example shows the Documents Toolbox with the Page Sorter
open. Use the Page Sorter to:
• See the number of problems in your document and where you are.
• Move from one page to another by clicking on the page you want.
• Add, cut, copy, and paste pages and problems within the same document
or between documents.
Note: When you are working in a PublishView™ document, the Page Sorter is
not available in the Documents Toolbox.
Using the Documents Workspace 61
62 Using the Documents Workspace
ÀThe Documents Toolbox menu.
ÁClick the minus sign to collapse the view. Click the + sign to open the
view and show pages in the document.
ÂScroll bar. The scroll bar is only active when there are too many
pages to show in the pane.
Exploring the TI-SmartView™ Feature
The TI-SmartView™ feature emulates how a handheld works. In the teacher
software, the emulated handheld facilitates classroom presentations. In the
student software, the emulated keypad gives students the ability to drive the
software as if using a handheld.
Note: Content is displayed on the TI-SmartView™ small screen only when the
document is in Handheld view.
When working in a PublishView™ document, TI-SmartView™ emulator is not
available.
Note: The following illustration shows the TI-SmartView™ panel in the teacher
software. In the Student Software, only the keypad is shown. For more
information, see Using the TI-SmartView™ Emulator.
ÀThe Documents Toolbox menu.
ÁHandheld Selector. Click ¤to select which handheld to show in the
pane:
• TI-Nspire™ CX or TI-Nspire™ CX CAS
• TI-Nspire™ Touchpad or TI-Nspire™ CAS with Touchpad
Using the Documents Workspace 63
64 Using the Documents Workspace
• TI-Nspire™ Clickpad or TI-Nspire™ CAS with Clickpad
Then, select how to show the handheld:
• Normal
• High contrast
• Outline
ÂView selector. In the teacher software, click ¤to select the handheld
view:
• Handheld only
• Keypad plus side screen
• Handheld plus side screen
Note: You can also change these options in the TI-SmartView™
Options window. Click File> Settings > TI-Smartview™ Options to
open the window.
Note: The view selector is not available in the student software.
When the Handheld Only display is active, select Always in Front to
keep the display in front of all other open applications. (Teacher
software only.)
Exploring Utilities
Utilities provides access to the math templates and operators, special symbols,
catalog items, and libraries that you need when working with documents. In the
following example, the Math templates tab is open.
ÀThe Documents Toolbox menu.
ÁMath Templates are open. Double-click a template to add it to a
document. Click the Math Template tab to close the template view.
To open the Symbols, Catalog, Math Operators, and Libraries, click
the tab.
ÂWizards On check box. Select this option to use a wizard to enter
function arguments.
ÃTabs for opening views where you can select and add symbols,
catalog items, math operators, and library items to a document. Click
the tab to open the view.
Using the Documents Workspace 65
66 Using the Documents Workspace
Exploring Content Explorer
Use Content Explorer to:
• See a list of files on your computer.
• Create and manage lesson bundles.
• If using software that supports connected handhelds, you can:
- See a list of files on any connected handheld.
- Update the OS on connected handhelds.
- Transfer files between a computer and connected handhelds.
Note: If you are using TI-Nspire™ software that does not support connected
handhelds, the Connected Handheld heading is not shown in the Content
Explorer pane.
ÀThe Documents Toolbox menu.
ÁShows files on your computer and the name of the folder where the files
are located. Click ¤to navigate to another folder on the computer.
ÂThe list of folders and files within the folder named in the Look In: field.
Right-click on a highlighted file or folder to open the context menu listing
available actions for that file or folder.
ÃClick to close the list of files. Click to open the list of files.
ÄOptions menu. Click ¤to open the menu of actions you can perform
on a selected file:
Using the Documents Workspace 67
68 Using the Documents Workspace
• Open an existing file or folder.
• Move (navigate) up one level in the folder hierarchy.
• Create a new folder.
• Create a new lesson bundle.
• Rename a file or folder.
• Copy selected file or folder.
• Paste file or folder copied to Clipboard.
• Delete selected file or folder.
• Select all files in a folder.
• Package lesson bundles.
• Refresh the view.
• Install OS.
ÅConnected handhelds. Lists the connected handhelds. Multiple
handhelds are listed if more than one handheld is connected to the
computer or when using the TI-Nspire™ Docking Stations.
ÆThe name of the connected handheld. To show the folders and files on a
handheld, double-click the name.
Click ¤to navigate to another folder on the handheld.
Using the Work Area
The space on the right side of the workspace provides an area for creating and
working with TI-Nspire™ and PublishView™ documents. This work area
provides a view of the document so that you can add pages, add applications,
and perform all work. Only one document at a time is active.
When you create a document, you specify its page size as Handheld or
Computer. This is how the page is displayed in the work area.
•Handheld page size is optimized for the smaller screen of a handheld. This
page size can be viewed on handhelds, computer screens, and tablets.
The content is scaled when viewed on a larger screen.
•Computer page size takes advantage of the larger space of a computer
screen. These documents can show details with less scrolling required.
The content is not scaled when viewed on a handheld.
You can change the page preview to see how the document will look in a
different page size.
▶To change the page preview, click Document Preview on the toolbar, and
then click Handheld or Computer.
For more information on page size and document preview, see
Working with
TI-Nspire™ Documents
.
Changing Document Settings
Document settings control how all numbers, including elements or matrices
and lists, are displayed in TI-Nspire™ and PublishView™ documents. You can
change the default settings at anytime and you can specify settings for a
specific document.
Changing Document Settings
1. Create a new document or open an existing document.
2. From the TI-Nspire™ File menu, select Settings>DocumentSettings.
The Document Settings dialog box opens.
When you open Document Settings the first time, the default settings are
displayed.
Using the Documents Workspace 69
70 Using the Documents Workspace
3. Press Tab or use your mouse to move through the list of settings. Click ¤
to open the drop-down list to view the available values for each setting.
Field Value
Display
Digits
• Float
• Float1 - Float12
• Fix0 - Fix12
Angle • Radian
• Degree
• Gradian
Exponential
Format
• Normal
• Scientific
• Engineering
Real or
Complex
Format
• Real
• Rectangular
• Polar
Calculation
Mode
• Auto
• CAS: Exact
• Approximate
Note: Auto mode shows an answer that is not a whole
number as a fraction except when a decimal is used in the
problem. Exact mode (CAS) shows an answer that is not a
whole number as a fraction or in symbolic form, except when
a decimal is used in the problem.
Vector
Format
• Rectangular
• Cylindrical
• Spherical
Base • Decimal
• Hex
• Binary
Unit System
(CAS)
• SI
• Eng/U.S.
4. Click the desired setting.
5. Choose one of the following options:
• To apply the customized settings to ALL documents, click Make
Default.
• To apply the settings to the open document only, click OK.
• To restore default settings, click Restore.
• Click Cancel to close the dialog box without making changes.
Changing Graphs & Geometry Settings
Graphs & Geometry settings control how information is displayed in open
problems and in subsequent new problems. When you change the Graphs &
Geometry settings, the selections become the default settings for all work in
these applications.
Complete the following steps to customize the application settings for graphs
and geometry.
1. Create a new graphs and geometry document or open an existing
document.
2. In the Documents Toolbox, click to open the Graphs & Geometry
application menu.
3. Click Settings > Settings.
The Graphs & Geometry Settings dialog box opens.
Using the Documents Workspace 71
72 Using the Documents Workspace
4. Press Tab or use your mouse to move through the list of settings. Click ¢to
open the drop-down list to view the available values for each setting.
Field Values
Display Digits • Auto
• Float
• Float1 -
Float12
• Fix0 -
Fix12
Graphing Angle • Auto
• Radian
• Degree
• Gradian
Geometry Angle • Auto
• Radian
• Degree
• Gradian
5. Select the desired setting.
6. Select a check box to enable an option or clear a check box to disable an
option.
Check box Operation when selected
Automatically hide
plot labels
Plot labels are displayed only when selected,
grabbed, or hovered.
Show axis end
values
A numeric label is displayed at the least and greatest
values visible on an axis
Show tool tips for
function
manipulation
Shows helpful information as you manipulate
function graphs
Automatically find a
point of interest
Shows zeros, minima, and maxima for graphed
functions and objects while tracing function graphs.
7. Choose one of the following options:
• To apply the customized settings to ALL graphs and geometry
documents, click Make Default.
• To apply the settings to the open document only, click OK.
• To restore default settings, click Restore.
• Click Cancel to close the dialog box without making changes.
Using the Documents Workspace 73
74
Working with TI-Nspire™ Documents
All work that you create and save using TI-Nspire™ applications is stored as a
document, which you can share with others using TI-Nspire™ software and with
those using handhelds. There are two types of documents:
• TI-Nspire™ document (.tns file)
• PublishView™ document (.tnsp file)
TI-Nspire™ Documents
A TI-Nspire™ document consists of one or more problems. Each problem can
contain one or more pages. A single page is displayed in the work area. All
work occurs in the applications within pages.
Because the TI-Nspire™ software and handhelds share the same functionality,
you can transfer TI-Nspire™ documents between computers and handhelds.
When you create a document, you select one of two page sizes.
•Handheld. Size: 320 ×217 pixels. This size allows documents to be viewed
on all platforms. The content will be scaled when viewed on a tablet or
larger screen.
•Computer. Size: 640 ×434 pixels. The content will not be scaled when
viewed on smaller platforms. Some content may not be visible on a
handheld device.
You can convert a document from one page size to the other anytime.
PublishView™ Documents
PublishView™ documents can be printed on a standard piece of paper or
published to a website or blog. PublishView™ documents can include formatted
text, images, and hyperlinks as well as all TI-Nspire™ applications.
For more information, see
Working with PublishView™ Documents
Creating a New TI-Nspire™ Document
When you open the software, the Documents Workspace opens with a blank
document containing one problem. You can add applications and content to
this problem to create a document.
Working with TI-Nspire™ Documents 75
76 Working with TI-Nspire™ Documents
Note: The Welcome Screen is displayed when you open the software if the
"always show this at startup" option is selected. Click an application icon to add
a problem with an active application to a new document.
To create a new document, complete the following steps:
1. On the TI-Nspire™ File menu,
• Select New TI-Nspire™ Document - Handheld Page Size.
-or-
• Select New TI-Nspire™ Document - Computer Page Size.
The new document opens in the Documents Workspace, and you are
prompted to select an application.
2. Select an application to add a problem to the document.
The problem is added to the document.
Opening an Existing Document
To open an existing document:
1. Click File > Open Document.
—or—
Click .
The Open dialog box opens.
2. Use the file browser to locate the file you want to open and click the file to
select it.
3. Click Open.
The document opens in the work area.
Note: To select from your 10 most recent documents, click File > Recent
Documents and select a document from the drop-down list.
Saving TI-Nspire™ Documents
To save a new document:
1. Click File > Save Document or click .
The Save TI-Nspire™ Document dialog box opens.
Working with TI-Nspire™ Documents 77
78 Working with TI-Nspire™ Documents
2. Navigate to the folder where you want to save the document or create a
folder in which to store the document.
3. Type a name for the new document.
4. Click Save to save the document.
The document closes and is saved with the extension .tns.
Note: When you save a file, the software looks in the same folder the next time
you open a file.
Saving a Document with a New Name
To save a previously saved document in a new folder and/or with a new name:
1. Click File > Save As.
The Save TI-Nspire™ Document dialog box opens.
2. Navigate to the folder where you want to save the document or create a
folder in which to store the document.
3. Type a new name for the document.
4. Click Save to save the document with a new name.
Deleting Documents
File deletions on your computer are sent to the Recycle bin and can be
retrieved if the Recycle bin has not been emptied.
Note: File deletions on the handheld are permanent and cannot be undone, so
be sure that you want to delete the file that you select.
1. Select the document you want to delete.
2. Click Edit > Delete or press Delete.
The Warning dialog box opens.
3. Click Yes to confirm the delete.
The document is deleted.
Closing Documents
▶To close a document, click File > Close or click the Close icon on the
document tab at the bottom of the document.
▶If working in tiled view, click the Close icon in the upper right corner of the
document window.
Formatting Text in Documents
Use the text formatting tools to format text in TI-Nspire™ applications that allow
text input, and to format text in PublishView™ documents. By default, the text
formatting toolbar opens in the area above an active document. Options on the
toolbar are enabled or disabled depending on the active application.
For example, the following image shows options available in an active
Graphs&Geometry document.
Option Function
Click ¤to open the menu for the active
application. This tool enables you to open
an application menu regardless of the
option selected in the Documents Toolbox.
Click ¤to select a background color for
highlighting text or choose a fill color for a
Working with TI-Nspire™ Documents 79
80 Working with TI-Nspire™ Documents
Option Function
selected cell.
Click ¤to select the line color for an object.
For example, in Graphs&Geometry, you
can choose a color for a selected shape.
Click ¤to select a color for selected text.
Use these tools to choose a font and set the
size of the font.
• Click ¤to select a different font from
the drop-down box.
• To select as specific font size, click ¤to
select a size from the drop-down box.
• Click to increase the font size or
click to decrease the font size
incrementally.
Click the appropriate tool to apply bolding,
italics, or underlining; apply superscript or
subscript; or strike out text.
In a PublishView™ document, use these
tools to position text within the header or
footer, or in text box. Clicking opens the
Hyperlink dialog box.
For more information, see
Working with
PublishView™ Documents
.
Hiding and Showing the Formatting Toolbar
▶When the formatting toolbar is visible, click £(located under the toolbar) to
hide the toolbar.
▶Click ¤to show the toolbar when the formatting toolbar is hidden.
Using Colors in Documents
In the TI-Nspire™ applications that allow formatting, you can use color in filled
areas of an object, or in lines or text, depending on the application you are
using and how you have selected the item. If the icon or menu item that you
want to use is not available (dimmed) after you have selected an item, color is
not an option for the selected item.
Colors appear in documents opened on your computer and on the TI-Nspire™
CX handheld. If a document containing color is opened on a TI-Nspire™
handheld, colors are displayed in shades of gray.
Note: For more information about using color in a TI-Nspire™ application, see
the chapter for that application.
Adding Color from a List
To add color to a fill area, line, or text, complete the following steps:
1. Select the item.
2. Click Edit > Color or select where you want to add color (fill, line, or text).
3. Select the color from the list.
Adding Color from a Palette
To add color using the palette, complete the following steps:
1. Select the object.
2. Click the appropriate toolbar icon.
3. Select the color from the palette.
Setting Page Size and Document Preview
When you ceate a document, you specify its page size as Handheld or
Computer, depending on how you expect the document to be used.
Documents of both page sizes can be opened on either platform, and you can
convert the page size anytime.
•Handheld. Size: 320 ×217 pixels. This size allows documents to be viewed
on all platforms. The content will be scaled when viewed on a tablet or
larger screen.
Working with TI-Nspire™ Documents 81
82 Working with TI-Nspire™ Documents
•Computer. Size: 640 ×434 pixels. The content will not be scaled when
viewed on smaller platforms. Some content may not be visible on a
handheld device.
Note: Page size is independent of document preview. That is, you can view
documents of either page size using Handheld or Computer preview.
Converting the Current Document's Page Size
▶On the main TI-Nspire™ File menu, select Convert to, and then select the
page size.
The software saves the current document and creates a copy that uses the
requested page size.
Viewing the Document in Handheld Preview
1. On the application toolbar, click DocumentPreview, and select Handheld.
The preview changes. This does not change the document's underlying
page size.
2. (Optional) Click the Zoom tool beneath the work area, and select a
magnification value for the preview.
Viewing the Document in Computer Preview
1. On the application toolbar, click DocumentPreview, and select Computer.
The preview changes. This does not change the document's underlying
page size.
2. (Optional) Click the Boldness tool beneath the work area, and select a
value to increase or decrease the boldness of text and other items.
Setting a Default Preview
By default, when you open a document, it is automatically displayed using the
preview that matches its page size. You can override this rule and specify a
preview that you prefer.
1. On the main TI-Nspire™ File menu, select Settings > Preview Settings.
2. Select the preview that you want documents to use when you open them.
Working with Multiple Documents
When multiple documents are open, document names are listed in tabs at the
bottom of the work area. Only one document is active at a time, and only the
active document is affected by commands from menus or tools.
To switch between documents:
ÀClick the tab to show a document in the work area. This
document becomes the active document. If the Show
Documents in Tiles view is open, these tabs are not shown.
ÁUse the right and left arrows to scroll through the list of
documents. These arrows are active only when there are too
many documents to fit in the window.
ÂClick the Show List icon to list all open documents. This is
useful when you have a large number of documents open and
documents names on the tabs may be truncated.
Working with Multiple Documents in Tiled View
When multiple documents are open, you can view thumbnails of the
documents in the work area. To change the view:
▶Click Window > Show Documents in Tiles.
Open documents are shown as thumbnails in the work area, and the scroll
bar becomes active.
Working with TI-Nspire™ Documents 83
84 Working with TI-Nspire™ Documents
The status bar remains available; however, document names now appear in
the thumbnail view. Click Select Window > Show Documents in Tabs to view
one document at a time in the work area.
Working with Applications
When you first open a new document or add a new problem to a document,
select an application from the menu.
The following illustration shows how a problem with the Lists&Spreadsheet
application appears in the work area on the right side of the window.
ÀDocument name. Tabs show the names of open documents.
Click a name to make it the active document.
ÁPage Size. Shows the document's page size as Handheld or
Computer. You can use the TI-Nspire™ File menu to convert a
document from one page size to the other.
ÂProblem/Page counter. The first value represents the problem
number of the active page, and the second value tells you the
page number within the problem. In the example, the counter
reads 1.2, indicating Problem 1, Page 2.
ÃSettings. Double-click to view or change the Document Settings
for the active document or to change the default Document
Settings.
ÄZoom. Enabled in Handheld preview only (click
DocumentPreview on the toolbar and select Handheld). Click
▼and select a magnification value for the preview.
ÅBoldness. Enabled in Computer preview only (click Document
Working with TI-Nspire™ Documents 85
86 Working with TI-Nspire™ Documents
Preview on the toolbar and select Computer). Click ▼and
select a value to increase or decrease the boldness of text and
other items.
Working with Multiple Applications on a Page
You can add up to four applications to a page. When you have multiple
applications on a page, the menu for the active application is displayed in the
Documents Toolbox. Using multiple applications involves two steps:
• Changing the page layout to accommodate multiple applications.
• Adding the applications.
You can add multiple applications to a page even if an application is already
active.
Adding Multiple Applications to a Page
By default, each page contains space to add one application. To add additional
applications to the page, complete the following steps.
1. Click Edit > Page Layout > Select Layout.
—or—
Click .
The page layout menu opens.
There are eight page layout options available. If an option is already selected,
it is dimmed.
2. Highlight the layout you want to add to the problem or page, and then click
to select it.
The new layout is displayed with the first application active.
3. In Handheld preview, click Press menu to select an application for each
new section in the problem or page. In Computer view, select Click here to
add an application.
Swapping Applications
To change the position of applications on a page with multiple applications,
“swap“the positions of two applications.
1. Click Edit > Page Layout > Swap Application.
Note: The last active application you worked on is automatically selected
as the first application to be swapped.
2. Click the second application to swap.
This action performs the swap.
Note: When there are only two work areas, the selected application
automatically swaps position with the other application in the work area.
To cancel a swap, press Esc.
Selecting and Moving Pages
To quickly move and rearrange pages in a document that contains multiple
pages, use the Page Sorter to list thumbnail views of all pages in the
document.
Working with TI-Nspire™ Documents 87
88 Working with TI-Nspire™ Documents
ÀPage Sorter. Show by clicking the Page Sorter button ( ) on
the Documents Toolbox. Displays thumbnail sketches of all
pages in all problems in the current document. Use the scroll
bar to view pages off the screen.
ÁActive page. The page currently highlighted in the Page Sorter
and active in the work area.
ÂProblem/Page counter. Displays the problem number followed
by the page number.
Selecting Pages
The Page Sorter always indicates the active page in the work area.
• If you are working on a page in the work area, this page is indicated in the
Page Sorter by a color border.
• If you are actively using the Page Sorter, the active page displayed in the
work area has a color border in the Page Sorter pane.
• Clicking on any page in the Page Sorter makes it the active page, and it is
displayed in the work area.
Rearranging Pages
Use the Page Sorter to change the order of pages within a problem.
1. Click to select the thumbnail view of the page in the Page Sorter.
2. Drag the page to the desired position, and release to drop it in the new
location.
Grouping Applications
To group up to four pages into a single page:
1. Click the first page in the series.
2. Click Edit > Page Layout > Group.
The next page is grouped with the first page. The page layout
automatically adjusts to display all the pages in the group.
To ungroup pages:
1. Click the grouped page.
2. Click Edit > Page Layout > Ungroup.
The material becomes individual pages and applications.
Deleting an Application from a Page
1. Click the application you want to delete.
2. Click Edit > Page Layout > Delete Application.
The application is deleted.
To undo the delete, press Ctrl + Z (Mac®: “+Z).
Deleting Pages
1. Select the page you want to delete.
2. Click Edit > Delete.
—or—
Click .
—or—
Right-click and click Delete.
Working with Problems and Pages
When you create a new document, a problem is added with one page. When a
document has a problem with multiple pages or multiple problems, click to
open the page sorter view in the Documents Toolbox to view the problems and
Working with TI-Nspire™ Documents 89
90 Working with TI-Nspire™ Documents
pages.
Adding a Problem to a Document
A document can contain up to 30 problems.
1. Click Insert > Problem.
—or—
Click .
2. Click Problem.
A new problem with one new page is added to your document.
Adding a Page to a Problem
Each problem can contain up to 50 pages.
1. Click Insert > Page.
—or—
Click
2. Click Page.
A new page is added to the problem.
3. Select an application to add to the page.
Copying and Pasting a Problem
You can copy and paste a single problem from one location to another within
the same document or a different document.
1. Click to open the Page Sorter.
2. Click a problem name to select it.
3. Click Edit > Copy or press Ctrl +C(Mac®: “+C).
4. Go to the location where you want the problem to appear.
5. Click Edit > Paste or press Ctrl + V (Mac®: “+V).
The problem is copied to the new location.
Deleting a Problem
To delete a problem from the document:
1. Click a problem name to select it.
2. Click Edit > Delete or press Ctrl+X (Mac®: “+X).
The problem is deleted from the document.
Renaming a Problem
To rename a problem:
1. Using the Page Sorter, select the problem name.
2. Right-click and click Rename.
The problem name box clears.
3. Type the new name and press Enter.
The new name appears in bold to indicate that it has been changed.
Printing Documents
1. Click File > Print.
The Print dialog box opens.
2. Set options for the print job.
• Printer — Select from your list of available printers
• Print What:
- Print All — prints each page on a separate sheet
- Viewable Screen — prints selected pages with additional layout
options (see Layout, below)
• Print Range — Click All Pages, or click Page range and set the starting
and ending pages.
• Layout:
- Orientation (portrait or landscape)
- The number of TI-Nspire™ pages (1, 2, 4, or 8) to be printed on
each sheet (available in Viewable Screen option only). The
default is 2 pages per sheet.
- Whether to allow space below each printed TI-Nspire™ page for
comments (available in Viewable Screen option only)
- Margins (from .25 inches to 2 inches). The default margin is .5
inches on all edges.
Working with TI-Nspire™ Documents 91
92 Working with TI-Nspire™ Documents
• Documentation information to include:
- Problem name, including the option to group the pages physically
by problem
- Page label (such as 1.1 or 1.2) under each page
- Page header (up to two lines)
- Document name in the footer
3. Click Print, or click Save As PDF.
Note: To restore the Print defaults, click Reset.
Using Print Preview
• Click the Preview check box to toggle the preview pane.
• Click the arrows at the bottom of the preview pane to page through the
preview.
Viewing Document Properties and Copyright Information
Note: Most of these instructions apply only to the Teacher Software.
Checking Page Size
1. In the Teacher Software, go to the TI-Nspire™ File menu and select
Document Properties.
2. Click the Page Size tab.
3. A checkmark indicates the document's current page size.
Viewing Copyright Information
The Teacher Software and Student Software let you view copyright information
that has been added to a document.
1. On the TI-Nspire™ File menu, select View Copyright Information.
The Copyright Information dialog box opens.
2. Click OK to close the dialog box.
Adding Copyright Information to a Document
Using the Teacher Software, you can add copyright information to individual
documents that you create, or you can apply the same copyright information to
all new documents.
1. Open the document.
2. On the TI-Nspire™ File menu, select Document Properties.
3. Click the Copyright tab.
4. Edit the following fields to define the copyright details:
• Author
• Copyright (select Public Domain or Copyright).
• Year (disabled if you selected Public Domain)
• Owner (disabled if you selected Public Domain)
• Comments
5. To add the supplied information to all new documents from this point
forward, select Apply this copyright to all new documents.
6. Click OK to apply the copyright information to the document.
Working with TI-Nspire™ Documents 93
94 Working with TI-Nspire™ Documents
Protecting a Document (making a document read-only)
Teachers can protect documents to create a document for distribution to your
students or for other use. A student who receives a read-only document and
makes changes to it will be prompted to save the document as a new file.
1. Open the document.
2. On the TI-Nspire™ File menu, select Document Properties.
3. Click the Protection tab.
4. Select the Make this document Read Only check box.
5. Click OK.
Working with PublishView™ Documents
Use the PublishView™ feature to create and share interactive documents with
teachers and students. You can create documents that include formatted text,
TI-Nspire™ applications, images, hyperlinks, links to videos, and embedded
videos in a format that is suitable for printing on a standard piece of paper,
publishing to a website or blog, or for use as an interactive worksheet.
PublishView™ features provide layout and editing features for presenting math
and science concepts in a document where TI-Nspire™ applications can be
interactively and dynamically linked with supporting media, enabling you to
bring the document to life. Using the PublishView™ feature:
• Teachers can create interactive activities and assessments used on
screen.
• Teachers can create printed materials to complement documents used on
TI-Nspire™ handhelds.
• When working with lesson plans, teachers can:
- Create lesson plans from existing handheld documents or convert
lesson plans to handheld documents.
- Link to related lesson plans or documents.
- Embed explanatory text, images, video, and links to web resources.
- Build or interact with TI-Nspire™ applications directly from the lesson
plan.
• Students can create reports or projects such as lab reports containing data
playback, curve fits, pictures, and video—all on the same sheet.
• Students can print and turn in assignments on a standard piece of paper.
• Students taking exams can use one tool to create a document that
contains: all problems on the exam, text, images, hyperlinks, or videos,
interactive TI-Nspire™ applications, screen shots, and layout options
needed to print a document.
Note: PublishView™ documents can be exchanged using the TI-Nspire™
Navigator™ NC system. PublishView™ documents can reside in the Portfolio
Workspace, and TI-Nspire™ questions within a PublishView™ document can be
automatically graded by the TI-Nspire™ Navigator™ system.
Working with PublishView™ Documents 95
96 Working with PublishView™ Documents
Creating a New PublishView™ Document
1. From the Documents Workspace, click File > New PublishView™
Document.
—or—
Click , and then click New PublishView™ Document.
• A blank letter-size document opens in the Documents Workspace. The
orientation is portrait, which cannot be changed.
• The default margin settings for the top and bottom margins are one-
inch. There are no settings for side margins.
• By default, a problem is added to the document.
• By default, the document contains the page number in a # of # format
at the bottom of the sheet.
• The scroll bars on the right side of the screen and at the bottom of the
screen are active.
2. Add TI-Nspire™ applications and PublishView™ objects as needed to
complete the document.
About PublishView™ Documents
When working with PublishView™ documents, it is important to keep the
following points in mind:
• PublishView™ documents are saved as .tnsp files, which distinguishes
them from TI-Nspire™ documents (.tns files).
• When inserting PublishView™ objects into a document, the text, image,
hyperlink, or embedded video are contained in boxes that can be moved
and resized.
• When you insert TI-Nspire™ applications, they work the same way as
pages in a TI-Nspire™ document.
• In a PublishView™ document, objects can overlap each other and you can
control which object is on top or bottom.
• Objects can be placed and positioned in a PublishView™ document in a
free-form fashion.
• You can convert an existing TI-Nspire™ document to a PublishView™
document (.tnsp file).
• When you convert a PublishView™ document to a TI-Nspire™ document
(.tns file), TI-Nspire™ applications are converted. PublishView™ objects
containing text, hyperlinks, videos, and images are not converted.
• You cannot create or open a PublishView™ document on a handheld. You
must convert a PublishView™ document to a TI-Nspire™ document before
sending it to a handheld.
Exploring a PublishView™ Document
The following example shows how you might use TI-Nspire™ applications and
PublishView™ objects to build a PublishView™ document. In this example,
borders are turned on to show the boundaries around the objects. Showing
borders enables you to work with objects easily while building a document.
When you are ready to print or publish the document to the web, you can select
to the hide borders.
Working with PublishView™ Documents 97
98 Working with PublishView™ Documents
ÀHeader. In this example, the header contains the title of the document.
When the header area is active, you can type and format text as needed.
ÁProblem break and name. In PublishView™ documents, use problem
breaks to control the page layout. You can select to hide or show problem
breaks. Deleting a problem removes the contents of the problem and
removes the space between problems when there are multiple problems.
Problem breaks also enable you to use variables in PublishView™
documents. Variables that have the same name are independent of one
another if they are used in different problems.
ÂText boxes. In this example, the introduction text and the text in boxes 1, 2,
3, and 4 is contained in text boxes. You can insert text and hyperlinks into
a PublishView™ document using a text box. Text boxes can be resized and
positioned as needed. PublishView™ text boxes are not retained when you
convert a PublishView™ document to a TI-Nspire™ document.
ÃTI-Nspire™ applications. In this example, the author uses Graphs &
Geometry to show the math functions. When a TI-Nspire™ application is
active in a PublishView™ document, the appropriate application menu
opens in the Documents Toolbox. You can work in a TI-Nspire™
application just as you would in a TI-Nspire™ document. When you convert
a PublishView™ document to a TI-Nspire™ document, applications are
retained.
ÄNotes application. You can also use the TI-Nspire™ Notes application to
add text to a PublishView™ document. Because Notes is a TI-Nspire™
application, it will be retained when you convert the PublishView™
document to a TI-Nspire™ document. Using the Notes application enables
you to use an equation editor and can contain TI-Nspire™ math templates
and symbols.
ÅVideo. This is an example of a video that is embedded in a PublishView™
document within a frame. Users can start and stop the video using the
controls. Frames containing videos and images can be resized and
positioned in the document as needed.
ÆFooter. By default, the footer area contains the page number, which cannot
be edited. You can add other text above the page number if needed. Like
the header, you can format text as needed.
Using the Status Bar in a PublishView™ Document
When a PublishView™ document is open, options on the status bar are different
than when working in a TI-Nspire™ document.
ÀDocument names are displayed in tabs. If multiple documents are open,
the document names are listed. You can have TI-Nspire™ and
PublishView™ documents open at the same time. In this example,
Document 1 is an inactive TI-Nspire™ document ( ). Document 2 is the
active PublishView™ document ( ). Click the X to close a document.
ÁPage Size. Shows the document's page size as Handheld or Computer.
You can use the TI-Nspire™ File menu to convert a document from one
page size to the other.
ÂClick Settings to change Document Settings. You can specify settings that
Working with PublishView™ Documents 99
100 Working with PublishView™ Documents
are specific to an active document or set default settings for all
PublishView™ documents. When you convert a TI-Nspire™ document into
a PublishView™ document, the settings in the TI-Nspire™ document
convert to the settings defined for PublishView™ documents.
ÃUse the Zoom scale to zoom the active document in or out from 10% to
500%. To set a zoom, type a specific number, use the + and - buttons to
increase or decrease by increments of 10%, or use the drop-down box to
choose preset percentages.
ÄIn TI-Nspire™ applications, use the Boldness scale to increase or decrease
the boldness of text and line thickness within applications. To set the
boldness, type a specific number, use the + and - buttons to increase or
decrease by increments of 10%, or use the drop-down box to choose
preset percentages.
For PublishView™ objects, boldness is used to match text within
TI-Nspire™ applications to other text on the PublishView™ sheet. It can also
be used to increase the visibility of TI-Nspire™ applications when
presenting a document to a class.
ÅWhen there are too many open document names to show in the status bar,
click the forward and backward arrows ( ) to move through the
documents.
ÆClick to see a list of all open documents.
Saving PublishView™ Documents
Saving a New Document
1. Click File > Save Document.
—or—
Click .
The Save TI-Nspire™ Document dialog box opens.
2. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the document.
—or—
Create a folder in which to store the document.
3. Type a name for the new document.
4. Click Save.
The document closes and is saved with the extension .tnsp.
Note: When you save a file, the software first looks in the same folder the next
time you open a file.
Saving a Document with a New Name
To save a previously saved document in a new folder and/or with a new name:
1. Click File > Save As from the menu.
The Save TI-Nspire™ Document dialog box opens.
2. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the document.
—or—
Create a folder in which to store the document.
3. Type a new name for the document.
4. Click Save to save the document with a new name.
Working with PublishView™ Documents 101
102 Working with PublishView™ Documents
Note: You can also use the Save As option to convert documents from
TI-Nspire™ files to PublishView™ files or convert PublishView™ files to
TI-Nspire™ files.
Exploring the Documents Workspace
When you create or open a PublishView™ document, it opens in the
Documents Workspace. Use the menu options and the toolbar just as you
would when working with a TI-Nspire™ document to:
• Navigate to existing folders and documents using Content Explorer
• Open existing documents
• Save documents
• Use the copy, paste, undo, and redo options
• Delete documents
• Access TI-Nspire™ application-specific menus
• Open the Variables menu in TI-Nspire™ applications that allow variables
• Access and insert math templates, symbols, catalog items, and library
items into a PublishView™ document
Note: For more information, see
Using the Documents Workspace
.
Exploring the Documents Toolbox
When a PublishView™ document is active, the Documents Toolbox contains
tools needed for working with PublishView™ documents. You can add
TI-Nspire™ applications to a problem, insert parts of existing TI-Nspire™
documents into a problem, and add PublishView™ objects.
The Documents Toolbox opens when you create a new PublishView™
document or open an existing PublishView™ document. When working in a
PublishView™ document, Page Sorter and TI-SmartView™ emulator are not
available.
ÀIn a PublishView™ document:
• Click to open the application menu and tools needed to work with
TI-Nspire™ applications and PublishView™ objects.
• Click to open the Utilities panel where you can access Math
Templates, Symbols, the Catalog, Math Operators, and Libraries.
• Click to open Content Explorer.
Note: For more information, see
Using the Documents Workspace
.
Working with PublishView™ Documents 103
104 Working with PublishView™ Documents
ÁClick to collapse a pane containing a menu. Click to expand a
pane.
ÂTI-Nspire™ applications. Move an icon to a problem to insert an
application:
Calculator
Graph
Geometry
Lists & Spreadsheet
Data & Statistics
Notes
Vernier DataQuest™
Question (Available in TI-Nspire™ Teacher Software, TI-Nspire™
Navigator™ Teacher Software, and TI-Nspire™ Navigator™ NC Teacher
Software).
ÃTI-Nspire™ Documents. Use this tool to locate and insert existing
TI-Nspire™ documents (.tns files) into a problem.
ÄPublishView™ Objects. Use this tool to move the following objects into a
problem:
Image
Video
Text box
Hyperlink
Using Menus and the Toolbar
When working in a PublishView™ document, select options from the menus or
the toolbar in the Documents Workspace to work with content and objects.
When you insert an object into a PublishView™ document, you can manipulate
it using the same tools as you would when working with a TI-Nspire™
document. In PublishView™ documents, you can:
• Right-click on an object to open a context menu, which displays the
actions that can be performed on that object.
• Use add, insert, and paste to add objects to a PublishView™ document.
• Use delete and cut to remove objects from a PublishView™ document.
• Move objects from one place to another within a PublishView™ document.
• Copy objects from one document and paste them into another
PublishView™ document.
• Resize and scale objects such as text boxes and images.
• Change the font face and size and apply formatting such as italics, bold,
underline, and color to text.
Note: For more information, see
Using the Documents Workspace
.
Using Context Menus
In TI-Nspire™ applications and in PublishView™ documents, context menus
provide a list of options specific to the task you are working on. For example,
when you right-click a cell while working in the TI-Nspire™ Lists & Spreadsheet
application, a context menu opens providing a list of actions that you can
perform on that cell. When you right-click the border of a text box in a
PublishView™ document, the context menu provides actions that can be
performed on the text box.
Context Menus in TI-Nspire™ Applications
When you insert a TI-Nspire™ application into a PublishView™ document, the
application menu and the context menus associated with that application are
available and work the same way they work in a TI-Nspire™ document.
Context Menus in PublishView™ Documents
In PublishView™ documents, context menus provide shortcuts to frequently
Working with PublishView™ Documents 105
106 Working with PublishView™ Documents
performed tasks. Context menus are specific to an object or area:
• The Sheet context menu provides options for working with the layout of the
sheet and document.
• Object context menus provide options for manipulating the object.
• Content-sensitive context menus provide options for working with the
content inside the object such as text or a video.
Working with PublishView™ Objects
In a PublishView™ document, text, hyperlinks, images, and videos are
contained in PublishView™ objects. You can move, resize, copy and paste, and
delete an object within a PublishView™ document. Objects can also be
positioned so that one overlaps the other.
Within a document, PublishView™ objects can exist in three states: unselected,
selected, and interactive.
State Description
Unselected When unselected, an
object does not have
handles for repositioning
and sizing. To deselect
an object, left-click or
right-click outside the
object.
In this example, borders
around the object are
showing.
Selected When selected, an object
will have eight square
handles framing the
object. To select an
object, click the object’s
border. When selected,
objects can be moved
and resized.
State Description
• To move an object,
click a border and
drag the object to its
new location.
• To resize an object,
grab a handle.
• Right-click the
border to open a
context menu with
options for
manipulating the
object.
Interactive An interactive state is
indicated by a blue frame
around the object. To
enter interactive state,
left-click or right-click
anywhere in the body of
the object. When in an
interactive state, you can
work with the contents of
the object. For example,
you can add or edit text
in a text box or complete
math functions in a
TI-Nspire™ application.
When in an interactive
state, context menus
contain options specific
to the contents of an
object.
Working with PublishView™ Documents 107
108 Working with PublishView™ Documents
Inserting an Object
1. In the Documents Toolbox, ensure the PublishView™ Objects menu is
open.
2. Use your mouse to click an icon and drag it to the document.
3. Release the mouse button to drop the object into the document.
Selected text boxes and
frames can be resized,
moved, copied, pasted,
and deleted.
4. Using the mouse, grab the handles to resize the object and drag it to
position the object in the document as needed.
Opening Object Context Menus
▶Right-click the border of any object in a PublishView™ document.
The context menu opens to provide access to delete, copy/paste, cut, and
bring to front/send to back actions.
Working with PublishView™ Documents 109
110 Working with PublishView™ Documents
Resizing an Object
1. Click any border around the object to select it. The border becomes a bold
blue line and the handles are active.
2. Move your mouse over one of the handles to activate the resizing tool.
3. Grab one of the handles and drag in the direction needed to make the
object larger or smaller.
4. Click outside the object to save the new size.
Moving an Object
To move an object to another location on the page:
1. Click any border around the object to select it. The border becomes a bold
blue line and the handles are active.
2. Move your cursor over one of the borders to activate the positioning tool
.
3. Click to grab the object. The horizontal and vertical alignment guides are
activated at the top and bottom of the object. Use the grid lines to position
the object on the page.
Àvertical alignment guide
Áhorizontalalignment
guide
4. Drag the object to a new location on the page.
5. Release the mouse button to drop the object in its new location.
Overlapping Objects
You can position objects so that one is on top of another. You can control the
stacking order to specify which object is positioned in front or behind the other.
Overlapping objects have many practical uses when presenting information in
the classroom. For example, you can create a "curtain control" by placing an
empty text box over other objects. Then, you can move the text box to reveal
the items below it one at a time.
Working with PublishView™ Documents 111
112 Working with PublishView™ Documents
To change the position of an object in the stacking order:
1. Click the border of the object you want to position to select it, and then
right-click to open the context menu.
2. Click Send to back or Bring to front to move the selected object to the
desired position.
Deleting an Object
To delete an object from a sheet:
1. Click any border of the object to select it. When an object is selected, the
border is blue and the handles are active.
2. Press the Delete key to delete the text box.
—or—
Right-click a border, and then click Delete from the context menu.
Choosing a Working Folder for PublishView™ Objects
Use the Choose Your Working Folder field in the PublishView™ Objects pane
to select a folder for storing PublishView™ documents and related files.
1. Ensure the PublishView™ Objects pane is open.
2. Click .
The Choose Your Working Folder dialog box opens.
Working with PublishView™ Documents 113
114 Working with PublishView™ Documents
3. Navigate to the folder where you want to store video and image files.
4. Click Open to choose the working folder.
The selected folder becomes the working folder and the folder name is
displayed in the Choose your working folder field. Previews of supported
images and video files in the folder are shown in the PublishView™ objects
pane.
5. To add an image or video file to a PublishView™ document, select the file
and move it onto the active sheet.
Working with TI-Nspire™ Applications
Note: For more information, see the appropriate chapter in this guidebook.
Adding an Application to a Problem
To add a TI-Nspire™ application to a problem in a PublishView™ document:
1. Choose one of the following actions to select an application:
• From the TI-Nspire™ Applications pane in the Documents Toolbox,
use the mouse pointer to point to the application and drag it to the
problem.
• From the menu bar, click Insert and choose an application from the
drop-down menu.
• Right-click inside the sheet to open the context menu, click Insert and
choose an application from the menu.
The application is added to the sheet.
2. Using your mouse, grab the handles to resize or position the application
object as needed.
3. Click outside the application frame to accept the dimensions.
4. To open the menu for the active TI-Nspire™ application, click inside the
application.
The menu opens in the Documents Toolbox above the TI-Nspire™
Applications pane.
Right-click on an application element, such as a cell or function to open
the context menu for that item.
Working with PublishView™ Documents 115
116 Working with PublishView™ Documents
5. To work in the application, click an option from the application menu. Click
to collapse the application menu pane.
Adding Existing TI-Nspire™ Documents
Use the TI-Nspire™ Documents pane to open an existing TI-Nspire™ document
to add to a PublishView™ document. When you open an existing TI-Nspire™
document, all pages of the document appear in the preview pane. You can
move complete problems or individual pages onto the PublishView™ sheet.
Choosing a Working TI-Nspire™ Document
To choose a working document:
1. In the Documents Toolbox, ensure the TI-Nspire™ Documents pane is
open.
2. Click .
The Choose Your Working Document dialog box opens.
3. Navigate to the folder in which the TI-Nspire™ document is stored:
• Click ¤in the Look in: field to use a file browser to locate a folder.
• From an open folder, click to move up a level in the folder
hierarchy
• Click to return to the default home folder
• Click to add a new folder to open folder on your computer.
• Click to list folders and files. To show details, click .
4. Select the file, and then click Open.
Working with PublishView™ Documents 117
118 Working with PublishView™ Documents
The TI-Nspire™ document opens in the TI-Nspire™ Documents pane.
5. To add the TI-Nspire™ document to the PublishView™ document, move
one page at a time or one problem at a time to the PublishView™ sheet.
If you are adding a problem with multiple pages, the pages are stacked on
top of each other on the PublishView™ sheet. Move the top page to see the
other pages.
Working with Problems
Like a TI-Nspire™ document, a PublishView™ document consists of one or
more problems.
Problems are used to control the layout of a PublishView™ document so that
you can isolate variables. When variables with the same name are used in
multiple problems, variables can have different values. To add problems to
PublishView™ documents, open the Sheet context menu or use the options on
the Insert menu in the Documents Workspace. When adding problems, keep
the following guidelines in mind:
• By default, a new PublishView™ document contains one problem.
• You can insert a problem after any existing problem.
• You cannot insert a problem in the middle of an existing problem.
• A new problem break is always inserted after the selected problem.
• Inserting a problem break adds empty space below the break.
• Any object between two problem breaks is part of the problem above the
break.
• The last problem includes all sheets and objects below the last problem
break.
• Problem breaks are not relative to any object, which lets you move objects
within a problem without affecting the problem break location.
Adding a Problem
To add a problem to an open PublishView™ document:
1. Right-click anywhere on the sheet, and then click Insert > Problem.
The problem is added to the document below any existing problems. The
problem break provides a visible divider between problems.
2. To name the problem, highlight the default text, type a name, and then
click outside the text box to save the name.
The problem break is saved.
If a document has multiple problems, use the scroll bar on the right side of
the document to move up and down through the problems.
Managing Problem Breaks
Problem breaks are used to separate problems and variable sets.
• Every problem has a problem break.
• A problem break becomes visible when a problem is added to a
document.
• A problem break is represented by a dashed line with the name of the
problem positioned on the left side of the sheet.
• By default, the problem name is shown as <Name of problem>. Highlight
the default text to type a new name for the problem.
Working with PublishView™ Documents 119
120 Working with PublishView™ Documents
• Problem names do not have be unique. Two problems can have the same
name.
Hiding and Showing Problem Breaks
You can select to hide or show problem breaks in a PublishView™ document.
By default, problem breaks are shown.
1. Right-click in any blank area of the document (outside of any object) to
open the sheet context menu.
2. Click Layout Options.
The Show/Hide Options dialog box opens.
Note: You can also click View > PublishView™ Layout Options.
3. Clear the Show problem breaks option to hide problem breaks in the
document. Select the option to return to the default setting and show the
problem breaks.
4. Click OK to close the dialog box.
Renaming a Problem
1. Click the existing problem name on the problem break line.
2. Type a new name for the problem.
3. Click outside the text box to save the new name.
Deleting a Problem
To delete a problem, complete one of the following actions:
▶Select the problem break and click on the right side of the break.
▶Click Edit > Delete.
▶Right-click the problem break and click Delete.
▶Select the problem break and press the Delete or Backspace key.
When you delete a problem, all objects contained in the problem are removed
and the space between the selected problem break and the next problem
break is removed.
Organizing PublishView™ Sheets
A PublishView™ document can have multiple sheets. A single sheet is
displayed in the workspace on your screen. All work occurs in the
PublishView™ objects and TI-Nspire™ applications within sheets.
Adding Sheets to a Document
To add a sheet to a document:
▶Click Insert > Sheet.
The sheet is added to the document and the numbering increments by
one.
Opening the Sheet Context Menu
▶Right-click in any blank area (outside of any object) in a PublishView™
sheet.
A context menu opens with options for inserting problems, pages,
applications, and PublishView™ objects, edit options for removing space or
deleting a page, and options for hiding and showing problem breaks and
object borders.
Page Numbering
In a PublishView™ document, page numbering is displayed in the bottom
margin (footer). By default, numbering is placed in the center of the
Working with PublishView™ Documents 121
122 Working with PublishView™ Documents
PublishView™ sheet in a # of # format. You cannot edit or delete page
numbering.
Working with Headers and Footers
PublishView™ documents contain space at the top and bottom of a sheet to add
a header or a footer. Headers and footers can contain the date, the document
name, the lesson plan name, the class name, your school’s name, or any other
information needed to identify a document.
By default, headers and footers do not contain content and boundaries for the
header and footer are hidden. To activate a header or footer for editing, click
inside the top or bottom margin. When activated, a text box with a light gray
border is displayed.
Inserting and Editing Text in Headers and Footers
1. Click inside the top or bottom margin.
The text box borders in the margin become visible and the object space is
disabled. The cursor is placed in the header or footer space and the
formatting toolbar becomes active.
2. Type the text.
• The default font is TI-Nspire™ true type, 12 pt, normal.
• By default, text is centered horizontally and vertically.
• Text can be aligned: left, center, right, or justified.
• Text that does not fit within the text box horizontally will wrap to the
next line.
• Text that does not fit within the text box vertically will not be shown, but
text is retained. (If you delete text, the hidden text will appear.)
3. Complete one of the following actions to save the text:
• Single-click anywhere outside the header or footer text box to save the
text.
• Press Esc to save the text.
The PublishView™ sheet becomes active and the formatting menu
closes.
Showing and Hiding Borders
By default, borders are displayed when you insert an object into a problem.
When you select to hide borders, the selection applies to all objects in the
document and to objects that you add to the document. To hide the border:
1. Right-click in any blank area of the sheet (outside of any object) to open
the context menu.
2. Click Layout Options.
The Layout Options dialog box opens.
Note: You can also click View > PublishView™ Layout Options.
3. Clear the Show object borders option to hide the borders around the
objects in the problem. Select the option to return to the default setting and
show borders.
4. Click OK to close the dialog box.
Adding and Removing Space
To manage how PublishView™ objects appear on a sheet, you may need to
add or delete space between objects.
Note: You can add and remove vertical space between objects using this
method. To add or remove horizontal space between objects, move the object.
Adding Space
1. Right-click in the area outside of any object where you want to add space.
The context menu opens.
Working with PublishView™ Documents 123
124 Working with PublishView™ Documents
2. Click Edit > Add/Remove Space. The Add/Remove Space tool becomes
active.
Add/Remove
Space tool
3. Use your mouse to position the tool to the exact place where you want to
add space.
4. Click the tool, and then drag down to select the amount of space you want
to add. As you select the amount of space to be added, it is indicated in
green.
5. Press the Enter key to add the space in between the objects. You can
adjust the amount of space by dragging up and down before you press
Enter.
Removing Space
1. Right-click in the area outside of any object where you want to remove
space.
The context menu opens.
2. Click Edit > Add/Remove Space.
The Add/Remove Space tool becomes active.
Working with PublishView™ Documents 125
126 Working with PublishView™ Documents
Add/Remove
Space tool
3. Use your mouse to position the tool to the exact place where you want to
remove space.
4. Click the tool, and then drag up to select the amount of space you want to
remove. As you select the amount of space to be removed, it is indicated in
red.
5. Press the Enter key to remove the space in between the objects. You can
adjust the amount of space by dragging up and down before you press
Enter.
Note: If there is not enough space on the sheet to accommodate the
objects, the objects won’t be moved when space is removed.
Deleting Blank Sheets from Problems
You can delete a sheet that does not contain any TI-Nspire™ applications or
PublishView™ objects from a problem. To delete a blank sheet from a problem:
1. Delete any TI-Nspire™ applications, PublishView™ objects, move or delete
any problem breaks from the sheet.
2. Place your cursor inside the sheet you want to delete.
3. Right-click inside the blank sheet to open the context menu.
4. Click Edit > Delete Sheet.
The blank sheet is removed from the problem.
Using Zoom
The zoom feature lets you zoom in on any object or area on the PublishView™
document for discussion, and zoom out to see an overview of the lesson. The
zoom uses the center point of the viewable area to zoom in.
The default zoom setting is 100%.
▶To change the zoom percentage, do one of the following:
• Type the number in the box and press Enter.
• Use the - and + buttons to decrease or increase the percentage in
10% increments.
• Use the drop-down arrow to choose a preset percentage.
The zoom settings are retained when you save the document.
Adding Text to a PublishView™ Document
In a PublishView™ document, there are three ways to add text:
• Insert a PublishView™ text box to enter free-form text or copy text from
other sources into the document. For example, you can place a
PublishView™ text box next to an image and type a description in a text
Working with PublishView™ Documents 127
128 Working with PublishView™ Documents
box. You can also copy and paste text from .doc, .txt, and .rtf files. Use
PublishView™ text boxes when you need options for emphasizing and
formatting text. PublishView™ text boxes are not converted when you
convert a PublishView™ document to a TI-Nspire™ document. You may
want to use a PublishView™ text box to add text that you don’t want
handheld users to see.
• Use the TI-Nspire™ Notes application. You should use the Notes
application when you need an advanced equation editor and when you
need to use TI-Nspire™ math templates and symbols. Superscript and
subscript are also easier to use in the Notes application. You should also
use Notes when you are planning to convert the PublishView™ document
to a TI-Nspire™ document for use on a handheld and you want handheld
users to see the text.
• Add text in TI-Nspire™ applications that allow text just as you would in a
TI-Nspire™ document.
Inserting Text into a Text Box
1. Ensure the PublishView™ Objects pane is open.
2. Use your mouse to click and drag it to the problem.
3. Release the mouse button to drop the text box into the problem.
4. Using the mouse, grab the handles to resize the text box or position in the
problem as needed.
5. Click outside the text box to save the size and position.
6. Click "Type your text here."
The formatting toolbar becomes active. The text box is in an interactive
state for adding or editing text.
7. Type the new text.
—or—
Copy and paste text from another file.
8. Apply formatting as needed.
9. Click outside the text box to save the text.
Formatting and Editing Text
The options for editing and formatting text are located on a formatting toolbar at
the top of the active document. Formatting options for editing text include:
• Changing the font, font size, and font color.
• Applying bold, italics, and underline formatting.
• Applying the following text horizontal alignment options: left, right,
centered, and justified.
Working with PublishView™ Documents 129
130 Working with PublishView™ Documents
• Inserting hyperlinks.
Launching Edit Mode
▶Click inside a text box to launch edit mode.
• The formatting menu opens.
• The text is selectable for editing.
Opening the Content Context Menu
▶Right-click inside a text box containing text or a hyperlink.
The formatting menu and context menu open providing shortcuts to cut,
copy, and paste.
Using Hyperlinks in PublishView™ Documents
In PublishView™ documents, use hyperlinks to:
• Link to a file
• Link to a website on the Internet
You can add a hyperlink to an open document or you can convert any text
within a text box to a hyperlink. When a hyperlink is added, the formatting of the
text is underlined and the font color is blue. You can change the formatting of
the hyperlinked text without losing the hyperlink.
If a link is broken, an error message is displayed when you click the link:
• Cannot open the specified file
• Cannot open the specified web page
PublishView™ text boxes support both absolute and relative links.
Absolute links contain the complete location of the linked file and do not
depend on the location of the main document.
Relative links contain the location of the linked file relative to the main
document. If you have multiple lessons in a single folder and they are all linked
using relative addressing, you can move the folder to any other location
(another local folder, datashare, flash drive, online) without breaking the links.
The links also stay intact if you bundle the documents into a lesson bundle or
zip them into a zip file and share them.
Note: The PublishView™ document must be saved before you can insert a
relative hyperlink.
Linking to a File
You can link to any file on your computer. If the file type is associated with an
application on your computer, it will launch when you click the link. There are
two ways to link to a file; by typing or pasting a file address into the Address
field, or by browsing to a file.
Linking to a File by Using an Address
1. Ensure the PublishView™ Objects pane is open.
2. Drag the hyperlink icon onto the document.
The Hyperlink dialog box opens.
3. Type the name of the link in the Text field. For example, this can be the
name of the document.
Working with PublishView™ Documents 131
132 Working with PublishView™ Documents
4. Copy the location of the file path you want to link to, and paste it in the
Address field.
—or—
Type the location of the file in the Address field.
Note: Type ../ to designate parent directories. For example:
../../lessons/mathlesson2.tns
5. Click OK to insert the link.
A text box containing the hyperlink is added to the PublishView™ document.
Linking to a File by Browsing
1. Ensure the PublishView™ Objects pane is open.
2. Drag the hyperlink icon onto the document.
The Hyperlink dialog box opens.
3. Type the name of the link in the Text field. For example, this can be the
name of the document.
4. Click to select Link to a file on your computer or network drive.
The Select file to insert as hyperlink dialog box opens.
5. Navigate to and select the file you want to link to, and then click Insert.
The path name is inserted into the Address field in the Hyperlink dialog
box.
If the software is unable to determine if the link is a relative or absolute
address, the Hyperlink dialog box opens with an option to change the type
of link.
To change the link, click the appropriate option:
•Change to absolute address.
•Change to relative address.
6. Click OK to insert the link.
—or—
Click Start Over to go back to the Hyperlink dialog box and choose a
different file to link, or to edit the Text or Address fields.
A text box containing the hyperlink is added to the PublishView™ document.
Working with PublishView™ Documents 133
134 Working with PublishView™ Documents
7. Using the mouse, grab the handles to resize the text box.
—or—
Grab any border to position the text box in the document as needed.
Linking to a Website
There are two ways to link to a website; by typing or pasting the URL into the
Address field, or by browsing to a file.
Linking to a Website by Using an Address
1. Ensure the PublishView™ Objects menu is open.
2. Drag the hyperlink icon onto the document to open the Hyperlink
dialog box.
3. Type or paste the URL you want to link to in the Address field.
4. Click OK.
A text box containing the hyperlink is added to the PublishView™
document.
Linking to a Website by Browsing
1. Ensure the PublishView™ Objects menu is open.
2. Drag the hyperlink icon onto the document to open the Hyperlink
dialog box.
3. Click to select Link to an Internet resource.
The browser opens to your default website.
4. Navigate to the website or file on a website that you want to link to.
5. Copy the URL, and then paste it in the Address field in the Hyperlink
dialog box.
—or—
Type the URL in the Address field.
6. Click OK.
A text box containing the hyperlink is added to the PublishView™
document.
7. Using the mouse, grab the handles to resize the text box.
—or—
Grab any border to position the text box in the document as needed.
Working with PublishView™ Documents 135
136 Working with PublishView™ Documents
Editing a Hyperlink
To change the name of a hyperlink, change the path, or change the URL,
complete the following steps.
1. Using your mouse, right-click the hyperlink text, and then click Edit
hyperlink.
The Hyperlink dialog box opens.
2. Make corrections as needed:
• Type corrections to the hyperlink name in the Text field.
• Click to open the Select a file to add as a hyperlink dialog box
and use the file browser to navigate to the folder where the file is
located.
• Click to open a browser and navigate to a website to copy and
paste the correct the URL in the Address field.
3. Click OK to save the changes.
Converting Existing Text to a Hyperlink
1. Click inside the text box to activate edit mode and open the formatting
menu.
2. Select the text you want to convert to a hyperlink.
3. Click .
The Hyperlink dialog box opens with the selected text in the Text field.
4. Click to create a link to a file.
—or—
Click to create a link to page on a website.
Removing a Hyperlink
Use this process to remove a link from text inside a text box. The text remains in
the document.
1. Using your mouse, right-click the hyperlink text.
2. Click Remove hyperlink.
The hyperlink formatting is removed from the text and the text is no longer
clickable.
Note: To remove both the text and hyperlink, delete the text. If a text box
contains only the linked text, delete the text box.
Working with Images
Images can be added to PublishView™ documents as PublishView™ objects or
can be added inside TI-Nspire™ applications that support images. Supported
files types are .bmp, .jpg, and .png files.
Note: If a TI-Nspire™ application is active in the PublishView™ document, the
image is added to the TI-Nspire™ page if you click Insert>Image from the
menu bar or context menu. If there is no TI-Nspire™ document active, the image
is added as a PublishView™ object. Only images inside TI-Nspire™ applications
convert to TI-Nspire™ documents (.tns files).
Inserting an Image
1. Ensure the PublishView™ Objects pane is open.
Working with PublishView™ Documents 137
138 Working with PublishView™ Documents
2. Click , and then drag the icon to the document.
The Choose an image to insert into PublishView™ dialog box opens.
Note: By default, the Texas Instruments preloaded images folder is
displayed.
3. Navigate to the folder where the image file you want to insert is located,
and then highlight the file name.
4. Click Insert image.
The image is added to the PublishView™ sheet.
5. Using the mouse, grab the handles to resize the text box,
—or—
Grab any border to position the text box in the document as needed.
Moving Images
1. Click the frame containing the image to select it.
2. Move your cursor over the edge of the image to activate the positioning
tool.
3. Move the image to its new location on the PublishView™ sheet.
Note: Objects can overlap each other on a PublishView™ sheet.
Resizing Images
1. Click the frame containing the image to select it.
2. Move your cursor over one of the blue handles to activate the resizing tool.
3. Drag the handle to make the image smaller or bigger.
Deleting Images
▶Click the image to select it, and then press the Delete key.
—or—
▶Right-click a handle to open the context menu, and then click Delete.
Working with PublishView™ Documents 139
140 Working with PublishView™ Documents
Working with Video Files
You can embed video files in a PublishView™ document and play the videos
directly from the PublishView™ document. Supported video formats include:
• Flash® (.flv) video files with VP6 video and MP3 audio.
• MP4 (MPEG-4 multimedia container) with H264/AVC (Advanced Video
Coding) video compression and AAC audio.
Note: You can also insert a link to a video that will launch in a new browser
window or media player window. For more information, see
Working with
Hyperlinks
.
Inserting a Video
1. Ensure the PublishView™ Objects pane is open.
2. Click , and then drag the icon to the document.
The Choose a video to insert into PublishView™ dialog box opens.
3. Navigate to the folder where the video file you want to insert is located,
and select the file name.
4. Click Insert video.
An object containing the embedded video is added to the PublishView™
sheet. By default, the resizing and positioning handles are active.
5. Using the mouse, grab the handles to resize the object or grab any border
to position the object in the document as needed. For example, you may
want to position the object containing the video above or below a text box
that contains text introducing the video.
6. To play the video, click the forward arrow, or click anywhere in the viewing
window.
Using the Video Console
The video console lets users control the video.
ÀStarts or stops the video.
ÁShows the elapsed time as the video plays.
ÂMutes or unmutes the audio.
Converting Documents
You can convert PublishView™ documents (.tnsp files) to TI-Nspire™
documents (.tns files) for display on handhelds. You can also convert
TI-Nspire™ documents to PublishView™ documents.
Working with PublishView™ Documents 141
142 Working with PublishView™ Documents
Converting a document creates a new document—the original document
remains intact and is not linked to the new document. If you make changes to
one document, the changes are not reflected in the other document.
Converting PublishView™ Documents to TI-Nspire™ Documents
You cannot open a PublishView™ document (.tnsp file) on a handheld.
However, you can convert the PublishView™ document to a TI-Nspire™
document that can be transferred to and opened on a handheld. When you
convert a PublishView™ document to a TI-Nspire™ document:
• Only the TI-Nspire™ applications become part of the TI-Nspire™ document.
• PublishView™ objects such as text boxes, images, hyperlinks, and videos
are not converted.
• Text contained in PublishView™ text boxes is not converted; however, text
in a TI-Nspire™ Notes application is converted.
• If images are contained in a TI-Nspire™ application, they are converted;
however, images contained in PublishView™ objects are not converted.
Complete the following steps to convert a PublishView™ document (.tnsp file) to
a TI-Nspire™ document (.tns file).
1. Open the PublishView™ document to be converted.
2. Click File > Convert to > TI-Nspire™ Document.
• The new TI-Nspire™ document opens in the Documents Workspace.
• All supported TI-Nspire™ applications are part of the new TI-Nspire™
document.
• Starting from top to bottom, and then left to right, the layout of the
TI-Nspire™ document is based on the order of the TI-Nspire™
applications in the PublishView™ document.
- Every TI-Nspire™ application in a PublishView™ document will
appear as a page in the converted TI-Nspire™ document. The
order of the pages in the TI-Nspire™ document is based on the
layout of the TI-Nspire™ applications in the PublishView™
document.
- If two or more problems are at the same level, the order is left to
right.
• Problem breaks are maintained.
• The new TI-Nspire™ document is not linked to the PublishView™
document.
3. When work in the document is complete, click to save the document
in the current folder.
—or—
Click File > Save As to save the document in a different folder.
Note: If the document has never been saved, both the Save and Save as
options allow saving in a different folder.
Note: You can also use the Save as option to convert a PublishView™
document to a TI-Nspire™ document.
Note: If you try to convert a PublishView™ document that does not contain TI-
Nspire™ pages or applications, an error message is displayed.
Converting TI-Nspire™ Documents to PublishView™ Documents
You can convert existing TI-Nspire™ documents to PublishView™ documents,
which enables you to take advantage of the richer layout and editing features
for printing, generating student reports, creating worksheets and assessments,
and publishing documents to a website or blog.
Complete the following steps to convert a TI-Nspire™ document to a
PublishView™ document:
1. Open the TI-Nspire™ document you want to convert.
2. Click File > Convert to > PublishView™ Document.
• The new PublishView™ document opens in the Documents
Workspace.
• By default, there are six objects per page.
• When converted, each problem from the TI-Nspire™ document will
start a new sheet in the PublishView™ document.
• Problem breaks are maintained.
3. When work in the document is complete, click to save the document
in the current folder.
—or—
Working with PublishView™ Documents 143
144 Working with PublishView™ Documents
Click File > Save As to save the document in a different folder.
Note: You can also use the Save as option to save a TI-Nspire™ document
as a PublishView™ document.
Printing PublishView™ Documents
You can print reports, worksheets, and assessments created using the
PublishView™ feature. To print a document:
1. Click File > Print.
The Print dialog box opens. A preview of the document is shown on the
right side of the dialog box.
2. Select a printer from the menu.
Note: The Print what field is disabled.
3. Select Paper Size from the menu. Options are:
• Letter (8.5 x 11 inches)
• Legal (8.5 x 14 inches)
• A4 (210 x 297 mm)
4. Select or type the number of Copies you want to print.
5. In the Print Range area, select to print all sheets in the document, a range
of sheets, or the current sheet only.
Note: By default, top and bottom margins are set to one-inch and are
maintained when printing a PublishView™ document. There are no side
margins. PublishView™ sheets print just as they appear in the workspace.
6. If needed, select or clear the boxes to:
• Print problem breaks and names.
• Print headers
• Print footers
• Print object borders
7. Click Print, or click Save As PDF.
Working with Lesson Bundles
Many lessons or activities contain multiple files. For example, teachers usually
have a teacher version of a file, a student version, assessments, and
sometimes supporting files. A lesson bundle is a container that enables
teachers to group all files needed for a lesson together. Lesson bundles are
used to:
• Add any type of file (.tns, .tnsp, .doc, .pdf, .ppt) to a lesson bundle.
• Send lesson bundles to connected handhelds or laptops; however, only
the .tns files are sent to the handheld.
• View all the files in a lesson bundle using the TI-Nspire™ software.
• Group all files associated with one lesson in one place.
• Email one lesson bundle file to teachers or students instead of looking for
and attaching multiple files.
Creating a New Lesson Bundle
Teachers and students can create new lesson bundles in the Documents
Workspace. Teachers can also create new lesson bundles in the Content
Workspace.
Creating a Lesson Bundle in the Documents Workspace
Complete the following steps to create a new lesson bundle. By default, the
new lesson bundle does not contain files.
1. Click in the Documents Toolbox to open the Content Explorer.
2. Navigate to the folder where you want to save the lesson bundle file.
3. Click to open the menu, and then click New Lesson Bundle.
The new lesson bundle file is created with a default name and placed in
your list of files.
4. Type a name for your lesson bundle.
5. Press Enter to save the file.
Working with Lesson Bundles 145
146 Working with Lesson Bundles
Creating Lesson Bundles in the Content Workspace
In the Content Workspace, teachers have two options for creating lesson
bundles:
• When files needed for a lesson bundle are located in different folders,
create an empty lesson bundle, and then add files to the lesson bundle.
• If all needed files are located in the same folder, create a lesson bundle
with selected files.
Creating an Empty Lesson Bundle
Complete the following steps to create a lesson bundle that does not contain
files.
1. Navigate to the folder on your computer where you want to save the lesson
bundle.
Note: If you are using the software for the first time, you may need to create
a folder on your computer before creating a lesson bundle.
2. Click or click File > New Lesson Bundle.
The new lesson bundle file is created with a default name and placed in
the list of files.
3. Type a name for the lesson bundle and press Enter.
The lesson bundle is saved with the new name and details are shown in
the Preview pane.
Creating a Lesson Bundle Containing Files
You can select multiple files within a folder, and then create the lesson bundle.
You cannot add a folder to a lesson bundle.
1. Navigate to the folder that contains the files you want to bundle.
2. Select the files. To select multiple files, select the first file then hold down
Shift and click the last file in the list. To select random files, select the first
file, and then hold down Ctrl and click the other files to select them.
3. Click , and then click Lesson Bundles > Create New Lesson Bundle
from selected.
A new lesson bundle is created and placed in the open folder. The lesson
bundle contains copies of the selected files.
4. Type a name for the lesson bundle and press Enter.
The lesson bundle is saved in the open folder and the details are shown in
the Preview pane.
Adding Files to a Lesson Bundle
Use any of the following methods to add files to a lesson bundle:
• Drag any file into a selected lesson bundle. This method moves the file to
the lesson bundle. If you delete the lesson bundle, the file is deleted from
your computer. You can recover the file from the Recycle Bin.
• Copy and paste any file into a selected lesson bundle.
• Use the "Add files to lesson bundle" option. This method copies the
selected files into the lesson bundle. The file is not moved from its original
location.
Using the Add Files to Lesson Bundle Option
Use this option to add files to an empty lesson bundle or add more files to an
existing lesson bundle.
1. Use one of the following options to select the lesson bundle file.
• When working in the Documents Workspace, open the Content
Explorer, and then double-click the lesson bundle file name.
• When working in the Content Workspace, double-click the lesson
bundle name.
Note: In the Content Workspace, you can also click the lesson bundle
name to open the Files dialog box in the Preview pane. The Add Files
to Lesson Bundle option is available from the Files dialog box. If the
lesson bundle already contains files, the first file in bundle is shown in
the Files dialog box.
The lesson bundle dialog box opens. The name reflects the name of the
lesson bundle.
Working with Lesson Bundles 147
148 Working with Lesson Bundles
2. Click Add Files to Lesson Bundle.
The Add dialog box opens.
3. Navigate to and select the file you want to add to the lesson bundle.
• You can select multiple files at one time if they are located in the same
folder.
• If files are located in different folders, you can add them one at a time.
• You cannot create a folder within a lesson bundle or add a folder to a
lesson bundle.
4. Click Add to add the file to the bundle.
The file is added to the bundle and is now listed in the lesson bundle
dialog box.
5. Repeat this process until all needed files are added to the lesson bundle.
Opening a Lesson Bundle
To view and work with files within a lesson bundle, complete one of the
following steps to open the lesson bundle file.
▶Double-click the lesson bundle name.
▶Select the lesson bundle, and then right-click and click Open.
▶Select the lesson bundle, click , and then click Open.
▶Select the lesson bundle, and then press Ctrl + O. (Mac®: “+O).
When you open a lesson bundle, the files in the bundle are displayed in a
separate dialog box.
Note: You cannot open a lesson bundle outside of the TI-Nspire™ software. For
example, if you open the folder using the file manager on your computer and
double-click the lesson bundle name, it does not automatically launch the
TI-Nspire™ software.
Opening Files Within a Lesson Bundle
You can open any file within a lesson bundle on your computer if you have the
program associated with the file type.
• When you open a .tns or .tnsp file, the file opens in the Documents
Workspace in the TI-Nspire™ software.
• When you open another file type, it launches the application or program
associated with that file. For example, if you open a .doc file, it opens in
Microsoft® Word.
Use one of the following options to open a file within a lesson bundle:
▶Double-click the lesson bundle, and then double-click a file within the
lesson bundle.
Working with Lesson Bundles 149
150 Working with Lesson Bundles
▶Within a lesson bundle, select the file, and then click ¢or right-click the file
name and select Open.
Managing Files in a Lesson Bundle
You can open, copy/paste, delete, and rename files in an existing lesson
bundle. To locate and work with files in an existing lesson bundle:
1. Choose one of the following options to locate an existing lesson bundle.
• When working in the Documents Workspace, open the Content
Explorer (click in the Documents Toolbox), and then navigate to
the folder where the lesson bundle is located.
• When working in the Content Workspace, navigate to the folder where
the lesson bundle is located in Content pane.
Note: When you click a lesson bundle name in the Content pane, the
Files dialog box opens in the Preview pane. Select a file and right-
click to open the context menu.
2. Double-click the lesson bundle name to open the Lesson Bundle dialog
box.
3. Select the file you want to work with and click ¢to open the context menu.
4. Click the action you want to perform:
• Click Open. TI-Nspire™ and PublishView™ documents open in the
Documents Workspace. When you open another file type, it launches
the application or program associated with that file.
• Click Copy to place the file in the Clipboard.
• Navigate to a folder on your computer or select a connected handheld
or laptop, and then right-click and click Paste to place the copied file in
a new location.
• Click Delete to delete a file from the lesson bundle. Use caution when
deleting a file from a lesson bundle. You should ensure files
contained in the bundle are backed up if you need the files for future
use.
• Click Rename to give the file a new name. To cancel this action, press
Esc.
• Click Add Files to Lesson Bundle to select and add files to the bundle.
• Click Refresh to update the list of files in the bundle.
• Click Package Lesson Bundle to create a .tilb file
• Click Send to Connected Handhelds to open the Transfer Tool and
send the selected file to connected handhelds. You can send .tns files
and OS files.
Working with Lesson Bundles 151
152 Working with Lesson Bundles
Note: This option is not available in the TI-Nspire™ Navigator™ NC
Teacher Software.
5. When finished, click Close to close the dialog box.
Managing Lesson Bundles
Use the options menu or the context menu to copy, delete, rename, or send a
lesson bundle to connected handhelds or laptops. You cannot add a folder to a
lesson bundle.
Managing Lesson Bundles in the Documents Workspace
1. Open the Content Explorer, and then right-click the lesson bundle name or
click to open the context menu.
2. Click the action you want to perform. If an action is not available, it is
dimmed.
• Click Open to open the lesson bundle.
• Click Up One Level to navigate up a level in the folder hierarchy.
• You cannot add a folder to a lesson bundle. If you click New Folder, a
new folder is added to the folder where the lesson bundle is stored.
• Click New Lesson Bundle to create a new lesson bundle. The new
lesson bundle is not added to the existing lesson bundle—it is created
in the same folder as the existing lesson bundle.
• Click Rename to change the name of the lesson bundle. Press Esc to
cancel this action.
• Click Copy to copy the lesson bundle to the Clipboard.
• Navigate to another folder, and then click Paste to copy the lesson
bundle in another location.
• Click Delete to delete the lesson bundle. Use caution when deleting a
lesson bundle. You should ensure files contained in the bundle are
backed up if you need the files for future use.
•Select All highlights all files in the open folder. This action does not
apply to lesson bundles.
• Click Package Lesson to create a .tilb file.
• Click Refresh to update the list of files in the open folder.
Managing Lesson Bundles in the Content Workspace
1. Click Computer Content in the Resources pane.
2. In the Content pane, navigate to the lesson bundle you want to work with,
and then right-click to open the context menu or click to open the menu
of options.
Working with Lesson Bundles 153
154 Working with Lesson Bundles
3. Select the action you want to perform:
• Click Open to open the lesson bundle.
• Click Copy to place the lesson bundle file in the Clipboard.
• Navigate to a folder on your computer or select a connected
handheld, and then right-click and click Paste to place the copied file
in a new location.
• Click Delete to delete the lesson bundle. Use caution when deleting a
lesson bundle. You should ensure files contained in the bundle are
backed up if you need the files for future use.
• Click Refresh to update the list of files in the bundle.
• Click Rename to give the lesson bundle a new name. To cancel this
action, press Esc.
• To move up a level in the folder hierarchy, click Up a Level.
• To add the lesson bundle to the list of shortcuts in Local Content, click
Create Shortcut.
• To add more files to the lesson bundle, click Lesson Bundles >Add
Files to Lesson Bundle.
• Click Lesson Bundles >Package Lesson Bundle to create a .tilb file.
• Click Send to Connected Handhelds to open the Transfer Tool and
send the lesson bundle to connected handhelds. (This option is not
available in the TI-Nspire™ Navigator™ NC Teacher Software
software.)
Packaging Lesson Bundles
Packaging lesson bundles creates a "package" folder with a .tilb file. This file
contains all files contained in the lesson bundle. You must package the lesson
before you can email the lesson bundle (.tilb file) to colleagues or students. By
default, the lesson bundle is saved in the following folder:
...\TI-Nspire\New Lesson Bundle1.tilb\package\...
Packaging a Lesson in the Documents Workspace
1. Open the Content Explorer.
2. Navigate to the folder where the lesson bundle is saved.
3. Select the lesson bundle you want to package.
4. Right-click to open the context menu, and then click Package Lesson.
The Lesson Bundle dialog box opens confirming that the .tilb file was
created and the lesson bundle was successfully packaged.
5. Click Yes to open the folder where the lesson package is stored. Click No
to close the dialog box.
Packaging a Lesson in the Contents Workspace
1. In ComputerContent, navigate to the folder that contains the lesson bundle
you want to package.
2. Click the lesson bundle in the Content pane. The Lesson Bundle details
are displayed in the Preview pane.
3. Use one of the following methods to create the package:
• From the Preview pane, click ¢in the Files dialog box, and then click
Package Lesson Bundle.
• From the Content pane, right-click the lesson bundle name, and then
click Lesson Bundles > Package Lesson Bundle.
The Lesson Bundle dialog box opens confirming that the lesson bundle
was created.
4. Click Yes to open the folder where the lesson package is stored. Click No
to close the dialog box.
Emailing a Lesson Bundle
After a lesson bundle is packaged, you can email the .tilb file to other teachers
or students. To attach the lesson bundle to an email:
1. In your email client, select the option needed to attach a file, and then
navigate to the .tilb folder.
2. Make sure you open the folder and select the .tilb file to attach to the email.
You cannot email the .tilb folder.
Working with Lesson Bundles 155
156 Working with Lesson Bundles
Sending Lesson Bundles to Connected Handhelds
Note: This option is not available in TI-Nspire™ Navigator™ NC Teacher
Software.
1. Complete one of the following actions to select a lesson bundle:
• In the Documents Workspace, open the Content Explorer, and then
select the lesson bundle you want to send.
• In the Content Workspace, navigate to the lesson you want to send in
the Content pane.
2. Drag the lesson bundle file to a connected handheld. You can also copy
the lesson bundle, and then paste it to a connected handheld.
The lesson bundle is transferred to the handheld as a folder with the same
name. Only .tns files are transferred to the handheld.
Capturing Screens
Screen Capture enables you to:
•Capture Page
- Capture the active page in a TI-Nspire™ document from the software
or from the TI-SmartView™ emulator as an image.
- Save captured images as .jpg, .gif, .png, or .tif files, which can be
inserted into TI-Nspire™ applications that allow images.
- Copy and paste images into another application such as Microsoft®
Word.
•Capture Selected Handheld
- Capture the current screen on a connected handheld as an image.
- Save captured images as .jpg, .gif, .png, or .tif files, which can be
inserted into TI-Nspire™ applications that allow images.
- Copy and paste images into another application such as Microsoft®
Word.
•Capture Images in Handheld Mode
- In the Documents Workspace, use the DragScreen feature to capture
the emulator screen or side screen when the TI-SmartView™ Emulator
is active.
- Teachers can use this feature to drag and paste an image to
presentation tools such as SMART® Notebook, Promethean’s
Flipchart, and Microsoft® Office applications including Word and
PowerPoint®.
Accessing Screen Capture
The Screen Capture tool is available from all workspaces. To access Screen
Capture:
▶From the menu bar, click Tools >Screen Capture.
▶From the toolbar, click .
Capturing Screens 157
158 Capturing Screens
Using Capture Page
Use the Capture Page option to capture an image of an active page in a
TI-Nspire™ document. You can save images in the following file formats: .jpg,
.gif, .png, and .tif. Saved images can be inserted into TI-Nspire™ applications
that allow images. The image is also copied to the Clipboard and can be
pasted into other applications such as Microsoft® Word or PowerPoint.
Capturing a Page
Complete the following steps to capture an image of an active page.
1. In the Documents Workspace, open a document and navigate to the page
you want to capture to make it active.
2. Click , and then click Capture Page.
The image of the active page is copied to the Clipboard and to the Screen
Capture window. The dialog box opens
in the lower right corner of your desktop when the screen capture is
complete.
3. Click View it.
The Screen Capture window opens.
You can also click Window > Screen Capture Window to open the Screen
Capture window.
4. To capture additional pages, move to another page in the current
document or open a new document to select a page.
As you capture additional pages, the images are copied to the Screen
Capture window, which holds multiple images. The last page captured
replaces the contents of the Clipboard.
Using Capture Selected Handheld
Use the Capture Selected Handheld option to capture the active screen on a
connected handheld.
1. On a connected handheld, navigate to the menu or to a page in a
document you want to capture.
2. In the software, select the connected handheld:
• In the Content Workspace, select the handheld from the list of
Connected Handhelds in the Resources pane.
• In the Documents Workspace, open Content Explorer from the
Documents Toolbox, and then select the handheld from the list of
Connected Handhelds.
• In the Class Workspace, select a logged in student.
Capturing Screens 159
160 Capturing Screens
3. Click , and then click Capture Selected Handheld.
—or—
Click , and then click Capture Selected Handheld.
The screen is copied to the Clipboard and to the TI-Nspire™ Screen
Capture window. The dialog
box opens in the lower right corner of your desktop when the screen
capture is complete.
4. Click View it.
The Screen Capture window opens.
You can capture additional screens from an open document on a
connected handheld or open another document on a connected handheld
to capture screens from that document.
As you capture additional screens, the images are copied to the Screen
Capture window, which holds multiple images. The last screen captured
replaces the contents of the Clipboard.
Viewing Captured Screens
When you capture a page or screen, it is copied to the Screen Capture window.
Zooming the View of Captured Screens
In the Screen Capture window, use the zoom in and zoom out options to
increase or decrease the size of the captured screens.
▶From the toolbar, click to increase the size of the screens in the view.
You can also click View > Zoom In from the menu.
▶From the toolbar, click to decrease the size of the screens in the view.
You can also click View > Zoom Out from the menu.
Saving Captured Pages and Screens
You can save captured pages and screens captured as images for use in other
TI-Nspire™ documents that allow images or for use in other applications such
as Microsoft® Word. You can save one image at a time, select multiple images
to save, or save all captured images.
Saving Selected Screens
1. In the Screen Capture window, select the screen image you want to save.
2. Click File > Save Selected Screen(s).
Capturing Screens 161
162 Capturing Screens
Note: From the Screen Capture window, you can also click .
The Save as dialog box opens.
3. Navigate to the folder on your computer where you want to save the file.
4. Type a name for the file.
Note: The default file name is
MM-DD-YYYY Image ###
.
5. Select the file type for the image file. The default format is .jpg. Click¤to
select another format: .gif, .tif, or .png.
6. Click Save.
The file is saved in the designated folder.
Saving Multiple Screens
1. In the Screen Capture window, select the screens you want to save.
To select multiple consecutive screens, click the first image, and then hold
down the Shift key and click the additional images. To select screens in
random order, press Ctrl (Mac®: “) and click each image you want to
save.
2. Click or select File > Save Selected Screen(s). To save all captured
screens, select File > Save All Screens.
Note: The "Save All Screens" option is not available when using Capture
Class.
The Save as dialog box opens.
3. In the Save In field, navigate to the folder where you want to save the
images.
4. In the File Name field, type a new folder name. The default folder name is
MM-DD-YYYY Image
, where
MM-DD-YYYY
is the current date.
5. Select the file type for the image files. The default format is .jpg. Click¤to
select another format: .gif, .tif, or .png.
6. Click Save.
The images are saved in the specified folder with system-assigned names
reflecting the current date and a sequence number. For example,
MM-DD-
YYYY Image 001.jpg
,
MM-DD-YYYY Image 002.jpg
and so on.
Copying and Pasting a Screen
You can select a captured screen and copy it to the Clipboard for inclusion into
other documents or applications. You can also print copied screens. Copied
screens are captured at 100% zoom level, and they are copied in the order of
selection.
Copying a Screen
1. Select the screen to copy.
2. Click or Edit > Copy.
The selected screen is copied to the Clipboard.
Pasting a Screen
Depending on the application you are pasting to, click Edit > Paste.
Note: You can also drag a screen capture to another application. This functions
as a copy and paste.
Capturing Images in Handheld Mode
In the Documents Workspace, use the DragScreen feature to capture the
emulator screen or side screen when the TI-SmartView™ Emulator is active.
Teachers can use this feature to drag and paste an image to presentation tools
such as SMART® Notebook, Promethean’s Flipchart, and Microsoft® Office
applications including Word and PowerPoint®.
Capturing Screens 163
164 Capturing Screens
Capturing Images Using the DragScreen Feature
Complete the following steps to capture an image and copy it to a third-party
application.
1. From the Documents Workspace, click , which is located in the
Documents Toolbox.
The TI-SmartView™ Emulator opens.
• If the display selected is Handheld + SideScreen, the current
document is shown in the emulator and in the side screen.
• If the display selected is Keypad + SideScreen, the current document
is shown in the side screen.
2. To start the screen capture, click the area above the emulator screen or
above the keypad. In the Handheld + Sidescreen display, you can also
click the area around the emulator screen.
Do not release the mouse button. If the cursor is active or if you click inside
the emulator window, the screen capture is not started.
In Handheld + SideScreen view,
click the area above the emulator,
click the area around the emulator, or
click the border of the emulator
screen to start the screen capture.
In Keypad + SideScreen view, click
the area above the keypad to start the
screen capture.
3. Without releasing the mouse, drag the image.
A ghost image of the captured screen opens. The ghost image remains
visible until you release the mouse button.
The in the corner of the ghost image indicates you cannot paste the
image in that location.
4. Drag the image to an open third-party application. When the image is on
top of the third-party application, the indicates you can drop the
image.
Capturing Screens 165
166 Capturing Screens
5. Release the mouse button to drop the image into the selected application.
The image is also copied to the Clipboard and to the TI-Nspire™ Screen
Capture window.
To view captured images in the Screen Capture window, click Window >
Screen Capture Window.
You can capture additional screens as needed. As you capture additional
screens, the images are copied to the Screen Capture window, which
holds multiple images. The last screen captured replaces the contents of
the Clipboard.
Working with Images
Images can be used in TI-Nspire™ applications for reference, assessment, and
instructional purposes. You can add images to the following TI-Nspire™
applications:
• Graphs & Geometry
• Data & Statistics
• Notes
• Question, including Quick Poll
In the Graphs & Geometry and Data & Statistics applications, images are set in
the background behind the axis and other objects. In the Notes and Question
applications, the image is set at the cursor location inline with the text (in the
foreground).
You can insert the following image file types: .jpg, .png, or .bmp.
Note: The transparency feature of a .png file type is not supported. Transparent
backgrounds are displayed as white.
Working with Images in the Software
When working in the TI-Nspire™ software, you can insert, copy, move, and
delete images.
Inserting Images
In the Notes and Question applications, and in Quick Poll, you can insert more
than one image on a page. You can only insert one image on a page in the
Graphs & Geometry and Data & Statistics applications.
1. Open the document where you want to add an image.
2. Click Insert > Image.
The Insert Image dialog box opens.
Working with Images 167
168 Working with Images
3. Navigate to the folder where the image is located and select the image.
4. Click Open.
• In the Graphs & Geometry and Data & Statistics applications, the
image is inserted in the background behind the axis.
• In Notes, Question, and Quick Poll, the image is inserted at the cursor
location. You can type text above or below the image, and you can
move the image up or down on the page.
Note: You can also insert images by copying an image to the Clipboard and
pasting it into the application.
Moving Images
In applications such as Notes and Question where the image is set at the
cursor location, you can reposition the image by moving the image to a new
line or blank space, or by placing the image within a line of text. In the Graphs
& Geometry and Data & Statistics applications, images can be moved to any
position on the page.
1. Select the image.
• In the Notes and Question applications, click the image to select it.
• In the Graphs & Geometry and Data & Statistics applications, right-
click the image, and then click Select > Image.
2. Click the selected image and hold the mouse button.
• If an image is in the foreground, the cursor changes to .
• If an image is in the background, the cursor changes to .
3. Drag the image to the new location and release the mouse button to place
the image.
If an image is in the foreground, the cursor changes to when you hover
your mouse pointer over a location where there is a new line or space.
Images in the background can be moved and placed anywhere on the
page.
Resizing Images
To retain the aspect ratio of an image, resize by grabbing the image at one of
the four corners.
1. Select the image.
• In the Notes and Question applications, click the image to select it.
• In the Graphs & Geometry and Data & Statistics applications, right-
click the image, and then click Select > Image.
2. Move the cursor to one of the corners of the image.
The cursor changes to (a four-sided directional arrow).
Note: If you drag the cursor to an edge of the image, the cursor changes to
(a two-sided directional arrow). If you drag an image from one of its
edges to resize it, the image becomes distorted.
3. Click the corner or edge of the image.
The tool is enabled.
4. Drag in to make the image smaller or drag out to make the image larger.
5. Release the mouse when the image size is correct.
Deleting Images
To delete an image from an open document, complete the following steps.
1. Select the image.
• If an image is in the foreground, click the image to select it.
• If an image is in the background, right-click the image, and then click
Select > Image.
Working with Images 169
170 Working with Images
2. Press Delete.
The image is removed.
Using Question in the Teacher Software
The Question application in the Teacher Software allows you to author multiple
choice, open response, equation, expression, coordinate points, lists, image,
and chemistry questions.
Although students cannot author questions, they can open documents
containing questions, answer these questions, and, in Self-Check mode, check
their work.
The Question application is located on the Insert menu in the Documents
Workspace.
ÀInsert menu. Click Insert and select Question to add a question, or select
Image to add an image to a question.
ÁDocument Tools. Click this icon to open the toolbox pane.
ÂQuestion tool. Provides a menu of tools available for working with the
Question application.
ÃConfiguration tool. Allows you to set certain properties for each question
you insert.
ÄQuestion area. This is where you type questions and view student
responses.
ÅFormatting toolbar. Allows you to apply formatting to text.
Using Question in the Teacher Software 171
172 Using Question in the Teacher Software
ÆDocument Preview. View the document in Handheld or Computer mode.
The preview changes, but the page size does not. For more information
on Document Preview, see
Working with TI-Nspire™ Documents
.
Understanding the Question Tools
When you add a question, the Question application opens. If necessary, click
Document Tools to open the tools menu.
Note: The Teacher Tool Palette is not available to students.
Tool name Tool function
Clear
Answers
Lets teachers or students clear the answers in the
current question or in the document.
Check
Answer
If you select Self-Check as the document type in the
Question Properties dialog box, students can check
their answer to the question.
Insert Lets teachers or students insert an expression box or
chemical equation box into the question or answer.
Format Lets teachers or students format the selected text as
subscript or superscript. (The chemical equation box
uses its own formatting tool, so this Format tool does
not work in the chemical equation box.)
Teacher
Tool
Palette
Lets you add copyright information and set the
document type as Self-Check or Exam.
Using the Insert Menu
The Insert menu in the Document Tools lets you add math expression boxes
and chemical equation boxes to the Question area, Suggested
Response area, or Correct Answer area of some question types. When you are
in question types that allow math expressions or chemical equations, place
your cursor where you want to insert the box, and then follow these steps.
1. Open the Question tool.
2. Click Insert > Expression Box or Chem Box.
The software inserts a blank box where your cursor is positioned.
3. Type the desired math expression or chemical equation, and then click
outside of the box to continue typing text.
Using the Teacher Tool Palette
The Teacher Tool Palette allows you to add copyright information and set the
document type as Self-Check or Exam.
Adding Copyright Information
Use the Question Properties dialog box to add copyright information to the
current question.
1. Click the Teacher Tool Palette icon > Question Properties.
The Question Properties dialog box opens.
2. Type the author’s name and move to the Copyright field.
Note: TI-Nspire™ software allows you to use questions from more than one
author in the same document. Therefore, the information that you enter
about the author and copyright is not global. You must enter the relevant
information for each different question.
Using Question in the Teacher Software 173
174 Using Question in the Teacher Software
3. Select whether the question is public domain or has a copyright assigned
to it and move to the Year field.
4. Type the year the question was copyrighted and move to the Owner field. If
you are copyrighting a new question, type the current year (example:
2012).
5. Type the name of the person or entity that owns the copyright.
6. Click OK.
Setting Self-Check and Exam Document Types
When you define a document as Self-Check or Exam, all of the questions in
that document will be either Self-Check or Exam.
• When you define the document type as Self-Check, students can check the
answers against the answers provided by the teacher.
• In Exam mode, when you enter a suggested response to a question,
students cannot check the answers. You can use Exam mode to
automatically grade student responses.
1. Click the Teacher Tool Palette icon > Question Properties.
2. In the Document Type field, click Exam or Self-Check.
3. Click OK.
Understanding the Configuration Tool
The Configuration tool allows you to set properties specific to each question
type you insert. Properties include the response type, the number of responses
(if applicable), the correct answer, and other options.
For example, you can specify the correct answer to a question, and set the
scale, axes, and grid on a graph. You can add a 2D math expression on the
question types that contain a Correct Answer field.
Each question type has a unique set of options. The options are explained for
each question type in the
Adding Questions
section.
The configuration settings are retained when you copy and paste a question
from one document to another.
Adding Configuration Options
1. Click the down arrow on the Configuration bar in the Documents Toolbox
to open the Configuration tool.
2. Click the down arrow next to the choices you want to edit, and type the
applicable text.
3. Close the Configuration panel. The options you chose are saved when
you save the document.
Formatting Text and Objects
Use the text formatting tools to format text in sections of questions that allow
text input.
The formatting toolbar also contains the Document Tools icon to provide
easy access to the Question and Configuration tools.
For more information on formatting text and objects, see
Working with
TI-Nspire™ Documents
.
Using Question in the Teacher Software 175
176 Using Question in the Teacher Software
Adding Images to Questions
You can add images to the Question Text Area of most questions. On some
question types, you can add an image in the Student Answer or Suggested
Response Area of a question.
Adding images provides a visual aid to help explain the context of the question,
or as a background on a graph.
Choose the image from a set of images on your computer, or copy and paste
an image from a different application into the Question Text Area. For more
information, see
Working with Images
.
Image Types Available
The following file types can be used in the Question application:
• .jpg
• .jpeg
• .bmp
• .png
Note: The transparency feature of .png is not supported. Any transparent
.png backgrounds will appear as white.
Adding Images Using the Insert Command
1. Click Insert > Image.
The Insert Image dialog box opens.
2. Navigate to the location of the image and select it.
3. Click Open.
The image appears in the question.
Adding Images Using the Clipboard
To copy an image to the Clipboard from a TI-Nspire™ document, image file, or
another program, press Ctrl+C (Mac®: “+C).
To paste the image into the question, press Ctrl+V (Mac®: “+V).
Adding Questions
You can add the following types of questions:
• Multiple Choice
- Custom
- ABCD
- True/False
- Yes/No
- Always/Sometimes/Never
- Agree/Disagree
- Strongly Agree...Strongly Disagree
• Open response
- Explanation (not auto-graded)
- Text Match (auto-graded)
• Equations and Expressions
- y=
- f(x)=
- Expression
• Coordinate Points and Lists
- (x,y) numerical input
- Drop Point(s)
- List(s)
• Image
- Label
- Point on
• Chemistry
When you select a question type, a brief explanation of the question is
displayed at the bottom of the Choose Question Type dialog box.
Using Question in the Teacher Software 177
178 Using Question in the Teacher Software
When you open a question template, the cursor is in the Question text area.
Adding a Multiple Choice Question
This example shows how to add a custom multiple choice question. A custom
multiple choice question allows you to specify answers your students can
select. You can then select one or more responses as correct to help you when
grading or to help students check questions that are in Self-Check mode.
To add a custom multiple-choice question:
1. Click Insert > Question.
The Choose Question Type dialog box opens.
2. Click Custom Choice under the Multiple Choice heading.
3. Click Insert.
The Custom Choice template opens with the cursor in the Question text
area.
Two response options exist in the template by default.
4. Type the question.
• You can type any combination of text, math expressions, and chemical
equations in the Question Area and Suggested Response area.
• You can add an image in the question text area.
5. Press Enter to add another question line, or press Tab to go to the first
Correct Answer button.
6. Type the response options. Add an image, if desired.
7. Press Enter to add other response options, and add the response text.
• Press Delete to clear or delete a response.
• Press Backspace to delete an empty response line.
8. Click the option next to a suggested response, if desired.
Note: In Self-Check mode, the student can check their answer against the
suggested response.
Using Question in the Teacher Software 179
180 Using Question in the Teacher Software
9. Open the Configuration tool. Choose the response type, and click the
option that corresponds to the correct answer.
Adding an Open Response Question
An open response question prompts the student to write a response. An
explanation question type allows students to respond without any predefined
answers. A text match question type allows the teacher to specify an answer for
the student response. Text match questions are automatically graded; open
response questions are not automatically graded.
This example shows how to add an explanation question.
1. Click Insert > Question.
The Choose Question Type dialog box opens.
2. Click Explanation under Open Response.
3. Click Insert.
The Open Response template opens with the cursor in the Question text
area.
4. Type the question.
• You can type any combination of text, math expressions, and chemical
equations in the Question Area and Suggested Response area.
• You can add an image in the question text area.
• Press Tab or use the mouse pointer to navigate between fields.
5. Open the Configuration tool. Select the response type as Explanation or
Text Match, and type the correct answer.
• The Explanation response type allows students to give answers that
closely match your suggested response.
• The Text Match response type requires students to exactly match your
suggested response. Select the Ignore Case check box if
capitalization is not important.
• You can type any combination of text, math expressions, and chemical
equations in the Correct Answer area.
Adding an Equation Question
An equation question prompts the student to write an equation in the form of y=
or f(x)=, or to respond with a number or expression.
This example shows how to add a y=question.
1. Click Insert > Question.
The Choose Question Type dialog box opens.
2. Select y= under Equations and Expressions.
3. Click Insert.
The equation template opens with the cursor in the Question text area.
4. Type the question.
• You can type any combination of text, math expressions, and chemical
equations in the Question Area.
• You can add an image in the question text area.
• Press Tab or use the mouse pointer to navigate between fields.
5. Enter a suggested response, if desired.
6. Press Enter to add other response options, and add the response text.
Using Question in the Teacher Software 181
182 Using Question in the Teacher Software
• Press Delete to clear or delete a response.
• Press Backspace to delete an empty response line.
7. Open the Configuration tool to set the number of responses, the correct
answer, and whether the students should show their work. You can also
add a graph that will show in the Question area.
• The number of responses can range from 1 to 5.
• The Show your work option includes areas for the students to write
their starting point, their steps, and their final answer. The option to
show work is disabled if multiple responses are allowed.
• To add a graph in the Question area, check Include a Graph Preview.
The Question text area splits to show a graph on the right.
• When you are in the graph, the Graphs & Geometry toolbox is
available to allow you to add functions.
Note: Only the teacher can edit the graph. Students can only view and
zoom the graph.
• Click to add additional fields for multiple correct answers. For
example, you might want to accept both y=(x+1)(x+2) and y=(x+2)
(x+1) as correct answers.
• Select whether or not to accept equivalent responses as correct.
- If you
do not
check Accept equivalent responses as correct, the
student response is marked correct if it is an exact text match to
one of the accepted responses you entered.
- If you
do
check Accept equivalent responses as correct, the
student response is marked correct if it is equivalent to any
accepted response you entered. For example, if you typed x+2 as
the correct answer, and the student submits 2+x, this response is
equivalent to the accepted response and is automatically graded
as correct. Spaces, case differences, and extra parentheses are
ignored when the software evaluates student answers. For
example, y=2x+1 is evaluated the same as Y=2X+1.
Adding an Expression Question
An expression question prompts the student to respond with a number value or
an expression.
1. Click Insert > Question.
The Choose Question Type dialog box opens.
2. Click Expression under Equations and Expressions.
3. Click Insert.
The expression template opens with the cursor in the Question text area.
4. Type the question.
• You can type any combination of text, math expressions, and chemical
equations in the Question area.
• You can add an image in the Question area.
Using Question in the Teacher Software 183
184 Using Question in the Teacher Software
5. In the Expression type response, enter a starting expression, if desired.
The student sees the starting expression.
6. Enter a suggested response, if desired.
• If you set the response type as Number, the response fields are math
boxes and accept only number values such as 1/3.
• If you set the response type as Expression, the response fields are
expression boxes and accept only expression inputs such as 2(3+5).
7. Open the Configuration tool to set the response type as Number or
Expression, set whether or not the students should show their work, and
enter a correct answer. You can also set a tolerance for Number types, or
equivalent responses for Expression types.
• The Show your work option includes areas for the students to write
their starting point, their steps, and their final answer.
• In the Number type response, enter the accepted numerical response
and the tolerance. Student responses are marked correct if they fall
within the tolerance interval you specify.
• Specifying a tolerance of zero indicates you are looking for the exact
number answer. Not specifying a tolerance is the same as specifying
a tolerance of zero.
• Student answers are considered correct if they are numerically
equivalent to the correct answer. Spaces, case differences, and extra
parentheses are ignored when the software evaluates student
answers.
• In the Expression type response, you can add additional fields (up to
10) for multiple correct answers.
• In the Expression type response, click to open the Templates and
Symbols catalog that allows you to enter 2D math expressions.
• In the Expression type response, you can select whether or not to
accept equivalent responses as correct.
- If you
do not
check Accept equivalent responses as correct, the
student response is marked correct if it is an exact text match to
one of the accepted responses you entered.
- If you
do
check Accept equivalent responses as correct, the
student response is marked correct if it is equivalent to any
accepted response you entered. For example, if you typed x+2 as
the correct answer, and the student submits 2+x, this response is
equivalent to the accepted response and is automatically graded
as correct. Spaces, case differences, and extra parentheses are
ignored when the software evaluates student answers. For
example, x+2 is evaluated the same as X+2.
Important: Students can enter the starting expression you supply
and have this response automatically graded as correct. For
example, if you ask students to factor x2-7x+12 and stipulate the
correct answer is (x-3)(x-4), the student can submit a response of
x2-7x+12. This response is automatically graded as correct
because it is equivalent to the accepted answer. You must
manually mark this student response as incorrect in either the
Review or Portfolio Workspaces. See the chapters for those
workspaces for more information on marking and grading
responses.
Adding an (x,y) Numerical InputQuestion
An (x,y) numerical input question prompts the student to respond with a
coordinate.
Using Question in the Teacher Software 185
186 Using Question in the Teacher Software
1. Click Insert > Question.
The Choose Question Type dialog box opens.
2. Click (x,y) Numerical Input under Coordinate Points & Lists.
3. Click Insert.
The template opens with the cursor in the Question text area.
4. Type the question.
• You can type any combination of text, math expressions, and chemical
equations in the Question area.
• You can add an image in the Question area.
• Press Tab or use the mouse pointer to navigate between fields.
5. Enter a suggested response, if desired.
• The response fields are expression boxes and accept only expression
inputs.
6. Press Enter to add other response options (up to five), and add the
response text.
• Press Delete to clear or delete a response.
• Press Backspace to delete an empty response line.
7. Open the Configuration tool to set the number of points, add a graph
preview, enter a correct answer, and set equivalent responses as correct.
• The number of points can range from 1 to 5.
• Click to add additional fields for multiple correct answers. You can
type any combination of text, math expressions, and chemical
equations in the correct answer fields.
• Click to open the Templates and Symbols catalog that allows you
to enter 2D math expressions.
• To add a graph in the Question area, select Include a Graph Preview.
The Question text area splits to show a graph on the right and the
student prompt area on the left. To change the location of the graph,
click the down arrow next to Prompt Location and choose the desired
location for the graph in the student prompt area.
• When you are in the graph, the Graphs & Geometry tools are available
to allow you to add functions.
Note: Only the teacher can edit the graph. Students can only view and
zoom the graph.
• Select whether or not to accept equivalent responses as correct.
- If you
do not
check Accept equivalent responses as correct, the
student response is marked correct if it is an exact text match to
one of the accepted responses you entered.
Using Question in the Teacher Software 187
188 Using Question in the Teacher Software
- If you
do
check Accept equivalent responses as correct, the
student response is marked correct if it is equivalent to any
accepted response you entered. For example, if you typed
(-0.5,.75) as the correct answer, and the student submits (-.5,.75)
or (-1/2,3/4), and so forth, the student response is equivalent to
the accepted response and is automatically graded as correct.
Adding a Drop Points Question
A drop points question inserts a graph and prompts the student to drop points
on the graph in response to your question.
1. Click Insert > Question.
The Choose Question Type dialog box opens.
2. Select Drop Points under Coordinate Points & Lists.
3. Click Insert.
The drop points template opens with the cursor in the Question text area.
The graph is in the Student answer area.
• When you are in the graph, the Graphs & Geometry tools are available
to allow you to add functions.
Note: Only the teacher can edit the graph. Students can only view,
zoom, or place points on the graph.
4. Type the question.
• You can type any combination of text, math expressions, and chemical
equations in the Question area.
• You can add an image in the Question Area.
• Press Tab or use the mouse pointer to navigate between fields.
5. Open the Configuration tool to set the number of points, hide or show
coordinates, and enter a correct answer.
• The number of points can range from 1 to 5.
• Showing coordinates is turned off by default. Select the check box to
display coordinate labels on the graph.
• Click to add additional fields for multiple correct answers. You can
type any combination of text, math expressions, and chemical
equations in the correct answer fields.
• Click to open the Templates and Symbols catalog that allows you
to enter 2D math expressions.
Adding a Lists Question
A Lists question inserts a list and prompts students to enter data in the lists in
response to your question.
1. Click Insert > Question.
The Choose Question Type dialog box opens.
2. Select List(s) under the Coordinate Points & Lists question from the
Choose Question Type dialog box.
3. Click Insert.
The List template opens with the cursor in the Question text area.
Using Question in the Teacher Software 189
190 Using Question in the Teacher Software
4. Type the question.
• You can add columns or rows, change the name of the lists, and input
data in the lists, using the same functions allowed in the Lists &
Spreadsheet application.
5. Enter initial data in the lists, if desired.
6. Open the Configuration tool to set the number of lists for the student
responses.
• The number of lists can range from 1 to 5.
• Lists must have names. The default names are List1,List2, and so
forth.
Adding an Image: Label Question
An Image: Label question inserts an image. You can add blank fields to the
image and have students fill in the blanks in response to your question.
1. Click Insert > Question.
The Choose Question Type dialog box opens.
2. Select Label under Image.
3. Click Insert.
The Image: Label template opens with a blank background and one label.
This is where the image for the question is inserted.
4. Type the question.
• You can type any combination of text, math expressions, and chemical
equations in the Question area.
• Press Tab or use the mouse pointer to navigate between fields.
5. Insert an image in the bottom portion of the question template.
6. Open the Configuration tool to set the number of responses and to enter
answers for each label.
• The number of responses determines the number of labels on the
image. Each new response gives the label a unique identifier, such as
A, B, C, and so forth. Drag the labels to the desired location on the
image.
Note: If you set more than 26 responses, the labels are identified with
numbers, starting with 1. You can insert a maximum of 35 labels.
• In the answers area, click to open the Templates and Symbols
catalog that allows you to enter 2D math expressions.
• If the label text is too large to fit in the default label size, grab and drag
the borders of the label to resize it.
7. Type a suggested response in the labels, if desired. Select the Ignore case
check box if capitalization is not important.
• You can type any combination of text, math expressions, and chemical
equations in the response area.
• As you type the suggested response, a ghosted image of your answer
appears in the respective label on the image. If the suggested
response is too large for the default label size, grab and drag the
borders of the label to resize it.
Using Question in the Teacher Software 191
192 Using Question in the Teacher Software
Adding an Image: Point on Question
An Image: Point on question inserts an image. Add check boxes to the image
and have students place a check mark in the correct boxes in response to your
question.
1. Click Insert > Question.
The Choose Question Type dialog box opens.
2. Select Point on under Image.
3. Click Insert.
The Image: Point on template opens with a blank background and one
point. This is where the image for the question is inserted.
4. Type the question.
• You can type any combination of text, math expressions, and chemical
equations in the Question area.
• Press Tab or use the mouse pointer to navigate between fields.
5. Open the Configuration tool to set the response type, number of
responses, and correct answer.
• The Response Type makes the point a circle for Single Reponse and
changes to a square for Multiple Responses to indicate students can
select more than one box.
• The number of responses determines the number of points on the
image. Each new response gives the point a unique identifier, such as
A, B, C, and so forth. Drag the points to the desired location on the
image.
Note: If you set more than 26 responses, the points are identified with
numbers, starting with 1. You can insert a maximum of 35 points.
6. Click a point or points as a suggested response, if desired.
Adding a Chemistry Question
When you add a Chemistry question, students respond with a chemical formula
or equation.
1. Click Insert > Question.
The Choose Question Type dialog box opens.
2. Click Chemistry.
3. Click Insert.
The Chemistry template opens with the cursor in the Question text area.
4. Type the question.
• You can type any combination of text, math expressions, and chemical
equations in the Question area.
• You can add an image in the Question area.
5. Enter a suggested response, if desired.
6. Open the Configuration tool to enter a correct answer.
Click to add additional fields for multiple correct answers. You should
enter all possible answers. The software does not evaluate equivalency for
Chemistry answers.
Using Question in the Teacher Software 193
194
Responding to Questions
The teacher may send you several different question types. This section shows
you how to answer the different question types.
Understanding the Question Toolbar
When you open a document with a question, a toolbar is available with four
options. Access the toolbar using the following method.
▶In the Documents Toolbox, click .
Handheld: press b.
Tool name Tool function
Clear
Answers
Lets you clear the answers in the current question or in
the document.
Check
Answer
If the teacher enabled Self-Check mode for the
question, click here to view the correct answer.
Insert Lets you insert a math expression box or chemical
equation box in your answer.
Format Click this tool to format the selected text in your answer
as subscript or superscript. (The chemical equation box
uses its own formatting tool, so this Format tool does
not work in the chemical equation box.)
Types of Questions
There are several types of questions you may be asked. There may be
variations in a type, but how you answer the question is basically the same for
each type.
• Multiple Choice
- Custom
Responding to Questions 195
196 Responding to Questions
- ABCD
- True/False
- Yes/No
- Always/Sometimes/Never
- Agree/Disagree
- Strongly Agree...Strongly Disagree
• Open response
- Explanation (not auto-graded)
- Text Match (auto-graded)
• Equations and Expressions
- y=
- f(x)=
- Expression
• Coordinate Points and Lists
- (x,y) numerical input
- Drop Point(s)
- List(s)
• Image
- Label
- Point on
• Chemistry
Responding to Quick Poll Questions
When teachers send quick polls during class, the question opens as a new
document on top of any document you may currently have open. You can
access other applications to perform calculations, and check or clear answers
before submitting your answer to the question or quick poll.
Note: On TI-Nspire™ CX or TI-Nspire™ CX CAS handhelds, questions appear in
color if the teacher applied color when writing the question. Although you can
see color in the questions you receive, you cannot add color to the responses
you submit. If you are using a TI-Nspire™ or TI-Nspire™ CAS handheld,
questions are shown in black and white.
Accessing Other Applications
If the teacher gives permission, the Quick Poll tool allows you to temporarily
exit the question to perform calculations or access other documents to
determine the answer to the question. For example, you can access the
Scratchpad to perform a calculation, or you can access the Lists & Spreadsheet
application and copy data from there to a List question type. In a List question,
you can link to variables from the Vernier DataQuest™ or Lists & Spreadsheet
applications.
To access other applications while in the Quick Poll screen:
1. Open a new document.
Handheld: Press cto open the Home screen.
2. Choose an application.
Handheld: To return to the Quick Poll without accessing any documents,
choose C:Quick Poll.
3. When you are finished, click the Quick Poll icon.
When you respond to a poll, your response is immediately sent to the teacher’s
computer and teachers can track student responses in real time.
Showing Your Work
The teacher may request you to show work for your response. If so, the
response area has sections for you to write your starting point, your steps, and
the final answer.
Responding to Different Question Types
▶For Multiple Choice questions, press Tab to navigate to a response. Press
Enter to mark a response.
▶For Open Response questions, type a response.
▶For Equation questions, type a response. If a graph is included in a
question, the graph updates when you press Enter. Any functions entered
show up on the graph, and the cursor remains in the answer box. You
cannot manipulate the graph itself.
▶For Expression questions, type a response. If the response type is Number,
your response must be in the form of a number. If the response type is
Expression, your response must be in the form of an expression. For
example, x+1.
Responding to Questions 197
198 Responding to Questions
▶For Coordinate Points: (x,y) questions, type an answer in the x-field box,
and press Tab to move to the y-field box. Type an answer.
If a graph is included with the question, the graph is updated when you
enter a function and press Enter.
You can access the Window and Zoom functions while you are working on
the graph.
▶For Coordinate Points: Drop Points questions, press Tab to move the cursor
to a point on the graph. Press Enter to drop a point at that location.
To delete a point, press Ctrl + Z to undo the action.
▶For Lists questions, press Tab if necessary to move the cursor to the first
cell of the list. Type an answer, and press Tab to move to the next cell. Type
an answer.
To link a column to an existing variable, select the column and then click
var. Click Link To, and then click the variable you want to link to.
The behavior in a Lists question closely matches the behavior of the Lists
& Spreadsheet application, with the following exceptions. In a Lists
question, you cannot:
• Add, insert, or delete columns.
• Change the header row.
• Enter formulas.
• Switch to Table.
• Create plots.
▶For Chemistry questions, type a response.
▶For Image: Label questions, press Tab to move the cursor to a label on the
image. Type a response in the label field.
▶For Image: Point on questions, press Tab to move the cursor to a point on
the image. Press Enter to mark a response.
Checking Answers
If the teacher enables self-check on the question, the Check Answer option is
available.
1. Click .
Handheld: Press b.
2. Click Check Answer.
Clearing Answers
After you answer a quick poll, you may decide you want to change the answer
before you submit it.
▶Click Menu > Clear Answers > Current Question or Document.
•Current Question clears answers for the active question.
•Document clears answers for all questions contained in the active
document.
—or—
If you answered the question, you still have time to clear the answer before you
submit it to your teacher.
▶Click Clear Answer to clear your answer and try again.
Handheld: Press ~and choose Clear Answer.
Submitting Responses
To send a final answer to the teacher:
▶Click Submit Response.
Handheld: Press ~and choose Submit.
The response is sent to the teacher and the last screen you used is displayed.
Your response appears on the teacher’s computer. Your teacher may have set
the poll to allow you to submit more than one answer. If so, you can continue to
respond to the poll and submit answers until the teacher stops the poll.
Responding to Questions 199
200
Calculator Application
The Calculator application lets you:
• Enter and evaluate math expressions
• Define variables, functions, and programs that become available to any
TI-Nspire™ application—such as the Graphs application—residing in the
same problem.
• Define library objects, such as variables, functions, and programs, which
are accessible from any problem of any document. For information on
creating library objects, see
Libraries
.
Adding a Calculator Page
▶To start a new document with a blank Calculator page:
From the main File menu, click New Document, and then click Add
Calculator.
Handheld: Press c, and select Calculator .
▶To add a Calculator page in the current problem of an existing document:
From the toolbar, click Insert > Calculator.
Handheld: Press ~and select Insert > Calculator.
ÀCalculator menu. This menu is available anytime you are in the Calculator
work area using the Normal view mode. The menu in this screen snapshot
may not exactly match the menu on your screen.
ÁCalculator work area
• Enter a math expression on the entry line, and then press Enter to
evaluate the expression.
Calculator Application 201
202 Calculator Application
• Expressions are displayed in standard mathematical notation as you
enter them.
• Entered expressions and results show in the Calculator history.
ÂExample of Calculator variables used in another application.
Entering and Evaluating Math Expressions
Entering Simple Math Expressions
Note: To enter a negative number on the handheld, press v. To enter a
negative number on a computer keyboard, press the hyphen key (-).
Suppose you want to evaluate
1. Select the entry line in the Calculator work area.
2. Type 2^8 to begin the expression.
3. Press ►to return the cursor to the baseline.
4. Complete the expression:
Type *43/12.
Handheld: Type r43 p12.
5. Press Enter to evaluate the expression.
The expression is displayed in standard mathematical notation, and the
result is displayed on the right side of the Calculator.
Note: If a result does not fit on the same line with the expression, it is displayed
on the next line.
Controlling the Form of a Result
You might expect to see a decimal result instead of 2752⁄3 in the preceding
example. A close decimal equivalent is 917.33333..., but that’s only an
approximation.
By default, Calculator retains the more precise form: 2752⁄3. Any result that is
not a whole number is shown in a fractional or (CAS) symbolic form. This
reduces rounding errors that could be introduced by intermediate results in
chained calculations.
You can force a decimal approximation in a result:
• By pressing shortcut keys.
Windows®: Press Ctrl +Enter to evaluate the expression.
Mac®: Press “+Enter to evaluate the expression.
Handheld: Press / · instead of ·to evaluate the expression.
Pressing
/ ·
forces the approximate result.
• By including a decimal in the expression (for example, 43. instead of 43).
• By wrapping the expression in the approx() function.
• By changing the document’s Auto or Approximate mode setting to
Approximate.
From the File menu, click Settings >Document Settings.
Handheld: Press ~to display the File menu.
Note that this method forces all results in all of the document’s problems to
approximate.
Calculator Application 203
204 Calculator Application
Inserting Items from the Catalog
You can use the Catalog to insert system functions and commands, symbols,
and expression templates into the Calculator entry line.
1. Click the Utilities tab, and then click to open the Catalog.
Handheld: Press k1.
Note: Some functions have a wizard that prompts you for each argument.
Those functions are shown with an indicator. To receive the prompts,
select Wizards On.
2. If the item you are inserting is visible in the list, select it and press Enter to
insert it.
3. If the item is not visible:
a) Click inside the list of functions, and then press a letter key to jump to
the entries that begin with that letter.
b) Press ▲or▼as necessary to highlight the item you are inserting.
Help, such as syntax information or a short description of the selected
item, appears at the bottom of the Catalog.
c) Press Enter to insert the item into the entry line.
Using an Expression Template
The Calculator has templates for entering matrices, piecewise functions,
systems of equations, integrals, derivatives, products, and other math
expressions.
For example, suppose you want to evaluate
1. On the Utilities tab, click to open the templates.
Handheld: Press t.
2. Click to insert the algebraic sum template.
The template appears on the entry line with small blocks representing
elements that you can enter. A cursor appears next to one of the elements
to show that you can type a value for that element.
3. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to each element’s position, and
type a value or expression for each element.
4. Press Enter to evaluate the expression.
Calculator Application 205
206 Calculator Application
Creating Matrices
1. On the Utilities tab, click to open the templates.
Handheld: Press t.
2. Click .
The Create a Matrix dialog box opens.
3. Type the Number of rows.
4. Type the Number of columns, and then click OK.
Calculator opens a template with spaces for the rows and columns.
Note: If you create a matrix with a large number of rows and columns, it
may take a few moments to appear.
5. Type the matrix values into the template, and then press Enter to define the
matrix.
Inserting a Row or Column into a Matrix
▶To insert a new row, hold down Alt and press Enter.
▶To insert a new column, hold down Shift and press Enter.
Handheld:
▶To insert a new row, press @.
▶To insert a new column, press Shift+Enter.
Inserting Expressions Using a Wizard
You can use a wizard to simplify entering some expressions. The wizard
contains labeled boxes to help you enter the arguments in the expression.
For example, suppose you want to fit a y = mx + b linear regression model to
the following two lists:
{1,2,3,4,5}
{5,8,11,14,17}
1. On the Utilities tab, click to open the Catalog.
Handheld: Press k1.
2. Click an entry in the Catalog, and then press Lto jump to the entries that
begin with “L.”
3. Press ▼as necessary to highlight LinRegMx.
4. Select the Wizards On option, if it is not already selected:
Handheld: Press Tab Tab to highlight Wizards On, press Enter to change
the setting, and then press Tab Tab to highlight LinRegMx again.
5. Press Enter.
A wizard opens, giving you a labeled box to type each argument.
6. Type {1,2,3,4,5} as X List.
7. Press Tab to move to the Y List box.
8. Type {5,8,11,14,17} as Y List.
Calculator Application 207
208 Calculator Application
9. If you want to store the regression equation in a specific variable, press
Tab, and then replace Save RegEqn To with the name of the variable.
10. Click OK to close the wizard and insert the expression into the entry line.
Calculator inserts the expression and adds statements to copy the
regression equation and show the variable stat.results, which will contain
the results.
LinRegMx {1,2,3,4,5},{5,8,11,14,17},1: CopyVar stat.RegEqn,f2: stat.results
Calculator then shows the stat.results variables.
Note: You can copy values from the stat.results variables and paste them
into the entry line.
Creating a Piecewise Function
1. Begin the function definition. For example, type the following expression:
Define f(x,y)=
2. On the Utilities tab, click to open the templates.
Handheld: Press t.
3. Click .
The Create Piecewise Function dialog box opens.
4. Type the Number of Function Pieces, and click OK.
Calculator opens a template with spaces for the pieces.
5. Type the expressions into the template, and press Enter to define the
function.
6. Enter an expression to evaluate or graph the function. For example, type
the expression f(1,2) on the Calculator entry line.
Creating a System of Equations
1. On the Utilities tab, click to open the templates.
Handheld: Press t.
2. Click .
The Create a System of Equations dialog box opens.
3. Type the Number of Equations, and click OK.
Calculator opens a template with spaces for the equations.
4. Type the equations into the template, and press Enter to define the system
of equations.
CAS: Working with Measurement Units
A list of pre-defined constants and measurement units is available in the
Catalog. You can also create your own units.
Note: If you know a unit’s name, you can type the unit directly. For example,
you can type _qt to specify quarts. To type the underscore symbol on the
handheld, press / _.
Calculator Application 209
210 Calculator Application
CAS: Converting Between Measurement Units
You can convert a value between any two units within the same category (such
as length).
Example: Using the Catalog, convert 12 meters to feet. The desired expression
is 12•_m►_ft.
1. Type 12 on the entry line.
2. On the Utilities tab, click to show the unit conversions.
Handheld: Press k3.
3. Click the Length category to expand the list of pre-defined length units.
Handheld: Scroll to the Length category, and press Enter.
4. Scroll to meter.
Handheld: Scroll to _m (noting the meter hint in the Help window).
5. Press Enter to paste _m to the entry line.
6. Click the Conversion Operator (►) at the top of the Units list, and press
Enter to paste it to the entry line.
7. Select _ft from the Length category, and press Enter.
8. Press Enter to evaluate the expression.
CAS: Creating a User-defined Unit
As with the pre-defined units, user-defined unit names must begin with an
underscore symbol.
Example: Using the pre-defined units _ft and _min, define a unit named _fpm
that lets you enter velocity values in feet per minute and convert velocity results
to feet per minute.
Now you can use the new velocity unit _fpm.
Working with Variables
When you first store a value in a variable, you give the variable a name.
• If the variable does not already exist, Calculator creates it.
• If the variable already exists, Calculator updates it.
Variables within a problem are shared by TI-Nspire™ applications. For
example, you can create a variable in Calculator and then use or modify it in
Graphs&Geometry or Lists&Spreadsheet within the same problem.
For more information, see
Using Variables
.
Calculator Application 211
212 Calculator Application
Creating User-defined Functions and Programs
You can use the Define command to create your own functions and programs.
You can create them in the Calculator application or in the Program Editor and
then use them in other TI-Nspire™ applications.
For more information, see
Overview of the Program Editor
and
Libraries
.
Defining a Single-line Function
Suppose you want to define a function named cube() that calculates the cube
of a number or variable.
1. On the Calculator entry line, type Define cube(x)=x^3 and press
Enter.
The message “Done” confirms that the function has been defined.
2. Type cube(2) and press Enter to test the function.
Defining a Multiple-line Function Using Templates
You can define a function consisting of multiple statements entered on
separate lines. A multiple-line function may be easier to read than one with
multiple statements separated by colons.
Note: You can create multiple-line functions only by using the Define
command. You cannot use the := or →operators to create multiple-line
definitions. The Func...EndFunc template serves as a container for the
statements.
As an example, define a function named g(x,y)that compares two arguments x
and y. If argument x> argument y, the function should return the value of x.
Otherwise, it should return the value of y.
1. On the Calculator entry line, type Define g(x,y)=. Do not press Enter
yet.
2. Insert the Func...EndFunc template.
From the Functions&Programs menu, select Func...EndFunc.
Calculator inserts the template.
3. Insert the If...Then...Else...EndIf template.
From the Functions&Programs menu, select Control, and then select
If...Then...Else...EndIf.
Calculator inserts the template.
4. Type the remaining parts of the function, using the arrow keys to move the
cursor from line to line.
5. Press Enter to complete the definition.
6. Evaluate g(3,-7) to test the function.
Defining a Multiple-line Function Manually
▶To start each new line without completing the function definition, hold down
Alt and press Enter
Handheld: Press @instead of pressing Enter.
Calculator Application 213
214 Calculator Application
As an example, define a function sumIntegers(x)that calculates the cumulative
sum of integers from 1 through x.
1. On the Calculator entry line, type Define sumIntegers(x)=. Do not
press Enter yet.
2. Insert the Func...EndFunc template.
From the Functions&Programs menu, select Func...EndFunc.
Calculator inserts the template.
3. Type the following lines, pressing @or Alt+Enter at the end of each line.
4. After typing Return tmpsum, press Enter to complete the definition.
5. Evaluate sumIntegers(5) to test the function.
Defining a Program
Defining a program is similar to defining a multiple-line function. The
Prgm...EndPrgm template serves as a container for the program statements.
As an example, create a program named g(x,y)that compares two arguments.
Based on the comparison, the program should show the text “x>y” or “x≤y”
(showing the values of xand yin the text).
1. On the Calculator entry line, type Define prog1(x,y)=. Do not press
Enter yet.
2. Insert the Prgm...EndPrgm template.
From the Functions&Programs menu, select Prgm...EndPrgm.
3. Insert the If...Then...Else...EndIf template.
From the Functions&Programs menu, select Control, and then select
If...Then...Else...EndIf.
4. Type the remaining parts of the function, using the arrow keys to move the
cursor from line to line. Use the Symbol Palette to select the "≤“symbol.
5. Press Enter to complete the definition.
6. Execute prog1(3,-7)to test the program.
Calculator Application 215
216 Calculator Application
Recalling a Function or Program Definition
You might want to reuse or modify a function or program that you have defined.
1. Show the list of defined functions.
From the Actions menu, select Recall Definition.
2. Select the name from the list.
The definition (for example, Define f(x)=1/x+3) is pasted into the
entry line for editing.
Editing Calculator Expressions
Although you cannot edit an expression in the Calculator history, you can copy
all or part of an expression from the history and paste it to the entry line. You
can then edit the entry line.
Positioning the Cursor in an Expression
▶Press Tab,◄,►,▲, or ▼to move the cursor through the expression. The
cursor moves to the closest valid position in the direction that you press.
Note: An expression template may force the cursor to move through its
parameters, even though some parameters may not be exactly in the path of
the cursor movement. For example, moving upward from the main argument of
an integral always moves the cursor to the top limit.
Inserting into an Expression in the Entry Line
1. Position the cursor at the point where you want to insert additional
elements.
2. Type the elements that you want to insert.
Note: When you insert an open parenthesis, Calculator adds a temporary close
parenthesis, displayed in gray. You can override the temporary parenthesis by
typing the same parenthesis manually or by entering something past the
temporary parenthesis (thereby implicitly validating its position in the
expression). After you override the temporary gray parenthesis, it is replaced
with a black parenthesis.
Selecting Part of an Expression
1. Position the cursor at the starting point in the expression.
Handheld: Press ◄,►,▲, or ▼to move the cursor.
2. Press and hold Shift, and then press ◄,►,▲, or ▼to select.
Deleting all or part of an expression on the entry line
1. Select the part of the expression to delete.
2. Press Del.
Financial Calculations
Several TI-Nspire™ functions provide financial calculations, such as time value
of money, amortization calculations, and return on investment calculations.
The Calculator application also includes a Finance Solver. It lets you
dynamically solve several types of problems, such as loans and investments.
Using the Finance Solver
1. Open the Finance Solver.
From the Finance menu, click Finance Solver.
The Finance Solver displays its default values (or previous values, if you
have already used the solver in the current problem).
2. Enter each known value, using Tab to cycle through the items.
• The help information at the bottom of the Finance Solver describes
each item.
• You might need to temporarily skip the value that you want to
calculate.
Calculator Application 217
218 Calculator Application
• Make sure to set PpY,CpY, and PmtAt to the correct settings (12, 12,
and END in this example).
3. Press Tab as necessary to select the item that you want to calculate, and
then press Enter.
The Finance Solver calculates the value and stores all the values in “tvm.”
variables, such as tvm.n and tvm.pmt. These variables are accessible to
all TI-Nspire™ applications within the same problem.
Finance Functions Included
In addition to the Finance Solver, TI-Nspire™ built-in finance functions include:
• TVM functions for calculating future value, present value, number of
payments, interest rate, and payment amount.
• Amortization information such as amortization tables, balance, sum of
interest payments, and sum of principal payments.
• Net present value, internal rate of return, and modified rate of return.
• Conversions between nominal and effective interest rates, and calculation
of days between dates.
Notes:
• Finance functions do not automatically store their argument values or
results to the TVM variables.
• For a complete list of TI-Nspire™ functions, see the
Reference Guide
.
Working with the Calculator History
As you enter and evaluate expressions in the Calculator application, each
entry/result pair is saved in the Calculator history. The history gives you a way
to review your calculations, repeat a set of calculations, and copy expressions
for reuse in other pages or documents.
Viewing the Calculator History
Note: You may notice a processing slowdown when the history contains a
large number of entries.
▶Press ▲or ▼to scroll through the history.
Copying a Calculator History Item to the Entry Line
You can quickly copy an expression, subexpression, or result from the history
into the entry line.
1. Press ▲or ▼to move through the history and select the item that you
want to copy.
—or—
Select part of the expression or result by using Shift in combination with
the arrow keys.
Note: The float setting for the current document may limit the number of
decimal places displayed in a result. To capture the result in its full
Calculator Application 219
220 Calculator Application
precision, select it either by scrolling with the up and down arrow keys or
by triple-clicking it.
2. Press Enter to copy the selection and insert it into the entry line.
Copying a History Item to Another Application
1. Press ▲or ▼to move through the history and select the item that you
want to copy.
2. Optionally, select part of the expression or result by pressing Shift in
combination with the arrow keys.
3. Use the standard key shortcut for copying a selection.
Windows®: Press Ctrl+C.
Mac®: Press “+C.
Handheld: Press / C.
4. Place the cursor at the location where you want the copy.
5. Paste the copy.
Windows®: Press Ctrl+V.
Mac®: Press “+V.
Handheld: Press / V.
Note: If you copy an expression that uses variables into a different problem, the
values of those variables are not copied. You must define the variables in the
problem where you paste the expression.
Deleting an Expression from the History
When you delete an expression, all variables and functions defined in the
expression retain their current values.
1. Drag or use the arrow keys to select the expression.
Handheld: Use the arrow keys.
2. Press Del.
The expression and its result are removed.
Clearing the Calculator History
When you clear the history, all variables and functions defined in the history
retain their current values. If you clear the history by mistake, use the undo
feature.
▶From the Actions menu, select Clear History.
All expressions and results are removed from the history.
Calculator Application 221
222
Using Variables
A variable is a defined value that can be used multiple times in a problem. You
can define a value or function as a variable within each application. Within a
problem, variables are shared by TI-Nspire™applications. For example, you
can create a variable in Calculator, and then use or modify it in Graphs &
Geometry or Lists & Spreadsheet within the same problem.
Each variable has a name and a definition and the definition can be changed.
When you change the definition, all occurrences of the variable in the problem
are updated to use the new definition. In the TI-Nspire™ software, a variable
has four attributes:
• Name - User-defined name assigned when the variable is created.
• Location - Variables are stored in memory.
• Value - Number, text, mathematical expression, or function.
• Type - Type of data that can be stored as a variable.
Note: Variables created with the Local command within a user-defined function
or program are not accessible outside that function or program.
Linking Values on Pages
Values and functions created or defined in one application can interact with
other applications (within the same problem) to share data.
When using linked items, keep in mind:
• Values can be linked between applications on one page or between
different pages of the same problem.
• All applications are linked to the same data.
• If the linked value is changed in the original application, the change is
reflected in all linked usages.
Defining a variable is the first step in linking values.
Creating Variables
Any portion or attribute of an object or function created within an application
can be stored as a variable. Examples of attributes that can become variables
are the area of a rectangle, the radius of a circle, the value contained in a
Using Variables 223
224 Using Variables
spreadsheet cell or the contents of a row or column, or a function expression.
When you create a variable, it is stored in memory.
Types of Variables
You can store the following data types as variables:
Data type Examples
Expression
2.54 1.25E6 2pxmin/102+3i (xN2)2
List {2, 4, 6, 8} {1, 1, 2} {"red", "blue", "green"}
Matrix
This can be entered as: [1,2,3;3,6,9]
Character string “Hello”“xmin/10”“The answer is:”
Function, program myfunc(arg )ellipse(x, y, r1, r2 )
Measurement area, perimeter, length, slope, angle
When you click or press hon a handheld to open the list of stored
variables, a symbol indicates the type.
Creating a Variable from a Calculator Value
This example shows how to create a variable using a handheld. Complete the
following steps to create a variable named num and store the result of the
expression 5+83in that variable.
1. On the Calculator entry line, type the expression 5+8^3.
2. Press ¢to expand the cursor to the baseline.
3. Press / h and then type the variable name num.
This means: Calculate 5+83and store the result as a variable named num.
4. Press ·.
Calculator creates the variable num and stores the result there.
Creating a Variable in the Computer Software
When creating a variable in the computer software, use the following
conventions. As alternatives to using &(store), you can use “:=” or the Define
command. All of the following statements are equivalent.
5+83&num
num := 5+83
Define num=5+83
Checking a Variable’s Value
You can check the value of an existing variable by entering its name on the
Calculator entry line. When you type the name of a stored variable, it appears
in bold type.
▶On the Calculator entry line, type the variable name num and press ·.
The value most recently stored in num is displayed as the result.
Automatically Creating Variables in Graphs & Geometry
In the Graphs and Geometry applications, functions defined on the entry line
are automatically stored as variables.
Using Variables 225
226 Using Variables
In this example, f1(x)=x3is a variable definition, which allows it to be displayed
in other applications including a table in the Lists & Spreadsheet application.
Creating a Variable from a Graphs & Geometry Value
1. Click the value to store as a variable.
2. Click .
Handheld: Press h.
The Variables options are displayed with Store Var highlighted.
3. Press ·. VAR := appears before the selected value. This is the default
name.
4. Replace the default name VAR with the variable name you want to give
the value.
5. When the variable name is typed, press ·.
The value is saved to that variable name, and the stored value or its name
appears in bold text to indicate it is a stored value.
Note: You can also share a Graphs & Geometry axis end value with other
applications. If necessary, click Actions,Show/Hide Axes End Values to display
the end values on the horizontal and vertical axes. Click the number for an end
value to highlight it in the entry field. Name the variable and store it for use with
other applications by using any method described in Step 2.
Automatically Creating Variables in Lists & Spreadsheet
Naming a list at the top of a Lists & Spreadsheet column automatically stores
that value as a list variable. This variable can be used in other applications
including Data & Statistics.
Creating a Variable from a Lists & Spreadsheet Cell Value
You can share a cell value with other applications. When defining or referring
to a shared cell in Lists & Spreadsheet, precede the name with an apostrophe
(‘).
1. Click the cell that you want to share.
2. Click to open the Variables menu.
Handheld: Press h.
Using Variables 227
228 Using Variables
3. Click Store Var.
A formula is inserted into the cell with var as a placeholder for a variable
name.
4. Replace the letters “var” with a name for the variable, and press ·.
The value is now available as a variable to other applications within the
same problem.
Note: If a variable with the name you specified already exists in the current
problem space, Lists & Spreadsheet displays an error message.
Using (Linking) Variables
Sharing, or linking, the variables you create is a powerful tool for math
exploration. The display of linked variables is automatically updated when the
variable’s value changes.
Linking to Shared Variables
To use a stored variable:
1. Display the page and select the location or object to which you want to link
a variable.
2. Select the Variables tool h.
The Variables options are displayed. The software knows which types of
variables will work in the location or with the object selected and will only
display those variables.
3. Use 9and :to scroll the list.
—or—
Type part of the variable name.
As you type, the system displays a list of variables that begin with the
letters you typed. Typing part of the name enables you to locate a variable
more quickly if the list is long.
4. When you locate and highlight the name of the variable you want to use,
click the name.
—or—
Press ·.
The selected variable value is linked.
Linking a Lists & Spreadsheet Cell to a Variable
When you link a cell to a variable, Lists & Spreadsheet keeps the cell value
updated to reflect the current value of the variable. The variable can be any
variable in the current problem and can be defined in Graphs & Geometry,
Calculator, or any instance of Lists & Spreadsheet.
Note: Do not link to a system variable. Doing so could prevent the variable from
being updated by the system. System variables include ans,StatMatrix, and
statistics results (such as RegEqn,dfError, and Resid).
1. Click the cell that you want to link to the variable.
2. Open the VarLink menu:
- Click , and then click Cell.
- Handheld: Press h.
Using Variables 229
230 Using Variables
The VarLink menu is displayed.
3. Under Link To, scroll to the name of the variable and click it.
The cell shows the value of the variable.
Using a Variable in a Calculation
After storing a value in a variable, you can use the variable name in an
expression as a substitute for the stored value.
1. Enter the expression:
- Type 4*25*num^2 on the entry line, and press Enter.
- Handheld: Type 4r25 rnum^2 on the entry line, and press ·.
Calculator substitutes 517, the value currently assigned to num, and
evaluates the expression.
2. Enter the expression:
- Type 4*25*nonum^2, and press Enter.
- Handheld: Type 4r25 rnonum^2 on the entry line, and press
·.
CAS: Because the variable nonum has not been defined, it is treated
algebraically in the result.
Because the variable nonum has not been defined, the expression returns
an error message.
Entering Multiple Statements on the Entry Line
To enter several statements on a single line, separate them with a colon (“:”).
Only the result of the last expression is shown.
Setting Variable Values with a Slider
In the Graphs and Geometry applications, a slider control lets you adjust or
animate the assignment of values for a numeric variable. Use a slider to
represent multiple variable values in a continuous range.
1. From the Document Tools menu, click Actions > Insert Slider.
Handheld: Press b 1 Ato insert a slider.
The slider is displayed on the work area. If you need to adjust or animate
value selection for more than one variable, you can repeat this step and
insert multiple sliders.
Note: You can access the context menu to Pin a slider to its location and
prevent unintentional movement.
2. Click the slider to activate it and press eto move between the slider
scale and the variable’s value.
3. Use ¡and ¢to move the slider on the scale.
4. Press Enter to select the value.
Access the context menu and choose Settings to view or change the default
slider settings.
Naming Variables
Variable and function names that you create must meet the following naming
rules.
Note: In the unlikely event that you create a variable with the same name as
one used for statistical analysis or by the Finance Solver, an error condition
Using Variables 231
232 Using Variables
could occur. If you begin entering a variable name that is already in use in the
current problem, the software shows the entry in bold to let you know.
• Variable names must be in one of the forms xxx or xxx.yyy. The xxx part
can have 1 to 16 characters. The yyy part, if used, can have 1 to 15
characters. If you use the xxx.yyy form, both xxx and yyy are required; you
cannot start or end a variable name with a period “.”.
• Characters can consist of letters, digits, and the underscore character (_).
Letters can be U.S. or Greek letters (but not Πor p), accented letters, and
international letters.
• Do not use cor nfrom the symbol palette to construct a variable name
such as c1 or n12. These may appear to be letters, but they are treated
internally as special symbols.
• You can use uppercase or lowercase letters. The names AB22,Ab22,
aB22, and ab22 all refer to the same variable.
• You cannot use a digit as the first character of xxx or yyy.
• You can use digits 0 through 9, U.S. letters, a - z, Latin and Greek letters
(but not p) as subscripts (for example, a2,qa, or h2o). To enter a subscript
while typing a variable name, select in the Math Templates or on the
formatting toolbar.
• Do not use spaces.
• If you want a variable to be treated as a complex number, use an
underscore as the last character of the name.
• CAS: If you want a variable to be treated as a type of unit (such as _m or _
ft), use an underscore as the first character of the name. You cannot use
subsequent underscores in the name.
• You cannot use an underscore as the first character of the name.
• You cannot use a preassigned variable, function, or command name, such
as Ans,min, or tan.
Note: For more information about TI-Nspire™ functions, see the
Reference
Guide
.
• Library documents and library objects are subject to additional naming
restrictions. For more information, see
Libraries
.
Here are some examples:
Variable names Valid?
Myvar, my.var Yes
My var, list 1 No. Contains a space.
a, b, b12, b12, c, d Yes. Note that variables
b12
and
b
12 are distinct.
Log, Ans No. Preassigned to a system function or variable.
Log1, list1.a, list1.b Yes
3rdTotal, list1.1 No. xxx or yyy starts with a digit.
Locking and Unlocking Variables
Locking lets you protect variables from modification or deletion. Locking
prevents unintended changes to a variable.
Time and altitude lists can be locked to
ensure problem fidelity.
Reference function
f1
can be locked to
prevent unintended change.
Variables you Cannot Lock
• System variable Ans
•stat. and tvm. variable groups
Using Variables 233
234 Using Variables
Important Information About Locked Variables
• To lock variables, use the Lock command.
• To modify or delete a locked variable, you must first unlock the item.
• Locked variables display a lock icon on the variable menu list.
• The Lock command clears the Redo/Undo history when applied to
unlocked variables.
Examples of Locking
Lock a,b,c Locks variables a,b, and cfrom the Calculator
application.
Lock mystats.Locks all members of variable group mystats.
UnLock func2 Unlocks variable func2.
lm:=getLockInfo
(var2)
Retrieves the current lock status of var2 and assigns
that value to lm in the Calculator application.
For more information, see the
Reference Guide
.
Updating a Variable
If you want to update a variable with the result of a calculation, you must store
the result explicitly.
Entry Result Comment
a := 2 2
a38 Result not stored in variable
a.
a2
a := a38Variable aupdated with
result.
a8
a2&a64 Variable aupdated with
result.
Entry Result Comment
a64
Reusing the Last Answer
Each instance of Calculator automatically stores the last calculated result as a
variable named Ans. You can use Ans to create a chain of calculations.
Note: Do not link to Ans or any system variable. Doing so could prevent the
variable from being updated by the system. System variables include statistics
results (such as Stat.RegEqn,Stat.dfError, and Stat.Resid) and Finance Solver
variables (such as tvm.n,tvm.pmt, and tvm.fv).
As an example of using Ans, calculate the area of a garden plot that is 1.7
meters by 4.2 meters. Then use the area to calculate the yield per square meter
if the plot produces a total of 147 tomatoes.
1. Calculate the area:
- On the Calculator entry line, type1.7*4.2,and press Enter.
- Handheld: On the Calculator entry line, type1.7 r4.2,and press
·.
2. Reuse the last answer to calculate the yield per square meter:
- Type147/ans,and press Enter to find the yield.
- Handheld: Type147 pans,and press ·to find the yield.
3. As a second example, calculate and then add 2*log(45).
- Type3.76/(-7.9+sqrt(5)),and press Enter.
- Handheld: Type3.76 p(v7.9+sqrt(5)),and press ·.
4. Reuse the last answer:
Using Variables 235
236 Using Variables
- Typeans+2*log(45), and press Enter.
- Handheld: Typeans+2 rlog(45), and press ·.
Temporarily Substituting a Value for a Variable
Use the “|” (such that) operator to assign a value to a variable for just a single
execution of the expression.
Removing a Linked Variable
1. Select the linked variable.
2. Press h.
The Variables options are displayed.
3. Select Unlink.
The link is removed from the value, and the value is displayed without any
bold formatting.
Graphs Application
The Graphs application lets you:
• Graph and explore functions and other relations, such as inequalities,
parametrics, polars, sequences, differential equation solutions, and conics.
• Animate points on objects or graphs and explore their behavior.
• Link to data created by other applications.
Adding a Graphs Page
▶To start a new document with a blank Graphs page:
From the main File menu, click New Document, and then click Add Graphs.
Handheld: Press c, and select Graphs .
▶To add a Graphs page in the current problem of an existing document:
From the toolbar, click Insert > Graphs.
Handheld: Press ~and select Insert > Graphs.
Graphs &Geometry menu. Contains tools for defining, viewing, and
investigating relations.
Entry line. Lets you define the relations that you want to graph. The default
graph type is Function, so the form f1(x)= is displayed initially. You can
define multiple relations for each of several graph types.
Graphs Work Area
• Shows graphs of relations that you define on the entry line.
• Shows points, lines, and shapes that you create with geometry tools.
Graphs Application 237
238 Graphs Application
• Drag the area to pan (affects only those objects created in the Graphs
application).
What You Must Know
Changing the Graphs and Geometry Settings
1. From the Settings menu, select Settings.
2. Select the settings that you want to use.
-Display Digits. Sets the display format for numbers as Floating or Fixed
decimal.
-Graphing Angle. Sets angle unit for the Graphs application only. To
use the current Document Settings, set this to Auto.
-Geometry Angle. Sets angle unit for the Geometry application only. To
use the current Document Settings, set this to Auto.
-Automatically hide plot labels. In the Graphs application, hides the
label that normally appears next to a graphed relation.
-Show axis end values. Applies only in the Graphs application.
-Show tool tips for function manipulation. Applies only in the Graphs
application.
-Automatically find points of interest. In the Graphs application, shows
zeros, minima, and maxima while tracing function graphs.
- Click Restore to restore all settings to their factory defaults.
- Click Make Default to apply the current settings to the open document
and save them as the default for new Graphs and Geometry
documents.
Using Context Menus
Context menus provide quick access to commonly used commands and tools
that apply to a specific object. For example, you can use a context menu to
change an object's line color or to group a set of selected objects.
▶Display the context menu for an object in one of the following ways.
- Windows®: Right-click the object.
- Mac®: Hold “and click the object.
- Handheld: Move the pointer to the object, and then press / b.
Finding Hidden Objects in the Graphs or Geometry Application
You can hide and show individual graphs, geometric objects, text, labels,
measurements, and axis end-values.
To temporarily view hidden graphs or objects or to restore them as shown
objects:
1. From the Actions menu, select Hide/Show.
The Hide/Show tool appears in the work area, and all hidden objects
become visible in dimmed colors.
2. Click a graph or object to toggle its Hide/Show state.
3. To apply the changes and close the Hide/Show tool, press ESC.
Inserting a Background Image
You can insert an image as a background for a GraphsorGeometry page. The
file format of the image can be .bmp, .jpg, or .png.
1. From the Insert menu, click Image.
2. Navigate to the image you want to insert, select it, and then click Open.
For information on moving, resizing, and deleting a background image, see
Working with Images in the Software
.
Adding Text to the Graphs or Geometry Work Area
1. From the Actions menu, select Text.
The Text tool appears in the work area.
2. Click the location for the text.
3. Type the text in the box that appears, and then press Enter.
4. To close the Text tool, press ESC.
Graphs Application 239
240 Graphs Application
5. To edit the text, double-click it.
Deleting a Relation and its Graph
1. Select the relation by clicking its graph.
2. Press Backspace or DEL.
The graph is removed from both the work area and the graph history.
Graphing Functions
1. From the GraphEntry/Edit menu, select Function.
2. Type an expression for the function.
3. Press Enter to graph the function.
Manipulating Functions by Dragging
Some types of functions can be translated, stretched, and/or rotated by
dragging parts of the graph. As you drag, the expression for the graph updates
to reflect the change.
Drag graph from the ends to rotate.
Drag graph near the middle to translate.
Manipulating a Linear Function
▶To translate, grab near the middle of the graph, and then drag.
▶To rotate, grab near the ends of the graph, and then drag.
Graphs Application 241
242 Graphs Application
Manipulating a Quadratic Function
▶To translate, grab near the vertex of the graph, and then drag.
▶To stretch, grab away from the vertex of the graph, and then drag.
Manipulating a Sine or Cosine Function
▶To translate, grab near the axis of vertical symmetry of the graph, and then
drag.
▶To stretch, grab away from the axis of vertical symmetry of the graph, and
then drag.
Specifying a Function with Domain Restrictions
You can use the entry line or the Calculator application to specify a function
with domain restrictions. For multiple domain restrictions on a function, use the
piecewise() function.
In the following example, a function with a domain that is less than 2 and
greater than -2 is specified on the entry line:
1. From the GraphEntry/Edit menu, select Function.
2. Type the following on the entry line, using spaces to separate the "and"
operator:
piecewise(3,x>-2 and x<2)
3. Tap Enter to graph the function.
Graphs Application 243
244 Graphs Application
Finding Points of Interest on a Function Graph
The Graphs application helps you find zeros, minimums, maximums,
intersections, derivatives (dy/dx), or integrals. For Graphs defined as conic
sections, you can also find foci, directrix, and other points.
(CAS): You can also find the point of inflection.
Identifying Points of Interest by Dragging a Point
▶To quickly identify maximums, minimums, and zeros, create a point on the
graph and then drag the point.
Temporary signposts appear as you drag through points of interest.
Identifying Points of Interest with Analysis Tools
This example illustrates using the Minimum tool. Other analysis tools operate
similarly.
1. From the AnalyzeGraph menu, select Minimum.
The Minimum icon is displayed at the top left on the work area, and a
graph? prompt appears in the work area.
2. Click the graph on which you want to find the minimum.
A dotted line appears, representing the lower bound of the range to
search.
3. Drag the line or click a location to set the lower bound and display a
proposed upper bound.
Graphs Application 245
246 Graphs Application
4. Drag the line representing the upper bound, or click a location to set it.
The minimum is displayed, along with a text object showing its
coordinates.
Graphing a Family of Functions
In a family of functions, each member has its own value for one or more of the
parameters. By entering the parameters as lists, you can use a single
expression to graph a family of up to 16 functions.
For example, the expression f1(x) = {-1,0,1,2} •x + {2,4,6,8} denotes the following
four functions:
f1_1(x)=-1•x+2
f1_2(x) = 0•x+4
f1_3(x) = 1•x+6
f1_4(x) = 2•x+8
To Graph a Family of Functions
1. From the GraphEntry/Edit menu, select Function.
2. Type the expression, using lists to represent the members of the family.
3. Press Enter to graph the functions.
Each member is labeled separately (f1_1,f1_2, and so on) to indicate its
sequence in the expression.
Graphs Application 247
248 Graphs Application
Note: You cannot edit a single function graph to change it to a family of
functions.
Graphing Equations
1. From the GraphEntry/Edit menu, select Equation.
2. Click the type of equation (Line,Parabola,Circle,Ellipse,Hyperbola, or
Conic).
3. Click the specific template for the equation. For example, tap y=a•x2+b•x+c
to define a parabola.
The entry line includes a symbol to indicate the type of equation.
4. Type the coefficients into the equation template.
5. Press Enter.
Graphing Conic Sections
The Graphing view lets you graph and explore linear and conic equations
analytically in a two-dimensional coordinate system. You can create and
analyze lines, circles, ellipses, parabolas, hyperbolas, and general conic
equations.
The entry line makes it easy to enter the equation by displaying a template for
the type of equation you choose.
Example: Creating a conic ellipse
1. From the GraphEntry/Edit menu, select Equation>Ellipse, and tap the
equation type.
2. Type initial values for the coefficients in the provided spaces. Use the
arrow keys to move among the coefficients.
3. Press Enter to graph the equation.
Graphs Application 249
250 Graphs Application
Exploring the sample ellipse
1. Drag the ellipse from its center to explore the effect of translation on the
equation.
2. Use the analysis tools, such as AnalyzeGraph >AnalyzeConics>Foci to
further explore the graph.
Note: The type of conic determines which analysis tools you can use. In
the case of the ellipse, you can obtain its center, vertices, foci, axes of
symmetry, directrices, eccentricity, and latera recta.
3. To explore translation and dilation interactively, define a conic ellipse that
uses variables for the h,k,a, and bcoefficients. Insert sliders to vary the
parameters.
Graphing Parametric Equations
1. From the GraphEntry/Edit menu, select Parametric.
Graphs Application 251
252 Graphs Application
Use the up and down arrow keys to move among the fields in the
Parametric entry line.
2. Type expressions for xn(t) and yn(t).
3. (Optional) Edit the default values for tmin,tmax, and tstep.
4. Press Enter.
Graphing Polar Equations
1. From the GraphEntry/Edit menu, select Polar.
2. Type an expression for rn(θ).
3. (Optional) Edit the default values for θmin,θmax, and θstep.
4. Press Enter.
Using the Text Tool to Graph Equations
You can graph an "x=" or "y=" equation by typing it into a text box and dragging
the text to an axis. You can edit the equation text (for example, change it to an
inequality), but you cannot change it between x= and y=.
Graphing a Trigonometry Relation from Text
1. From the Actions menu, select Text.
2. Click the work area to place the text box.
3. Type the equation for the trigonometry relation, such as x=sin(y)*2.
Graphs Application 253
254 Graphs Application
4. Press Enter to complete the text object.
5. Drag the text object to either axis to graph the equation.
Graphing a Vertical or Horizontal Line from Text
1. From the Actions menu, select Text.
2. Click the work area to place the text box.
3. Type the equation for a vertical line, such as x=4, or a horizontal line, such
as y=-2. Click Enter to complete it.
4. Drag the text object to either axis to graph the equation.
After plotting a line, you can drag to translate or rotate it.
Graphing an Inequality from Text
You can graph inequalities that use the >, <, ≤, or ≥operators. Areas that satisfy
the inequality are shown with shading. If the shaded areas of two or more
inequalities overlap, the area of overlap is shaded darker.
1. From the Actions menu, select Text.
2. Click the work area to place the text box.
3. Type the inequality expression, such as x<2*sin(y). Click Enter to
complete it.
4. Drag the text object to either axis to graph the inequality.
Graphing Scatter Plots
1. (Optional) Create two predefined list variables containing the x and y
values to plot. You can use the Lists&Spreadsheet, Calculator, or Notes
application to create the lists.
Graphs Application 255
256 Graphs Application
2. From the GraphEntry/Edit menu, select Scatter Plot.
Use the up and down arrow keys to move between the x and y fields.
3. Use one of the following methods to specify lists to plot as x and y.
- Click to select names of the predefined list variables.
- Type the names of the variables, such as v1.
- Type lists as comma-separated elements enclosed within brackets, for
example: {1,2,3}.
4. Press Enter to plot the data, and then zoom the work area to view the
plotted data.
Plotting Sequences
The Graphs application lets you plot two types of sequences. Each type has a
separate template for defining the sequence.
Defining a Sequence
1. From the GraphEntry/Edit menu, select Sequence > Sequence.
2. Type the expression to define the sequence.
3. Type an initial term. If the sequence expression references more than one
prior term, such as u1(n-1) and u1(n-2), separate the terms with commas.
4. Press Enter.
Defining a Custom Sequence
A custom sequence plot shows the relationship between two sequences by
plotting one on the xaxis and the other on the yaxis.
This example simulates the Predator-Prey model from biology.
1. Use the relations shown here to define two sequences: one for a rabbit
population, and another for a fox population. Replace the default
sequence names with rabbit and fox.
Graphs Application 257
258 Graphs Application
.05 = the growth rate of rabbits if there are no foxes
.001 = the rate at which foxes can kill rabbits
.0002 = the growth rate of foxes if there are rabbits
.03 = the death rate of foxes if there are no rabbits
Note: If you want to see the plots of the two sequences, zoom the window
to the Zoom-Fit setting.
2. From the GraphEntry/Edit menu, select Sequence > Custom.
3. Specify the rabbit and fox sequences to plot on the x and y axes,
respectively.
4. Press Enter to create the custom plot.
5. Zoom the window to the Zoom-Fit setting.
6. Explore the custom plot by dragging the point that represents the initial
term.
Graphing Differential Equations
You can study linear and non-linear differential equations and systems of
ordinary differential equations (ODEs), including logistic models and Lotka-
Volterra equations (predator-prey models). You can also plot slope and
direction fields with interactive implementations of Euler and Runge-Kutta
methods.
ODE entry line:
•y1 ODE identifier
• Expression k·y1 defines the relation
• Fields (1,1) for specifying initial condition
• Buttons for adding initial conditions and setting plot parameters
Slider to vary coefficient kof the ODE
Slope field
A solution curve passing through the initial condition
To Graph a Differential Equation:
1. From the GraphEntry/Edit menu, select DiffEq.
The ODE is automatically assigned an identifier, such as “y1.”
Graphs Application 259
260 Graphs Application
2. Move to the relation field and enter the expression that defines the relation.
For example, you might enter -y1+0.1*y1*y2.
3. Enter the initial condition for the independent value x0and for y10.
Note: The x0value(s) are common to all the ODEs in a problem but can be
entered or modified only in the first ODE.
4. (Optional) To study multiple initial conditions for the current ODE, click Add
Initial Conditions and enter the conditions.
5. Tap Edit Parameters to set the plot parameters. Select a numerical
Solution Method, and then set any additional parameters. You can change
these parameters anytime.
6. Click OK.
7. To enter additional ODEs, press the down arrow to display the next ODE
edit field.
As you move among defined ODEs, the graph is updated to reflect any
changes. One solution to the ODE is graphed for each IC specified for
each shown ODE (selected by check box).
Summary of Differential Equation Settings
Solution
Method
Selects Euler or Runge-Kutta as the numerical solution
method.
Iterations
Between
Plot Step
Computational accuracy for Euler solution method only. Must
be an integer value>0. To restore the default, select the down-
arrow and select Default.
Error
Tolerance
Computational accuracy for Runge-Kutta solution method only.
Must be a floating-point value|1×10-14. To restore the default,
Graphs Application 261
262 Graphs Application
select the down-arrow and select Default.
Field None - No field is plotted. Available for any number of ODEs,
but required if three or more 1st-order ODEs are active. Graphs
a combination of the solution and/or values of one or more
ODEs (according to user-configured Axes settings).
Slope - Plots a field representing the family of solutions to a
single 1st-order ODE. Exactly one ODE must be active. Sets
Axes to Default(xandy). Sets Horizontal axis to x (the
independent variable). Sets Vertical axis to y (the solution to
the ODE).
Direction - Graphs a field in the phase plane representing the
relationship between a solution and/or values of a system of
two 1st-order ODEs (as specified by the CustomAxes setting).
Exactly two ODEs must be active.
Axes Default (x and y) - Plots x on the x axis and y (the solutions to
the active differential equations) on the y axis.
Custom - Lets you select the values to be plotted on the x and y
axes respectively. Valid entries include:
•x(the independent variable)
•y1,y2, and any identifiers defined in the ODE editor
•y1’,y2’, and any derivatives defined in the ODE editor
Plot Start Sets the independent variable value at which the solution plot
starts.
Plot End Sets the independent variable value at which the solution plot
stops.
Plot Step Sets the increment of the independent variable at which values
are plotted.
Field
Resolution
Sets the number of columns of field rendering elements (line
segments) used to draw a slope or direction field. You can
change this parameter only if Field =Direction or Slope.
Direction
Field at x=
Sets the independent variable value at which a direction field
is drawn when plotting non-autonomous equations (those that
refer to x). Ignored when plotting autonomous equations. You
can change this parameter only if Field =Direction.
Viewing Tables from the Graphs Application
You can show a table of values for any relation defined in the current problem.
Note: For details about using tables and instructions for accessing tables from
the Lists&Spreadsheet application, see Working with Tables.
Showing a Table
▶From the Table menu, select Split-screenTable.
The table is displayed with columns of values for the currently defined
relations.
To change which relation is displayed in a column, click the arrow in the
top cell of the column, and then select the relation name.
Hiding the Table
▶From the Table menu, select RemoveTable.
Editing Relations
1. Double-click the graph to show its expression in the entry line.
—or—
Display the graph’s context menu, and then click EditRelation.
Graphs Application 263
264 Graphs Application
2. Modify the expression as needed.
3. Press ·to graph the revised function.
Renaming a Relation
Each relation type has a default naming convention. For example, the default
name for functions is fn(x). (The number represented by nincreases as you
create more functions.) You can replace the default name with a name of your
choice.
Note: If you want to use a custom name as a convention, you must enter it
manually for each function.
1. In the entry line, delete the existing name. For example, delete the "f1"
from "f1(x)". You can use the right and left arrow keys to position the
cursor.
2. Type the replacement name.
3. If you are defining a new relation, position the cursor after the = sign and
type the expression.
4. Press Enter to graph the relation with its new name.
Accessing the Graph History
For each problem, the software stores a history of relations defined in the
Graphs application and 3D Graphing view, such as function graphs f1 through
f99 and 3D function graphs z1 through z99. You can view and edit these items
using a button on the entry line.
Viewing the History
1. Press Ctrl+G to show the entry line.
2. Clickthe History Menu button on the entry line.
The menu is displayed. As you point to the name of each item, its
expression appears in the entry line.
3. Select the name of the relation you want to view or edit.
Graphs Application 265
266 Graphs Application
4. (Optional) From the entry line, use the up and down arrow keys to scroll
through the defined relations of the same type.
Viewing the History of Specific Relation Types
Use this method if you want to view or edit a defined relation that does not
appear in the History menu.
1. On the GraphEntry/Edit menu, click the relation type. For example, click
Polar to show the entry line for the next available Polar relation.
2. Clickthe History Menu button , or use the up and down arrow keys to
scroll through the defined relations of the same type.
Zooming/Rescaling the Graphs Work Area
Rescaling in the Graphs application affects only the graphs, plots, and objects
that reside in the Graphing view. It has no effect on objects in the underlying
Plane Geometry view.
▶To rescale the x and y axes proportionally, drag a tic mark on either axis.
▶To rescale only one axis, hold down Shift and drag a tic mark on the axis.
Zooming to predefined settings
▶From the Window/Zoom menu, select one of the Zoom tools (Zoom-Box,
Zoom-In, or Zoom-Out), or select one of the predefined Zoom settings.
The initial setting is Zoom-Standard.
Entering Custom Window Settings
▶From the Window/Zoom menu, select WindowSettings.
Customizing the Graphs Work Area
Inserting a Background Image
You can insert an image as a background for any Graphs or Geometry page.
1. From the Insert menu, click Image.
2. Navigate to the image you want to insert, select it, and then click Open.
Adding a Text Object to the Work Area
Use the Text tool to add numeric values, formulas, observations, or other
explanatory information to the Graphs work area. You can graph an equation
entered as text (such as "x=3").
1. From the Actions menu, select Text.
2. Click the location for the text.
3. Type the text in the box that appears, and then press Enter.
Graphs Application 267
268 Graphs Application
To move a text object, drag it. To edit the text, double-click it. To delete a text
object, display its context menu, and select Delete.
Changing the Attributes of Numeric Text
If you enter a numeric value as text, you can lock it or set its format and
displayed precision.
1. From the Actions menu, select Attributes.
2. Click the numeric text to display its list of attributes.
3. Press ▲and▼to move through the list.
4. At each attribute icon, press◄or►to move through the options. For
example, select 0through 9as the precision.
5. Press Enter to apply the changes.
6. Press Esc to close the Attributes tool.
Displaying the Grid
By default, the grid is not displayed. You can choose to display it as dots or
lines.
▶From the View menu, select Grid, and then select DotGrid,LinedGrid, or
NoGrid.
Changing the Grid Color
1. From the Actions menu, choose Select > Grid (available only when the grid
is displayed).
The grid flashes to show it is selected.
2. Click the down arrow next to the Color button, and select a color for the
grid.
Changing the Appearance of the Graph Axes
1. From the Actions menu, click Attributes.
2. Click either axis.
3. Press ▲and▼to move to the desired attribute, and then press ◄and►
to choose the option to apply.
Note: To hide the axes or selectively hide or show an individual axis end-value,
use the Hide/Show tool.
Hiding and Showing Items in the Graphs Application
The Hide/Show tool reveals objects you have previously selected as hidden
and lets you select which objects to show or hide.
Note: If you hide a graph, its expression is automatically marked as hidden in
the graph history.
1. From the Actions menu, select Hide/Show.
The Hide/Show tool appears at the top of the work area, and currently
hidden items (if any) are shown dimmed.
2. Click objects to toggle their hide/show status. You can hide graphs,
geometric objects, text, labels, measurements, and individual axis end-
values.
3. Press Esc to complete your selections and close the tool.
Graphs Application 269
270 Graphs Application
All objects you selected as hidden objects disappear.
4. To view the hidden objects temporarily or restore them as shown objects,
open the Hide/Show tool.
Conditional Attributes
You can cause objects to hide, show, and change color dynamically, based on
specified conditions such as "r1<r2" or "sin(a1)>=cos(a2)."
For example, you might want to hide an object based on a changing
measurement that you have assigned to a variable, or you might want an
object’s color to change based on a "Calculate" result assigned to a variable.
Conditional behaviors can be assigned to objects or groups in the Graphing,
Plane Geometry, and 3D Graphing views.
Setting Conditional Attributes of an Object
You can set conditions of a selected object either by using its context menu or
by activating the Set Conditions tool from the Actions menu and then selecting
the object. These instructions describe using the context menu.
1. Select the object or group.
2. Display the object’s context menu, and click Conditions.
The conditional attributes are displayed.
For 2D objects For 3D objects
3. (Optional) In the Show When field, enter an expression specifying the
conditions during which the object will be shown. Anytime the condition is
not satisfied, the object will be hidden.
You can specify tolerance by using compound conditionals in the Show
When input field. For example, area>=4andarea<=6.
Note: If you need to see conditionally hidden objects temporarily, click
Actions>Hide/Show. To return to normal viewing, press ESC.
4. (Optional) Enter numbers or expressions that evaluate to numbers in the
applicable color fields, such as Line Color or Mesh Color. To see a map of
color values, click the Colors button.
Map of conditional color values
5. Click OK in the Conditional Attributes dialog box to apply the conditions.
Graphs Application 271
272 Graphs Application
Calculating Area Between Curves
Note: To avoid unexpected results when using this feature, make sure the
documentsetting for "RealorComplexFormat" is set to Real.
When you calculate the area between curves, each curve must be:
• A function with respect to x.
- or -
• An equation in the form y=, including y= equations defined through a text
box or a conicequation template.
Defining and Shading the Area
1. From the Analyze Graph menu, select Bounded Area.
If only two appropriate curves are available, they are selected
automatically. Otherwise, you are prompted to select both curves.
2. Click each curve to select it.
You are prompted to set the lower and upper bounds.
3. Click two points to define the bounds. Optionally, you can type numeric
values.
The area becomes shaded, and the area value is displayed. The value is
always non-negative, regardless of the interval direction.
Working with Shaded Areas
As you change the bounds or redefine the curves, the shading and the area
value are updated .
• To change the lower or upper bound, drag it or type new coordinates for it.
You cannot move a bound that resides on an intersection. However, the
point moves automatically as you edit or manipulate the curves.
• To redefine a curve, either manipulate it by dragging or edit its expression
in the entry line.
If an endpoint resided originally on an intersection, and the redefined
functions no longer intersect, the shading and area value disappear. If you
redefine the function(s) so that there is an intersection point, the shading
and area value reappear.
• To delete or hide the shaded area, or to change its color and other
attributes, display its context menu.
- Windows®: Right-click the shaded area.
- Mac®: Hold “and click the shaded area.
- Handheld: Move the pointer to the shaded area and press / x.
Tracing Graphs or Plots
Graph Trace lets you move a trace cursor over the points of a graph or plot and
displays value information.
Tracing Specific Graphs
1. From the Trace menu, select Graph Trace.
Graphs Application 273
274 Graphs Application
The Graph Trace tool appears at the top of the work area, the trace cursor
appears, and the cursor coordinates are displayed in the lower right
corner.
2. Explore a graph or plot:
- Point to a position on a graph or plot to move the trace cursor to that
point.
- Press ◄or ►to step the cursor along the current graph or plot. The
screen pans automatically to keep the cursor in view.
- Press ▲or ▼to cycle among the displayed graphs.
- Click the trace cursor to create a persistent point. Optionally, enter a
specific independent value to move the trace cursor to that value.
3. To stop tracing, press Esc.
Tracing All Graphs
The Trace All tool allows tracing multiple functions simultaneously. With
several functions graphed on the work area, perform the following steps:
Note: The Trace All tool traces only function graphs, not plots of other relations
(polar, parametric, scatter, sequence).
1. From the Trace menu, select TraceAll.
The Trace All tool appears in the work area, a vertical line indicates the x
value of the trace, and the coordinates for each traced point are displayed
in the lower right corner.
2. Explore the graphs:
- Click a point on the x axis to move all the trace points to that x value.
- Press ◄or ►to step the trace points along all the graphs.
3. To stop tracing, press Esc.
Changing the Trace Step
1. From the Trace menu, select Trace Step.
2. Choose Automatic or enter a specific step size for tracing.
Introduction to Geometric Objects
Geometry tools are accessible in both the Graphs and Geometry applications.
You can use these tools to draw and investigate objects such as points, lines,
and shapes.
• The Graphing view shows the Graphs work area superimposed on the
Geometry work area. You can select, measure, and alter objects in both
work areas.
• The Plane Geometry view shows only the objects created in the Geometry
application.
Graphs Application 275
276 Graphs Application
Objects Created in the Graphs Application
Points, lines, and shapes created in the Graphs application are analytic
objects.
• All points that define these objects reside on the x,y graph plane. Objects
created here are visible only in the Graphs application. Changing the axes
scale affects the appearance of the objects.
• You can display and edit the coordinates of any point on an object.
• You can display the equation of a line, tangent line, circle shape, or
geometric conic created in the Graphs application.
The circle arc and polygon were created in the Geometry application. The sine
wave and conic were created in the Graphs application.
Objects Created in the Geometry Application
Points, lines, and shapes created in the Geometry application are not analytic
objects.
• Points that define these objects do not reside on the graph plane. Objects
created here are visible in both the Graphs and Geometry applications, but
they are unaffected by changes to the Graphs x,y axes.
• You cannot obtain the coordinates of an object’s points.
• You cannot display the equation of a geometric object created in the
Geometry application
Creating Points and Lines
As you create an object, a tool appears in the work area (for example, Segment
). To cancel, press ESC.
Creating a Point on the Work Area
1. From the PointsandLines menu, select Point. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > PointsandLines > Point.)
2. Click a location to create the point.
3. (Optional) Label the point.
4. To move a point, drag it.
Creating a Point on a Graph or Object
You can create a point on a line, segment, ray, axis, vector, circle, graph, or
axis.
1. From the PointsandLines menu, select Point On. (In the Graphs
application, click Geometry > PointsandLines > Point On.)
2. Click the graph or object on which you want to create the point.
3. Click a location on the object to place the point.
Graphs Application 277
278 Graphs Application
Identifying Points of Intersection
1. From the PointsandLines menu, select Intersection Points. (In the Graphs
application, click Geometry > PointsandLines > Intersection Points.)
2. Click two intersecting objects to add points at their intersections.
Creating a Line
1. From the PointsandLines menu, select Line. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > PointsandLines > Line.)
2. Click a location to define one point on the line.
3. Click a second location to define the direction of the line and the length of
its visible portion.
4. To move a line, drag its identifying point. To rotate it, drag any point except
the identifying point or ends. To extend its visible portion, drag from either
end.
Creating a Segment
1. From the PointsandLines menu, select Segment. (In the Graphs
application, click Geometry > PointsandLines > Segment.)
2. Click two locations to define the endpoints of the segment.
3. To move a segment, drag any point other than an endpoint. To manipulate
the direction or length, drag either endpoint.
Creating a Ray
1. From the PointsandLines menu, select Ray. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > PointsandLines > Ray.)
2. Click a location to define the endpoint of the ray.
3. Click a second location to define the direction.
Graphs Application 279
280 Graphs Application
To move a ray, drag its identifying point. To rotate it, drag any point except
the identifying point or end. To extend its visible portion, drag from the end.
Creating a Tangent
You can create a tangent line at a specific point on a geometric object or
function graph.
1. From the PointsandLines menu, select Tangent. (In the Graphs
application, click Geometry > PointsandLines > Tangent.)
2. Click the object to select it.
3. Click a location on the object to create the tangent.
4. To move a tangent, drag it. It remains attached to the object or graph.
Creating a Vector
1. From the PointsandLines menu, select Vector. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > PointsandLines > Vector.)
2. Click a location to establish the vector's initial point.
3. Click a second location to specify direction and magnitude and complete
the vector.
4. To move a vector, drag any point other than the endpoints. To manipulate
the magnitude and/or direction, drag either end point.
Note: If you create an endpoint on an axis or another object, you can move
the endpoint only along that object.
Creating a Circle Arc
1. From the PointsandLines menu, select Circle Arc. (In the Graphs
application, click Geometry > PointsandLines > Circle Arc.)
2. Click a location or point to establish the starting point of the arc.
3. Click a second point to establish an intermediate point through which the
arc will pass.
4. Click a third point to set the ending point and complete the arc.
5. To move an arc, drag its perimeter. To manipulate it, drag any of its three
defining points.
Graphs Application 281
282 Graphs Application
Creating Geometric Shapes
The Shape tools let you explore circles, polygons, conics, and other geometric
objects.
As you create a shape, a tool appears in the work area (for example,Circle ).
To cancel the shape, press ESC.
Creating a Circle
1. From the Shapes menu, select Circle. (In the Graphs application, click
Geometry > Shapes > Circle.)
2. Click a location or point to position the circle’s center point.
3. Click a location or point to establish the radius and complete the circle.
4. To resize a circle, drag its perimeter. To move it, drag its center point.
Creating a Triangle
1. From the Shapes menu, select Triangle. (In the Graphs application, click
Geometry > Shapes > Triangle.)
2. Click three locations to establish the vertices of the triangle.
3. To manipulate a triangle, drag any point. To move it, drag any side.
Creating a Rectangle
1. From the Shapes menu, select Rectangle. (In the Graphs application, click
Geometry > Shapes > Rectangle.)
2. Click a location or point to establish the first corner of the rectangle.
3. Click a location for the second corner.
One side of the rectangle is displayed.
4. Click to establish the distance to the opposite side and complete the
rectangle.
5. To rotate a rectangle, drag one of its first two points. To extend it, drag one
of the last two points. To move it, drag any side.
Creating a Polygon
1. From the Shapes menu, select Polygon. (In the Graphs application, click
Geometry > Shapes > Polygon.)
2. Click a location or point to establish the first vertex of the polygon.
3. Click to establish each additional vertex.
4. To complete the polygon, click the first vertex.
Graphs Application 283
284 Graphs Application
5. To manipulate a polygon, drag any vertex. To move it, drag any side.
Creating a Regular Polygon
1. From the Shapes menu, select Regular Polygon. (In the Graphs
application, click Geometry > Shapes > Regular Polygon.)
2. Click once on the work area to establish the center point.
3. Click a second location to establish the first vertex and radius.
A 16-sided regular polygon is formed. The number of sides is displayed in
brackets; for example, {16}.
4. Drag any vertex in a circular motion to set the number of sides.
- Drag clockwise to reduce the number of sides.
- Drag counterclockwise to add diagonals.
5. To resize or rotate a regular polygon, drag any of its points. To move it,
drag any side.
Creating an Ellipse
1. From the Shapes menu, select Ellipse. (In the Graphs application, click
Geometry > Shapes > Ellipse.)
2. Click two locations or points to establish the foci.
3. Click to establish a point on the ellipse and complete the shape.
4. To manipulate an ellipse, drag any of its three defining points. To move it,
drag its perimeter.
Creating a Parabola (from focus and vertex)
1. From the Shapes menu, select Parabola. (In the Graphs application, click
Geometry > Shapes > Parabola.)
2. Click a location to establish the focus.
3. Click a location to establish the vertex and complete the parabola.
4. To manipulate a parabola, drag its focus or its vertex. To move it, drag it
from any other point.
Creating a Parabola (from focus and directrix)
1. Create a line to serve as the directrix.
2. From the Shapes menu, select Parabola. (In the Graphs application, click
Geometry > Shapes > Parabola.)
3. Click a location to establish the focus.
4. Click the line to establish it as the directrix.
Graphs Application 285
286 Graphs Application
5. To manipulate a parabola, rotate or move its directrix or drag its focus. To
move it, select both the directrix and the focus, and then drag either object.
Creating a Hyperbola
1. From the Shapes menu, select Hyperbola. (In the Graphs application, click
Geometry > Shapes > Hyperbola.)
2. Click two locations to establish the foci.
3. Click a third location to complete the hyperbola.
4. To manipulate a hyperbola, drag any of its three defining points. To move
it, drag it from any other place on the shape.
Creating a Conic by Five Points
1. From the Shapes menu, select ConicbyFivePoints. (In the Graphs
application, click Geometry > Shapes > ConicbyFivePoints.)
2. Click five locations to establish the five points on the shape.
Depending on the pattern of the points, the conic can be a hyperbola or an
ellipse.
3. To manipulate a conic, drag any of its five defining points. To move it, drag
it from any other place on the shape.
Basics of Working with Objects
Selecting and Deselecting Objects
You can select an individual object or multiple objects. Select multiple objects
when you want to quickly move, color, or delete them together.
1. Click an object or graph to select it.
The object flashes to indicate selection.
2. Click any additional objects to add them to the selection.
3. Perform the operation (such as moving or setting color).
4. To deselect all objects, click an empty space in the work area.
Grouping and Ungrouping Geometric Objects
Grouping objects gives you a way to reselect them as a set, even after you
have deselected them to work with other objects.
1. Click each object to add it to the current selection.
The selected objects flash.
2. Display a context menu of the selected object or objects.
3. Click Group. You can now select all the items in the group by clicking any
of its members.
4. To split a group into individual objects, display a context menu of any of its
member objects, and click Ungroup.
Graphs Application 287
288 Graphs Application
Deleting Objects
1. Display the context menu of the object or objects.
2. Click Delete.
You cannot delete the origin, the axes, or points representing locked
variables, even if those items are included in the selection.
Moving Objects
You can move an object, group, or combination of selected objects and groups.
Note: If an immovable object (such as the graph axes or a point with locked
coordinates) is included in a selection or group, you cannot move any of the
objects. You must cancel the selection and then select only movable items.
To move
this...
Drag this
A multiple-
object selection
or group
Any of its objects
A point The point
A segment or
vector
Any point other than an endpoint
A line or ray The identifying point
A circle The center point
Other geometric
shapes
Any position on the object except one of its defining
points. For example, move a polygon by dragging any of
its sides.
Constraining Object Movement
Holding down the SHIFT key before dragging lets you constrain how certain
objects are drawn, moved, or manipulated.
Use the constraint feature to:
• Rescale only a single axis in the Graphs application.
• Pan the work area horizontally or vertically, depending on which direction
you drag initially.
• Limit object movement to horizontal or vertical.
• Limit point placement to 15°increments as you draw a triangle, rectangle,
or polygon.
• Limit angle manipulations to 15°increments.
• Limit the radius of a resized circle to integer values.
Pinning Objects
Pinning objects prevents accidental changes as you move or manipulate other
objects.
You can pin graphed functions, geometric objects, text objects, the graph axes,
and the background.
1. Select the object or objects to pin, or click an empty area if you are pinning
the background.
2. Display the context menu, and select Pin.
A pinned object displays a pin icon when you point to it.
3. To unpin an object, display its context menu, and select Unpin.
Notes:
• Although you cannot drag a pinned point, you can reposition it by editing
its x and y coordinates.
• You cannot pan the work area while the background is pinned.
Changing the Line or Fill Color of an Object
Color changes made in the software are displayed in shades of gray when you
work on documents using a TI-Nspire™ handheld that does not support color.
Color is preserved when you move documents back to the software.
1. Select the object or objects.
2. Display the object’s context menu, click Color, and then click LineColor or
FillColor.
3. Select the color to apply to the objects.
Graphs Application 289
290 Graphs Application
Changing the Appearance of an Object
1. From the Actions menu, select Attributes.
2. Click the object that you want to change. You can change shapes, lines,
graphs, or graph axes.
The list of the attributes for the selected object are displayed.
3. Press 9and:to move through the list of attributes.
4. At each attribute icon, press 7or8to move through the options. For
example, select Thick, Thin, or Medium for the Line Weight attribute.
5. Press Enter to apply the changes.
6. Press ESC to close the Attributes tool.
Labeling Points, Geometric Lines, and Shapes
1. Display the context menu of the object.
2. Click Label.
3. Type the text of the label, and then press Enter.
The label attaches itself to the object and follows the object as you move it.
The label's color matches the object's color.
Measuring Objects
Measurement values update automatically as you manipulate the measured
object.
Note: Measurements of objects created in the Graphs application are displayed
in generic units namedu. Measurements of objects created in the Geometry
application are displayed in centimeters (cm).
Measuring Length of a Segment, Circle Arc, or Vector
1. From the Measurement menu, select Length. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > Measurement > Length.)
2. Click the object to display its length.
Measuring Distance Between Two Points, a Point and a Line, or a
Point and a Circle
1. From the Measurement menu, select Length. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > Measurement > Length.)
2. Click the first point.
3. Click the second point or a point on the line or circle.
In this example, length is measured from the center
of the circle to the upper left vertex of the polygon.
Measuring Circumference of a Circle or Ellipse or the Perimeter of a
Polygon, Rectangle, or Triangle
1. From the Measurement menu, select Length. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > Measurement > Length.)
Graphs Application 291
292 Graphs Application
2. Click the object to display its circumference or perimeter.
Measuring a Side of a Triangle, Rectangle, or Polygon
1. From the Measurement menu, select Length. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > Measurement > Length.)
2. Click two points on the object that form the side you want to measure.
Note: You must click two points to measure a side. Clicking the side
measures the entire length of the object's perimeter.
Measuring Area of a Circle, Ellipse, Polygon, Rectangle, or Triangle
Note: You cannot measure the area of a polygon constructed using the
Segment tool.
1. From the Measurement menu, select Area. (In the Graphs application, click
Geometry > Measurement > Area.)
2. Click the object to display its area.
Measuring Slope of a Line, Ray, Segment, or Vector
1. From the Measurement menu, select Slope. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > Measurement > Slope.)
2. Click the object to display its slope.
The value is updated automatically when you manipulate the object.
Measuring Angles
Measured angles in the Geometry application range from 0°to 180°. Measured
angles in the Graphs application range from 0 radians to πradians. To change
the angle unit, use the Settings menu.
1. From the Measurement menu, select Angle. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > Measurement > Angle.)
2. Click three locations or points to define the angle. The second click defines
the vertex.
Graphs Application 293
294 Graphs Application
Moving a Measured Value
▶Drag the measurement to the desired location.
Note: If you move a measurement too far from its object, it stops following
the object. However, its value continues to be updated as you manipulate
the object.
Editing a Measured Length
You can set the length of a side of a Triangle, Rectangle, or Polygon by editing
its measured value.
▶Double-click the measurement, and then enter the new value.
Storing a Measured Value as a Variable
Use this method to create a variable and assign a measured value to it.
1. Display the item's context menu, and select Store.
2. Type a variable name for the stored measurement.
Linking a Measured Length to an Existing Variable
Use this method to assign a measured length value to an existing variable.
1. Display the measurement's context menu, and select Variables > Link to.
The menu shows the list of currently defined variables.
2. Click the name of the variable you want to link to.
Deleting a Measurement
▶Display the measurement's context menu, and select Delete.
Locking or Unlocking a Measurement
1. Display the measurement's context menu, and select Attributes.
2. Use the up/down arrow keys to highlight the Lock attribute.
3. Use the left/right arrow keys to close or open the lock.
As long as the value remains locked, manipulations are not allowed that
would require the measurement to change.
Transforming Objects
You can apply transformations to drawn objects in both the Graphs and
Geometry applications.
Exploring Symmetry
1. From the Transformation menu, select Symmetry. (In the Graphs
application, click Geometry > Transformation > Symmetry.)
2. Click the object whose symmetry you want to explore.
3. Click a location or existing point to establish the point of symmetry.
A symmetrical image of the object is displayed.
4. Manipulate the original object or the point of symmetry to explore the
symmetry.
Exploring Reflection
1. Create a line or segment to predefine the line about which the object will
be reflected.
Graphs Application 295
296 Graphs Application
2. From the Transformation menu, select Reflection. (In the Graphs
application, click Geometry > Transformation > Reflection.)
3. Click the object whose reflection you want to explore.
4. Click the predefined reflection line or segment.
A reflected image of the object is displayed.
5. Manipulate the original object or the line of symmetry to explore the
reflection.
Exploring Translation
1. (Optional) Create a vector to predefine the distance and direction of
translation.
2. From the Transformation menu, select Translation. (In the Graphs
application, click Geometry > Transformation > Translation.)
3. Click the object whose translation you want to explore.
4. Click the predefined vector.
—or—
Click two locations on the work area to indicate the direction and distance
of translation.
A translated image of the object is displayed.
5. Manipulate the original object or the vector to explore the translation.
Exploring Rotation
1. (Optional) Create an angle measurement to serve as a predefined angle of
rotation.
2. From the Transformation menu, select Rotation. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > Transformation > Rotation.)
3. Click the object whose rotation you want to explore.
4. Click a location or point to define the point of rotation.
5. Click the points of the predefined angle.
—or—
Click three locations to define an angle of rotation.
A rotated image of the object is displayed.
6. Manipulate the original object or the point of rotation to explore the
rotation.
Exploring Dilation
1. Create a Text object containing a numeric value to serve as a predefined
dilation factor.
Note: You can also use a measured length value as the dilation factor.
Keep in mind that if you use a large value, you may have to pan the
display to view the dilated object.
2. From the Transformation menu, select Dilation. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > Transformation > Dilation.)
3. Click the object whose dilation you want to explore.
4. Click a location or existing point to define the center point of dilation.
5. Click the Text object or measurement that defines the dilation factor.
A dilated image of the object is displayed.
Graphs Application 297
298 Graphs Application
6. Manipulate the original object or the center point of dilation to explore the
dilation. You can also edit the dilation factor.
Exploring with Geometric Construction Tools
While a construction is in progress, a tool appears in the work area (for
example, Parallel ). To cancel, press ESC.
Creating a Midpoint
This tool lets you bisect a segment or define a midpoint between any two
points. The points can be on a single object, on separate objects, or on the
work area.
1. From the Construction menu, select Midpoint. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > Construction > Midpoint.)
2. Click a point or location to define the first point.
3. Click a second point or location to complete the midpoint.
Creating a Parallel Line
This tool creates a parallel line with respect to any existing line. The existing
line can be a Graphs axis or any side of a triangle, square, rectangle, or
polygon.
1. From the Construction menu, select Parallel. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > Construction > Parallel.)
2. Click the object that will serve as the reference line.
3. Click a location to create the parallel line.
You can drag the parallel line to move it. If you manipulate the reference
object, the line remains parallel.
Creating a Perpendicular Line
You can create a line that is perpendicular to a reference line. The reference
can be an axis, an existing line, a segment, or one side of a triangle, rectangle,
or polygon.
1. From the Construction menu, select Perpendicular. (In the Graphs
application, click Geometry > Construction > Perpendicular.)
2. Click a location or existing point through which the perpendicular line
should pass.
3. Click the item that will serve as the reference line.
Graphs Application 299
300 Graphs Application
You can drag the intersection point to move the perpendicular. If you
manipulate the reference object, the line remains perpendicular.
Creating a Perpendicular Bisector
You can create a perpendicular bisector on a segment, on one side of a
triangle, rectangle, or polygon, or between any two points.
1. From the Construction menu, select PerpendicularBisector. (In the Graphs
application, click Geometry > Construction > PerpendicularBisector.)
2. Click the item that will serve as the reference line.
—or—
Click two points to create a perpendicular bisector between them.
Bisecting an Angle
This tool creates an angle bisector. The points of the angle can be on existing
objects, or they can be locations on the work area.
1. From the Construction menu, select AngleBisector. (In the Graphs
application, click Geometry > Construction > AngleBisector.)
2. Click three locations or points to define the angle. The second click defines
the vertex of the angle.
The angle bisector adjusts automatically as you manipulate its defining
points.
Creating a Locus
The Locus tool enables you to explore the range of motion of one object with
respect to another object as constrained by a shared point.
1. Create a segment, line, or circle.
2. Create a point on the segment, line, or circle.
3. Create another object that uses the point created in the previous step.
Graphs Application 301
302 Graphs Application
Circle created to use the defined
point on the segment.
4. From the Construction menu, select Locus. (In the Graphs application, click
Geometry > Construction > Locus.)
5. Click the point shared by the objects.
6. Click the object defined to share the point (this is the object to vary).
The continuous locus is displayed.
Creating a Compass
This tool operates similarly to a geometric compass used for drawing circles on
paper.
1. From the Construction menu, select Compass. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > Construction > Compass.)
2. To set the width (radius) of the compass:
Click a segment.
—or—
Click any side of a triangle, rectangle, polygon, or regular polygon.
—or—
Click any two existing points or locations on the work area.
3. Click a location to establish the center of the circle and complete the
construction.
The radius adjusts automatically as you manipulate the original segment,
side, or points used to define the radius.
Animating Points on Objects
You can animate any point created as a point on an object or graph. Multiple
points can be animated simultaneously.
Animating a Point
1. From the Actions menu, select Attributes.
2. Click the point to display its attributes.
3. Press ▼to select the animation attributes.
4. Press ◄or►to choose either unidirectional or alternating animation.
5. Type a value to set the animation speed. Any nonzero speed begins the
animation. To reverse the direction, enter a negative value.
6. Press Enter to display the animation controls .
7. Press ESC to close the Attributes tool.
Pausing and Resuming All Animations
▶To pause all animations on a page, click Pause .
▶To resume all animations, click Play .
Graphs Application 303
304 Graphs Application
Resetting All Animations
Resetting pauses all animations and returns all animated points to the
positions they occupied when they were first animated.
▶To reset animation, click Reset .
Changing or Stopping the Animation of a Point
1. Click Reset to stop all animation.
2. From the Actions menu, select Attributes.
3. Click the point to display its attributes.
4. Select the animation attribute, and type a new animation speed. To stop
the point’s animation, enter zero.
Note: If other animated points exist, the animation controls remain in the
work area.
Adjusting Variable Values with a Slider
In the Graphs, Geometry, and Data&Statistics applications, a slider control lets
you adjust or animate the value of a numeric variable.
Horizontal slider for adjusting variable v1.
Minimized vertical slider for adjusting variable v2.
Inserting a Slider
1. Start in a Graphs, Geometry, or Data&Statistics page.
2. From the Actions menu, select Insert Slider.
The Slider Settings screen opens.
3. Enter desired values.
4. Click OK.
The slider is displayed in the work area. Handles on the slider let you
move or stretch it. To remove the handles, click an empty space in the work
area.
5. To adjust the variable, slide the pointer (or click the arrows on a minimized
slider).
Graphs Application 305
306 Graphs Application
Working with the Slider
Use the options on the context menu to move or delete the slider, and to start or
stop its animation. You can also change the slider's settings.
1. Display the slider's context menu.
2. Click an option to select it.
Labeling (Identifying) the Coordinates of a Point
The Graphs application can identify and label the coordinates of any existing
point, provided the point was created in the Graphs application.
1. From the Actions menu, select Coordinates and Equations.
The tool appears at the top of the work area
2. Tap the point whose coordinates you want to show.
3. Press Esc to close the tool.
If you later move the point to a different location, the coordinates follow the
point and update automatically.
Displaying the Equation of a Geometric Object
You can display the equation of a line, tangent line, circle shape, or geometric
conic, provided the object was constructed in the Graphing View or within the
Analytic Window of the Plane Geometry View.
Note: Due to differences in the numerical representations of analytic and
geometric conics, the capability to convert a geometric conic to an analytic
template may sometimes be unavailable. This is done in order to avoid a
situation where the template-based conic would be different from the geometric
one.
1. From the Actions menu, click CoordinatesandEquations.
2. Move the pointer to the object.
The equation for the object appears.
Note: If you approach a defined point on the line or the center point of a
circle, the coordinates of that point are displayed instead of the equation.
Move the pointer away from the defined point to obtain the equation of the
object.
3. Click to attach the equation to the pointer.
4. Move the equation to the desired location, and click to anchor it.
5. Press Esc to exit the tool.
Graphs Application 307
308 Graphs Application
Using the Calculate Tool
The Calculate tool is available in the Graphs and Geometry applications. It lets
you evaluate a math expression you have entered as a text object. You can
edit an evaluated expression, and then re-evaluate it.
In the following example, a triangle is constructed and its angles are measured
using the Angle tool on the Measurements menu. The Calculate tool then adds
the angles.
1. Create an object and display measurements for it.
2. From the Actions menu, click Text.
3. Type the formula for the calculation. In this example, the formula adds the
measurements of the three angles.
4. From the Actions menu, click Calculate.
5. Click the formula you created.
You are prompted to select a value for each term in the formula.
6. Click each angle measurement when prompted.
Note: If you have stored a measurement as a variable, you can select it
when prompted by clicking . If the name of a stored measurement
matches a term in the formula, you can press “L” when prompted for that
term.
When all variables in the formula have values, the answer is displayed on
the work area.
7. Press Enter to anchor the result as a new text object.
Graphs Application 309
310
3D Graphs
The 3D Graphing view lets you create and explore three-dimensional graphs
of:
• 3D functions of the form z(x,y)
• 3D parametric plots
Selecting the 3D Graphing View
The 3D Graphing View is available on any Graphs page or Geometry
page .
▶From the View menu, select 3DGraphing.
3D Graphs Menu
Entry line. Lets you define 3D graphs. The default graph type is 3D
Function, indicated by z1(x,y)=.
3D Graphs Work Area. Shows a 3D box containing graphs that you
define. Drag to rotate the box.
Graphing 3D Functions
1. In the 3D Graphing view, select 3DGraphEntry/Edit > Function.
The entry line appears.
3DGraphs 311
312 3DGraphs
2. Enter the expression that defines the graph. You can type the expression
or build it using expression templates.
3. Press Enter to create the graph and hide the entry line. You can show or
hide the entry line anytime by pressing Ctrl+G.
Graphing 3D Parametric Equations
1. In the 3D Graphing view, select 3DGraphEntry/Edit > Parametric.
The entry line appears.
2. Type the equations that define the graph.
3. Press Enter to draw the graph and hide the entry line and keyboard. You
can show or hide the entry line anytime by pressing Ctrl+G.
4. To set the graphing parameters tmin,tmax,umin, and umax, display the
graph's context menu, and select EditParameters.
Rotating the 3D View
Rotating Manually
1. Press Rto activate the Rotation tool (required only for the TI-Nspire™
handheld with Clickpad).
2. Press any of the four arrow keys to rotate the graph.
Rotating Automatically
Auto rotation is equivalent to holding down the right arrow key.
3DGraphs 313
314 3DGraphs
1. Press A.
The Auto Rotation icon appears, and the graph rotates.
2. (Optional) Use the up and down arrow keys to explore the rotating graph.
3. To stop the rotation and return to the Pointer tool, press Esc.
Viewing from Specific Orientations
1. If necessary, press Esc to return to the Pointer tool.
2. Use letter keys to select the orientation:
- Press Z,Y, or Xto view along the z, y, or x axis.
- Press letter Oto view from the default orientation.
Editing a 3D Graph
1. Double-click the graph to show its expression in the entry line.
—or—
Display the graph’s context menu, and then click EditRelation.
2. Modify the existing expression, or type a new expression in the entry line.
3. Press Enter.
Accessing the Graph History
For each problem, the software stores a history of relations defined in the
Graphs application and 3D Graphing view, such as function graphs f1 through
f99 and 3D function graphs z1 through z99. You can view and edit these items
using a button on the entry line.
Viewing the History
1. Press Ctrl+G to show the entry line.
2. Clickthe History Menu button on the entry line.
The menu is displayed. As you point to the name of each item, its
expression appears in the entry line.
3. Select the name of the relation you want to view or edit.
4. (Optional) From the entry line, use the up and down arrow keys to scroll
through the defined relations of the same type.
Viewing the History of Specific Relation Types
Use this method if you want to view or edit a defined relation that does not
appear in the History menu.
1. On the GraphEntry/Edit menu, click the relation type. For example, click
Polar to show the entry line for the next available Polar relation.
2. Clickthe History Menu button , or use the up and down arrow keys to
scroll through the defined relations of the same type.
Changing the Appearance of a 3D Graph
Setting Wire and Surface Color:
1. Display the graph’s context menu, click Color, and then click LineColor or
FillColor.
2. Click a color swatch to apply it.
Setting Custom Plot Colors:
You can assign different colors to a graph's top and bottom surfaces or choose
to have the graph colored automatically, based on height or steepness. You
can also set the wire color.
1. Display the graph’s context menu, and then click Color >
CustomPlotColor.
3DGraphs 315
316 3DGraphs
2. Select one of the three Surface color options: Top/bottom color,Vary color
by height, or Vary color by steepness.
- If you choose Top/bottom color, click the color swatches to select
colors for the top and bottom surfaces.
- If you choose to vary color by height or steepness, colors are
determined automatically.
3. To set the Wire color, click the color swatch and select a color.
Setting Other Attributes of a Graph:
1. Display the graph’s context menu, and then click Attributes. You can set
the following attributes for the selected graph.
- format: surface+wire, surface only, or wire only
- x resolution (enter a value in range 2-200*, default=21)
- y resolution (enter a value in range 2-200*, default=21)
- transparency (enter a value in range 0-100, default=30)
* Handhelds are limited to a maximum display resolution of 21, regardless
of the value entered.
2. Set the attributes as you like, and then press Enter to accept the changes.
Showing or Hiding a Graph’s Label
▶Display the graph’s context menu, and then click Hide Label or Show Label.
Showing and Hiding 3D Graphs
1. In the 3D Graphing view, select Actions > Hide/Show.
The Hide/Show tool appears, and all hidden items are displayed in
gray.
2. Tap a graph to change its hide/show state.
3. To apply the changes and dismiss the tool, press Esc.
Note: If you want to show or hide only the graph's label, see Showing or Hiding
a Graph’s Label.
Customizing the 3D Viewing Environment
Setting the Background Color
▶Display the context menu for the work area, and then click Background
Color.
Showing or Hiding Specific View Elements
▶From the View menu, click the item to show or hide. You can choose items
such as the 3D box, axes, box end values, and legend.
Setting the Visual Attributes of the Box and Axes
1. Display the context menu for the box, and then click Attributes. You can set
the following attributes.
- Show or hide tic labels
- Show or hide end values
- Show or hide arrows on axes
- Show 3D or 2D arrow heads
2. Set the attributes as you like, and then press Enter to accept the changes.
Shrinking or Magnifying the 3D View
▶From the Range/Zoom menu, click ShrinkBox or MagnifyBox.
To Change the 3D Aspect Ratio:
1. From the Range/Zoom menu, click Aspect Ratio.
2. Enter values for the x, y, and z axes. The default value for each axis is1.
3DGraphs 317
318 3DGraphs
Changing the Range Settings
▶On the Range/Zoom menu, click RangeSettings. You can set the following
parameters.
- XMin (default=-5)
XMax (default=5)
XScale (default=Auto) You can enter a numeric value.
- YMin (default=-5)
YMax (default=5)
YScale (default=Auto) You can enter a numeric value.
- ZMin (default=-5)
ZMax (default=5)
ZScale (default=Auto) You can enter a numeric value.
- eye q¡ (default=35)
eye f¡ (default=160)
eye distance (default=11)
Tracing in the 3D View
1. From the Trace menu, select zTrace.
The z Trace icon and the trace plane appear, along with a text line
showing the current "z=" trace value.
2. To move the trace, hold down Shift and press the up or down arrow key.
The "z=" text is updated as you move.
3. (Optional) Use the four arrow keys to rotate the view and see how the trace
plane and the graph intersect.
4. To stop tracing and return to the Pointer tool, press Esc.
Changing the Trace Settings
1. From the Trace menu, select TraceSetup.
The 3D Trace Setup dialog box opens.
2. Enter or select the settings, and click OK to apply them.
3. If you are not already tracing, your new settings take effect the next time
you trace.
Example: Creating an Animated 3D Graph
1. Insert a new problem and select the 3D Graphing view.
2. From the Actions menu, select InsertSlider, click to position it, and type
time as the variable name.
3. Display the slider’s context menu, click Settings, and enter the following
values.
Value: 3.8
Minimum: 3.2
Maximum: 4.4
Step Size: 0.1
4. In the entry line, define the function shown here:
5. Drag the slider thumb to see the effect of varying time.
3DGraphs 319
320 3DGraphs
6. Add visual interest. For example:
-Change the background color of the work area.
-Hide the box, axes, or legend.
-Automatically rotate the graph.
-Change the graph's fill color and hide its lines.
- Change the graph’s transparency and shading.
7. To animate the graph, display the slider’s context menu, and click Animate.
(To stop, click StopAnimate from the context menu.)
You can combine manual or auto rotation with the slider animation.
Experiment with the x and y resolution to balance curve definition against
animation smoothness.
Geometry Application
The Geometry application lets you:
• Create and explore geometric objects and constructions.
• Manipulate and measure geometric objects.
• Animate points on objects and explore their behavior.
• Explore object transformations.
Adding a Geometry Page
▶To start a new document with a blank Geometry page:
From the main File menu, click New Document, and then click Add
Geometry.
Handheld: Press c, and select Geometry .
▶To add a Geometry page in the current problem of an existing document:
From the toolbar, click Insert > Geometry.
Handheld: Press ~and select Insert > Geometry.
ÀGeometry menu – Available anytime you are viewing a Geometry page.
ÁGeometry work area -- The area where you create and explore geometric
objects.
Geometry Application 321
322 Geometry Application
What You Must Know
Changing the Graphs and Geometry Settings
1. From the Settings menu, select Settings.
2. Select the settings that you want to use.
-Display Digits. Sets the display format for numbers as Floating or Fixed
decimal.
-Graphing Angle. Sets angle unit for the Graphs application only. To
use the current Document Settings, set this to Auto.
-Geometry Angle. Sets angle unit for the Geometry application only. To
use the current Document Settings, set this to Auto.
-Automatically hide plot labels. In the Graphs application, hides the
label that normally appears next to a graphed relation.
-Show axis end values. Applies only in the Graphs application.
-Show tool tips for function manipulation. Applies only in the Graphs
application.
-Automatically find points of interest. In the Graphs application, shows
zeros, minima, and maxima while tracing function graphs.
- Click Restore to restore all settings to their factory defaults.
- Click Make Default to apply the current settings to the open document
and save them as the default for new Graphs and Geometry
documents.
Using Context Menus
Context menus provide quick access to commonly used commands and tools
that apply to a specific object. For example, you can use a context menu to
change an object's line color or to group a set of selected objects.
▶Display the context menu for an object in one of the following ways.
- Windows®: Right-click the object.
- Mac®: Hold “and click the object.
- Handheld: Move the pointer to the object, and then press / b.
Finding Hidden Objects in the Graphs or Geometry Application
You can hide and show individual graphs, geometric objects, text, labels,
measurements, and axis end-values.
To temporarily view hidden graphs or objects or to restore them as shown
objects:
1. From the Actions menu, select Hide/Show.
The Hide/Show tool appears in the work area, and all hidden objects
become visible in dimmed colors.
2. Click a graph or object to toggle its Hide/Show state.
3. To apply the changes and close the Hide/Show tool, press ESC.
Inserting a Background Image
You can insert an image as a background for a GraphsorGeometry page. The
file format of the image can be .bmp, .jpg, or .png.
1. From the Insert menu, click Image.
2. Navigate to the image you want to insert, select it, and then click Open.
For information on moving, resizing, and deleting a background image, see
Working with Images in the Software
.
Adding Text to the Graphs or Geometry Work Area
1. From the Actions menu, select Text.
The Text tool appears in the work area.
2. Click the location for the text.
3. Type the text in the box that appears, and then press Enter.
4. To close the Text tool, press ESC.
Geometry Application 323
324 Geometry Application
5. To edit the text, double-click it.
Deleting a Relation and its Graph
1. Select the relation by clicking its graph.
2. Press Backspace or DEL.
The graph is removed from both the work area and the graph history.
Introduction to Geometric Objects
Geometry tools are accessible in both the Graphs and Geometry applications.
You can use these tools to draw and investigate objects such as points, lines,
and shapes.
• The Graphing view shows the Graphs work area superimposed on the
Geometry work area. You can select, measure, and alter objects in both
work areas.
• The Plane Geometry view shows only the objects created in the Geometry
application.
Objects Created in the Graphs Application
Points, lines, and shapes created in the Graphs application are analytic
objects.
• All points that define these objects reside on the x,y graph plane. Objects
created here are visible only in the Graphs application. Changing the axes
scale affects the appearance of the objects.
• You can display and edit the coordinates of any point on an object.
• You can display the equation of a line, tangent line, circle shape, or
geometric conic created in the Graphs application.
The circle arc and polygon were created in the Geometry application. The sine
wave and conic were created in the Graphs application.
Objects Created in the Geometry Application
Points, lines, and shapes created in the Geometry application are not analytic
objects.
• Points that define these objects do not reside on the graph plane. Objects
created here are visible in both the Graphs and Geometry applications, but
they are unaffected by changes to the Graphs x,y axes.
• You cannot obtain the coordinates of an object’s points.
• You cannot display the equation of a geometric object created in the
Geometry application
Geometry Application 325
326 Geometry Application
Creating Points and Lines
As you create an object, a tool appears in the work area (for example, Segment
). To cancel, press ESC.
Creating a Point on the Work Area
1. From the PointsandLines menu, select Point. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > PointsandLines > Point.)
2. Click a location to create the point.
3. (Optional) Label the point.
4. To move a point, drag it.
Creating a Point on a Graph or Object
You can create a point on a line, segment, ray, axis, vector, circle, graph, or
axis.
1. From the PointsandLines menu, select Point On. (In the Graphs
application, click Geometry > PointsandLines > Point On.)
2. Click the graph or object on which you want to create the point.
3. Click a location on the object to place the point.
Identifying Points of Intersection
1. From the PointsandLines menu, select Intersection Points. (In the Graphs
application, click Geometry > PointsandLines > Intersection Points.)
2. Click two intersecting objects to add points at their intersections.
Creating a Line
1. From the PointsandLines menu, select Line. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > PointsandLines > Line.)
2. Click a location to define one point on the line.
3. Click a second location to define the direction of the line and the length of
its visible portion.
Geometry Application 327
328 Geometry Application
4. To move a line, drag its identifying point. To rotate it, drag any point except
the identifying point or ends. To extend its visible portion, drag from either
end.
Creating a Segment
1. From the PointsandLines menu, select Segment. (In the Graphs
application, click Geometry > PointsandLines > Segment.)
2. Click two locations to define the endpoints of the segment.
3. To move a segment, drag any point other than an endpoint. To manipulate
the direction or length, drag either endpoint.
Creating a Ray
1. From the PointsandLines menu, select Ray. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > PointsandLines > Ray.)
2. Click a location to define the endpoint of the ray.
3. Click a second location to define the direction.
To move a ray, drag its identifying point. To rotate it, drag any point except
the identifying point or end. To extend its visible portion, drag from the end.
Creating a Tangent
You can create a tangent line at a specific point on a geometric object or
function graph.
1. From the PointsandLines menu, select Tangent. (In the Graphs
application, click Geometry > PointsandLines > Tangent.)
2. Click the object to select it.
3. Click a location on the object to create the tangent.
4. To move a tangent, drag it. It remains attached to the object or graph.
Creating a Vector
1. From the PointsandLines menu, select Vector. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > PointsandLines > Vector.)
Geometry Application 329
330 Geometry Application
2. Click a location to establish the vector's initial point.
3. Click a second location to specify direction and magnitude and complete
the vector.
4. To move a vector, drag any point other than the endpoints. To manipulate
the magnitude and/or direction, drag either end point.
Note: If you create an endpoint on an axis or another object, you can move
the endpoint only along that object.
Creating a Circle Arc
1. From the PointsandLines menu, select Circle Arc. (In the Graphs
application, click Geometry > PointsandLines > Circle Arc.)
2. Click a location or point to establish the starting point of the arc.
3. Click a second point to establish an intermediate point through which the
arc will pass.
4. Click a third point to set the ending point and complete the arc.
5. To move an arc, drag its perimeter. To manipulate it, drag any of its three
defining points.
Creating Geometric Shapes
The Shape tools let you explore circles, polygons, conics, and other geometric
objects.
As you create a shape, a tool appears in the work area (for example,Circle ).
To cancel the shape, press ESC.
Creating a Circle
1. From the Shapes menu, select Circle. (In the Graphs application, click
Geometry > Shapes > Circle.)
2. Click a location or point to position the circle’s center point.
3. Click a location or point to establish the radius and complete the circle.
4. To resize a circle, drag its perimeter. To move it, drag its center point.
Creating a Triangle
1. From the Shapes menu, select Triangle. (In the Graphs application, click
Geometry > Shapes > Triangle.)
2. Click three locations to establish the vertices of the triangle.
Geometry Application 331
332 Geometry Application
3. To manipulate a triangle, drag any point. To move it, drag any side.
Creating a Rectangle
1. From the Shapes menu, select Rectangle. (In the Graphs application, click
Geometry > Shapes > Rectangle.)
2. Click a location or point to establish the first corner of the rectangle.
3. Click a location for the second corner.
One side of the rectangle is displayed.
4. Click to establish the distance to the opposite side and complete the
rectangle.
5. To rotate a rectangle, drag one of its first two points. To extend it, drag one
of the last two points. To move it, drag any side.
Creating a Polygon
1. From the Shapes menu, select Polygon. (In the Graphs application, click
Geometry > Shapes > Polygon.)
2. Click a location or point to establish the first vertex of the polygon.
3. Click to establish each additional vertex.
4. To complete the polygon, click the first vertex.
5. To manipulate a polygon, drag any vertex. To move it, drag any side.
Creating a Regular Polygon
1. From the Shapes menu, select Regular Polygon. (In the Graphs
application, click Geometry > Shapes > Regular Polygon.)
2. Click once on the work area to establish the center point.
3. Click a second location to establish the first vertex and radius.
A 16-sided regular polygon is formed. The number of sides is displayed in
brackets; for example, {16}.
4. Drag any vertex in a circular motion to set the number of sides.
- Drag clockwise to reduce the number of sides.
- Drag counterclockwise to add diagonals.
5. To resize or rotate a regular polygon, drag any of its points. To move it,
drag any side.
Creating an Ellipse
1. From the Shapes menu, select Ellipse. (In the Graphs application, click
Geometry > Shapes > Ellipse.)
2. Click two locations or points to establish the foci.
3. Click to establish a point on the ellipse and complete the shape.
Geometry Application 333
334 Geometry Application
4. To manipulate an ellipse, drag any of its three defining points. To move it,
drag its perimeter.
Creating a Parabola (from focus and vertex)
1. From the Shapes menu, select Parabola. (In the Graphs application, click
Geometry > Shapes > Parabola.)
2. Click a location to establish the focus.
3. Click a location to establish the vertex and complete the parabola.
4. To manipulate a parabola, drag its focus or its vertex. To move it, drag it
from any other point.
Creating a Parabola (from focus and directrix)
1. Create a line to serve as the directrix.
2. From the Shapes menu, select Parabola. (In the Graphs application, click
Geometry > Shapes > Parabola.)
3. Click a location to establish the focus.
4. Click the line to establish it as the directrix.
5. To manipulate a parabola, rotate or move its directrix or drag its focus. To
move it, select both the directrix and the focus, and then drag either object.
Creating a Hyperbola
1. From the Shapes menu, select Hyperbola. (In the Graphs application, click
Geometry > Shapes > Hyperbola.)
2. Click two locations to establish the foci.
3. Click a third location to complete the hyperbola.
4. To manipulate a hyperbola, drag any of its three defining points. To move
it, drag it from any other place on the shape.
Creating a Conic by Five Points
1. From the Shapes menu, select ConicbyFivePoints. (In the Graphs
application, click Geometry > Shapes > ConicbyFivePoints.)
2. Click five locations to establish the five points on the shape.
Depending on the pattern of the points, the conic can be a hyperbola or an
ellipse.
Geometry Application 335
336 Geometry Application
3. To manipulate a conic, drag any of its five defining points. To move it, drag
it from any other place on the shape.
Basics of Working with Objects
Selecting and Deselecting Objects
You can select an individual object or multiple objects. Select multiple objects
when you want to quickly move, color, or delete them together.
1. Click an object or graph to select it.
The object flashes to indicate selection.
2. Click any additional objects to add them to the selection.
3. Perform the operation (such as moving or setting color).
4. To deselect all objects, click an empty space in the work area.
Grouping and Ungrouping Geometric Objects
Grouping objects gives you a way to reselect them as a set, even after you
have deselected them to work with other objects.
1. Click each object to add it to the current selection.
The selected objects flash.
2. Display a context menu of the selected object or objects.
3. Click Group. You can now select all the items in the group by clicking any
of its members.
4. To split a group into individual objects, display a context menu of any of its
member objects, and click Ungroup.
Deleting Objects
1. Display the context menu of the object or objects.
2. Click Delete.
You cannot delete the origin, the axes, or points representing locked
variables, even if those items are included in the selection.
Moving Objects
You can move an object, group, or combination of selected objects and groups.
Note: If an immovable object (such as the graph axes or a point with locked
coordinates) is included in a selection or group, you cannot move any of the
objects. You must cancel the selection and then select only movable items.
To move
this...
Drag this
A multiple-
object selection
or group
Any of its objects
A point The point
A segment or
vector
Any point other than an endpoint
A line or ray The identifying point
A circle The center point
Other geometric
shapes
Any position on the object except one of its defining
points. For example, move a polygon by dragging any of
its sides.
Constraining Object Movement
Holding down the SHIFT key before dragging lets you constrain how certain
objects are drawn, moved, or manipulated.
Use the constraint feature to:
• Rescale only a single axis in the Graphs application.
Geometry Application 337
338 Geometry Application
• Pan the work area horizontally or vertically, depending on which direction
you drag initially.
• Limit object movement to horizontal or vertical.
• Limit point placement to 15°increments as you draw a triangle, rectangle,
or polygon.
• Limit angle manipulations to 15°increments.
• Limit the radius of a resized circle to integer values.
Pinning Objects
Pinning objects prevents accidental changes as you move or manipulate other
objects.
You can pin graphed functions, geometric objects, text objects, the graph axes,
and the background.
1. Select the object or objects to pin, or click an empty area if you are pinning
the background.
2. Display the context menu, and select Pin.
A pinned object displays a pin icon when you point to it.
3. To unpin an object, display its context menu, and select Unpin.
Notes:
• Although you cannot drag a pinned point, you can reposition it by editing
its x and y coordinates.
• You cannot pan the work area while the background is pinned.
Changing the Line or Fill Color of an Object
Color changes made in the software are displayed in shades of gray when you
work on documents using a TI-Nspire™ handheld that does not support color.
Color is preserved when you move documents back to the software.
1. Select the object or objects.
2. Display the object’s context menu, click Color, and then click LineColor or
FillColor.
3. Select the color to apply to the objects.
Changing the Appearance of an Object
1. From the Actions menu, select Attributes.
2. Click the object that you want to change. You can change shapes, lines,
graphs, or graph axes.
The list of the attributes for the selected object are displayed.
3. Press 9and:to move through the list of attributes.
4. At each attribute icon, press 7or8to move through the options. For
example, select Thick, Thin, or Medium for the Line Weight attribute.
5. Press Enter to apply the changes.
6. Press ESC to close the Attributes tool.
Labeling Points, Geometric Lines, and Shapes
1. Display the context menu of the object.
2. Click Label.
3. Type the text of the label, and then press Enter.
The label attaches itself to the object and follows the object as you move it.
The label's color matches the object's color.
Measuring Objects
Measurement values update automatically as you manipulate the measured
object.
Note: Measurements of objects created in the Graphs application are displayed
in generic units namedu. Measurements of objects created in the Geometry
application are displayed in centimeters (cm).
Geometry Application 339
340 Geometry Application
Measuring Length of a Segment, Circle Arc, or Vector
1. From the Measurement menu, select Length. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > Measurement > Length.)
2. Click the object to display its length.
Measuring Distance Between Two Points, a Point and a Line, or a
Point and a Circle
1. From the Measurement menu, select Length. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > Measurement > Length.)
2. Click the first point.
3. Click the second point or a point on the line or circle.
In this example, length is measured from the center
of the circle to the upper left vertex of the polygon.
Measuring Circumference of a Circle or Ellipse or the Perimeter of a
Polygon, Rectangle, or Triangle
1. From the Measurement menu, select Length. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > Measurement > Length.)
2. Click the object to display its circumference or perimeter.
Measuring a Side of a Triangle, Rectangle, or Polygon
1. From the Measurement menu, select Length. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > Measurement > Length.)
2. Click two points on the object that form the side you want to measure.
Note: You must click two points to measure a side. Clicking the side
measures the entire length of the object's perimeter.
Measuring Area of a Circle, Ellipse, Polygon, Rectangle, or Triangle
Note: You cannot measure the area of a polygon constructed using the
Segment tool.
1. From the Measurement menu, select Area. (In the Graphs application, click
Geometry > Measurement > Area.)
2. Click the object to display its area.
Geometry Application 341
342 Geometry Application
Measuring Slope of a Line, Ray, Segment, or Vector
1. From the Measurement menu, select Slope. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > Measurement > Slope.)
2. Click the object to display its slope.
The value is updated automatically when you manipulate the object.
Measuring Angles
Measured angles in the Geometry application range from 0°to 180°. Measured
angles in the Graphs application range from 0 radians to πradians. To change
the angle unit, use the Settings menu.
1. From the Measurement menu, select Angle. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > Measurement > Angle.)
2. Click three locations or points to define the angle. The second click defines
the vertex.
Moving a Measured Value
▶Drag the measurement to the desired location.
Note: If you move a measurement too far from its object, it stops following
the object. However, its value continues to be updated as you manipulate
the object.
Editing a Measured Length
You can set the length of a side of a Triangle, Rectangle, or Polygon by editing
its measured value.
▶Double-click the measurement, and then enter the new value.
Storing a Measured Value as a Variable
Use this method to create a variable and assign a measured value to it.
1. Display the item's context menu, and select Store.
2. Type a variable name for the stored measurement.
Linking a Measured Length to an Existing Variable
Use this method to assign a measured length value to an existing variable.
1. Display the measurement's context menu, and select Variables > Link to.
The menu shows the list of currently defined variables.
2. Click the name of the variable you want to link to.
Geometry Application 343
344 Geometry Application
Deleting a Measurement
▶Display the measurement's context menu, and select Delete.
Locking or Unlocking a Measurement
1. Display the measurement's context menu, and select Attributes.
2. Use the up/down arrow keys to highlight the Lock attribute.
3. Use the left/right arrow keys to close or open the lock.
As long as the value remains locked, manipulations are not allowed that
would require the measurement to change.
Transforming Objects
You can apply transformations to drawn objects in both the Graphs and
Geometry applications.
Exploring Symmetry
1. From the Transformation menu, select Symmetry. (In the Graphs
application, click Geometry > Transformation > Symmetry.)
2. Click the object whose symmetry you want to explore.
3. Click a location or existing point to establish the point of symmetry.
A symmetrical image of the object is displayed.
4. Manipulate the original object or the point of symmetry to explore the
symmetry.
Exploring Reflection
1. Create a line or segment to predefine the line about which the object will
be reflected.
2. From the Transformation menu, select Reflection. (In the Graphs
application, click Geometry > Transformation > Reflection.)
3. Click the object whose reflection you want to explore.
4. Click the predefined reflection line or segment.
A reflected image of the object is displayed.
5. Manipulate the original object or the line of symmetry to explore the
reflection.
Exploring Translation
1. (Optional) Create a vector to predefine the distance and direction of
translation.
2. From the Transformation menu, select Translation. (In the Graphs
application, click Geometry > Transformation > Translation.)
3. Click the object whose translation you want to explore.
4. Click the predefined vector.
—or—
Click two locations on the work area to indicate the direction and distance
of translation.
A translated image of the object is displayed.
5. Manipulate the original object or the vector to explore the translation.
Geometry Application 345
346 Geometry Application
Exploring Rotation
1. (Optional) Create an angle measurement to serve as a predefined angle of
rotation.
2. From the Transformation menu, select Rotation. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > Transformation > Rotation.)
3. Click the object whose rotation you want to explore.
4. Click a location or point to define the point of rotation.
5. Click the points of the predefined angle.
—or—
Click three locations to define an angle of rotation.
A rotated image of the object is displayed.
6. Manipulate the original object or the point of rotation to explore the
rotation.
Exploring Dilation
1. Create a Text object containing a numeric value to serve as a predefined
dilation factor.
Note: You can also use a measured length value as the dilation factor.
Keep in mind that if you use a large value, you may have to pan the
display to view the dilated object.
2. From the Transformation menu, select Dilation. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > Transformation > Dilation.)
3. Click the object whose dilation you want to explore.
4. Click a location or existing point to define the center point of dilation.
5. Click the Text object or measurement that defines the dilation factor.
A dilated image of the object is displayed.
6. Manipulate the original object or the center point of dilation to explore the
dilation. You can also edit the dilation factor.
Exploring with Geometric Construction Tools
While a construction is in progress, a tool appears in the work area (for
example, Parallel ). To cancel, press ESC.
Creating a Midpoint
This tool lets you bisect a segment or define a midpoint between any two
points. The points can be on a single object, on separate objects, or on the
work area.
1. From the Construction menu, select Midpoint. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > Construction > Midpoint.)
2. Click a point or location to define the first point.
3. Click a second point or location to complete the midpoint.
Geometry Application 347
348 Geometry Application
Creating a Parallel Line
This tool creates a parallel line with respect to any existing line. The existing
line can be a Graphs axis or any side of a triangle, square, rectangle, or
polygon.
1. From the Construction menu, select Parallel. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > Construction > Parallel.)
2. Click the object that will serve as the reference line.
3. Click a location to create the parallel line.
You can drag the parallel line to move it. If you manipulate the reference
object, the line remains parallel.
Creating a Perpendicular Line
You can create a line that is perpendicular to a reference line. The reference
can be an axis, an existing line, a segment, or one side of a triangle, rectangle,
or polygon.
1. From the Construction menu, select Perpendicular. (In the Graphs
application, click Geometry > Construction > Perpendicular.)
2. Click a location or existing point through which the perpendicular line
should pass.
3. Click the item that will serve as the reference line.
You can drag the intersection point to move the perpendicular. If you
manipulate the reference object, the line remains perpendicular.
Creating a Perpendicular Bisector
You can create a perpendicular bisector on a segment, on one side of a
triangle, rectangle, or polygon, or between any two points.
1. From the Construction menu, select PerpendicularBisector. (In the Graphs
application, click Geometry > Construction > PerpendicularBisector.)
2. Click the item that will serve as the reference line.
—or—
Click two points to create a perpendicular bisector between them.
Bisecting an Angle
This tool creates an angle bisector. The points of the angle can be on existing
objects, or they can be locations on the work area.
1. From the Construction menu, select AngleBisector. (In the Graphs
application, click Geometry > Construction > AngleBisector.)
2. Click three locations or points to define the angle. The second click defines
the vertex of the angle.
Geometry Application 349
350 Geometry Application
The angle bisector adjusts automatically as you manipulate its defining
points.
Creating a Locus
The Locus tool enables you to explore the range of motion of one object with
respect to another object as constrained by a shared point.
1. Create a segment, line, or circle.
2. Create a point on the segment, line, or circle.
3. Create another object that uses the point created in the previous step.
Circle created to use the defined
point on the segment.
4. From the Construction menu, select Locus. (In the Graphs application, click
Geometry > Construction > Locus.)
5. Click the point shared by the objects.
6. Click the object defined to share the point (this is the object to vary).
The continuous locus is displayed.
Creating a Compass
This tool operates similarly to a geometric compass used for drawing circles on
paper.
1. From the Construction menu, select Compass. (In the Graphs application,
click Geometry > Construction > Compass.)
2. To set the width (radius) of the compass:
Click a segment.
—or—
Click any side of a triangle, rectangle, polygon, or regular polygon.
Geometry Application 351
352 Geometry Application
—or—
Click any two existing points or locations on the work area.
3. Click a location to establish the center of the circle and complete the
construction.
The radius adjusts automatically as you manipulate the original segment,
side, or points used to define the radius.
Using Geometry Trace
The Geometry Trace tool leaves a visible trail of a geometric object or function
graph as it is moved or manipulated. The movement can be done manually or
by using animation. This tool is accessible in both the Graphs and Geometry
applications.
1. From the Trace menu, select GeometryTrace.
The Geometry Trace tool appears.
2. Click the object or function that you want to trace to select it.
3. Drag the object, or play the animation.
This example shows traces of a graphed function manipulated by dragging
and a triangle manipulated by animation.
Note: You cannot select or manipulate the trace trail.
4. To erase all trails, select EraseGeometryTrace from the Trace menu.
5. To stop tracing, press Esc.
Conditional Attributes
You can cause objects to hide, show, and change color dynamically, based on
specified conditions such as "r1<r2" or "sin(a1)>=cos(a2)."
For example, you might want to hide an object based on a changing
measurement that you have assigned to a variable, or you might want an
object’s color to change based on a "Calculate" result assigned to a variable.
Conditional behaviors can be assigned to objects or groups in the Graphing,
Plane Geometry, and 3D Graphing views.
Setting Conditional Attributes of an Object
You can set conditions of a selected object either by using its context menu or
by activating the Set Conditions tool from the Actions menu and then selecting
the object. These instructions describe using the context menu.
1. Select the object or group.
2. Display the object’s context menu, and click Conditions.
The conditional attributes are displayed.
Geometry Application 353
354 Geometry Application
For 2D objects For 3D objects
3. (Optional) In the Show When field, enter an expression specifying the
conditions during which the object will be shown. Anytime the condition is
not satisfied, the object will be hidden.
You can specify tolerance by using compound conditionals in the Show
When input field. For example, area>=4andarea<=6.
Note: If you need to see conditionally hidden objects temporarily, click
Actions>Hide/Show. To return to normal viewing, press ESC.
4. (Optional) Enter numbers or expressions that evaluate to numbers in the
applicable color fields, such as Line Color or Mesh Color. To see a map of
color values, click the Colors button.
Map of conditional color values
5. Click OK in the Conditional Attributes dialog box to apply the conditions.
Hiding Objects in the Geometry Application
The Hide/Show tool reveals objects you have previously selected as hidden
and lets you select which objects to show or hide.
1. From the Actions menu, select Hide/Show.
The Hide/Show tool appears, and currently hidden items (if any) are
shown dimmed.
2. Click objects to toggle their hide/show status.
3. Press Esc to complete your selections and close the tool.
All objects you selected as hidden objects disappear.
4. To view the hidden objects temporarily or restore them as shown objects,
open the Hide/Show tool.
Customizing the Geometry Work Area
Inserting a Background Image
You can insert an image as a background for any Graphs or Geometry page.
1. From the Insert menu, click Image.
2. Navigate to the image you want to insert, select it, and then click Open.
Geometry Application 355
356 Geometry Application
Adding a Text Object to the Work Area
Use the Text tool to add numeric values, formulas, observations, or other
explanatory information to the Geometry work area.
1. From the Actions menu, select Text.
2. Click the location for the text.
3. Type the text in the box that appears, and then press Enter.
To move a text object, drag it. To edit the text, double-click it. To delete a text
object, display its context menu, and select Delete.
Changing the Attributes of Numeric Text
If you enter a numeric value as text, you can lock it or set its format and
displayed precision.
1. From the Actions menu, select Attributes.
2. Click the numeric text to display its list of attributes.
3. Press 9and:to move through the list.
4. At each attribute icon, press 7or8to move through the options. For
example, select 0through 9as the precision.
5. Press Enter to apply the changes.
6. Press Esc to close the Attributes tool.
Animating Points on Objects
You can animate any point created as a point on an object or graph. Multiple
points can be animated simultaneously.
Animating a Point
1. From the Actions menu, select Attributes.
2. Click the point to display its attributes.
3. Press ▼to select the animation attributes.
4. Press ◄or►to choose either unidirectional or alternating animation.
5. Type a value to set the animation speed. Any nonzero speed begins the
animation. To reverse the direction, enter a negative value.
6. Press Enter to display the animation controls .
7. Press ESC to close the Attributes tool.
Pausing and Resuming All Animations
▶To pause all animations on a page, click Pause .
▶To resume all animations, click Play .
Resetting All Animations
Resetting pauses all animations and returns all animated points to the
positions they occupied when they were first animated.
▶To reset animation, click Reset .
Changing or Stopping the Animation of a Point
1. Click Reset to stop all animation.
2. From the Actions menu, select Attributes.
3. Click the point to display its attributes.
4. Select the animation attribute, and type a new animation speed. To stop
the point’s animation, enter zero.
Note: If other animated points exist, the animation controls remain in the
work area.
Adjusting Variable Values with a Slider
In the Graphs, Geometry, and Data&Statistics applications, a slider control lets
you adjust or animate the value of a numeric variable.
Geometry Application 357
358 Geometry Application
Horizontal slider for adjusting variable v1.
Minimized vertical slider for adjusting variable v2.
Inserting a Slider
1. Start in a Graphs, Geometry, or Data&Statistics page.
2. From the Actions menu, select Insert Slider.
The Slider Settings screen opens.
3. Enter desired values.
4. Click OK.
The slider is displayed in the work area. Handles on the slider let you
move or stretch it. To remove the handles, click an empty space in the work
area.
5. To adjust the variable, slide the pointer (or click the arrows on a minimized
slider).
Working with the Slider
Use the options on the context menu to move or delete the slider, and to start or
stop its animation. You can also change the slider's settings.
1. Display the slider's context menu.
Geometry Application 359
360 Geometry Application
2. Click an option to select it.
Using the Calculate Tool
The Calculate tool is available in the Graphs and Geometry applications. It lets
you evaluate a math expression you have entered as a text object. You can
edit an evaluated expression, and then re-evaluate it.
In the following example, a triangle is constructed and its angles are measured
using the Angle tool on the Measurements menu. The Calculate tool then adds
the angles.
1. Create an object and display measurements for it.
2. From the Actions menu, click Text.
3. Type the formula for the calculation. In this example, the formula adds the
measurements of the three angles.
4. From the Actions menu, click Calculate.
5. Click the formula you created.
You are prompted to select a value for each term in the formula.
6. Click each angle measurement when prompted.
Note: If you have stored a measurement as a variable, you can select it
when prompted by clicking . If the name of a stored measurement
matches a term in the formula, you can press “L” when prompted for that
term.
When all variables in the formula have values, the answer is displayed on
the work area.
7. Press Enter to anchor the result as a new text object.
Geometry Application 361
362
Lists&Spreadsheet Application
The Lists&Spreadsheet application gives you a place to work with tabular
data. It lets you:
• Store numeric data, text, or math expressions.
• Define a table cell in terms of the contents of other cells.
• Define an entire column based on the contents of another column.
• Share columns of data as list variables with other TI-Nspire™ applications.
Also share individual cells as variables.
• Work with variables created in the Graphs&Geometry and Calculator
applications.
• Collect tables of real-world data from sensors.
• Generate columns of data-based sequences that you define.
• Plot table data using the Data&Statistics application.
• Generate a table of values for a function.
• Copy and paste table data from the Lists&Spreadsheet application to
other computer applications, such as TI Connect™ software and Excel®
spreadsheet software.
• Perform statistical analysis on lists of data.
Adding a Lists&Spreadsheet Page
▶To start a new document with a blank Lists&Spreadsheet page:
From the main File menu, click New Document, and then click
Lists&Spreadsheet.
Handheld: Press c, and select Lists&Spreadsheet .
▶To add a Lists&Spreadsheet page in the current problem of an existing
document:
From the toolbar, click Insert > Lists&Spreadsheet.
Handheld: Press ~and select Insert >Lists&Spreadsheet.
Lists&Spreadsheet Application 363
364 Lists&Spreadsheet Application
ÀLists&Spreadsheet tools (available when a Lists&Spreadsheet
work area is active)
ÁSample Lists&Spreadsheet work area
ÂLists&Spreadsheet entry line
ÃLists&Spreadsheet data plotted in the Data&Statistics application
Creating and Sharing Spreadsheet Data as Lists
You can define a column as a named list of elements of the same type of data.
After defining a list, you can link to it from the Graphs&Geometry, Calculator,
or Data&Statistics applications, and from other instances of the
Lists&Spreadsheet application within the current problem.
Note: Lists&Spreadsheet can display a maximum of 2500 elements in a list.
Sharing a Spreadsheet Column as a List Variable
You share a column of data by naming it as a list variable.
Note: Avoid defining variables that use the same names as those used for
statistical analysis. In some cases, an error condition could occur.
Variable names used for statistical analysis are listed in the
TI-Nspire™
Reference Guide
, under the stat.results entry.
1. Click the cell to move to the column’s name cell (the top cell of the
column).
—or—
Press ▲as necessary.
2. Type a name for the list variable, and press Enter.
The column is now available as a list variable to other TI-Nspire™
applications.
3. Create elements in the list the same as you would create data in
spreadsheet cells. For example, you can type the data into each cell or use
a formula to generate a column of data.
Notes:
• If a variable with the name you specified already exists in the current
problem, Lists&Spreadsheet displays an error message.
• When you select the column formula cell of a list, it displays the list name
in an expression similar to width:=.
• Lists can contain empty elements (denoted by “_”) .
• You can refer to a specific element in a named list from the Calculator
application. Use the list name and the element’s position within the list. In
a list named Heights, for example, refer to the first element as Heights[1].
The expression Heights[2] refers to the second element, and so on.
Linking to an Existing List Variable
Linking a column to an existing list variable lets you easily view and edit the
values in the list. The list can be any shared list in the current problem and can
be defined in Graphs&Geometry, Calculator, or any instance of
Lists&Spreadsheet.
After you link a column to a list, Lists&Spreadsheet automatically shows any
changes that you make to the list with other TI-Nspire™ applications.
1. Click the column formula cell (the second cell from the top) of the column
that you want to link to the variable.
2. Type the name of the list variable you want to link to.
—or—
Click on the toolbar (press hon the handheld), click Link To, and
click the variable you want to link to.
3. Press Enter.
The column shows the list elements.
Notes:
Lists&Spreadsheet Application 365
366 Lists&Spreadsheet Application
• You cannot link to the same variable multiple times on the same page.
• Use caution if you link to a system variable. Doing so could prevent the
variable from being updated by the system. System variables include ans
and statistics results (such as stat.results,stat.RegEqn, and stat.Resid).
Inserting an Element in a List
When you insert an element in a list, the remaining elements shift downward to
create space. No other columns are affected.
▶Click Insert > Insert Cell.
Deleting an Element from a List
When you delete an element, the remaining list elements shift upward to close
the gap. The upward shift affects only the selected column.
1. Click the cell of the element to delete.
2. Open the context menu for the cell, and click Delete Cell.
Note: If you press Del or Backspace to clear the contents of the cell instead
of deleting the list element, the element is assigned a value of 0 (zero).
The remaining list elements do not shift.
Creating Spreadsheet Data
You can type numeric values, text, or formulas into body cells. Column formula
cells can contain formulas only. (For more information, see Generating
Columns of Data.)
Data Examples
Entry Remarks
1.234 Simple numeric entry
“Green” Text - Enclose categorical data (such as the names of colors
used in a study) within quotes to distinguish them from
variable names.
Handheld: Press / r to enter quoted data.
=a3*length Formula - Consists of an “=” symbol followed by an
Entry Remarks
expression.
You can type the expression or use the Catalog and
expression templates to build it. For more information, see the
Calculator
section.
To ensure a decimal result instead of a fraction, type one of
the integers in the expression as a decimal. For example,
type 1.0 instead of 1.
Typing a Math Expression, Text, or Spreadsheet Formula
1. Double-click the cell to select it and put it in edit mode.
Note: If the cell is already selected, you can press Enter or click the entry
line.
2. Type the expression, text, or formula. Be sure to enclose text entries in
quotes and start formula entries with an “=” symbol.
As you type the data, it appears in the cell and on the entry line
simultaneously.
3. Press Enter to complete the entry and move down to the next cell.
—or—
Press Tab to complete the entry and move right to the next cell.
The Lists&Spreadsheet application automatically recalculates any cells
that are dependent on the cell you entered. If you have shared the cell,
and other TI-Nspire™ applications are linked to the cell, the other
applications are also updated.
Note: Empty cells in a spreadsheet display as a void represented by an
underscore (_). The underscore is automatically added to empty cells
when a list is named or when an empty cell is referenced in a formula.
When you plan to perform calculations on a range of cells, be sure to
notice the location of void cells. Cells without a value can affect
calculations. For example, if you include a void cell in the range for a sum
such as “=b2+c2,” the result of the calculation is void(_).
Lists&Spreadsheet Application 367
368 Lists&Spreadsheet Application
Inserting a Cell Range into a Formula
The Select Range feature lets you insert a cell range (such as a1:b3) into a
formula by selecting the range instead of typing cell addresses into an
argument.
Suppose you want to calculate the mean of a range of cells.
1. Select the cell that will contain the result.
2. From the Data menu, click ListMath>Mean.
An editable formula appears in the cell.
3. Click Actions>Select>Select Formula Range.
4. Drag a selection rectangle around the range of values for which you want
to calculate the mean.
Handheld: Move to the first cell in the range, hold g, and press the
arrow keys.
The formula is updated as you select the cells.
5. Press Enter to complete the formula and display the result.
Navigating in a Spreadsheet
A spreadsheet includes a column letter at the top of each column and a row
number on the left of each row. The top two rows and the row numbers remain
in place as you scroll. You can name a column of data to make it available as a
list variable in TI-Nspire™ applications.
ÀColumn reference letter
ÁColumn name cell for defining a column as a list variable
ÂColumn formula cell for generating a column of data
Lists&Spreadsheet Application 369
370 Lists&Spreadsheet Application
ÃRow reference number
ÄBody Cells - Any empty (void) element in a list is displayed as an
underscore (“_”). Any value that cannot fit in a cell’s width is truncated
(143489...). Hover over the cell to display the complete value.
ÅEntry line (includes cell reference for current cell)
You can select any cell to view or edit its contents. When a spreadsheet is
larger than the Lists&Spreadsheet work area, you can move to different parts
of the spreadsheet by using the Tab key and by pressing shortcut keys.
▶Press Tab to move between the body of the spreadsheet (data zone) and
the column names and formulas (naming zone).
▶Press ◄,►,▲, and ▼to move through the spreadsheet one cell at a time
(move between cells within a zone). The arrow keys move the cursor from
cell to cell and scroll as necessary to keep the selected cell in view.
▶Move across several cells at a time by pressing Page up,Page Dn,Home,
and End.
Handheld: Press / 9(Pageup), / 3 (PageDn), / 7 (Home),
and / 1 (End) keys.
▶Use the Go To command on the Actions menu to select a specific cell. Type
the cell’s column letter and row number (such as G16).
▶Press Enter to put the selected cell in Edit mode.
▶Drag the scroll bar to move vertically without changing the cell or block of
cells selected.
Working with Cells
Working with Color
The Lists&Spreadsheet application displays black text and cells with a white
background by default. You can change the color of cells and text to
emphasize or distinguish data. The colors and the order in which color is
assigned is based on the TI-Nspire™ color palette.
Color changes made in the software are displayed in shades of gray when you
work on documents on the TI-Nspire™ handheld. Color is preserved when you
move documents back to the software.
Changing the Fill Color of Cells
1. Select the cells to fill with color. You can choose one or more cells in any
adjacent cells, columns, or rows.
2. Access the context menu and click Color > Fill Color.
3. Click the color to apply to the cells.
Note: If you combine color text and color cells, choose colors carefully to
ensure visibility as you work with documents in the software and on the
handheld.
Changing the Color of Text
1. Select the cells that contain the text to change. You can choose one or
more cells in any adjacent cells, columns, or rows.
2. Access the context menu and click Color > Text Color.
3. Click the color to apply to the text. Empty cells in the selection area show
the color change when text is added.
Understanding Cell References in Formulas
Use a cell reference to use data from a cell or range of cells in a formula. The
calculation results update automatically when values in cells change.
Relative references include only the cell’s column letter and row number (for
example, E7). A relative reference describes where a cell is in relation to other
cells of the spreadsheet. The Lists&Spreadsheet application keeps track of
relative cell references and adjusts the reference automatically when
surrounding cells shift (because of actions you perform, such as column
deletions or cell insertions).
Follow these guidelines to specify cell references:
• Include a column letter and row number in a relative reference.
• Include the $symbol before both the column letter and the row number to
specify an absolute reference.
• Include a colon (:) between a two cell reference to specify a range of cells.
Absolute references include the $symbol before the column letter and before
the row number (for example, $B$16). Absolute references always refer to the
cell in a specific position in the spreadsheet. The application does not
automatically adjust the cell reference when cell positions change.
Lists&Spreadsheet Application 371
372 Lists&Spreadsheet Application
Typing a Cell Reference in a Formula
1. Double-click the cell and type the formula. For more information, see the
Calculator
section.
2. Move to the appropriate position in the formula and type the cell reference.
Use the format for a relative reference (B3), absolute reference ($B$2), or
range of cells (A1:A4).
Note: You can click Recalculate on the Actions menu to update all
references and formula results in a spreadsheet.
Deleting the Contents of Cells
1. Click a cell to select it.
—or—
Use the arrow keys to move to the cell.
Note: If you are deleting a range of cells, select a cell at one end or corner
of the range, and then use Shift with the arrow keys to select the remaining
cells in the range.
2. Press Del.
Note: Any cell that uses a formula with an absolute reference to deleted
data shows an error. A cell that uses a formula with a relative reference to
deleted data is updated to use the data currently in the referenced
position.
Copying Cells
When you copy cells, any formulas in the original cells are copied to the
destination cells.
1. Click the cell to copy.
—or—
Use the arrow keys to move to the cell.
Note: If you are copying a range of cells, select a cell at one end or corner
of the range, and then use Shift with the arrow keys to select the remaining
cells in the range.
2. Use the standard key shortcut for copying a selection.
Windows®: Press Ctrl+C.
Mac®: Press “+C.
Handheld: Press / C.
3. Click the cell where you want to duplicate the copied cell. If you are
copying a block of data, click the cell that will become the upper left corner
of the copied block.
4. Paste the selected cells:
Windows®: Press Ctrl+V.
Mac®: Press “+V.
Handheld: Press / V.
Important: Paste copied data into a cell that is in the same mode as the
cell from which the data was originally copied. Otherwise, a formula could
paste as a string enclosed in quotes instead of a formula.
Filling Adjacent Cells
You can repeat a cell’s formula or value throughout adjacent cells within the
row or column. You can also repeat a range of cells horizontally or vertically. If
you fill from a range that contains a simple sequence (such as 2, 4, 6), the
sequence continues in the filled cells.
1. Click the cell that contains the value or formula to repeat.
Note: If you are repeating a range of cells, drag to select the range, or
select a cell at one end of the range, and then use Shift with the arrow keys
to select the remaining cells.
2. Click Data > Fill.
3. Use the arrow keys, or drag to select the range that will hold the
repetitions.
4. Press Enter.
The value, formula, or pattern that you selected for duplication is repeated
over the selected range.
Sharing a Cell Value as a Variable
You can share the value of a cell with other TI-Nspire™ applications by storing it
as a variable. When you define or refer to a shared cell or variable in
Lists&Spreadsheet, the name is preceded with an apostrophe(‘).
1. Click the cell that you want to share.
Lists&Spreadsheet Application 373
374 Lists&Spreadsheet Application
2. Click on the toolbar, and click Store Var to store the cell’s value.
Handheld: Press / h or press hand select Store Var).
A formula is inserted into the cell with var as a placeholder for a variable
name.
3. Type over the letters “var” with a name for the variable, and press Enter.
Use a variable name that does not exist in the current problem.
The value is shown in bold to indicate that it is now available as a variable
to other TI-Nspire™ applications.
Linking a Cell to a Variable
When you link a cell to a variable, Lists&Spreadsheet keeps the cell value
updated to reflect the current value of the variable. The variable can be any
variable in the current problem and can be defined in Graphs&Geometry,
Calculator, Data&Statistics, or any instance of Lists&Spreadsheet.
1. Click the cell that you want to link to a variable.
2. Click on the toolbar, and click Link to.
Handheld: Press / h or press hand select Link to.
The VarLink menu opens.
3. Under Link To, press ▲, and ▼to scroll to the name of the variable.
4. Press Enter.
The cell shows the value of the variable.
Note: Use caution if you link to a system variable. Linking could prevent the
variable from being updated by the system. System variables include statistics
results (such as Stat.RegEqn,Stat.dfError, and Stat.Resid) and finance-solver
variables (such as tvm.n,tvm.pmt, and tvm.fv).
Working with Rows and Columns of Data
Selecting a row or column
▶To select a column, move to the top of the column and click the column
reference letter. To select a row, move to the leftmost cell of the row and
click the row reference number. Press Esc to cancel the selection.
Handheld: Hold down ▲to move past the top cell, or hold down ◄to move
past the leftmost cell.
▶To extend a selection to adjacent rows or columns, hold down Shift and
press ◄,►,▲, or ▼.
Resizing a Row or Column
1. Click the row or column that you want to resize.
2. From the Actions menu, select Resize, and then select an option.
3. Choose a resizing option for a column or row.
- For a column, choose Resize Column Width,Maximize Column Width,
or Minimize Column Width.
- For a row, you can choose Resize Row Height.
The tools that minimize and maximize the column width work
automatically. You must manually adjust the size to use the Resize Column
Width and Resize Row Height tools.
4. To resize manually, use ◄and ►to resize the column, or use ▲and ▼to
resize the row, and then press Enter.
Inserting an Empty Row or Column
1. Click a column or row where you want to insert the new data.
2. From the Insert menu, select either Row or Column.
- If you are inserting a row, the remaining rows shift down to create
space for the new row.
- If you are inserting a column, the remaining columns shift right to
create space.
Note: If other cells contain formulas with relative references to a displaced
row or column, those references adjust accordingly.
Deleting Entire Rows or Columns
You can delete a row, column, group of rows, or group of columns. When you
delete a row or column, the remaining rows or columns move up or left to fill the
gap.
1. Click the column or row that you want to delete.
Lists&Spreadsheet Application 375
376 Lists&Spreadsheet Application
2. (Optional) To select adjacent rows or columns to delete, hold down Shift
and press ◄,►,▲, or ▼.
3. Display the context menu.
- Windows®: Right-click the selected row.
- Mac®: Hold the “key, and click the selected row.
- Handheld: Press / b.
4. On the context menu, select Delete Row.
The selected rows or columns are deleted.
Note: If other cells contain formulas that refer to the deleted row or column,
those cells show an error. Relative references to cells whose positions
have changed because of a deletion adjust accordingly.
Copying Rows or Columns
1. Click the row number to copy a row, or click the column letter to copy a
column.
2. (Optional) To select adjacent rows or columns to copy, hold down Shift and
press ◄,►,▲, or ▼.
3. Copy the row or column:
Windows®: Press Ctrl+C.
Mac®: Press “+C.
Handheld: Press / C.
4. Move to any cell in the row or column where you want to place the copied
items.
5. Paste the row or column:
Windows®: Press Ctrl+V.
Mac®: Press “+V.
Handheld: Press / V.
The copied row or column is pasted in place, replacing the previous
contents.
Note: If you copy a named column, it is pasted with the name removed to
prevent a variable conflict.
Moving a Column
1. Click the column that you want to move.
2. From the Actions menu, select Move Column.
An insertion bar appears.
3. Press ◄and ►to place the insertion bar at the column’s new position,
and then press Enter.
Note: Relative references to any cell in a position is affected by the move
adjust accordingly.
Displaying Results as Exact or Approximate
You can choose to display a column’s calculated results in Exact (fraction) or
Approximate (decimal) form. This affects only the values calculated from a
formula.
1. Select the column by clicking the reference letter at the top of the column.
Handheld: Hold down ▲to move past the top cell.
2. Display the context menu for the column.
3. On the context menu, click either Data>Exact or Data>Approximate.
Note: To restore the column results to the document’s default setting, select the
column and click Data>Restore Document Setting.
Clearing Column Data
The Clear Data command lets you remove the data from selected columns.
Clear Data does not delete the column, and it does not clear a column’s name
or formula.
After clearing the data, Lists&Spreadsheet recalculates column formulas for
the selected columns. This makes Clear Data useful for capturing a fresh set of
data from another application or selectively generating a fresh column of
random numbers.
1. Click the column or columns that you want to clear.
2. From the Data menu, select Clear Data.
Note: If a recalculated formula produces the same data as before, it may
appear that the Clear Data command has failed.
Lists&Spreadsheet Application 377
378 Lists&Spreadsheet Application
Sorting Data
You can sort a selected area of the spreadsheet in ascending or descending
order. You select which column in the selected area will be used as the key for
the sort. When the sort moves data up or down in the key column, the
corresponding data in the other selected columns is also moved up or down.
This preserves the integrity of each row.
Note: Sorting is based on numeric values. If you select a key column that
contains text, you could get unexpected results.
1. Select the range of cells.
2. From the Actions menu, select Sort.
The Sort dialog box opens.
3. Click the column letter to use for ordering.
4. Click Descending or Ascending as the sort method, and then click OK.
Note: Sorting a column that is defined by a formula will remove the formula,
because it may not be valid after the sort.
Generating Columns of Data
You can create a column of values based on the contents of another column.
You can also create a column based on any of several types of sequential
data.
Entering a formula in a column’s formula cell tells the Lists&Spreadsheet
application that you want to apply the formula to all cells in the column, not just
to a single cell.
ÀColumn formula based on a variable
ÁColumn formula based on another column (column A)
ÂColumn formula that generates a sequence
Notes:
• If you generate data in a column that already contains one or more cell
values, Lists&Spreadsheet asks for confirmation before replacing the
existing values. Proceeding removes all of the existing values in the
column.
• If you edit a cell manually in a column of generated data,
Lists&Spreadsheet asks for confirmation before replacing the generated
data. Proceeding removes the generated data for the entire column.
Creating Column Values Based on Another Column
1. Click the column formula cell (the second cell from the top) of the column
where you want to use a formula.
Lists&Spreadsheet Application 379
380 Lists&Spreadsheet Application
Lists&Spreadsheet inserts the leading equal sign (=) for the formula. If the
column is a named list, Lists&Spreadsheet inserts listname:= followed by
the cursor.
2. Type the expression for the formula after the = and press Enter Use
brackets ([]) after any column letter you include in the formula. For
example, type =a[]^2 to create a column of values in which each cell is
the square of the corresponding cell of column A.
Lists&Spreadsheet shows the formula in the formula cell and fills the
column with the results.
Generating a Column of Random Numbers
This example generates a column of 20 random integers in the range 1
through 6.
1. Click the column formula cell (the second cell from the top) of the column.
Lists&Spreadsheet inserts the leading equal sign (=) for the formula. If the
column is a named list, Lists&Spreadsheet inserts listname:= followed by
the cursor.
2. After the equal sign, type RandInt(1,6,20).
Note: You can also use the Catalog or click Data > Random > Integer to
insert the RandInt() function.
3. Press Enter to generate the numbers.
4. Generate (Recalculate) a new set of random numbers:
Windows®: Press Ctrl+R.
Mac®: Press “+R.
Handheld: Press / R.
Generating a Numerical Sequence
1. Click any cell in the column in which you want to generate the sequence.
2. From the Data menu, select Generate Sequence.
The Sequence dialog box opens.
3. Type the Formula that will be applied to the column values.
4. Type any Initial Terms required by the sequence. Separate them with
commas.
5. Type a starting value for the independent variable (n0).
6. Type a maximum number of values to be generated (nMax).
7. Type the step value (nStep).
Lists&Spreadsheet Application 381
382 Lists&Spreadsheet Application
8. (Optional) Type a maximum value for the sequence in the Ceiling Value
field.
9. Click OK.
Lists&Spreadsheet shows the formula in the formula cell and fills the
column with the results.
Graphing Spreadsheet Data
You can graph the data in a spreadsheet using Quick Graph or Summary Plot.
Lists&Spreadsheet cells that contain no data are not represented by data
points on graphs.
Using Quick Graph
You can easily create a dot plot of the data in one column or a scatter plot of
two adjacent columns by using the Quick Graph feature. This feature displays
the graphed data using the Data&Statistics application.
To create a scatter plot:
1. Name both of the columns to declare them as lists.
2. Select both columns.
3. From the Data menu, select Quick Graph.
A Data&Statistics application is added to the page with the plotted data.
The leftmost of the two lists is plotted on the x axis, and the other list is
plotted on the y axis.
4. (Optional) Use the Data&Statistics features to analyze or visually
enhance the graph.
Note: For more information, see
Using Data and Statistics
.
Lists&Spreadsheet Application 383
384 Lists&Spreadsheet Application
Creating a Summary Plot from a Summary Table
In this example, you create a summary table from raw data, and then use the
table to generate a summary plot. For more information, see
Using
Data&Statistics
.
raw data summary table for eye color based on
raw data
A summary table contains an X (or Y) List and a Summary List.
• The X (or Y) List contains numeric or string values (such as 1999 or
“color”). Numeric values result in a histogram. String values identify the
categories for a bar chart.
• The Summary List contains numeric values (such as count, frequency, or
probability) for each element in the other list.
To Create a Summary Plot:
Note: For situations in which you already have a summary table, you can skip
the first two steps.
1. Create a list that holds the category identifiers. For this example, name the
list “color” and type strings for eye color. Enclose category names in
quotes to prevent them from being interpreted as variables.
2. Create the summary list. For this example, name the list “counts” and type
the total count for each of the eye colors.
3. Select either list by clicking the top cell of the column and pressing▲.
4. From the Data menu, select Summary Plot.
The Summary Plot dialog box opens.
5. If necessary, use Tab and the arrow keys to select the correct lists for X List
and Summary List.
6. In the Display On field, select how to display the summary plot in the
Data&Statistics application.
• Select Split Page to place the chart on half of the current page.
• Select New Page to add the chart on a new page.
The summary plot is displayed with the list names along the axes and a
summary plot symbol in the lower left corner of the chart window.
Lists&Spreadsheet Application 385
386 Lists&Spreadsheet Application
Note: In this example, the XList contains string data, so the summary plot
displays as a bar chart. The category strings from the list display beneath
the bars.
Exchanging Data with Other Computer Software
You can use the TI-Nspire™ desktop software to copy table data to and from
software outside the TI-Nspire™ applications, such as TIDataEditor (in the
TIConnect™ software) and Excel® spreadsheet software.
For example, you can copy:
• The values of individual cells, a range of cells, or an entire list from
TIDataEditor.
• The values (not the underlying formulas) of individual cells, a range of
cells, or an entire column from an Excel® spreadsheet.
• A number from TIDataEditor.
• The value of a matrix from TIDataEditor.
Example - Copying Data from TIDataEditor
1. Open the TIConnect™ software.
2. Display the TIDataEditor.
3. If necessary, open the file containing the number, list, or matrix that you
want to copy.
4. Drag to select the values that you want to copy. To copy an entire list, click
the top cell in the list.
5. Click Edit > Copy.
6. In Lists&Spreadsheet, click the cell where you want the data to be pasted.
If you have copied a range of cells, they will be pasted so that the upper-
left corner of the range is positioned at the selected cell. Any data in those
cells will be overwritten.
7. Click Edit > Paste.
Copying Cells from an Excel® Spreadsheet
You can copy up to 26 columns and 2500 rows from an Excel® spreadsheet to
a Lists&Spreadsheet application.
1. Drag to select the values that you want to copy from the Excel®
spreadsheet. To copy an entire column, click the column identifier at the
top of the column.
Note: If you select non-contiguous columns in the Excel® spreadsheet,
they will be pasted as contiguous columns in Lists&Spreadsheet.
2. Use the standard key shortcut for copying a selection.
Windows®: Press Ctrl+C.
Mac®: Press “+C.
Lists&Spreadsheet Application 387
388 Lists&Spreadsheet Application
3. In Lists&Spreadsheet, click the cells where you want the data to be
pasted.
If you are copying a range of cells, they will be pasted so that the upper-left
corner of the range is positioned at the selected cell. Any data in those
cells in will be overwritten.
4. Paste the data.
Windows®: Press Ctrl+V.
Mac®: Press “+V.
Handheld: Press / V.
Note: Categorical data must be enclosed in quotes (““) after the data is
pasted.
Capturing Data from Graphs&Geometry
You can use Lists&Spreadsheet application to capture information about
objects in the Graphs&Geometry application. For example, you could track
changes in the area of a triangle as you change the length of a side in the
Graphs&Geometry application.
Captured values replace values in the column. If you prefer, you can remove all
data from a column before starting a new capture by clicking Clear Data on the
Data menu.
Capturing Data Manually
1. Make sure the data value that you want to capture is linked to a variable
name.
2. Click the column formula cell (the second cell from the top) of the column
in which you want to capture the values.
Note: Captured values replace values in the column.
3. Click Data > Data Capture >Manual.
A capture expression is inserted into the column formula cell with
var
as a
placeholder for the name of the variable you are capturing.
4. Replace the letters “var” with the name of the variable to capture from
Graphs&Geometry. For example, type area.
The formula cell now contains an expression similar to =capture
(area,0).
Note: The argument “0” tells Lists&Spreadsheet that you want to trigger
each capture manually.
5. Press Enter.
6. From the Graphs&Geometry application, change the object with a
measured value stored as the variable (area, in this example) referenced
in the data capture expression.
7. Each time you are ready to capture the current value of area, press the
capture keys.
Windows®: Press Ctrl+.(the period key).
Mac®: Hold down “and press .(the period key).
Handheld: Press / ^.
The current area value is added to the end of the list as a list element.
Capturing Data Automatically
When you capture data automatically, you can specify that you want the
captures to be triggered by:
• Changes in the captured variable only.
• Changes in the captured variable or additional variables.
Lists&Spreadsheet Application 389
390 Lists&Spreadsheet Application
This lets you set up multiple columns of synchronized captures, such as the x
and y coordinates of a moving object.
1. Clear all columns that you will be using for the captured data.
2. Make sure any data values that you want to capture are linked to variable
names.
3. Click the column formula cell (the second cell from the top) of the column
in which you want to capture the values.
4. Click Data >Data Capture >Automatic.
A capture expression is inserted into the column formula cell with var as a
placeholder for the name of the variable you are capturing.
5. Replace the letters “var” with the name of the variable to capture. For
example, type objpathX. Alternatively, you can select the variable name
from the Variables menu.
The formula cell now contains an expression similar to =capture
(objpathX,1).
Note: The argument “1” tells Lists&Spreadsheet that you want the
captures to be triggered by the variable change.
6. If you want the capture to also be triggered by changes in an additional
variable or variables, type a comma after the 1, and then type the variable
name or the name of a list that itemizes the variables.
The formula cell will contain an expression similar to =capture
(objpathX,1,objpathY).
7. Press Enter to complete the formula.
8. If you are capturing multiple columns of synchronized data, set up the
additional columns. For example, you might set up a second capture
variable using
=capture(objpathY,1,objpathX).
9. When you are ready to capture the values, begin moving the object or start
the animation that affects it in Graphs&Geometry.
Each captured value is added to the end of the list.
Using Table Data for Statistical Analysis
Tools on the Statistics menu provide access to wizards that help you perform
statistical analyses on the data in table columns. You specify the location of the
data, and Lists&Spreadsheet stores the results in two columns: one for the
result names, and one for the corresponding values.
Plotting Statistical Data
Some statistics wizards include a Draw check box. By default, the box is not
selected. Selecting this box creates a Data&Statistics work area on the page,
displays the calculated results in Lists&Spreadsheet, and draws the results of
the statistical analysis in the Data&Statistics work area.
Note: For functions that support the Draw option, the option is available only if
you type the function in a column formula cell.
Draw check box (as shown in the zTest wizard).
Lists&Spreadsheet Application 391
392 Lists&Spreadsheet Application
Statistics Input Descriptions
The following table describes the different inputs used in Lists&Spreadsheet
wizards.
Input Description
m0Hypothesized value of the population
mean that you are testing.
sThe known population standard
deviation; must be a real number >0.
List The name of the list containing the
data you are testing.
Frequency List The name of the list containing the
frequency values for the data in List.
Default=1. All elements must be
integers |0. The frequency values
can also be typed as a list, in the
format {1, 1, 3, 2}.
v, Sx, n Summary statistics (mean, standard
deviation, and sample size) for the
one-sample tests and intervals.
s1 The known population standard
deviation from the first population for
the two-sample tests and intervals.
Must be a real number>0.
s2 The known population standard
deviation from the second population
for the two-sample tests and intervals.
Must be a real number>0.
List1, List2 The names of the lists containing the
data you are testing for the two-
sample tests and intervals.
Input Description
Frequency1,
Frequency2
The names of the lists containing the
frequencies for the data in List1 and
List2 for the two-sample tests and
intervals. Defaults=1. All elements
must be integers |0.
v1, Sx1, n1, v2,
Sx2, n2
Summary statistics (mean, standard
deviation, and sample size) for
sample one and sample two in two-
sample tests and intervals.
Pooled Specifies whether variances are to be
pooled for 2-SampletTest and
2-SampletInterval.
p0The expected sample proportion for
1-PropzTest. Must be a real number,
such that0<p0<1.
x The count of successes in the sample
for the 1-PropzTest and
1-PropzInterval. Must be an
integer|0.
n The count of observations in the
sample for the 1-PropzTest and
1-PropzInterval. Must be an
integer>0.
x1 The count of successes from sample
one for the 2-PropzTest and
2-PropzInterval. Must be an
integer|0.
x2 The count of successes from sample
two for the 2-PropzTest and
Lists&Spreadsheet Application 393
394 Lists&Spreadsheet Application
Input Description
2-PropzInterval. Must be an
integer|0.
n1 The count of observations in sample
one for the 2-PropzTest and
2-PropzInterval. Must be an integer
>0.
n2 The count of observations in sample
two for the 2-PropzTest and
2-PropzInterval. Must be an integer
>0.
C-Level The confidence level for the interval
instructions. Must be |0 and <100. If
it is |1, it is assumed to be given as a
percent and is divided by 100.
Default=0.95.
RegEQ The prompt for the name of the
function where the calculated
regression equation is to be stored.
Statistical Calculations
Performing a Statistical Calculation
You can perform statistical calculations to analyze data. The following example
fits a y=mx+b linear regression model to the two lists in columns A and B.
1. From the Statistics menu, select Stat Calculation > LinearRegression
(mx+b) to choose the regression model.
The Linear Regression (mx+b) dialog box opens.
2. Type a[] as the column for the X List.
3. Type b[] as the column for the Y List.
4. To store the regression equation in a specified variable, replace Save
RegEqn To with the name of the variable.
5. Type c[] as the column for the 1st Result.
6. Click OK.
Lists&Spreadsheet inserts two columns: one containing the names of the
results, and one containing the corresponding values.
Note: The results are linked to the source data. For example, if you change
a value in column A, the regression equation is updated automatically.
Storing Statistical Results
Lists&Spreadsheet stores statistical results using a variable-group name with
the format stat.nnn, where nnn is the result name (for example, stat.RegEqn
and stat.Resid). The use of standard names for variables makes it easier to
Lists&Spreadsheet Application 395
396 Lists&Spreadsheet Application
identify and use the statistical variables later. If you want to use a custom
variable group instead of the standard name, you can edit the formula in the
column formula cell.
You could use the following formula to store the results in the variable group
MystatsB.
=LinRegMx(a[],b[],1 ): CopyVar Stat., MystatsB.
Later, you could view the results by entering the following expression inthe
Calculator application or in another column of the Lists&Spreadsheet
application:
MystatsB.results
Supported Statistical Calculations
The Stat Calculations menu lets you select from the calculations described
below. For more information, see the
TI-Nspire™ReferenceGuide
.
One-Variable Statistics (OneVar)
Analyzes data with one measured variable. You can specify an optional
frequency list. The statistical data returned using this analysis technique are:
• Sample mean, x
• Sum of the data, Gx
• Sum of the squared data, Gx2
• Sample standard deviation, sx
• Population standard deviation, sx
• Sample size, n
• X-min
• First quartile, Q1
• Median
• Third quartile, Q3
• X-max
• Sum of squared deviations, SSx = G(xNx)2
Two-Variable Statistics (TwoVar)
Analyzes paired data. List 1 is the independent variable. List 2 is the
dependent variable. You can specify an optional frequency list. The statistical
data returned using this analysis technique are:
For each list:
• Sample mean, xor y
• Sum of the data, Gxor Gy
• Sum of the squared data, Gx2or Gy2
• Sample standard deviation, sx = sn-1x or sy = sn-1y
• Population standard deviation, sx = snx or sy = sny
• X-min or Y-min
• First quartile, Q1X or Q1Y
• Median
• Third quartile, Q3X or Q3Y
• X-max or Y-max
• Sum of squared deviations, SSx = G(xNx)2or SSy = G(yNy)2
Additional data:
• Sample size for each data set, n
•Gxy
• Correlation coefficient, R.
Linear Regression (mx+b) (LinRegMx)
Fits the model equation y=ax+b to the data using a least-squares fit. It displays
values for m(slope) and b(y-intercept).
Linear Regression (a+bx) (LinRegBx)
Fits the model equation y=a+bx to the data using a least-squares fit. It displays
values for a(y-intercept), b(slope), r2, and r.
Median-Median Line (MedMed)
Fits the model equation y=mx+b to the data using the median-median line
(resistant line) technique, calculating the summary points x1, y1, x2, y2, x3, and
y3. Median-MedianLine displays values for m(slope) and b(y-intercept).
Lists&Spreadsheet Application 397
398 Lists&Spreadsheet Application
Quadratic Regression (QuadReg)
Fits the second-degree polynomial y=ax2+bx+c to the data. It displays values
for a,b,c, and R2. For three data points, the equation is a polynomial fit; for four
or more, it is a polynomial regression. At least three data points are required.
Cubic Regression (CubicReg)
Fits the third-degree polynomial y=ax3+bx2+cx+d to the data. It displays values
for a,b,c,d, and R2. For four points, the equation is a polynomial fit; for five or
more, it is a polynomial regression. At least four points are required.
Quartic Regression (QuartReg)
Fits the fourth-degree polynomial y=ax4+bx3+cx2+dx+e to the data. It displays
values for a,b,c,d,e, and R2. For five points, the equation is a polynomial fit;
for six or more, it is a polynomial regression. At least five points are required.
Power Regression (PowerReg)
Fits the model equation y=axb to the data using a least-squares fit on
transformed values ln(x) and ln(y). It displays values for a,b,r2, and r.
Exponential Regression (ExpReg)
Fits the model equation y=abxto the data using a least-squares fit on
transformed values x and ln(y). It displays values for a,b,r2, and r.
Logarithmic Regression (LogReg)
Fits the model equation y=a+bln(x) to the data using a least-squares fit on
transformed values ln(x) and y. It displays values for a,b,r2, and r.
Sinusoidal Regression (SinReg)
Fits the model equation y=asin(bx+c)+d to the data using an iterative least-
squares fit. It displays values for a,b,c, and d. At least four data points are
required. At least two data points per cycle are required to avoid aliased
frequency estimates.
Note: The output of SinReg is always in radians, regardless of the
Radian/Degree mode setting.
Logistic Regression (d=0) (Logistic)
Fits the model equation y=c/(1+a*e⁻bx) to the data using an iterative least-
squares fit. It displays values for a,b, and c.
Logistic Regression (d
ƒ
0) (LogisticD)
Fits the model equation y=c(1+a*e(⁻bx))+d to the data using an iterative least-
squares fit. It displays values for a,b,cand d.
Multiple Linear Regression (MultReg)
Calculates multiple linear regression of list Y on lists X1, X2, …, X10.
Distributions
Calculating a Distribution
Example: Calculate a distribution to fit the Normal Pdf distribution model.
1. Click the column formula cell (second cell from the top) in columnA.
2. Click Statistics > Distributions > Normal Pdf to choose the Distribution
model.
The Normal Pdf dialog box opens and displays fields for typing or
selecting the arguments for the calculation.
- Press Tab as necessary to move from field to field and provide each
argument. You can type values, or select them from the drop down list:
-X Value: Click the drop-down arrow to choose any list in the problem
to provide the x values for the calculation.
-Mean: Type a value for the mean or click the drop-down arrow to
choose a variable that contains the mean.
-Standard Deviation: Type a value for the standard deviation or choose
a variable that contains the standard deviation.
3. Click the Draw check box to see the distribution plotted in Data&Statistics.
Note: The Draw option is not available for all distributions.
4. Click OK.
Lists&Spreadsheet inserts two columns: one containing the names of the
results, and one containing the corresponding values. The results are
plotted in Data&Statistics.
Lists&Spreadsheet Application 399
400 Lists&Spreadsheet Application
Note: The results are linked to the source data. For example, you can
change a value in Column A, and the equation updates automatically.
Supported Distribution Functions
The following distributions are available from the Lists&Spreadsheet
application. For more information regarding these functions, see the
TI-Nspire™
Reference Guide
.
• To return a single distribution result based on a single value, type the
function in a single cell.
• To return a list of distribution results based on a list of values, type the
function in a column formula cell. In this case, you specify a list (column)
that contains the values. For each value in the list, the distribution returns a
corresponding result.
Note: For distribution functions that support the draw option (normPDF,
tPDF,χ²Pdf, and FPdf), the option is available only if you type the
distribution function in a formula cell.
Normal Pdf (normPdf)
Computes the probability density function (pdf) for the normal distribution at a
specified xvalue. The defaults are mean μ=0 and standard deviation σ=1. The
probability density function (pdf) is:
This distribution is used to determine the probability of the occurrence of a
certain value in a normal distribution. The draw option is available when
Normal PDF is invoked from a formula cell.
When you access distributions from the formula cell, you must select a valid list
from the drop-down list to avoid unexpected results. If accessed from a cell, you
must specify a number for the x-value. The distribution returns the probability
that the value you specify will occur.
Normal Cdf (normCdf)
Computes the normal distribution probability between LowerBound and
UpperBound for the specified mean, μ(default=0) and the standard deviation,
s(default=1). You can click the Draw (Shade area) check box to shade the area
between the lower and upper bounds. Changes to the initial LowerBound and
UpperBound automatically update the distribution.
This distribution is useful in determining the probability of an occurrence of any
value between the lower and upper bounds in the normal distribution. It is
equivalent to finding the area under the specified normal curve between the
bounds.
Inverse Normal (invNorm)
Computes the inverse cumulative normal distribution function for a given area
under the normal distribution curve specified by mean, μ, and standard
deviation, s.
This distribution is useful in determining the x-value of data in the area from 0
to x<1 when the percentile is known.
tPdf (tPdf)
Computes the probability density function (pdf) for the t-distribution at a
specified xvalue. df (degrees of freedom) must be >0. The probability density
function (pdf) is:
This distribution is useful in determining the probability of the occurrence of a
value when the population standard deviation is not known and the sample
size is small. The draw option is available when tPdf is invoked from a formula
cell.
Lists&Spreadsheet Application 401
402 Lists&Spreadsheet Application
tCdf (tCdf)
Computes the Student-t distribution probability between LowerBound and
UpperBound for the specified df (degrees of freedom). You can click the Draw
(Shade area) check box to shade the area between the bounds. Changes to
the initial LowerBound and UpperBound automatically update the
distribution.
This distribution is useful in determining the probability of the occurrence of a
value within an interval defined by the lower and upper bound for a normally
distributed population when the population standard deviation is not known.
Inverset (invt)
Computes the inverse cumulative t-distribution probability function specified by
Degrees of Freedom, df, for a given area under the curve.
This distribution is useful in determining the probability of an occurrence of
data in the area from 0 to x<1. This function is used when the population mean
and/or population standard deviation is not known.
c2
Pdf (
c2
Pdf())
Computes the probability density function (pdf) for the c2(chi-square)
distribution at a specified xvalue. df (degrees of freedom) must be an integer
>0. The probability density function (pdf) is:
This distribution is useful in determining the probability of the occurrence of a
given value from a population with a c2distribution. The draw option is
available when c2Pdf is invoked from a formula cell.
c2
Cdf (
c2
Cdf())
Computes the c2(chi-square) distribution probability between lowBound and
upBound for the specified df (degrees of freedom). You can click the Draw
Shade area check box to shade the area between the lower and upper
bounds. Changes to the initial lowBound and upBound automatically update
the distribution.
This distribution is useful in determining the probability of the occurrence of
value within given boundaries of a population with a c2distribution.
F
Pdf (
F
Pdf())
Computes the probability density function (pdf) for the Fdistribution at a
specified xvalue. numerator df (degrees of freedom) and denominator df
must be integers >0. The probability density function (pdf) is:
where n= numerator degrees of freedom
d= denominator degrees of freedom
This distribution is useful in determining the probability that two samples have
the same variance. The draw option is available when FPdf is invoked from a
formula cell.
F
Cdf (
F
Cdf())
Computes the Fdistribution probability between lowBound and upBound for
the specified dfnumer (degrees of freedom) and dfDenom. You can click the
Draw (Shade area) check box to shade the area between the lower and upper
bounds. Changes to the initial lowBound and upBound automatically update
the distribution.
This distribution is useful in determining the probability that a single
observation falls within the range between the lower bound and upper bound.
Binomial Pdf (binomPdf())
Computes a probability at xfor the discrete binomial distribution with the
specified numtrials and probability of success (
p
) on each trial. The x
parameter can be an integer or a list of integers. 0{
p
{1 must be true. numtrials
must be an integer >0. If you do not specify x, a list of probabilities from 0 to
numtrials is returned. The probability density function (pdf) is:
where n = numtrials
This distribution is useful in determining the probability of success in a
success/failure trial, at trial
n
. For example, you could use this distribution to
predict the probability of getting heads in a coin toss on the fifth toss.
Binomial Cdf (binomCdf())
Computes a cumulative probability for the discrete binomial distribution with n
number of trials and probability p of success on each trial.
Lists&Spreadsheet Application 403
404 Lists&Spreadsheet Application
This distribution is useful in determining the probability of a success on one
trial before all trials are completed. For example, if heads is a successful coin
toss and you plan to toss the coin 10 times, this distribution would predict the
chance of obtaining heads at least once in the 10 tosses.
Poisson Pdf (poissPdf())
Computes a probability at xfor the discrete Poisson distribution with the
specified mean, μ, which must be a real number >0. xcan be an integer or a
list of integers. The probability density function (pdf) is:
This distribution is useful in determining the probability of obtaining a certain
number of successes before a trial begins. For example, you could use this
calculation to predict the number of heads that would occur in eight tosses of a
coin.
Poisson Cdf (poissCdf())
Computes a cumulative probability for the discrete Poisson distribution with
specified mean, x.
This distribution is useful in determining the probability that a certain number of
successes occur between the upper and lower bounds of a trial. For example,
you could use this calculation to predict the number of heads displayed
between coin toss #3 and toss #8.
Geometric Pdf (geomPdf())
Computes a probability at x, the number of the trial on which the first success
occurs, for the discrete geometric distribution with the specified probability of
success
p
. 0{
p
{1 must be true. xcan be an integer or a list of integers. The
probability density function (pdf) is:
This distribution is useful in determining the likeliest number of trials before a
success is obtained. For example, you could use this calculation to predict the
number of coin tosses that would be made before a heads resulted.
Geometric Cdf (geomCdf())
Computes a cumulative geometric probability from lowBound to upBound with
the specified probability of success, p.
This distribution is useful in determining the probability associated with the first
success occurring during trials 1 through n. For example, you could use this
calculation to determine the probability that heads display on toss #1, #2, #3,
..., #n.
Confidence Intervals
Supported Confidence Intervals
The following confidence intervals are available from the Lists&Spreadsheets
application. For more information regarding these functions, see the
TI-Nspire™
Reference Guide
.
z Interval (zInterval)
Computes a confidence interval for an unknown population mean, m, when the
population standard deviation, s, is known. The computed confidence interval
depends on the user-specified confidence level.
This test is useful in determining how far from a population mean a sample
mean can get before indicating a significant deviation.
t Interval (tInterval)
Computes a confidence interval for an unknown population mean, m, when the
population standard deviation, s, is unknown. The computed confidence
interval depends on the user-specified confidence level.
This test is useful in examining whether the confidence interval associated with
a confidence level contains the value assumed in the hypothesis. Like the z
Interval, this test helps you determine how far from a population mean a
sample mean can get before indicating a significant deviation when the
population mean is unknown.
2-Sample z Interval (zInterval_2Samp)
Computes a confidence interval for the difference between two population
means (m1Nm2) when both population standard deviations (s1and s2) are
known. The computed confidence interval depends on the user-specified
confidence level.
This test is useful in determining if there is statistical significance between the
means of two samples from the same population. For example, this test could
determine whether there is significance between the mean college entrance
test score of female students and the mean of college entrance test score of
male students at the same school.
Lists&Spreadsheet Application 405
406 Lists&Spreadsheet Application
2-Sample t Interval (tInterval_2Samp)
Computes a confidence interval for the difference between two population
means (m1Nm2) when both population standard deviations (s1and s2) are
unknown. The computed confidence interval depends on the user-specified
confidence level.
This test is useful in determining if there is statistical significance between the
means of two samples from the same population. It is used instead of the 2-
sample z confidence interval in situations where the population is too large to
measure to determine the standard deviation.
1-Prop z Interval (zInterval_1Prop)
Computes a confidence interval for an unknown proportion of successes. It
takes as input the count of successes in the sample xand the count of
observations in the sample n. The computed confidence interval depends on
the user-specified confidence level.
This test is useful in determining the probability of a given number of successes
that can be expected for a given number of trials. For instance, casino
examiners would use this test to determine if observed payouts for one slot
machine demonstrate a consistent pay out rate.
2-Prop z Interval (zInterval_2Prop)
Computes a confidence interval for the difference between the proportion of
successes in two populations (p1-p2). It takes as input the count of successes in
each sample (x1andx2) and the count of observations in each sample
(n1andn2). The computed confidence interval depends on the user-specified
confidence level.
This test is useful in determining if two rates of success differ because of
something other than sampling error and standard deviation. For example, a
bettor could use this test to determine if there is an advantage in the long run
by playing one game or machine versus playing another game or machine.
Linear Reg t Intervals (LinRegtIntervals)
Computes a linear regression t confidence interval for the slope coefficient b. If
the confidence interval contains 0, this is insufficient evidence to indicate that
the data exhibits a linear relationship.
Multiple Reg Intervals (MultRegIntervals)
Computes multiple regression prediction confidence interval for the calculated
y and a confidence for y.
Stat Tests
Supported Statistical Tests
Hypothesis tests are available from the Lists&Spreadsheets application. For
more information regarding these functions, see the
TI-Nspire™ Reference
Guide
.
Some of the wizards for Stat Tests display a Draw check box. By default, the
box is not selected. Selecting the box creates a Data&Statistics work area on
the page and plots the results in that work area.
ztest (zTest)
Performs a hypothesis test for a single unknown population mean, m, when the
population standard deviation,s, is known. It tests the null hypothesis H0:m=m0
against one of the alternatives below.
• Ha:mƒm0
• Ha:m<m0
• Ha:m>m0
This test is used for large populations that are normally distributed. The
standard deviation must be known.
This test is useful in determining if the difference between a sample mean and
a population mean is statistically significant when you know the true deviation
for a population.
ttest (tTest)
Performs a hypothesis test for a single unknown population mean, m, when the
population standard deviation, s, is unknown. It tests the null hypothesis
H0:m=m0against one of the alternatives below.
• Ha:mƒm0
• Ha:m<m0
• Ha:m>m0
This test is similar to a z-test, but is used when the population is small and
normally distributed. This test is used more frequently than the z-test because
small sample populations are more frequently encountered in statistics than
are large populations.
Lists&Spreadsheet Application 407
408 Lists&Spreadsheet Application
This test is useful in determining if two normally distributed populations have
equal means, or when you need to determine if a sample mean differs from a
population mean significantly and the population standard deviation is
unknown.
2-Sample z Test (zTest_2Samp)
Tests the equality of the means of two populations (m1and m2) based on
independent samples when both population standard deviations (s1and s2)
are known. The null hypothesis H0:m1=m2is tested against one of the
alternatives below.
• Ha:m1ƒm2
• Ha:m1<m2
• Ha:m1>m2
2-Sample t Test (tTest_2Samp)
Tests the equality of the means of two populations (m1and m2) based on
independent samples when neither population standard deviation (s1or s2) is
known. The null hypothesis H0:m1=m2is tested against one of the alternatives
below.
• Ha:m1ƒm2
• Ha:m1<m2
• Ha:m1>m2
1-Prop z Test (zTest_1Prop)
Computes a test for an unknown proportion of successes (prop). It takes as
input the count of successes in the sample xand the count of observations in
the sample n.1-Prop z Test tests the null hypothesis H0:prop=p0against one of
the alternatives below.
• Ha: propƒp0
• Ha: prop<p0
• Ha: prop>p0
This test is useful in determining if the probability of the success seen in a
sample is significantly different from the probability of the population or if it is
due to sampling error, deviation, or other factors.
2-Prop z Test (zTest_2Prop)
Computes a test to compare the proportion of successes (p1and p2) from two
populations. It takes as input the count of successes in each sample (x1and
x2) and the count of observations in each sample (n1and n2). 2-Prop z Test
tests the null hypothesis H0:p1=p2(using the pooled sample proportion Ç)
against one of the alternatives below.
• Ha: p1ƒp2
• Ha: p1<p2
• Ha: p1>p2
This test is useful in determining if the probability of success seen in two
samples is equal.
c2
GOF (
c2
GOF)
Performs a test to confirm that sample data is from a population that conforms
to a specified distribution. For example, c2GOF can confirm that the sample
data came from a normal distribution.
c2
2-way Test (
c2
2way)
Computes a chi-square test for association on the two-way table of counts in
the specified Observed matrix. The null hypothesis H0for a two-way table is: no
association exists between row variables and column variables. The
alternative hypothesis is: the variables are related.
2-Sample
F
Test (
F
Test_2Samp)
Computes an F-test to compare two normal population standard deviations (s1
and s2). The population means and standard deviations are all unknown.
2-Sample FTest, which uses the ratio of sample variances Sx12/Sx22, tests the
null hypothesis H0:s1=s2against one of the alternatives below.
• Ha:s1ƒs2
• Ha:s1<s2
• Ha:s1>s2
Below is the definition for the 2-SampleFTest.
Sx1,Sx2 = Sample standard deviations having n1N1 and n2N1 degrees of
freedom df, respectively.
F=F-statistic =
Lists&Spreadsheet Application 409
410 Lists&Spreadsheet Application
df(x, n1N1,
n2N1)
=Fpdf() with degrees of freedom df, n1N1, and n2N1
p=reported pvalue
2-Sample FTest for the alternative hypothesis s1>s2.
2-Sample FTest for the alternative hypothesis s1<s2.
2-Sample FTest for the alternative hypothesis s1ƒs2. Limits must satisfy the
following:
where: [Lbnd,Ubnd]=lower and upper limits
The F-statistic is used as the bound producing the smallest integral. The
remaining bound is selected to achieve the preceding integral’s equality
relationship.
Linear Reg t Test (LinRegtTest)
Computes a linear regression on the given data and a ttest on the value of
slope band the correlation coefficient rfor the equation y=a+bx. It tests the null
hypothesis H0:b=0 (equivalently, r=0) against one of the alternatives below.
• Ha:bƒ0 and rƒ0
• Ha:b<0 and r<0
• Ha:b>0 and r>0
Multiple Reg Tests (MultRegTest)
Computes a linear regression on the given data, and provides the F test
statistic for linearity.
For more information, see the
TI-Nspire™ Reference Guide
.
ANOVA (ANOVA)
Computes a one-way analysis of variance for comparing the means of 2 to 20
populations. The ANOVA procedure for comparing these means involves
analysis of the variation in the sample data. The null hypothesis
H0:m1=m2=...=mkis tested against the alternative Ha: not all m1...mkare equal.
The ANOVA test is a method of determining if there is a significant difference
between the groups as compared to the difference occurring within each
group.
This test is useful in determining if the variation of data from sample-to-sample
shows a statistically significant influence of some factor other than the variation
within the data sets themselves. For example, a box buyer for a shipping firm
wants to evaluate three different box manufacturers. He obtains sample boxes
from all three suppliers. ANOVA can help him determine if the differences
between each sample group are significant as compared to the differences
within each sample group.
ANOVA 2-Way (ANOVA2way)
Computes a two-way analysis of variance for comparing the means of two to 20
populations. A summary of results is stored in the stat.results variable.
The two-way ANOVA analysis of variance examines the effects of two
independent variables and helps to determine if these interact with respect to
the dependent variable. (In other words, if the two independent variables do
interact, their combined effect can be greater than or less than the impact of
either independent variable additively.)
This test is useful in evaluating differences similar to the ANOVA analysis but
with the addition of another potential influence. To continue with the ANOVA
box example, the two-way ANOVA might examine the influence of box material
on the differences seen.
Selecting an Alternative Hypothesis (
ƒ
< >)
Most of the inferential stat editors for the hypothesis tests prompt you to select
one of three alternative hypotheses.
• The first is a ƒalternative hypothesis, such as mƒm0 for the zTest.
• The second is a <alternative hypothesis, such as m1<m2 for the
2-SampletTest.
• The third is a >alternative hypothesis, such as p1>p2 for the 2-PropzTest.
Lists&Spreadsheet Application 411
412 Lists&Spreadsheet Application
To select an alternative hypothesis, move the cursor to the appropriate
alternative, and then press Enter.
Selecting the Pooled Option
Pooled (2-SampletTest and 2-SampletInterval only) specifies whether the
variances are to be pooled for the calculation.
• Select No if you do not want the variances pooled. Population variances
can be unequal.
• Select Yes if you want the variances pooled. Population variances are
assumed to be equal.
To select the Pooled option, select Yes from the drop-down list.
Working with Function Tables
The Lists&Spreadsheet application lets you show a table of function values for
any function in the current problem. You can change the settings for the table,
delete columns, add values for multiple functions, and edit the expression that
defines a function without leaving the Lists&Spreadsheet application.
Switching to a Table
1. While working in the Lists&Spreadsheet application:
Windows: Press Ctrl+T.
Mac®: Press “+T.
Handheld: Press / T.
The Lists&Spreadsheet application disappears and an empty table is
displayed with a list of the functions that are available in the problem.
Note: If you have previously shown a table for a function from the
Lists&Spreadsheet application, the table includes that function by default.
2. Choose the name of the function for which you want to display values.
Values for the function you selected are displayed in the first column of the
table.
3. To move through adjacent cells of the table, press ▲or ▼. Press Tab to
move from the body of the table (cells) to the top two rows (cells for column
names and formulas).
4. To hide the table of values and return to the Lists&Spreadsheet
application, repeat Step 1.
Making Changes from a Table
You can change the table of function values using the tools on the Table menu.
▶To remove a column from the table, click any cell and click Delete Column.
▶To display the list of functions, click a cell in a column and click Choose.
Select a cell in an empty column unless you are replacing values already
displayed. Click a function in the list to add its values to the column.
Note: You can also click the drop-down arrow on the top cell of a column to
display the list of functions in the problem.
▶To change the expression that defines a function, click Edit Expression. You
can also edit the expression directly on the entry line beneath the table.
Note: When you edit the expression for a function, that function
automatically changes in the application used to define the function. For
example, if you edit a Graphs&Geometry function in the table, the table
values and graph of the function are both updated.
▶To change the default table settings, choose Edit Table Settings.
The Table dialog box opens. Press Tab to move from field to field and type
or select new values for the default table settings:
-Table Start: Type the value to use as the first value in the table of
values.
-Table Step: Type a value for the interval between values.
-Independent and Dependent: Click the drop-down arrow to choose
Auto or Ask as the method for populating a column with the values of
the independent and dependent variables. Auto populates the table
starting at the defined table start value and displays an independent
and dependent value for each step. Ask lets you select a cell and
press Enter to generate a value for a cell.
Lists&Spreadsheet Application 413
414
Data&Statistics Application
The Data&Statistics application provides tools to:
• Visualize sets of data in different types of plots.
• Directly manipulate variables to explore and visualize data relationships.
Data changes in one application are dynamically applied to all linked
applications.
• Explore central tendency and other statistical summary techniques.
• Fit functions to data.
• Create regression lines for scatter plots.
• Graph hypothesis tests and results (z- and t-tests) based on summary
statistics definitions or data.
Adding a Data&Statistics Page
▶To start a new document with a blank Data&Statistics page:
From the main File menu, click New Document, and then click Add
Data&Statistics.
Handheld: Press c, and select Data&Statistics .
▶To add a Data&Statistics page in the current problem of an existing
document:
From the toolbar, click Insert > Data&Statistics.
Handheld: Press ~and select Insert > Data&Statistics.
Data&Statistics Application 415
416 Data&Statistics Application
ÀData&Statistics menu
ÁWork area
ÂAdd Variable regions on x-axis and y-axis
ÃNormal Probability Plot with expression
ÄData point with coordinates
Basic Operations in Data&Statistics
The Data&Statistics application lets you explore and visualize data and graph
inferential statistics. The Lists&Spreadsheet application can work in
conjunction with the Data&Statistics application. The Lists&Spreadsheet
Summary Plot and Quick Graph tools automatically add a Data&Statistics
application to show plots. A list that you create in a problem (using the
Lists&Spreadsheet or Calculator applications) can be accessed as a variable
in any TI-Nspire™ application in that problem.
Using the Default Caseplot
The Data&Statistics application plots numeric and string (categorical) data
from variables. When you add a Data&Statistics application to a problem that
includes lists, a default caseplot displays on the work area.
The caseplot is like having a stack of cards with information on them and
scattering the cards randomly on a table. You can click a dot to see the
information on that “card.” You can drag a dot to “group” the “cards” by the
caption variable.
▶Click the variable name displayed after Caption to use the caseplot.
- Choose <None> to remove the default caseplot.
- Choose the name of a variable to have it replace the current caseplot
variable.
- Hover over any data point to see the summary information.
- Drag any data point toward an axis to see how the points group.
- Activate the Graph Trace tool and press ◄or►to move across
points.
When you add a variable to either axis, the plot for that variable replaces the
default caseplot. The default caseplot redisplays if you remove the plotted
variable from each axis.
Using the Context Menu
The context menu provides access to the tools most commonly used with the
selected object. The context menu displays different options depending on the
active object and the task you are performing.
▶To open the context menu for an object.
Windows®: Right-click the object.
Mac®: Hold “and click the object.
Handheld: Point to the object and press / b.
The context menu includes the Color option. You can use the Color option to
change the data to the color of your choice.
Other options that are appropriate for various plots also appear on the context
menu.
Selecting Data and Displaying Summary Information
When you hover over part of a plot, the Data&Statistics application displays
summary information for the data it represents.
1. Hover at an area of interest in a plot to display data values or summary
information. For example, you can hover over the center of a box plot to
display the median summary data.
2. Click once to select a representation of data in a plot.
Data points are shown with a bold outline to indicate selection. You can
click a point a second time to deselect it, or click additional points to add to
the selection.
Data&Statistics Application 417
418 Data&Statistics Application
Plotting Variables
To plot variables, start with a problem that includes a Data&Statistics
application and lists created in the Lists&Spreadsheet application or the
Calculator application.
1. Click the Add Variable region near the center of an axis.
If no variable is plotted on the axis, the tooltip Click or Enter to add variable
displays.
2. Click the tooltip Click or Enter to add variable.
A list displays the names of available variables.
3. Click the name of the variable to plot.
Note: By convention, the independent variable is shown on the x-axis.
The default plot for one variable is a dot chart. The data points in the
default caseplot reposition to represent the elements of the selected
variable in a dot chart.
4. (Optional) Click the Add Variable region near the center of the remaining
axis to plot a second variable.
The default plot for two variables is a scatter plot. The data points shift to
represent the elements of both variables as a scatter plot.
5. (Optional) Repeat Steps 1-3 to choose additional variables to plot on the
vertical axis.
The name of each variable that you add is appended to the label on the
axis. The default data point shape changes to help you distinguish data,
and a legend is displayed to identify the shapes.
6. Change, analyze, or explore the plotted data.
- Remove or change the variable on an axis by clicking the Add
Variable region again.
- View the plotted data in another supported plot type by selecting a tool
from the Plot Typesmenu.
- Choose the Graph Trace tool on the Analyze menu and press ◄or►
to move across the data points in the plot.
- The lists that you plot as variables can include incomplete or missing
cases. (A case is the data contained in a row of cells in the
Lists&Spreadsheet application.) The Lists&Spreadsheet application
displays a void as an underscore (“_”), and Data&Statistics plots no
data point for a void cell.
Manipulating Plotted Data
You can manipulate data points on the Data&Statistics work area to explore
their effects. For example, you could explore how a specific group of values
affects the median.
You can move a data point only in directions allowed by its definition. If a list is
defined with a formula in Lists&Spreadsheet, the points in Data&Statistics
may not move because of the formula’s restrictions. For example, you can
manipulate a plot that represents the result of y=x, but you can only move along
a line.
Data&Statistics Application 419
420 Data&Statistics Application
You cannot move points that represent data in a locked variable or data that
represents a categorical value.
1. On the Data&Statistics work area, click a representation of data—such as
a histogram bin or a whisker of a box plot—that is not locked or restricted by
a formula.
The pointer changes to an open hand to show that the data can be moved.
2. Drag the selection to explore how different values of the point affect the
plot.
Handheld: Press / a to grab, and then swipe or use the arrow keys to
drag.
As you drag, the changing value displays on the work area.
Overview of Raw and Summary Data
You can create plots directly from raw data or from a summary table.
Raw data Summary table for eye color based on raw
data
• Raw data consists of a single list, such as a list of eye colors. When you
create a plot of raw data, Data&Statistics counts the occurrences for you.
Plotting raw data directly gives you flexibility in analyzing it.
• A summary table consists of two lists, such as eye colors (the XorYList)
and counts of eye-color occurrences (the Summary List). For more
information, see
Using Lists&Spreadsheet
chapter.
Working with Numeric Plot Types
Plots can represent the data from a variable in a variety of ways. Choosing the
appropriate plot can help you visualize the data. For example, you may be able
to observe the shape and spread of the data in one plot type and another type
may be useful for determining the best method for statistically evaluating data.
Creating Dot Plots
Dot plots, also known as dot-frequency plots, represent one-variable data. Dot
plots are the default plot type for numeric data. When you plot a variable as a
dot plot, one dot represents each value in the list. Each dot displays on the axis
at a point that correspond to the value.
1. To create a dot plot, click the Add Variable region in the center of an axis
and click the name of a numeric variable. For more information, see
Plotting Variables
.
2. (Optional) To split a dot plot by category, click the Add Variable region on
the other axis and choose the list that contains the corresponding category
data.
3. (Optional) To plot multiple dot plots, choose Add X Variable on the Plot
Properties menu and click a numeric variable from the list that displays.
A second dot plot appears on the work area and the name of the plotted
variable is added to both axis labels.
4. Explore the plotted data.
- Hover over a data point to display data values.
- Drag a dot to move it. As you move a point, the values associated with
it change on the work area display and in the list for the variable.
- Activate the Graph Trace tool and press ◄or►to move across the
data points in the plot in list order. Points enlarge and display a bold
outline as you move across them in Trace mode.
Data&Statistics Application 421
422 Data&Statistics Application
Creating Box Plots
The Box Plot Tool plots one-variable data in a modified box plot. “Whiskers”
extend from each end of the box, either to 1.5 times the interquartile range or to
the end of the data, whichever comes first. Points that are a width of
1.5*Interquartile Range past the quartiles plot individually, beyond the
whiskers. These points are the potential outliers. When no outliers exist, x-min
and x-max are the prompt for the end of each whisker.
Box plots are useful for comparing two or more sets of data that use the same
scale. If a dataset is large, a box plot can also be useful in exploring data
distribution.
1. Click the Add Variable region in the center of an axis. The default plot for
one numeric variable is a dot plot. For more information, see
Plotting
Variables
.
Note: If two variables are plotted in the work area, you can create a dot plot
by removing one variable. Choose RemoveXVariable or
RemoveYVariable from the Plot Types menu.
2. On the Plot Types menu, click Box Plot.
A modified box plot displays on the Data&Statistics work area.
Note: You can split a box plot by category by adding a list that contains
corresponding categorical data to the y-axis.
3. (Optional) To add additional variables for comparing box plots on the
same axis, click Add X Variable on the Plot Properties menu.
For example, you can use multiple box plots to compare the distributions of
sample proportions. In the example, true proportion is .5 and sample size
varies from n=20 to n=40 to n=90.
Notes:
- You can create a box plot with frequency by choosing Add X Variable
or Add Y Variable on the Plot Properties menu.
- You can specify a variable multiple times as you choose variables to
plot as box plots.
Data&Statistics Application 423
424 Data&Statistics Application
- The variable used to provide frequency information is added to the
label on the horizontal axis in the format: x_variablename
{frequencylist_name}.
4. Point and click the regions of the box plot to explore and analyze the data
it represents.
- Hover over a region or over a whisker to display the details for the
portion of the plot that interests you. The label for the quartile that
corresponds to your selection is displayed.
- Click a region of the box plot to select the data points or whiskers.
Click again to remove the selection.
- You can select any box plot that does not include frequency data and
choose Dot Plot on the context menu to change the plot type.
- Drag a selection to move it and explore other possibilities for the data.
- Use the arrow keys to move a data point one pixel at a time.
- Activate the Graph Trace tool and press ◄or►to move across dots
and regions of the plot. As the trace cursor moves, the values for Q1,
the median, Q3, and whisker ends/outliers are displayed.
5. Change the plot from a modified box plot to a standard box plot by
choosing Extend Box Plot Whiskers on the Plot Properties menu.
The box plot is redrawn as a standard box plot with extended whiskers.
The standard box plot’s whiskers use the minimum and maximum points in
the variable and outliers are not identified. The whiskers on the plot extend
from the minimum data point in the set (x-min) to the first quartile (Q1) and
from the third quartile (Q3) to the maximum point (x-max). The box is
defined by Q1, Med (median), and Q3.
Note: You can click Show Box Plot Outliers on the Plot Properties menu to
return to the modified box plot.
Plotting Histograms
A histogram plots one-variable data and depicts the distribution of data. The
number of bins displayed depends on the number of data points and the
distribution of these points. A value that occurs on the edge of a bin is counted
in the bin to the right.
Creating a Histogram from Raw Data
1. Create the list that you want to plot as a histogram. For example, you can
enter or collect data as a named list on a Lists&Spreadsheet page.
2. On a Data&Statistics page, click the x or y axis, and select your list as the
data to plot.
3. From the Plot Types menu, click Histogram.
The data forms the bins of a histogram, with Frequency plotted by default
on the unselected axis.
4. Explore the data.
- Hover over a bin to see the information for that bin.
- Click a bin to select it. Click the bin again to deselect it.
- Drag the side of a bin to adjust bin width and number of bins.
Data&Statistics Application 425
426 Data&Statistics Application
Note: The bins are not adjustable in categorical plots or plots in which
you choose variable bin widths.
- On the Analyze menu, click Graph Trace and press ◄or►to cycle
through the bins and display their values.
Adjusting the Histogram Scale of Raw Data
1. On the Plot Properties menu, click Histogram Properties and choose
Histogram Scale.
2. Choose the format for the scale of the histogram.
-Frequency - displays data based upon the number of values that
occur within each bin. This is the default data representation.
-Percent - displays data in the histogram by each group’s percent
value of the whole data set.
-Density - displays data based upon the density of each group within
the data set.
Creating a Histogram with Frequency or Summary Data
1. On a Lists&Spreadsheet page, create two lists: one containing the “bins,”
such as heights in a population (ht), and the other containing the
frequencies of those heights (freq).
2. On a Data&Statistics page, access the context menu on the x axis, and
click Add X Variable with Summary List.
3. Select ht as the X List and freq as the Summary List.
Note: It is up to you to set the data and bins in a meaningful way when
using summary data.
Setting Equal Bin Widths
By default, bin widths are set to equal. You can specify the width and alignment
of equal-width bins.
1. On the Plot Properties menu, click HistogramProperties > BinSettings,
and choose Equal Bin Width.
The Equal Bin Width Settings dialog box opens.
2. Type values to set Width and Alignment of the bins.
3. Click OK to apply the changes and redraw the bins.
Both the data represented by the bins and the value you type for the
alignment affect the placement of bins on the scale.
Data&Statistics Application 427
428 Data&Statistics Application
Setting Variable Bin Widths
You can set variable bin widths based on a list of bin boundaries.
1. Create a named list containing boundary values.
For example, a boundary list defined as {60,70,100,110} will create bins at
60 to 70, 70 to 100, and 100 to 110.
Note: The data must fall within the specified bin widths. For example, a
data point of 115 would be outside the bins in the above list, and you
would receive a Data/Bin Location Mismatch error.
2. On the Plot Properties menu, click HistogramProperties > BinSettings,
and choose Variable Bin Width.
The Variable Bin Width Settings dialog box opens.
3. Select your boundary list as the List of Bin Boundaries.
4. Click OK to apply the changes and redraw the bins.
Note: You cannot change variable bin widths by dragging their
boundaries; you must edit the list of boundaries or restore equal-width
bins.
Creating a Normal Probability Plot
A normal probability plot shows one set of data against the corresponding
quartile (z) of the standard normal distribution. You can use normal probability
plots to judge the appropriateness of the normal model for your data.
1. Choose or create the data you want to use for a normal probability plot.
Use a named list from Lists&Spreadsheet or Calculator.
2. Plot the data in one of the following ways:
- Create a dot plot by selecting a column and choosing QuickGraph.
- Add a Data&Statistics work area. Click the Add Variable region on an
axis and click the data list name to plot the variable.
3. On the Plot Types menu, click Normal Probability Plot.
The data graphs in the Data&Statistics work area. You can examine the
graph to compare the normal variable against the quartile.
4. Explore the data represented in the normal probability plot.
- Hover over a data point to display its value.
- Click to select a data point. Click again to deselect it.
- Click multiple data points to select them.
- Activate the Graph Trace tool and press ◄or►to move across the
data points and display values.
Creating a Scatter Plot
A scatter plot shows the relationship between two sets of data. You can also
plot a scatter plot by using the Quick Graph tool in the Lists&Spreadsheet
application.
1. In the Data&Statistics work area, click the Add Variable region and select
the variable that contains the data you want to see represented on an axis.
The plot of the selected variable displays on the axis.
2. Click the Add Variable region of the other axis and select the variable
containing the data you want to plot.
The data points shift to represent the data in the selected variable.
Data&Statistics Application 429
430 Data&Statistics Application
3. Analyze and explore the data in the plot.
- Click a point to select it.
- Hover over a data point to view the summary data.
- Work with the data using the available tools on the Analyze menu. For
example, choose the Graph Trace tool and press ◄or►to move
across the plot.
4. Optional: To plot additional lists against the x-axis, right-click the y-axis
and click Add Variable.
Creating an X-Y Line Plot
An X-Y line plot is a scatter plot in which the data points are plotted and
connected in order of appearance in the two variables. Like scatter plots, these
plots depict the relationship between two sets of data.
By convention, the left-most column of data is represented on the horizontal
axis.
1. Create a scatter plot. For more information, see
Creating a Scatter Plot
.
2. On the Plot Types menu, click the XY Line Plot tool.
The data points within each set are connected to each other by a line.
Note: The dots are connected in the order that they appear in the list
variable on the horizontal axis. To change the order, use the sort tool in
Lists&Spreadsheet.
3. Analyze and explore the data in the plot.
- Hover over a data point to view the summary data.
- Work with the data using the available tools on the Analyze menu. For
example, choose the Graph Trace tool and press the arrow keys to
move across the dots in the plot and view the values.
Working with Categorical Plot Types
You can sort and group data using the categorical plot types:
• Dot Chart
• Bar Chart
• Pie Chart
The categorical plot types can be used to compare the representations of data
across different plots. When the same variable (list) is used for a dot chart and
a bar chart or pie chart in a problem, selecting a data point or segment in one
of the plots selects the corresponding data point, segment, or bar in all other
plots that include the variable.
Creating a Dot Chart
The default plot type for categorical data is the dot chart.
Data&Statistics Application 431
432 Data&Statistics Application
When one variable is plotted, the value of each cell is represented as one dot,
and the dots are stacked at the point on the axis that corresponds to the cell
value.
1. In Lists&Spreadsheet, create a spreadsheet that includes at least one
column of string values that can be used as categories for data.
Note: To type a string in Lists&Spreadsheet, enclose the characters in
quotes.
2. Add a Data&Statistics page to the problem.
Notes:
- You can also use the Lists&Spreadsheet Quick Graph tool to
automatically add a Data&Statistics page and plot the selected
column.
- The new Data&Statistic work area displays a default caseplot with a
caption, variable name, and unplotted data points for the variable. You
can click the variable name in the caption to choose another variable
for previewing, or drag a default data point toward an axis to plot the
current variable.
3. Move near the center of either axis and click the Add List region. The list of
variables displays.
4. Click the list that contains the categories you want to use for sorting data.
A dot chart plots in the work area. The application labels the axis with the
variable name and shows a dot for each instance of a category.
5. Explore the plotted data.
- Hover over a dot in the plot to display data values.
- Click a dot to select it. Click the dot a second time to deselect it or
remove it from a selection of multiple dots.
- Activate the Graph Trace tool and press ◄or ►to move across the
points in list order. Dots display a bold outline as you move across
them in Trace mode.
Creating a Bar Chart
Like dot charts, bar charts display categorical data. The length of a bar
represents the number of cases in the category.
1. Click the Add Variable region of either axis and choose the name of a
categorical variable. For more information, see
Creating a Dot Chart
.
2. On the Plot Types menu, click Bar Chart.
The dot chart changes to a bar representation of the data.
Data&Statistics Application 433
434 Data&Statistics Application
3. Explore the data in the plot.
- Hover over a bar to see a category summary (the number of cases
and percentage among all categories).
- Activate the Graph Trace tool and press ◄or ►move across the bars
and view summary information.
Creating a Bar Chart from a Frequency Table or Summary Data
1. On a new Data&Statistics page, create a bar chart with frequency or
summary data by choosing Add X Variable on the Plot Properties menu.
Note: You can also create a bar chart with frequency by selecting Add
Variable with Summary List from the context menu of the Add Variable
region of an axis.
2. Select the desired variable from the pop-up choices.
3. Set the height of the bars with the summary variable by selecting Add
Summary List from the Plot Properties menu.
4. Select the summary list from the pop-up choices.
The bar chart plots on the work area. The icon in the lower left corner
indicates that this plot was generated from summary data.
5. Hover over a bar to see a category summary, or use the Graph Trace tool
on the Analyze menu to move across all of the bars displaying the
summaries.
6. (Optional) Add summary lists to create a comparative bar chart.
Creating a Pie Chart
A pie chart represents categorical data in a circular layout and uses an
appropriately proportioned segment for each category.
1. Create a dot chart on the work area.
2. On the Plot Types menu, click Pie Chart.
The dots move by category into the segments of the pie chart.
Data&Statistics Application 435
436 Data&Statistics Application
3. Hover over a segment to see the summary for the category, or use the
Graph Trace tool on the Analyze menu to move across each segment
displaying all of the summaries. The summary shows the number of cases
for the category and the percentage among all cases.
Note: You can switch to a pie chart from a bar chart generated from summary
data.
Creating a Comparative Bar Chart
This might be used to explore data in a two-way table.
1. Type the raw data on a Lists&Spreadsheet page.
2. From the Insert menu in the toolbar, click Data&Statistics.
Note: Your screen may differ, depending on the data you entered.
3. Select the Click to add variable field, and select eyecolor as the variable
for the x axis.
4. On the Plot Type menu, click Bar Chart.
The frequency of the eyecolor data is plotted.
5. To split the eyecolor data by gender, click the Plot Properties menu, click
Split Categories by Variable, and then click gender.
Data&Statistics Application 437
438 Data&Statistics Application
Splitting a Numeric Plot by Categories
You can use a categorical split to sort the values plotted on an axis.
1. Open a problem that includes a Lists&Spreadsheet page, or create data
to be plotted in the Lists&Spreadsheet application.
In this example, lists contain dog breed and daily walk information.
2. Click column letter (B).
3. On the Lists&Spreadsheet Data menu, click the Quick Graph tool.
The Quick Graph tool adds a Data&Statistics page. Data&Statistics plots
the variable and labels the horizontal axis.
4. To plot the numeric data for each category, hover on the Add Variable
region near the center of the vertical axis and click the tooltip Click or Enter
to add variable.
The list of available variables displays.
5. On the list of variables, click the name of the category variable.
Data&Statistics labels the vertical axis and plots the numeric data for
each category.
Data&Statistics Application 439
440 Data&Statistics Application
Exploring Data
You can manipulate and explore plotted data.
Moving Points or Bins of Data
1. Click and hold the desired point or bin.
The pointer changes to an open hand ÷.
2. Drag the point or bar to the new location and release it. Moving the point
changes the values for x and y.
If you are working with data from Lists&Spreadsheet, the data that
corresponds to the original point or bar automatically updates in the
original column(s) in Lists&Spreadsheet as you move the point.
You can also move points or bins by changing the numbers in the
Lists&Spreadsheet or Calculator applications. Data will update in all of
the representations.
Moving Multiple Points
1. Position the pointer over each data point that you want to select. When the
pointer changes to an open hand ÷, click to add the point to the selection.
Alternatively, you can drag a selection rectangle around the points to
select them.
2. Drag any of the selected points to move them all.
Note: When a list is defined in Lists&Spreadsheet as a formula, the
movement of points is restricted to positions that satisfy the formula.
Sorting Plotted Categories
You can sort plotted categories in list order, value order, or alphabetically by
category name.
1. Click the work area that contains the plotted data.
2. On the Actions menu, click Sort, and then click the type of sort.
Data&Statistics Application 441
442 Data&Statistics Application
Months listed chronologically but sorted by value (amount of rainfall)
Note: You can customize the order of the categories by clicking a label and
dragging it.
Plotting a Value
You can plot a value on an existing plot. It displays as a vertical line in the work
area.
1. From the Analyze menu, click Plot Value.
A text box with a default expression opens in the work area.
2. Type the value you want to plot, and press Enter. In this example, the value
is v1:= mean(cost).
The line is drawn at that value, perpendicular to the axis. If you have
multiple plots on the work area, a plot value segment displays for each
plot.
Note: If you use a frequency table to generate a histogram, reference the
frequency list in your expression. For example, type the expression "v1:=
mean(List, FreqList)" in the plot value entry box.
3. Click the line to display the value.
Note: Double-click the value to edit the expression.
Plot value with value displayed
You can use Plot value for a single number or any expression that
evaluates to a number. If the value is dependent on the data, like mean,
when you drag a point or make changes in the Lists&Spreadsheet
application, the line updates to reflect the change, allowing for
investigation of the influence of points on the calculation.
Removing a Plotted Value
1. Select the plotted value line.
2. From the Actions menu, click Remove Plotted Value.
Changing the Plot Type
You can change the plot type, to view different representations of data.
▶On the Plot Type menu, click a new plot type. Only the supported plot types
are available. For example, only univariate plot types are available when a
single variable plotted on an axis.
The data representation changes to the new plot format.
Note: Options are unavailable on the menu if the plotted data cannot be
represented by the plot type. For example, if a scatter plot is displayed in
Data&Statistics Application 443
444 Data&Statistics Application
the work area, you cannot create a box plot without first removing the
variable from the y-axis.
Rescaling a Graph
You can change the scale of the axes by using Translation and Dilation. The
pointer changes to indicate whether Translation (ö) or Dilation (ô) is available
in zones on the axes.
Translation
A translation slides a set of axes a fixed distance in a given direction. The
original axes have the same shape and size.
1. Position the pointer over a tic mark or label in the middle third of the axis.
The pointer changes to ö.
2. Click to grab. The pointer changes to a grasping hand ù. Drag to the
desired position and release.
Dilation
Dilation retains the shape of the axes, but enlarges or reduces the size.
1. Position the pointer over a tic mark or label near the ends of the axis. The
pointer changes to óon the vertical axis or ôon the horizontal axis.
2. Click to grab. The pointer changes to an open hand ÷. Drag to the desired
position and release.
Adding a Movable Line
You can add a movable line to a plot. Moving and rotating the line on the work
area changes the function that describes it.
▶From the Analyze menu, click Add Movable Line.
The movable line displays and is labeled with a function that describes it.
For this example, Data&Statistics stores the expression for the movable
line in the variable m1.
Rotating a Movable Line
1. Click and grab either end of the line.
The pointer changes to é.
Data&Statistics Application 445
446 Data&Statistics Application
2. Drag to rotate and change the slope of the line.
The function m1(x) is updated for the changes in the position of the
movable line.
Changing the Intercept
1. Click in the middle of the movable line.
The pointer changes to ö.
2. Drag to change the intercept.
The number at the end of the equation changes to show the change in the
intercept.
Note: The movable line is stored as a function that can be used for
prediction in the Calculator application.
Locking the Intercept at Zero
You can lock the intercept of the movable line at zero.
▶From the Analyze menu, click Lock Intercept at Zero.
You can unlock the intercept by choosing Unlock Movable Line Intercept
on the Analyze menu.
Tracing a Movable Line
You can trace a movable line to predict and analyze values.
1. Click the line.
The pointer changes.
2. From the Analyze menu, click Graph Trace to enable Trace mode for the
line. Rotation of the line is not supported in Trace mode.
3. Press ◄or►(left or right arrow keys) to trace the movable line.
If the plotted variables change, points on the graph and the line are
updated automatically.
Showing a Line of Regression
You can show a line of regression when you have a scatter plot or an X-Y line
plot on the work area. Studying the line of regression can help you understand
the relationship between two variables.
1. With a scatter plot or X-Y line plot of two variables on the work area, click
the Analyze menu, choose Regression and view the list of regressions.
2. Click the type of regression line to show. For example, choose Show
Linear (mx+b) to plot a linear regression line as shown in the following
example.
Data&Statistics Application 447
448 Data&Statistics Application
When the line of regression is selected, the expression for the line
displays.
Showing Residual Squares
You can display residual squares on a plot. Residual squares can help you
assess the appropriateness of the model for your data.
Note: This tool is only available when a regression or movable line is present
in the work area.
▶From the Analyze menu, click Residuals >Show Residual Squares.
The sum of squares is updated as the line or data changes.
Showing a Residual Plot
You can show a residual plot to determine how well a line fits data. The work
area must include a scatter plot and one or more movable lines, regressions, or
plotted functions for Show Residual Plot to be available.
▶With a scatter plot, line of regression, and/or movable line in the work area,
click the Analyze menu, and click Show Residual Plot > Residuals.
Notes:
• With multiple regressions or functions and movable lines plotted, you can
select each by clicking the line to show its residual plot.
• Click and hold a dot on the residual plot to see the residual.
• The residual plot for the selected regression or function displays in the
work area.
• For consistency in comparing sets of data, residual plots do not rescale
when you move from one function or regression to another.
• Select a function or regression before a showing residual plot. If no
function or regression is selected and there are several plotted,
Data&Statistics arbitrarily selects the function or regression for showing
the residual plot.
• Axes can be adjusted by clicking and dragging.
Removing a Residual Plot
▶With a scatter plot, line of regression, and/or movable line in the work area,
click the Analyze menu, and click Hide Residual Plot.
Data&Statistics Application 449
450 Data&Statistics Application
Using Window/Zoom Tools
Use the Window/Zoom tools to redefine the graph to better view points of
interest. The Window/Zoom tools include:
• Window Settings: displays a Window Settings dialog box that lets you type
the x-min, x-max, y-min, and y-max values for the axes.
• Zoom - Data: adjusts the zoom factor to display all plotted data.
• Zoom - In: lets you define the center point of the zoom in location. The
Zoom In factor is approximately 2.
• Zoom - Out: lets you define the center point of the zoom out location. The
Zoom Out factor is approximately 2.
Using the Window Settings Tool
1. On the Window/Zoom menu, click Window Settings.
The Window Settings dialog box opens. The current values for x-min,
x-max, y-min, and y-max are displayed in the fields.
Note: Only the appropriate boxes are editable, depending on whether
there are one or two axes in the work area.
2. Type the new values over the old values.
3. Click OK to apply the changes and redraw the plot.
Using the Zoom Data Tool
▶On the Window/Zoom menu, click Zoom Data.
The work area rescales to display all plotted data.
Using the Zoom In Tool
1. On the Window/Zoom menu, click Zoom In.
2. In the work area, click the center point of the area of interest. This will be
the center of the zoom in action.
The plot redraws to focus and enlarge the portion of the plot centered
about the point you selected in the previous step.
Using the Zoom Out Tool
1. On the Window/Zoom menu, click Zoom Out.
2. In the work area, click the center point of the area of interest. This will be
the center of the zoom out action.
The plot redraws to display a larger portion of the plot, centered about the
point you selected in the previous step.
Graphing Functions
You can graph functions by typing them in Data&Statistics, or you can graph
functions defined in other applications.
Graphing Functions Using the Plot Function Tool
You can use the Plot Function tool to plot functions in a work area that already
includes a plot on the axes. Plot Function lets you specify and graph a function
for comparison to an existing plot.
To use the Plot Function tool:
1. Create or open a problem that includes variables (from
Lists&Spreadsheet) that are plotted on a Data&Statistics work area.
Ensure that your work area contains both a horizontal axis and a vertical
axis scale.
2. From the Analyze menu, click Plot Function.
A function entry field displays in the work area.
Note: You can edit the function’s expression typed in the entry field.
However, the function graphed in Data&Statistics cannot be manipulated
or moved around the work area. To do that, use Graphs&Geometry.
3. Type the function in the entry field, and press Enter.
Note: You can rename the function by typing over f1(x): with another name,
if you choose.
Data&Statistics Application 451
452 Data&Statistics Application
The function graphs in the work area and is saved as a variable for use in
other applications.
Entering Functions from Other Applications
You can enter a function that has been defined as a variable in another
application, such as Lists&Spreadsheet, Graphs&Geometry, or Calculator.
1. Add a variable to each axis. You can access any variables defined in a
Lists&Spreadsheet or Calculator application in your problem from the
variable list.
2. From the Analyze menu, click Plot Function.
A function entry field displays in the work area.
3. Click on the toolbar.
Handheld: Press h.
A list of variables available in the problem displays.
4. Click to select the variable containing the function you want to plot.
In the example below, the variable acontains the function f(x)=x2.
5. Press Enter.
The function plots in the work area.
Editing a Function
You can edit a function and update it in the work area.
1. You can edit a function by double-clicking the equation and then making
changes as required.
2. Press Enter after making all changes and the updates are displayed in the
work area.
Data&Statistics Application 453
454 Data&Statistics Application
Using Data&Statistics Functions in other Applications
Data&Statistics functions are stored as variables, and may be used in other
applications, in the same manner as any other variable. Support for all function
types is included.
Note: Function numbers increment to use the next available. If you have
defined f1(x) and f2(x) in Graphs&Geometry, the first function you create in
Data&Statistics will be f3(x).
Using Show Normal PDF
You can approximate data plotted in the Data&Statistics work area against the
normal probability density function. The tool overlays the normal probability
density function using the mean and the standard deviation of the data in the
histogram.
To show the normal probability density function for plotted data:
1. Add a variable to the x-axis.
2. On the Plot Types menu, click Histogram.
Note:Show Normal PDF is available only when histogram is the plot type.
3. From the Analyze menu, click Show Normal PDF.
The normal PDF for the graph plots in the work area. The expression used
to calculate the PDF displays when selected.
You can click Hide Normal PDF on the Analyze menu to remove the PDF.
Using Shade Under Function
Use Shade Under Function to find the area of a selected region under a
function graphed in the work area.
1. Select any function graphed in the Data&Statistics work area. For
example, select a previously graphed normal PDF.
2. From the Analyze menu, click Shade Under Function.
The pointer becomes a dotted vertical line and the boundary +/- ˆdisplays
when you position the mouse near the boundary on the left or right. You
can click when ˆdisplays to set it as a boundary.
Data&Statistics Application 455
456 Data&Statistics Application
3. Select a point on the curve and click to indicate where to start shading
under the function. The direction in which you move next determines
whether the region shaded is on the left, right, or center of the curve.
4. Select a point on the curve and click to indicate the end boundary of the
shaded area. A region under the function is shaded based on the points
you selected.
You can work with Shade Under Function in the following ways:
• Select the region to display the values for data points in the shaded
area.
• To remove the shading, right-click or Ctrl-click the shaded region and
choose Remove Shaded Region.
• To change the fill color of the shaded area, right-click or Ctrl-click the
shaded region, choose Color, choose Fill, and click a color.
• Use plot value to set the boundary to an exact number. When a
boundary for shading is set to a plotted value, you can change the
plotted value to update the shading.
• Edit a shaded region by clicking and dragging the edge at the starting
or ending boundary.
Using Graph Trace
Graph Trace lets you move from one point on a graph to another to analyze
variations in the data. You can use Graph Trace mode to explore the data for
the following graphs.
• Graphs from Plot Function and Show Normal PDF
• Distribution curves (created in the Lists&Spreadsheet application)
• Movable Lines
• Regressions
• Caseplots
• Dot plots
• Scatter plots and X-Y line plots
• Box plots
• Histograms
• Bar charts
• Pie charts
To use Graph Trace
1. From the Analyze menu, click Graph Trace.
2. Press ◄or►to move across the plot.
The data representations enlarge and appear with a bold outline as you
move across them in Trace mode.
Customizing Your Workspace
Working with Color
All data points for a plotted variable display in the same color to distinguish
them from the data points of other variables. Data plotted by category and split
plots are automatically displayed in different colors to help you distinguish the
data.
To emphasize or distinguish certain parts of your work, you can change the
default color for a variable’s data.
• Apply fill colors to objects, such as shading, or change the color for a
variable’s data points.
• Apply color to plotted lines (such as lines of regression) or movable lines.
TI-Nspire™ handhelds without color show color objects in shades of gray. The
color information is preserved in the document unless you change color from
the handheld. If you choose to, you can work in grayscale mode to view objects
in the desktop software similarly to how they appear on the handheld.
Inserting a Background Image
When using the computer software, you can insert an image as a background
for a Data&Statistics page. The file format of the image can be .bmp, .jpg, or
.png.
1. From the Insert menu, click Image.
2. Navigate to the image that you want to insert.
3. Select it, and then click Open.
The image is inserted as a background.
For more information, see the
Working with Images
chapter.
Data&Statistics Application 457
458 Data&Statistics Application
Working with Text
The Insert Text tool lets you type text to describe details related to plots on the
work area.
1. From the Actions menu, click Insert Text.
A text box opens.
2. Type notes or descriptions in the text box.
3. Customize the text to suit your needs.
• Move the pointer over the edges of the text box to drag the borders
and change the width or height.
• Click and grab the text box to move it near objects that relate to the
text.
• Scroll to view additional text in a box by clicking the arrows at the top
and bottom edge.
• Click outside of the text entry box to exit the Text tool.
• Hide text by clicking the Actions menu and clicking Hide Text.
• Change the color of text.
Adjusting Variable Values with a Slider
In the Graphs, Geometry, and Data&Statistics applications, a slider control lets
you adjust or animate the value of a numeric variable.
Horizontal slider for adjusting variable v1.
Minimized vertical slider for adjusting variable v2.
Inserting a Slider
1. Start in a Graphs, Geometry, or Data&Statistics page.
2. From the Actions menu, select Insert Slider.
The Slider Settings screen opens.
Data&Statistics Application 459
460 Data&Statistics Application
3. Enter desired values.
4. Click OK.
The slider is displayed in the work area. Handles on the slider let you
move or stretch it. To remove the handles, click an empty space in the work
area.
5. To adjust the variable, slide the pointer (or click the arrows on a minimized
slider).
Working with the Slider
Use the options on the context menu to move or delete the slider, and to start or
stop its animation. You can also change the slider's settings.
1. Display the slider's context menu.
2. Click an option to select it.
Inferential Statistics
You can explore hypothesis tests and probability distributions in the
Data&Statistics application after entering the data on a Lists&Spreadsheet
page.
Drawing Inferential Statistics Plots
The following example uses the Draw option of the normCdf() function to plot a
distribution model.
1. On a Lists&Spreadsheet page, select the column-formula cell (second
cell from the top) in columnA.
2. From the Statistics menu, click Distributions, and click NormalCdf.
3. Type the plot parameters into the NormalCdf wizard.
4. Select the Draw check box to see the distribution plotted and shaded in
Data&Statistics.
Note: The Draw option is not available for all distributions.
Data&Statistics Application 461
462 Data&Statistics Application
5. Click OK.
Exploring Inferential Statistics Plots
After drawing the plot in the previous example, you can explore the effect of
changing the upper bound.
▶On the Data&Statistics plot, drag the vertical line that represents the upper
bound toward the left or right.
As you drag, the formula is updated and the shaded area is recalculated.
Notes Application
The Notes application lets you create and share text documents using the
TI-Nspire™ handheld and computer software. Use Notes to:
• Create study notes to reinforce learning, demonstrate your understanding
of classroom concepts, and to review for exams.
• Edit collaboratively by assigning different roles to individuals using your
document so that any edits appear in a different text format.
• Create and evaluate math expressions.
• Create correctly formatted chemical formulas and equations.
Adding a Notes Page
▶To start a new document with a blank Notes page:
From the main File menu, click New Document, and then click Add Notes.
Handheld: Press c, and select Notes .
▶To add a Notes page in the current problem of an existing document:
From the toolbar, click Insert > Notes.
Handheld: Press ~and select Insert > Notes.
ÀNotes tools – Available anytime you are in the Notes work area.
ÁText formatting toolbar -- Lets you change size, color, bold, and other text
properties.
ÂNotes work area -- The area where you type and format text.
Notes Application 463
464 Notes Application
Using Templates in Notes
Use the options on the Templates menu to select a format for your Notes page.
Menu Option Function
2: Templates
1: Q&A Creates a template to enter question and
answer text.
2: Proof Creates a template to enter statement and
reason text.
3: Default Lets you type freeform text.
4:Hide Answer
(Q&A)
Toggles to show or hide the Answer in a
Q&A format.
Selecting a Template
Complete the following steps to select and apply a template:
1. From the Notes menu, click .
2. From the menu, click the template you want to apply.
Handheld: From the Notes work area, press b, and then press ►to
display the menu options.
The Notes page is displayed in the format you selected.
Using the Q&A Template
Use the Q&A template to create questions and answers. You can show or hide
the answer so you can create questions for review and hide the answers.
When you use the document as a study aid, you can verify that your answers
are correct.
Press Tab to move the text cursor between the Question and Answer areas of
the template.
Using the Proof Template
The proof template provides an outline structure for statements and
corresponding reasons.
Press Tab to move the text cursor between the Statements and Reasons areas
of the template.
Formatting Text in Notes
Text formatting lets you apply visual properties, such as bold and italic, to your
text.
•Ordinary text. Apply most combinations of bold, italic, underline,
superscript, subscript, and strikethrough formatting. Select font and font
size for any character.
•Text in a math expression box. Apply formatting and enter math exponents
and math subscripts for variable names. Select font and font size. Font size
affects all text in the box.
•Text in a chemical equation box. Apply formatting. Select font and font size.
Font size affects all text in the box. Superscript and subscript are handled
automatically.
Selecting Text
▶Drag from the starting point to the ending point to select the text.
Handheld: If you are using the Q&A or Proof template, press eto place
the cursor in the area containing the text. Use the Touchpad to place the
Notes Application 465
466 Notes Application
cursor at the start or end of the text to be selected. Hold down g, and
use the Touchpad to select the text.
Applying a Text Format
1. Select the text that you want to format.
2. On the formatting toolbar, click the formatting icons (such as for bold) to
toggle them, or click to select a font and font size.
Handheld: Click b, and then select Format >Format Text.
The changes are applied to the text as you make selections.
Note: The toolbar shows only the icons that are applicable to the type of
text selected. For example, superscript ( ) and subscript ( ) are shown
only for ordinary text.
Using Color in Notes
When working in the Notes application on a desktop, use the (fill color) or
the (text color) options on the Documents Workspace toolbar to emphasize
words, calculations, and formulas.
You can also apply color to text when working in the Notes application on the
TI-Nspire™ CX handheld.
Note: If you transfer a document that contains color to a TI-Nspire™ handheld
that does not support color, the colors are converted to gray scale.
Changing Text Colors
1. Select the text you want to change to another color. You can select a
sentence, phrase, word, or a single letter. You can also select a math
expression box, a chemical equation box, or individual characters in a
calculation, formula, chemical equation, or math template.
2. From the Documents Workspace toolbar, click .
Handheld: Press ~, and then click Edit > Text Color.
The Text Color palette opens.
3. Click a color to apply it to the selected text.
Applying a Background Color
You can apply a background color to highlight selected characters in ordinary
text, text in a math expression, or text in a chemical equation box.
1. Select the text.
2. From the Documents Workspace toolbar, click the arrow next to .
Handheld: Press ~, and then press Edit > Fill Color.
The Fill Color palette opens.
3. Click a color to apply it to the selected text.
Inserting Images
When working in the Notes application on a desktop, use the Images option on
the Insert menu to add an image to a Notes page.
Note: The option for inserting an image is not available when working on a
handheld. However, you can transfer a file containing an image from your
computer to a TI-Nspire™ CX handheld and colors are retained. If transferred to
a TI-Nspire™ handheld, the colors in the image are converted to gray scale.
1. Click Insert > Image from the Documents Toolbar.
The Insert Image window opens.
2. Navigate to the folder where the image is located.
3. Select the image, and then click Open to insert the image into the Notes
work area. Valid files types are .jpg, .png, or .bmp.
4. To type text around the image, place the cursor in front of the image or
after the image, and then type the text.
Resizing an Image
Complete the following steps to resize an image.
1. Click the image to select it.
2. Move the pointer to the edge of the image.
Notes Application 467
468 Notes Application
The pointer changes to a left-right arrow symbol.
3. Drag the image to make it smaller or larger.
For more information, see
Working with Images
.
Inserting Items on a Notes Page
When working with the Notes application, open the Insert menu to insert a math
expression, chemical equation, shape symbol, or a comment.
Menu
Name
Menu
Option
Function
3: Insert
1: Math
Box - /M
Lets you insert a math expression.
2: Chem
box - /E
Lets you insert a chemical formula or equation.
2: Shape Marks the selected text as an angle, triangle,
circle, line, segment, ray, or vector.
3:
Comment
Lets you type text that is italicized and prefaced
with Teacher or Reviewer.
Inserting Comments in Notes Text
You can insert Teacher or Reviewer comments into a Notes application.
Comments are easy to distinguish from the original text.
1. Define the type of comments you are inserting (Teacher or Reviewer):
• PC: From the Insert menu, click Comment, and then click Teacher or
Reviewer.
• Handheld: While in the Notes work area, press bto display the
Notes menu. Press Insert > Comment, and then select either Teacher
or Reviewer.
2. Type your text.
Text that you type appears in italics.
Inserting Geometric Shape Symbols
You can use geometric shape symbols to designate selected text as geometric
objects, such as an angle, circle, or line segment.
To insert a shape symbol, position the cursor where you want it, and then do
the following:
• PC: From the Insert menu, click Shapes, and then select the shape to
apply.
• Handheld: Press bto display the Notes menu. On the Insert menu, click
Shapes, and then select the shape to apply.
Entering Math Expressions in Notes Text
You can include math expressions in Notes text, using the same tools as in
other TI-Nspire™ applications.
Notes Application 469
470 Notes Application
Math expression boxes have attributes that allow you to control how the
expression is displayed.
Menu
Name
Menu
Option
Function
5: Math Box
Options
1:
Math Box
Attributes
When a math box is selected, this option opens a
dialog box allowing you to customize the math box.
You can hide or show input or output, turn off
calculation for the box, insert symbols, change
display and angle settings, and allow or disallow the
wrapping of expressions and the display of warning
indicator after they have been dismissed. You can
change the attributes of multiple selected math boxes
at the same time.
2:
Show
Warning
Info
Displays a warning indicator after the warning has
been dismissed.
3:
Show
Error
Displays an error after the error has been dismissed.
Entering an Expression
1. In the Notes work area, place the cursor where you want the expression.
Then do the following:
• Windows®: From the Insert menu, click Math Expression Box or
Ctrl+M.
• Mac®: Press “+M.
• Handheld: Press bto open the Notes menu. Select Insert, and then
click Math Expression Box.
2. Type the expression. You can use the Catalog, if necessary, to insert a
function, command, symbol, or expression template.
Evaluating and Approximating Math Expressions
You can evaluate or approximate one or more expressions and display the
results. You can also convert selected text and multiple math expression boxes
into a single math expression box. Notes automatically updates expressions
and any variables used.
Menu
Name
Menu Option Function
1: Actions
1: Evaluate -
·
Evaluates the expression.
2: Approximate
/ ·
Approximates the expression.
3: Evaluate
and replace
Replaces the selected part of the
expression with the result.
4: Deactivate Deactivates the current or selected item
(box or boxes)
5: Deactivate
All
Deactivates all boxes in the current Notes
application.
6: Activate Activates the current or selected
previously deactivated item.
7: Activate All Activates all boxes in the current Notes
application.
Notes Application 471
472 Notes Application
Evaluating or Approximating an Expression
To evaluate or approximate an expression, place the cursor anywhere in the
math expression box and then do the following:
• Windows®: On the Actions menu, click Evaluate or Approximate. You can
also use Enter to evaluate or Ctrl+Enter to approximate.
• Mac®: Press “+ Enter to approximate.
• Handheld: Press bto display the Notes menu. On the Actions menu,
select Evaluate.
The result replaces the expression.
Evaluating Part of an Expression
To evaluate part of an expression, select the text or part of the math expression.
Then do the following:
▶On the Actions menu, click Evaluate and Replace.
Handheld: Press bto open the Notes menu. Select Actions, and then
select Evaluate Selection.
The result replaces the selected part only.
Breaking Long Calculations
Some calculations may take a long time. Notes indicates that the handheld is
performing a long calculation by displaying a busy icon. If a calculation is
taking more time than you want to spend, you can end the calculation.
To stop the function or program in progress, do the following:
• Windows®: Hold down the F12 key and press Enter repeatedly.
• Mac®: Hold down the F5 key and press Enter repeatedly.
• Handheld: Hold down the ckey and press ·repeatedly.
Showing Warnings and Errors
If a calculation in Notes results in a warning or error, you can view the warning
or error again even after you have dismissed the dialog box.
To display a warning or error in Notes after you have dismissed the dialog box,
do one of the following:
• Windows®: Right-click and select Show warning info or Show error.
• Mac®: “+click and select Show warning info or Show error.
Note: You can change your settings so that warnings do not appear at all. The
showing of warning indicators is controlled by the Math Box Attributes dialog
box. See
Changing the Attributes of Math Expression Boxes
.
Converting Selected Items to Math Expression Boxes
To convert items to math expression boxes:
1. Select the text, or combination of text and existing math expression box,
that you want to evaluate.
2. From the Actions menu, click Convert to Math Expression Box.
Inserting Chemical Equations in Notes
Chemical equation boxes (chem boxes) make it easy to type chemical formulas
and equations, such as .
As you type in a chem box, most of the formatting work is handled
automatically:
• Correct capitalization of most element symbols, such as Ag and Cl, is
automatic.
• Leading digits are treated as coefficients and are shown at full size.
Numbers that follow an element or a closed parenthesis are converted to
subscripts.
• The equals “=” symbol is converted to a yields “&” symbol.
Notes:
• Equations in a chem box cannot be evaluated or balanced.
• Element capitalization may not work in every situation. For example, to
enter carbon dioxide, CO2, you must manually capitalize theO. Otherwise,
typing “co” would result in“Co,” the symbol for cobalt.
Entering a chemical equation
1. Position the cursor where you want the equation.
2. On the Insert menu, select Chem Box, or press Ctrl+E.
An empty chemical equation box is displayed.
3. Type the equation in the box. For example, to represent sulphuric acid,
type h2sO4, capitalizing the O manually.
Notes Application 473
474 Notes Application
The chem box automatically formats the text as you type:
4. If you need superscripts for ionic equations, type a caret symbol (^) and
then the text.
5. Use parentheses to indicate whether a compound is solid(s), liquid(l),
gas(g), or aqueous(aq).
6. To exit the chem box, click anywhere outside it.
Deactivating Math Expression Boxes
Calculations are by default activated, which means that results automatically
update when you evaluate or approximate an expression. If you don’t want
results to automatically update, you can deactivate a math expression box,
group of boxes, or the entire application.
Deactivating a Box or a Group of Boxes
To deactivate a box or a group of boxes:
1. Select the box or boxes that you want to deactivate.
2. Deactivate the selected box or boxes:
• Windows®: Click Actions > Deactivate (or right-click and then click
Actions > Deactivate).
• Mac®: Click Actions > Deactivate (or “+click and then click Actions >
Deactivate).
• Handheld: Press bto open the Notes menu. From the Actions
menu, select Deactivate.
Note: You can manually update a deactivated box or boxes by selecting
the box or boxes and using the process described in
Evaluating and
Approximating Math Expressions
.
Deactivating All Boxes in the Notes Application
To deactivate all boxes in the Notes application:
▶With a document open, place your cursor in the Notes application that you
want to deactivate and select Deactivate All.
• Windows®: Click Actions > Deactivate All or right-click and click
Actions > Deactivate All.
• Mac®: Click Actions > Deactivate or “+click and click Actions >
Deactivate.
• Handheld: Press bto display the Notes menu. On the Actions
menu, click Deactivate.
Note: When you use this option in Q&A and Proof templates, Deactivate All
deactivates only the math boxes in the current work area.
Changing the Attributes of Math Expression Boxes
You can change attributes in one or more math expression boxes at the same
time. Controlling the attributes in math expression boxes allows you to do the
following:
• Show or hide the input or output, or prevent calculation in the box.
• Select a symbol separator using Insert Symbol.
• Choose the number of digits to display in the output of a math expression.
• Select angle settings so you can use both radian/degree and gradian
angle measures in the same Notes application.
• Select whether to allow math expressions to wrap.
• Select whether to show or hide warning indicators.
To change the attributes of one or more boxes, do the following:
1. Select the box or boxes that you want to change.
2. On the Math Box Options menu, click Math Box Attributes.
3. Use the menus or selection boxes to make your selections.
4. Click OK to save or Cancel to abandon the change.
Note: Math expression boxes recalculate automatically after you have made
attribute changes and saved the changes.
Undoing Changes to Math Expression Boxes
▶To undo changes you have made to a math expression box, press Ctrl+Z.
Notes Application 475
476 Notes Application
Using Calculations in Notes
In the Notes application, the options on the Calculations menu enable you to
perform calculations. The calculations are described in the following table.
Important Information to Know
• Notes does not support editing programs. Use Program Editor instead.
• Notes does not support executing Lock or Unlock commands. Use
Calculator instead.
• Notes does not display intermediate results obtained using the "Disp"
command. Use Calculator instead.
• Notes does not support user-defined dialog boxes obtained using the
"Request," "RequestStr," or "Text" commands. Use Calculator instead.
• Notes does not support the execution of multiple statistics commands that
produce stat. variables.
Menu
Name
Menu
Option
Function
6:
Calculations
1:
Define
Variables
Define a variable in a Note using the Calculator
application.
2:
Number
Use tools from the Calculator Number menu,
including Convert to Decimal, Approximate to
Fraction, Factor, Least Common Multiple, Greatest
Common Divisor, Remainder, Fraction Tools,
Number Tools, and Complex Number Tools.
3:
Algebra
Use tools from the Calculator Algebra menu,
including Numerical Solve, Solve System of Linear
Equations, Polynomial Tools.
4:
Calculus
Use tools from the Calculus menu including
Numerical Derivative at a Point, Numerical Definite
Menu
Name
Menu
Option
Function
Integral, Sum, Product, Numerical Function
Minimum, and Numerical Function Maximum.
3
(CAS):
Algebra
Use tools from the Calculator Algebra menu,
including Solve, Factor, Expand, Zeros, Numerical
Solve, Solve System of Equations, Polynomial
Tools, Fraction Tools, Convert Expressions,
Trigonometry, Complex, and Extract.
4
(CAS):
Calculus
Use tools from the Calculus menu including
Derivative, Derivative at a Point, Integral, Limit,
Sum, Product, Function Minimum, Function
Maximum, Tangent Line, Normal Line, Arc Length,
Series, Differential Equation Solver, Implicit
Differentiation, and Numerical Calculations
5:
Probability
Use tools from the Calculator Probability menu,
including Factorial, Permutations, Combinations,
Random, and Distributions.
6:
Statistics
Use tools from the Calculator Statistics menu,
including Stat Calculations, Stat Results, List Math,
List Operations, and others.
7:
Matrix &
Vector
Use tools from the Calculator Matrix&Vector menu,
including Create, Transpose, Determinant, Row-
Echelon Form, Reduced Row-Echelon Form,
Simultaneous, and others.
8:
Finance
Use tools from the Calculator Finance menu,
including Finance Solver, TVM Functions,
Amortization, Cash Flows, Interest Conversions,
and Days between Dates.
Note: For more information, see the Calculator chapter.
Notes Application 477
478 Notes Application
Exploring Notes with Examples
This section shows you how the Notes application works with other
applications to automatically update results.
Example #1: Using Notes to Explore Roots of a Quadratic Function
1. Open a new document and select the Notes application.
2. Define a function in a math box, evaluate, and hide the output using the
Math Box attributes.
3. Type some more text; for example: Real Roots of f1(x) are:
4. In a new math box, type: polyRoots(f1(x),x).
5. Press Enter and hide the input of this math box by using the Math Box
attributes dialog box.
6. Use the Page Layout toolbar icon to select the split layout.
7. Add the Graph application and plot f1(x).
See how the roots of f1 change when the function is modified in Graph.
Example #2: Using Notes to Explore Data Sampling
This example shows how to create a sampling distribution of sample means
drawn from a given population. We will be able to watch the sampling
distribution take shape for a given sample size and describe its characteristics.
You can change the population and the sample size.
1. Set up the population and the sample size.
a) Type Create sample data:
b) Insert a math expression box and define the population. For example,
type population:=seq(n,n,1,50).
c) Press Enter and hide the output using the Math Expression Box
Attributes dialog box.
Notes Application 479
480 Notes Application
d) Insert a math expression box and define the sample size. For
example, type size:=5.
e) Press Enter and hide the output using the Math Expression Box
Attributes dialog box.
2. Set up the initialization.
a) Type Start taking samples:
b) Insert a math expression box and set the initial values for the number
of samples (num) and the list of sample means (sampmeans). Type:
num:=0:sampmeans:={}
c) Press Enter and hide the output using the Math Expression Box
Attributes dialog box.
d) Deactivate the math expression box using Actions > Deactivate. The
deactivation will prevent the content of that math box from being
overwritten when the values for num and sampmeans change. The
deactivated math box will be shown with the light color background.
3. Set up Data&Statistics for the sampling.
a) Change the page layout and insert Data&Statistics.
b) Click on the horizontal axis and add sampmeans list.
c) Change the window setting: XMins=1 and XMax = 50.
d) You can also set up the plot of the mean of sample means using
Analyze > Plot Value.
4. Enter the instructions to add data.
a) Type Create new samples:
b) Insert a math expression to define the sample (sample) and update
the number of samples and the list of sample means. Type:
num:=num+1:sample:=randsamp(population,size):
sampmeans:=augment(sampmeans,{mean(sample)})
c) Press Enter, hide the output, and turn off the expression wrapping
using the Math Expression Box Attributes dialog box.
d) Deactivate the math expression box using Actions > Deactivate to
prevent the contents of the math box from changing when num and
sampmeans values are reinitialized.
e) Create math expression boxes that display the current number of
experiments (num), sample (sample), and the list of sample means
(sampmeans).
Notes Application 481
482 Notes Application
5. Now you are ready to explore. Add more samples by simply pressing Enter
when you are in the math expression box in the "Create new samples"
section.
Note: You can also automate the sampling process by using a
For...EndFor loop.
You can also change the sample size and restart the sampling.
Notes Application 483
484
Data Collection
The Vernier DataQuest™ application is built into the TI-Nspire™ software and
the operating system (OS) for handhelds. The application lets you:
• Capture, view, and analyze real-world data using a TI-Nspire™ handheld,
a Windows® computer, or a Mac® computer.
• Collect data from up to five connected sensors (three analog and two
digital) using the TI-Nspire™ Lab Cradle.
Important: The TI-Nspire™ CM-C Handheld is not compatible with the Lab
Cradle and only supports the use of a single sensor at a time.
• Collect data either in the classroom or at remote locations using collection
modes such as time-based or event-based.
• Collect several data runs for comparison.
• Create a graphical hypothesis using the Draw Prediction feature.
• Play back the data set to compare the outcome to the hypothesis.
• Analyze data using functions such as interpolation, tangential rate, or
modeling.
• Send collected data to other TI-Nspire™ applications.
Adding a Vernier DataQuest™ Page
Note: The application is launched automatically when you connect a sensor.
Starting a new document or problem for each new experiment ensures that the
Vernier DataQuest™ application is set to its default values.
▶To start a new document containing a data collection page:
From the main File menu, click New Document, and then click Add Vernier
DataQuest™.
Handheld: Press c, and select Vernier DataQuest™ .
▶To insert a new problem with a data collection page into an existing
document:
From the toolbar, click Insert > Problem>Vernier DataQuest™.
Handheld: Press ~and select Insert > Problem > Vernier DataQuest™.
Data Collection 485
486 Data Collection
ÀVernier DataQuest™ Menu. Contains menu items for setup, collection,
and analysis of sensor data.
ÁDetails view. Contains buttons for starting data collection ,
changing collection settings , marking collected data , storing
data sets , and tabs for managing multiple data runs.
View selection buttons let you choose from Meter view , Graph
view , or Table view .
ÂData work area. The information displayed here depends on the view.
Meter. Displays a list of sensors that are currently connected or set up
in advance.
Graph. Displays collected data in a graphical representation, or
displays the prediction before a data collection run.
Table. Displays collected data in columns and rows.
What You Must Know
Required Operating System
To use the Vernier DataQuest™ application on a TI-Nspire™ handheld, the OS
must be 3.0 or higher. Screen snapshots in this document are from version 3.9
and may not match your screens exactly. To update the OS, go to
education.ti.com.
Basic Steps in Performing an Experiment
These basic steps are the same no matter which type of experiment you
perform.
1. Start the Vernier DataQuest™ Application.
2. Connect sensors.
3. Modify sensor settings.
4. Select the collection mode and collection parameters.
5. Collect data.
6. Stop collecting data.
7. Store the data set.
8. Save the document to save all data sets in the experiment.
9. Analyze the data.
Sending Collected Data to Other TI-Nspire™ Applications
You can send collected data to the Graphs, Lists&Spreadsheet, and
Data&Statistics applications.
▶From the Send To menu, click the name of the application.
A new page showing the data is added to the current problem.
About Collection Devices
You can select from a variety of sensors and interfaces to collect data while
running the Vernier DataQuest™ application with TI-Nspire™ software.
Multi-Channel Sensor Interfaces
Multi-channel sensor interfaces let you connect more than one sensor at a
time.
Data Collection 487
488 Data Collection
Sensor
Interface
Description
Texas
Instruments
TI-Nspire™ Lab
Cradle
This sensor can be used with a handheld, a computer,
or as a stand-alone sensor.
The sensor interface allows you to connect and use one
to five sensors at the same time. It can be used in the
lab or at a remote collection location.
The Lab Cradle supports two digital sensors and three
analog sensors.
The Lab Cradle also supports high-sample data
collection sensors, such as a hand-grip heart rate or a
blood pressure monitor.
After using the Lab Cradle as a remote sensor, you can
download data to either a handheld or computer.
Single-Channel Sensor Interfaces
Single-channel sensor interfaces can only connect to one sensor at a time.
These sensors have either a mini-USB connector for a handheld or a standard
USB connector for a computer. For a complete list of compatible sensors, see
Compatible Sensors
.
Sensor Interface Description
Vernier EasyLink®
This sensor interface is used with handhelds. It
has a mini-USB connector so it can be plugged
directly into the handheld.
Connect sensors to Vernier EasyLink® to:
• Measure barometric pressure.
• Measure the salinity of a solution.
• Investigate the relationship between
pressure and volume (Boyles’ Law).
Sensor Interface Description
Vernier Go!Link®
This sensor interface is used with computers. It
has a standard connector so it can be plugged
into a Windows® or Mac® computer.
Connect sensors to Vernier GoLink® to:
• Measure the acidity or alkalinity of a
solution.
• Monitor greenhouse gases.
• Measure sound level in decibels.
Types of Sensors
•Analog sensors. Temperature, light, pH, and voltage sensors are analog
sensors and require a sensor interface.
•Digital sensors. Photogates, radiation monitors, and drop counters are
digital sensors. These sensors can only be used with the TI-Nspire™ Lab
Cradle.
•Direct-connect USB sensors. These sensors connect directly to a handheld
or computer and do not require a sensor interface.
Sensors for Handhelds
The following lists some sensors you can use with a handheld.
Sensor Description
Texas Instruments
CBR2™
This analog sensor connects directly to TI-Nspire™
handhelds through the mini-USB port. It is used to
explore and graph motion.
This sensor automatically launches the Vernier
DataQuest™ application when you connect it to a
handheld. Data collection begins when you select
the Motion Match function.
This sensor collects up to 200 samples per second.
Use this sensor to:
• Measure position and speed of a person or
object.
Data Collection 489
490 Data Collection
Sensor Description
• Measure the acceleration of an object.
Vernier EasyTemp®
temperature sensor
This analog sensor connects directly to TI-Nspire™
handhelds through the mini-USB port and is used to
collect temperature ranges. You can design
experiments to:
• Collect weather data.
• Record temperature changes due to chemical
reactions.
• Perform heat fusion studies.
Sensors for Computers
The following table lists some sensors you can use with a computer.
Sensor Description
Vernier Go!Temp®
temperature sensor
This analog sensor connects to the computer’s
USB port and is used to collect temperature
ranges.
You can use this sensor to:
• Collect weather data.
• Record temperature changes due to
chemical reactions.
• Perform heat fusion studies.
Vernier Go!Motion®
motion detector
This analog sensor connects to the computer’s
USB port and is used to measure acceleration,
speed, and velocity.
Use this sensor to:
• Measure position and speed of a person
or object.
• Measure the acceleration of an object.
Compatible Sensors
The following sensors can be used with the Vernier DataQuest™ application.
• 25-g Accelerometer
• 30-Volt Voltage Probe
• 3-Axis Accelerometer
• Low-g Accelerometer
• CBR 2™ - Connects directly to handheld USB port
• Go!Motion® - Connects directly to computer USB port
• Extra Long Temperature Probe
• Stainless Steel Temperature Probe
• Surface Temperature Sensor
• Ammonium Ion-Selective Electrode
• Anemometer
• Barometer
• Blood Pressure Sensor
• C02 Gas Sensor
• Calcium Ion-Selective Electrode
• Charge Sensor
• Chloride Ion-Selective Electrode
• Colorimeter
• Conductivity Probe
• High Current Sensor
• Current Probe
• Differential Voltage Probe
• Digital Radiation Monitor
• Dissolved Oxygen Sensor
• Dual-Range Force Sensor
• EasyTemp® - Connects directly to handheld USB port
• EKG Sensor
• Electrode Amplifier
• Flow Rate Sensor
Data Collection 491
492 Data Collection
• Force Plate
• Gas Pressure Sensor
• Go!Temp® - Connects directly to computer USB port
• Hand Dynamometer
• Hand-Grip Heart Rate Monitor
• Instrumentation Amplifier
• Light Sensor
• Magnetic Field Sensor
• Melt Station
• Microphone
• Nitrate Ion-Selective Electrode
• O2 Gas Sensor
• ORP Sensor
• pH Sensor
• Relative Humidity Sensor
• Respiration Monitor Belt (Requires Gas Pressure Sensor)
• Rotary Motion Sensor
• Salinity Sensor
• Soil Moisture Sensor
• Sound Level Meter
• Spirometer
• Thermocouple
• TI-Light - Sold only with the CBL 2™
• TI-Temp - Sold only with the CBL 2™
• TI-Voltage - Sold only with the CBL 2™
• Tris-Compatible Flat pH Sensor
• Turbidity Sensor
• UVA Sensor
• UVB Sensor
• Vernier Constant Current System
• Vernier Drop Counter
• Vernier Infrared Thermometer
• Vernier Motion Detector
• Vernier Photogate
• Voltage Probe
• Wide-Range Temperature Probe
Connecting Sensors
Direct-connect USB sensors, such as the Vernier Go!Temp® temperature
sensor (for computers) or the Vernier EasyLink® temperature sensor (for
handhelds), connect directly to the computer or handheld and do not need a
sensor interface.
Other sensors require a sensor interface such as the TI-Nspire™ Lab Cradle.
Connecting Directly
▶Attach the cable on the sensor directly to the computer's USB port or to an
appropriate port on the handheld.
Connecting through a Sensor Interface
1. Attach the sensor to the sensor interface using either the mini-USB, USB,
or BT connector and the appropriate cable.
2. Attach the interface to a computer or handheld using the appropriate
connector and cable.
Note: To attach a handheld to a TI-Nspire™ Lab Cradle, slide the handheld
into the connector at the bottom of the Lab Cradle.
Setting Up an Offline Sensor
You can predefine meter settings for a sensor that is not currently attached to a
computer or handheld.
You cannot use the sensor offline, but you can prepare the experiment for it
and then attach it when ready to collect the data. This option makes it faster to
share a sensor during a lesson or lab in which there are not enough sensors
for everyone.
1. From the Experiment menu, select Advanced Set Up > Configure Sensor >
Add Offline Sensor.
The Select Sensor dialog box opens.
Data Collection 493
494 Data Collection
2. Select a sensor from the list.
3. Click the Meter View tab .
4. Click the sensor you have added, and modify its settings.
The settings will be applied when you attach the sensor.
Removing an offline sensor
1. From the Experiment menu, select Advanced Setup > Configure Sensor.
2. Select the name of the offline sensor to remove.
3. Click Remove.
Modifying Sensor Settings
You can modify how the sensor values are displayed and stored. For example,
when using a temperature sensor, you can change the unit of measure from
Centigrade to Fahrenheit.
Changing Sensor Measurement Units
Measurement units depend on the selected sensor. For example, units for the
Vernier Go!Temp® Temperature sensor are Fahrenheit, Celsius, and Kelvin.
Units for the Vernier Hand Dynamometer (a specialized force sensor) are
Newton, Pound, and Kilogram.
You can change the units before or after you collect data. The collected data
reflects the new measurement unit.
1. Click Meter view to display the connected and offline sensors.
2. Click the sensor whose units you want to change.
3. In the Meter Settings dialog box, select the unit type from the Measurement
Units menu.
Calibrating a Sensor
When the software or handheld detects a sensor, the calibration for that sensor
automatically loads. You can calibrate some sensors manually. Other sensors,
such as the Colorimeter and the Dissolved Oxygen Sensor, must be calibrated
to provide useful data.
There are three options for calibrating a sensor:
• Manual Entry
• Two Point
• Single Point
Refer to the sensor’s documentation for specific calibration values and
procedures.
Data Collection 495
496 Data Collection
Setting a Sensor to Zero
You can set the standing value of some sensors to zero. You cannot set
sensors in which relative measurements such as force, motion, and pressure
are common to zero. Sensors designed to measure specific environmental
conditions, such as Temperature, pH, and CO2also cannot be set to zero.
1. Click Meter view to display the connected and offline sensors.
2. Click the sensor that you want to set to zero.
3. In the Meter Settings dialog box, click Zero.
Reversing a Sensor's Readings
By default, pulling with a force sensor produces a positive force and pushing
produces a negative force. Reversing the sensor allows you to display pushing
as a positive force.
1. Click Meter view to display the connected and offline sensors.
2. Click the sensor that you want to reverse.
3. In the Meter Settings dialog box, click Reverse Readings.
The sensor display is now reversed. In Meter View, the reverse indicator
appears after the sensor name.
Collecting Data
Collecting Time-Based Data
The Time Based collection mode captures sensor data automatically at regular
time intervals.
1. Connect the sensor or sensors.
Sensor names are added to the sensor list automatically.
2. From the Experiment menu, select New Experiment.
This removes all data and restores all meter settings to their defaults.
3. From the Experiment menu, select Collection Mode > Time Based.
a) Select Rate or Interval from the drop-down list, and then type the Rate
(samples/second) or Interval (seconds/sample).
b) Type the Duration of the collection.
The Number of points is calculated and displayed, based on rate and
duration. Note that collecting too many data points can slow system
performance.
c) Select Strip Chart if you want to collect samples continuously,
retaining only the last nsamples. (where “n” is the number shown in
the Number of points field.)
4. Modify sensor settings as necessary.
5. Click Start Collection .
6. After the data has been collected, click Stop Collection .
The data set run is complete.
Collecting Selected Events
Use the Selected Events collection mode to capture samples manually. In this
mode, each sample is automatically assigned an event number.
1. Connect the sensor or sensors.
Sensor names are added to the sensor list automatically.
2. From the Experiment menu, select New Experiment.
This removes all data and restores all meter settings to their defaults.
3. From the Experiment menu, select Collection Mode > Selected Events.
The Selected Events Setup dialog box opens.
-Name. This text is visible in the Meter View. Its first letter is displayed
as the independent variable in the Graph view.
-Units. This text is displayed in Graph view alongside the Name.
-Average over 10 s. This option averages ten seconds of data for each
point.
4. Modify sensor settings as necessary.
5. Click Start Collection .
Data Collection 497
498 Data Collection
The Keep Current Reading icon becomes active. The current sensor
value appears in the center of the graph.
6. Click Keep Current Reading to capture each sample.
The data point is plotted, and the current sensor value appears in the
center of the graph.
Note: If you selected the Averaging option, a countdown timer appears.
When the counter reaches zero, the system plots the average.
7. Continue capturing until you collect all of the desired data points.
8. Click Stop Collection .
The data set run is complete.
Collecting Events with Entry
Use the Events with Entry collection mode to capture samples manually. In this
mode, you define the independent value for each point you collect.
1. Connect the sensor or sensors.
Sensor names are added to the sensor list automatically.
2. From the Experiment menu, select New Experiment.
This removes all data and restores all meter settings to their defaults.
3. From the Experiment menu, select Collection Mode > Events with Entry.
The Events with Entry Setup dialog box opens.
-Name. This text is visible in the Meter View. Its first letter is displayed
as the independent variable in the Graph view.
-Units. This text is displayed in Graph view alongside the Name.
-Average over 10 s. This option averages ten seconds of data for each
point.
4. Modify sensor settings as necessary.
5. Click Start Collection .
The Keep Current Reading icon becomes active. The current sensor
value appears in the center of the graph.
6. Click Keep Current Reading to capture a sample.
The Events with Entry dialog box opens.
7. Type a value for the independent variable.
8. Click OK.
The data point is plotted, and the current sensor value appears in the
center of the graph.
Note: If you selected the Averaging option, a countdown timer appears.
When the counter reaches zero, the system plots the average.
9. Repeat steps 6 through 8 until you collect all of the desired data points.
10. Click Stop Collection .
The data set run is complete.
Collecting Photogate Timing Data
The Photogate Timing collection mode is available only when using the
Vernier Photogate sensor. This sensor can time objects that pass through the
gates or objects that pass outside of the gates.
1. Connect the Photogate sensor or sensors.
Sensor names are added to the sensor list automatically.
2. From the Experiment menu, select New Experiment.
This removes all data and restores all meter settings to their defaults.
3. From the Experiment menu, select Collection Mode > Photogate Timing.
4. Set the collection options.
5. Modify sensor settings as necessary.
6. Click Start Collection .
7. After the data has been collected, click Stop Collection .
The data set run is complete.
Data Collection 499
500 Data Collection
Collecting Drop Counter Data
The Drop Counting collection mode is available only when using the Vernier
Drop Counter optical sensor. This sensor can count the number of drops or
record the amount of liquid added during an experiment.
1. Connect the Drop Counter sensor or sensors.
Sensor names are added to the sensor list automatically.
2. From the Experiment menu, select New Experiment.
This removes all data and restores all meter settings to their defaults.
3. From the Experiment menu, select Collection Mode > Drop Counting.
4. Set the collection options.
5. Modify sensor settings as necessary.
6. Click Start Collection .
7. After the data has been collected, click Stop Collection .
The data set run is complete.
Using Data Markers to Annotate Data
Data markers give you a way to emphasize specific data points, such as when
you change a condition. For example, you might mark a point at which a
chemical is added to a solution or when heat is applied or removed. You can
add a marker with or without a comment, and you can hide a comment.
Two data markers, one with a comment displayed
Marker shown as red triangle in Table view
Adding a Marker During Data Collection
▶Click Add Data Marker to place a marker at the current data point.
Adding a Marker After Collecting Data
1. In Graph or Table view, click the point at which you want a marker.
2. Click Add Data Marker .
3. Complete the items in the dialog box.
Adding a Comment to an Existing Marker
1. In the Detail view, click to expand the list of markers for the data set.
2. Click the entry for the marker that you want to change, and complete the
items in the dialog box.
Data Collection 501
502 Data Collection
Repositioning a Data Marker
1. Click to expand the list of markers in the Detail view.
2. Click the entry for the marker that you want to change.
3. In the dialog box, type a new value for Mark Value at.
Moving a Data Marker's Comment in the Graph View
▶Drag the comment to move it. The connecting line remains attached to the
data point.
Hiding/Showing a Data Marker's Comment
▶Hide a comment by clicking the Xat the end of the comment.
▶To restore a hidden comment:
a) Click to expand the list of markers in the Detail view.
b) Click the entry for the marker that you want to change, and check
ShowCommentonGraph.
Removing a Data Marker
1. Click to expand the list of markers in the Detail view.
2. In the dialog box, click Remove.
Collecting Data Using a Remote Collection Unit
To collect information from a sensor while it is disconnected, you can set it up
as a remote sensor. Only the TI-Nspire™ Lab Cradle, TI CBR2™, and Vernier
Go!Motion® support remote data collection.
You can set up a remote collection unit to start collecting:
• When you press a manual trigger on the unit, as on the TI-Nspire™ Lab
Cradle
• When a delay countdown expires on a unit that supports a delayed start
Setting Up for Remote Collection
1. Save and close any open documents, and start with a new document.
2. Connect the remote collection unit to the computer or handheld.
3. Modifying Sensor Settings.
4. Click the Collection Setup button .
5. On the Collection Setup screen, check Enable Remote Collection.
6. Select the remote collection unit from the Devices list.
7. Specify the method for starting the collection:
• To start automatically after a specified delay (on supported units), type
the delay value.
• To start when you press the manual trigger (on supported units), type
a delay value of 0. When you use a delay, the manual trigger button
on the TI-Nspire™ Lab Cradle has no effect on the start of the
collection.
Data Collection 503
504 Data Collection
8. Click OK.
A message confirms that the unit is ready.
9. Disconnect the unit.
Depending on the device, LED lights may indicate its status.
Red. The system is not ready.
Amber. The system is ready but not collecting data.
Green. The system is collecting data.
10. If you are starting collection manually, press the trigger when ready. If you
are starting based on a delay, the collection will start automatically when
the countdown is complete.
Retrieving the Remote Data
After collecting data remotely, you transfer it to the computer or handheld for
analysis.
1. Open the Vernier DataQuest™ application.
2. Attach the TI-Nspire™ Lab Cradle to the handheld or computer.
The Remote Data Detected dialog box opens.
3. Click Import.
The data transfers to the Vernier DataQuest™ application.
Setting Up a Sensor for Automatic Triggering
To start data collection automatically based on a specific sensor reading, the
TI-Nspire™ Lab Cradle and sensor must be connected.
1. Connect the sensor.
2. Click Experiment > Advanced Set up > Triggering > Set Up.
The Configure Trigger dialog box opens.
Data Collection 505
506 Data Collection
3. Select the sensor from the Select the sensor to use as trigger drop-down
list.
Note: The menu displays the sensors connected to the TI-Nspire™ Lab
Cradle.
4. Select one of the following from the Select the type of trigger to use drop-
down list.
•Increasing through threshold. Use to trigger on increasing values.
•Decreasing through threshold. Use to trigger on decreasing values.
5. Type the appropriate value in the Enter the trigger threshold in units of the
selected sensor field.
When entering the trigger value, enter a value within the range of the
sensor.
If you change the unit type after setting the threshold, the value
automatically updates.
For example, if you use the Vernier Gas Pressure sensor with the units set
as atm and you later change the units to kPa, the settings are updated.
6. Type the number of data points to keep before the trigger value occurs.
7. Click OK.
The trigger is now set and enabled if values were entered.
8. (Optional) Select Experiment > Advanced Set up > Triggering to verify the
active indicator is set to Enabled.
Important: When the trigger is enabled, it stays active until it is disabled or
you start a new experiment.
Enabling a Disabled Trigger
If you set the trigger values in the current experiment, and then disable them,
you can enable the triggers again.
To enable a trigger:
▶Click Experiment > Advanced Set Up > Triggering > Enable.
Disabling an Enabled Trigger
To disable the active trigger.
▶Click Experiment > Advanced Set Up > Triggering > Disable.
Collecting and Managing Data Sets
By default, the Start Collection button overwrites collected data with data
from the next run. To preserve each run, you can store it as a data set. After
collecting multiple data sets, you can superimpose any combination of them on
the Graph View.
Important: Stored data sets are lost if you close the document without saving it.
If you want stored data to be available later, make sure to save the document.
Storing Data as Sets
1. Collect the data from the first run. (See Collecting Data.)
2. Click the Store Data Set button .
The data is stored as run1. A new data set, run2, is created for collecting
the next run.
3. Click Start Collection to collect data for run2.
Comparing Data Sets
1. Click the Graph View icon to show the graph.
2. Click the Data Set Selector (near the top of the Detail View) to expand the
list of data sets.
Data Collection 507
508 Data Collection
ÀData Set Selector lets you expand or collapse the list.
ÁExpanded list shows available data sets. Scroll buttons appear
as necessary to let you scroll the list.
3. Choose which data sets to view by selecting or clearing the check boxes.
The graph is rescaled as necessary to show all selected data.
Tip: To quickly select a single data set, hold down Shift while clicking its
name in the list. The graph shows only the selected set, and the list is
collapsed automatically to help you view details of the data.
Renaming a Data Set
By default, data sets are named run1,run2, and so on. The name of each data
set is displayed in the Table view.
1. Click the Table View icon to show the table.
2. Display the context menu for the table view, and select Data Set Options >
[current name].
3. Type the new Name.
Note: The maximum character limit is 30. The name cannot contain
commas.
4. (Optional) Type Notes about the data.
Deleting a Data Set
1. Click the Graph View icon to show the graph.
2. Click the Data Set Selector (near the top of the Detail View) to expand the
list of data sets.
3. Scroll the list as necessary, and then click the Delete symbol (X) next to the
name of the data set.
4. Click OK on the confirmation message.
Expanding the View Details Area
▶Drag the boundary at the right edge of the Details area to increase or
decrease its width.
Data Collection 509
510 Data Collection
Analyzing Collected Data
In the Vernier DataQuest™ application, use Graph View to analyze data. Start
by setting up graphs, and then use analysis tools such as integral, statistics,
and curve fit to investigate the mathematical nature of the data.
Important: The Graph menu and Analyze menu items are only available when
working in Graph View.
Finding the Area Under a Data Plot
Use Integral to determine the area under a data plot. You can find the area
under all of the data or a selected region of the data.
To find the area under a data plot:
1. Leave the graph unselected to examine all the data, or select a range to
examine a specific area.
2. Click Analyze > Integral.
3. Select the plotted column name if you have more than a single column.
The data plot area is displayed in the View Details area.
Finding the Slope
Tangent displays a measure of the rate at which the data is changing at the
point you are examining. The value is labeled “Slope.”
To find the slope:
1. Click Analyze > Tangent.
A check mark appears in the menu next to the option.
2. Click the graph.
The examine indicator is drawn to the nearest data point.
The values of the plotted data are shown in the View details area and the
All Details for Graph dialog box.
You can move the examine line by dragging, clicking another point, or
using the arrow keys.
Interpolating the Value Between Two Data Points
Use Interpolate to estimate the value between two data points and to determine
the value of a Curve Fit between and beyond these data points.
The examine line moves from data point to data point. When Interpolate is on,
the examine line moves between and beyond data points.
To use Interpolate:
1. Click Analyze > Interpolate.
A check mark appears in the menu next to the option.
2. Click the graph.
The examine indicator is drawn to the nearest data point.
The values of the plotted data are shown in the View Details area.
You can shift the examine line by moving the cursor with the arrow keys or
by clicking on another data point.
Generating Statistics
You can generate statistics (minimum, maximum, mean, standard deviation,
and number of samples) for all the collected data or for a selected region. You
can also generate a curve fit based on one of several standard models or on a
model that you define.
1. Leave the graph unselected to examine all the data, or select a range to
examine a specific area.
2. Click Analyze > Statistics.
3. Select the plotted column name if you have more than a single column. For
example, run1.Pressure.
The Stats dialog box opens.
Data Collection 511
512 Data Collection
4. Review the data.
5. Click OK.
For information on clearing the Statistics analysis, see
Removing Analysis
Options
.
Generating a Curve Fit
Use Curve Fit to find the best curve fit to match the data. Select all of the data or
a selected region of data. The curve is drawn on the graph.
1. Leave the graph unselected to examine all the data, or select a range to
examine a specific area.
2. Click Analyze > Curve Fit.
3. Select a curve fit option.
Curve Fit option Calculated in the form:
Linear y=m*x+b
Quadratic y=a*x^2+b*x+c
Cubic y=a*x^3+b*x^2+c*x+d
Quartic y=a*x^4+b*x^3+c*x^2+d*x+e
Power (ax^b) y=a*x^b
Curve Fit option Calculated in the form:
Exponential (ab^x) y=a*b^x
Logarithmic y=a+b*ln(x)
Sinusoidal y=a*sin(b*x+c)+d
Logistic (d 0) y=c/(1+a*e^(-bx))+d
Natural Exponential y=a*e^(-c*x)
Proportional y=a*x
The Fit Linear dialog box opens.
4. Click OK.
5. Review the data.
For information on clearing the Curve Fit analysis, see
Removing Analysis
Options
.
Plotting a Standard or User-Defined Model
This option provides a manual method for plotting a function to fit data. Use one
of the predefined models or enter your own.
You can also set the spin increment to use in the View Details dialog box. Spin
increment is the value by which the coefficient changes when you click the spin
buttons in the View Details dialog box.
Data Collection 513
514 Data Collection
For example, if you set m1=1 as the spin increment, when you click the up spin
button the value changes to 1.1, 1.2, 1.3 and so on. If you click the down spin
button, the value changes to 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, and so on.
1. Click Analyze > Model.
The Model dialog box opens.
2. Type your own function.
—or—
Click to select a value from the drop-down list.
3. Click OK.
The Set Coefficient Values dialog box opens.
4. Type the value for the variables.
5. Type the change in value in the Spin Increment fields.
6. Click OK.
Note: These values are the initial values. You can also adjust these values
in the View Details area.
The model is shown on the graph with adjustment options in the View
Details area and in the All Details for Graph dialog box.
7. (Optional) Adjust the window setting for minimum and maximum axis
values. For more information, see
Setting the Axis for One Graph
.
For information on clearing the Model analysis, see
Removing Analysis
Options
.
8. Click to make any desired adjustments to the coefficients.
—or—
Click the value in the View Details area.
This graphic is an example of a model with adjusted values.
Removing Analysis Options
1. Click Analyze > Remove.
2. Select the data display you want to remove.
The display you selected is removed from the graph and the View Details
area.
Displaying Collected Data in Graph View
When you collect data, it is written in both the Graph and Table views. Use the
Graph view to examine the plotted data.
Important: The Graph menu and Analyze menu items are only active when
working in Graph View.
Selecting the Graph View
▶Click the Graph View tab .
Viewing Multiple Graphs
Use the Show Graph menu to show separate graphs when using:
Data Collection 515
516 Data Collection
• A sensor that plots more than one column of data.
• Multiple sensors with different defined units at the same time.
In this example, two sensors (the Gas Pressure sensor and the Hand
Dynamometer) were used in the same run. The following image shows the
columns Time, Force, and Pressure in the Table view to illustrate why two
graphs are shown.
Displaying One of Two Graphs
When two graphs are displayed, the top graph is Graph 1 and the bottom graph
is Graph 2.
To display only Graph 1:
▶Select Graph > Show Graph > Graph 1.
Only Graph1 is displayed.
To display only Graph 2:
▶Select Graph > Show Graph > Graph 2.
Only Graph 2 is displayed.
Displaying Both Graphs
To display both Graph 1 and Graph 2 together:
▶Select Graph > Show Graph > Both.
Graph1 and Graph 2 are displayed.
Displaying Graphs in the Page Layout View
Use the Page layout view when Show Graph is not the appropriate solution for
showing more than one graph.
The Show Graph option is not applicable for:
• Multiple runs using a single sensor.
• Two or more of the same sensors.
• Multiple sensors that use the same column(s) of data.
To use Page Layout:
1. Open the original data set you want to see in two graph windows.
2. Click Edit > Page Layout > Select Layout.
3. Select the type of page layout you want to use.
4. Click Click here to add an application.
5. Select Add Vernier DataQuest™.
The Vernier DataQuest™ application is added to the second view.
6. To see separate views, click the view you want to change, and then select
View > Table.
The new view is displayed.
7. To show the same view, click the view to change.
8. Click View > Graph.
The new view is displayed.
Displaying Collected Data in Table View
Table view provides another way to sort and view collected data.
Selecting the Table View
▶Click the Table View tab .
Defining Column Options
You can name columns and define the decimal points and the precision you
want to use.
1. from the Data menu, select Column Options.
Note: You can be in the Meter, Graph, or Table view and still click these
menu options. The results will still be visible.
2. Click the name of the column you want to define.
The Column Options dialog box opens.
Data Collection 517
518 Data Collection
3. Type the long name for the column in the Name field.
4. Type the abbreviated name in the Short Name field.
Note: This name is displayed if the column cannot expand to display the
full name.
5. Type the number of units in the Units field.
6. From the Displayed Precision drop-down list, select the precision value.
Note: The default precision is related to the precision of the sensor.
7. Select Link to list to link to the symbol table and make this information
available to other TI-Nspire™ applications.
Note: Linking is the default for most sensors.
Important: Heart rate and blood pressure sensors require a tremendous
amount of data to be useful, and the default for these sensors is to be
unlinked to improve system performance.
8. Select Apply changes to all Data Sets to apply these settings to all data
sets.
9. Click OK.
The column settings are now defined with the new values.
Creating a Column of Manually Entered Values
To enter data manually, add a new column. Sensor columns cannot be
modified, but data entered manually can be edited.
1. Click Data > New Manual Column.
The Column Options dialog box opens.
2. Type the long name for the column in the Name field.
3. Type the abbreviated name in the Short Name field.
Note: This name is displayed if the column cannot expand to display the
full name.
4. Type the units to be used.
5. From the Displayed Precision drop-down list, select the precision value.
Note: The default precision is related to the precision of the sensor.
6. (Optional) Select Apply changes to all Data Sets to apply these settings to
all data sets.
7. (Optional) Select Generate Values to automatically populate the rows.
If you select this option, complete these steps:
a) Type a starting value in the Start field.
b) Type an ending value in the End field.
Data Collection 519
520 Data Collection
c) Type the increase in value in the Increment field.
The number of points is calculated and shown in the Number of Points
field.
8. Select Link from list to link to data in another TI-Nspire™ application.
Note: This list only populates when data exists in the other application and
includes a column label.
9. Select Link to list to link to the symbol table and make this information
available to other TI-Nspire™ applications.
Note: Linking is the default for most sensors.
Important: Heart rate and blood pressure sensors require a tremendous
amount of data to be useful, and the default for these sensors is to be
unlinked to improve system performance.
10. Click OK.
A new column is added to the table. This column can be edited.
Creating a Column of Calculated Values
You can add an additional column to the data set in which the values are
calculated from an expression using at least one of the existing columns.
Use a calculated column when finding the derivative for pH data. For more
information, see
Adjusting Derivative Settings
.
1. Click Data > New Calculated Column.
The Column Options dialog box opens.
2. Type the long name for the column in the Name field.
3. Type the abbreviated name in the Short Name field.
Note: This name is displayed if the column cannot expand to display the
full name.
4. Type the units to be used.
5. From the Displayed Precision drop-down list, select the precision value.
Note: The default precision is related to the precision of the sensor.
6. Type a calculation including one of the column names in the Expression
field.
Note: The system-provided column names are dependent on the sensor(s)
selected and any changes made to the name field in Column Options.
Important: The Expression field is case-sensitive. (Example: “Pressure” is
not the same as “pressure.”)
7. Select Link to list to link to the symbol table and make this information
available to other TI-Nspire™ applications.
Note: Linking is the default for most sensors.
Data Collection 521
522 Data Collection
Important: Heart rate and blood pressure sensors require a tremendous
amount of data to be useful, and the default for these sensors is to be
unlinked to improve system performance.
8. Click OK.
The new calculated column is created.
Customizing the Graph of Collected Data
You can customize the Graph view by adding a title, changing colors, and
setting ranges for the axis.
Adding a Title
When you add a title to a graph, the title is displayed in the View Details area.
When you print the graph, the title prints on the graph.
1. Click Graph > Graph Title.
The Graph Title dialog box opens.
If there are two graphs in the work area, the dialog box has two title
options.
2. Type the name of the graph in the Title field.
—or—
a) Type the name of the first graph in the Graph 1 field.
b) Type the name of the second graph in the Graph 2 field.
3. Select Enable to show the title.
Note: Use the Enable option to hide or show the graph title as needed.
4. Click OK.
The title is shown.
Setting Axis Ranges
Setting Axis Ranges for One Graph
To modify the minimum and maximum range for the x and y axis:
1. Click Graph > Window Settings.
The Window Settings dialog box opens.
2. Type the new values in one or more of these fields:
- X Min
- X Max
- Y Min
- Y Max
3. Click OK.
The application uses the new values for the graph visual range until you
modify the range or change data sets.
Setting Axis Ranges for Two Graphs
When working with two graphs, enter two y axis minimum and maximum
values, but only one set of minimum and maximum values for the x axis.
1. Click Graph > Window Setting.
Data Collection 523
524 Data Collection
The Window Setting dialog box opens.
2. Type the new values in one or more of these fields:
- X Min
- X Max
- Graph 1: Y Min
- Y Max
- Graph 2: Y Min
- Y Max
3. Click OK.
The application uses the new values for the graph visual range until you
modify the range or change data sets.
Setting the Axis Range on the Graph Screen
You can modify the minimum and maximum range for the x and y axes directly
on the graph screen.
▶Select the axis value that you want to change, and type a new value.
The graph is redrawn to reflect the change.
Selecting which Data Sets to Plot
1. In the Detail view on the left, click the tab immediately below the view
selection buttons.
2. The Detail view shows a list of available data sets.
3. Use the check boxes to select the data sets to plot.
Autoscaling a Graph
Use the autoscale option to show all the points plotted. Autoscale Now is useful
after you change the x and y axis range or zoom in or out of a graph. You can
also define the automatic autoscale setting to use during and after a collection.
Autoscale Now Using the Application Menu
▶Click Graph > Autoscale Now.
The graph now displays all the points plotted.
Autoscale Now Using the Context Menu
1. Open the context menu in the graph area.
2. Click Window/Zoom > Autoscale Now.
The graph now displays all the points plotted.
Defining Autoscale During a Collection
There are two options for using the automatic autoscaling that occurs during a
collection. To choose an option:
1. Click Options > Autoscale Settings.
The Autoscale Settings dialog box opens.
Data Collection 525
526 Data Collection
2. Click ►to open the During Collection drop-down list.
3. Select one of these options:
•Autoscale Larger - Expands the graph as needed to show all points as
you collect them.
•Do Not Autoscale - The graph is not changed during a collection.
4. Click OK to save the setting.
Defining Autoscale After a Collection
You have three options for setting the automatic autoscaling that occurs after a
collection. To set your choice:
1. Click Options > Autoscale Settings.
The Autoscale Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click ►to open the After Collection drop-down list.
3. Select one of these options:
•Autoscale to Data. Expands the graph to show all data points. This
option is the default mode.
•Autoscale From Zero. Modifies the graph so all data points including
the origin point are displayed.
•Do Not Autoscale. The graph settings are not changed.
4. Click OK to save the setting.
Selecting a Range of Data
Selecting a range of data on the graph is useful in several situations, such as
when zooming in or out, striking and unstriking data, and examining settings.
To select a range:
1. Drag across the graph.
The selected area is indicated by gray shading.
2. Perform one of these actions.
• Zoom in or out
• Strike or unstrike data
• Examine settings
Zooming In on a Graph
You can zoom in on a subset of the collected points. You can also zoom out
from a previous zoom or expand the graph window beyond the data points
collected.
To zoom in on a graph:
1. Select the area you want to zoom into or use the current view.
2. Click Graph > Zoom In.
The graph adjusts to display only the area you selected.
The x range selected is used as the new x range. The y range autoscales
to show all graphed data points in the selected range.
These images show an original view and zoom in performed multiple
times (or as a selected region).
Zooming Out of a Graph
▶Select Graph > Zoom Out.
The graph is now expanded.
If a Zoom In precedes a Zoom Out, the graph displays the original settings
prior to the Zoom In.
For example, if you Zoomed In twice, the first Zoom Out would display the
window of the first Zoom In. To display the full graph with all data points
from multiple zoom ins, use Autoscale Now.
Setting Point Options
To indicate how often marks show on the graph and whether to use a
connecting line:
1. Click Options > Point Options.
The Point Options dialog box opens.
Data Collection 527
528 Data Collection
2. Select a Mark option from the drop-down list.
•None. No point protectors.
•Regional. Periodic point protectors.
•All. Every data point as a point protector.
3. Select Connect Data Points to display a line between points.
—or—
Clear Connect Data Points to remove the line between points.
The following graphics show examples of some of the Point Mark options.
Changing a Graph's Color
1. Click the point indicator for the graph whose color you want to change.
2. In the Column Options dialog box, select the new Color.
Selecting Point Markers
1. Right-click in the graph to open the menu.
2. Click Point Marker.
Note: If there is only one dependent variable column, the Point Marker
option is preceded by the data set name and column name. Otherwise, the
Point Marker option has a menu.
3. Select the column variable to change.
4. Select the point marker to set.
The Point Marker changes to the option selected.
Selecting an Independent Variable Column
Use the option Select X-axis Column to select the column used as the
independent variable when graphing the data. This column is used for all
graphs.
1. Click Graph > Select X-axis Column.
2. Select the variable you want to change.
The x-axis label on the graph changes and the graph is reordered using
the new independent variable for graphing the data.
Selecting a Dependent Variable Column
Use the option Select Y-axis Column to select which dependent variable
columns to plot on the displayed graph(s).
1. Click Graph > Select Y-axis Column.
2. Select one of the following:
Data Collection 529
530 Data Collection
• A variable from the list. The list is a combination of dependent
variables and the number of data sets.
•More. Selecting More opens the Select dialog box. Use this when you
want to select a combination of data set variables to graph.
Showing and Hiding Details
You can hide or show the Details view on the left side of the screen.
▶Click Options > Hide Details or Options > Show Details.
Striking and Restoring Data
Striking data omits it temporarily from the Graph view and from the analysis
tools.
1. Open the data run that contains the data to be struck.
2. Click Table View .
3. Select the region by dragging from the starting row to the ending point.
The screen scrolls so you can see the selection.
4. Click Data > Strike Data.
5. Select one of the following:
•In Selected Region. Strike the data from the area you selected.
•Outside Selected Region. Strike all data except the area you selected.
The selected data is marked as struck in the table and is removed from the
graph view.
Restoring Struck Data
1. Select the range of data to restore or if restoring all struck data, start at step
two.
2. Click Data > Restore Data.
3. Select one of the following:
•In Selected Region - Restore data in the selected area.
•Outside Selected Region - Restore data outside the selected area.
•All Data - Restore all data. No data selection necessary.
The data is restored.
Replaying the Data Collection
Use the Replay option to playback the data collection. This option lets you:
• Select the data set you want to replay.
• Pause the playback.
• Advance the playback by one point at a time.
• Adjust the playback rate.
• Repeat the playback.
Selecting the Data Set to Replay
You can replay one data set at a time. By default, the latest data set plays using
the first column as the base column (example: time reference).
If you have multiple data sets, and want a different data set or base column
than the default, you can select the data set to replay and the base column.
To select the data set to replay:
1. Click Experiment > Replay > Advanced Settings.
The Advanced Replay Settings dialog box opens.
Data Collection 531
532 Data Collection
2. Select the data set to replay from the Data Set drop-down list.
Note: Changing the run in the Data Set selection tool does not affect the
playback choice. You must specify which data set in Experiment>Replay
> AdvanceSettings.
3. (Optional) Select a new value from the Base Column drop-down list.
The selected column acts as the “Time” column for the replay.
Note: The base column should be a strictly increasing list of numbers.
4. Click Start to start the playback and save the settings.
Note: Data Set and Base Column options are based on the number of
stored runs and the sensor type used.
Starting and Controlling the Playback
▶Select Experiment > Replay > Start Playback.
Playback begins, and the Data Collection Control buttons change to:
Pause
Resume
Stop
Advance by One Point (enabled only during pause)
Adjusting the Playback Rate
To adjust the playback rate:
1. Select Experiment > Replay > Playback Rate.
The Playback Rate dialog box opens.
2. In the Playback Rate field, click ▼to open the drop-down list.
3. Select the rate at which the playback will play.
Normal speed is 1.00. A higher value is faster, and a lower value is slower.
4. Select one of the following options:
• Click Start to start the playback and save the settings.
• Click OK to save the settings for use on the next playback.
Repeating the Playback
1. Select Experiment > Replay > Start Playback.
2. Click Start to start the playback and save the settings.
Adjusting Derivative Settings
Use this option to select the number of points to use in derivative calculations.
This value affects the tangent tool, velocity, and acceleration values.
Find pH derivative settings using a calculated column.
The Vernier DataQuest™ application can determine a numeric derivative from a
list of data with respect to another list of data. The data can be collected using
sensors, input manually, or linked with other applications. The numerical
derivative is found using a calculated column.
To determine the numerical 1st derivative of List B with respect to List A, enter
the following expression in the Column Options dialog:
derivative(B,A,1,0) or derivative(B,A,1,1)
To determine the numerical 2nd derivative of List B with respect to List A, enter
the following express:
derivative(B,A,2,0) or derivative (B,A,2,1)
The last parameter is either 0 or 1 depending on the method you are using.
When it is 0, a weighted average is used. When it is 1, a time shifted derivative
method is used.
Note: The first derivative calculation (weighted average) is what the Tangent
tool uses to display the slope at a data point when examining data. (Analyze >
Tangent).
Note: The derivative calculation is completely row based. It is recommended
that your List A data be sorted in ascending order.
1. Click Options > Derivative Settings.
The Settings dialog box opens.
Data Collection 533
534 Data Collection
2. Select the number of points from the drop-down list.
3. Click OK.
Drawing a Predictive Plot
Use this option to add points to the graph to predict the outcome of an
experiment.
1. Click the Graph View tab .
2. From the Analyze menu, select Draw Prediction > Draw.
3. Click each area in which you want to place a point.
4. Press Esc to release the drawing tool.
5. To clear the drawn prediction, click Analyze > Draw Prediction > Clear.
Using Motion Match
Use this option to create a randomly generated plot when creating
position-versus-time or velocity-versus-time graphs.
This feature is only available when using a motion detector such as the
CBR2™ sensor or the Go!Motion® sensor.
Generating a Motion Match Plot
To generate a plot:
1. Attach the motion detector.
2. Click View > Graph.
3. Click Analyze > Motion Match.
4. Select one of the following options:
•New Position Match. Generates a random position plot.
•New Velocity Match. Generates a random velocity plot.
Note: Continue selecting a new position or a new velocity match to generate a
new random plot without removing the existing plot.
Removing a Motion Match Plot
To remove the generated plot:
▶Click Analyze > Motion Match > Remove Match.
Printing Collected Data
You can only print from the computer. You can print any single displayed active
view, or with the Print All option:
• One data view.
• All of the data views.
• A combination of the data views.
The Print All option has no effect on applications outside of the Vernier
DataQuest™ application.
Printing Data Views
To print a data view:
1. On the main menu (top of the window), click File > Print.
The Print dialog box opens.
Data Collection 535
536 Data Collection
2. Select Print All from the Print what drop-down list.
3. Select additional options, if needed.
4. Click Print to send the document to the printer.
Setting Options for the Print All Feature
1. Click Options > Print All Settings.
The Print All Settings dialog box opens.
2. Select the views you want to print.
•Print Current View. The current view is sent to the printer.
•Print All Views. All three views (Meter, Graph, and Table) are sent to
the printer.
•More. Only the views you select are sent to the printer.
3. Click OK.
The Print All Settings are now complete and can be used when printing.
Data Collection 537
538
Libraries
A library is a TI-Nspire™ document that contains a collection of variables,
functions, and/or programs that have been defined as library objects.
Unlike ordinary variables, functions, and programs, which can be used only
within a single problem (the problem in which they are defined), library objects
are accessible from any document. You can even create public library objects
that appear in the TI-Nspire™ Catalog.
For example, suppose you have created library document matrix containing
public library function diagwithtrace() and a private library function errmsg().
Function diagwithtrace() displays the diagonal of a square matrix and
calculates the trace of the matrix. If its input is not a square matrix, the function
calls errmsg(), which should then return an appropriate error string.
You could then use the following syntax to display the diagonal and calculate
the trace of matrix mdefined in the current problem:
matrix\diagwithtrace(m)
Libraries 539
540 Libraries
Creating Libraries and Library Objects
A document is regarded as a library when it is saved or copied to the
designated library folder. The default location is:
• Windows®: MyDocuments\TI-Nspire\MyLib.
• Mac®: Documents/TI-Nspire/MyLib.
• Handheld: MyLib
If the folder has been inadvertently deleted, you must create it before
attempting to use libraries.
You can define library objects using either the Program Editor or the Calculator
application. Library objects must be defined with a Define command and must
reside in the first problem of a library document.
Note: If you use the Program Editor to define a library function or program, you
must store the object and also save the document. Saving the document does
not automatically store the object. For more information, see
Programming
.
Naming restrictions apply to library documents and library objects.
• A library document name must be a valid variable name between 1 and 16
characters long, and it must not contain a period or begin with an
underscore.
• A library object name must be a valid variable name between 1 and 15
characters long. It must not contain a period and must not begin with an
underscore.
Private and Public Library Objects
When you define a library object, you designate it as private (LibPriv) or public
(LibPub).
Define a=5
a is not a library object.
Define LibPriv b={1,2,3}
b is a private library object.
Define LibPub func1(x)=x^2 - 1
func1 is a public library object.
APrivate library object does not appear in the Catalog, but you can access it by
typing its name. Private objects serve well as building blocks that perform
basic, low-level tasks. Typically, private library objects are called upon by the
public functions and programs.
APublic library object appears in the Catalog’s library tab after you refresh the
libraries. You can access a public library object through the Catalog or by
typing its name.
Mac® only: In version 1.4 of the software, a library document name cannot
contain extended characters, such as Ö, á, or ñ.
Note: In library programs and functions defined as public, a comment line (©)
immediately following the Prgm or Func line is automatically displayed as help
in the Catalog. You could, for example, show a syntax reminder there.
Using Short and Long Names
Anytime you are in the same problem where an object is defined, you can
access it by entering its short name (the name given in the object’s Define
command). This is the case for all defined objects, including private, public,
and non-library objects.
You can access a library object from any document by typing the object’s long
name. A long name consists of the name of the object’s library document
followed by a backslash “\” followed by the name of the object. For example,
the long name of the object defined as func1 in the library document lib1 is
lib1\func1. To type the “\” character on the handheld, press g p.
Note: If you cannot remember the exact name or the order of arguments
required for a private library object, you can open the library document or use
the Program Editor to view the object. You also can use getVarInfo to view a list
of objects in a library.
Using Library Objects
Before using a library variable, function, or program, make sure that these
steps have been followed:
• The object has been defined with the Define command, and the command
specifies either the LibPriv or LibPub attribute.
• The object resides in the first problem of a library document. The document
must reside in the designated library folder and must meet the naming
requirements.
Libraries 541
542 Libraries
• If you defined the object using the Program Editor, it has been stored using
Check Syntax & Store from the Program Editor menu.
• The libraries have been refreshed.
Refreshing the Libraries
▶Refresh libraries to make the library objects available to your documents.
- From the Tools menu, click Refresh Libraries.
Handheld: Press / b and click Refresh Libraries.
Using a Public Library Object
1. Refresh the libraries.
2. Open the TI-Nspire™ application in which you want to use the variable,
function or program.
Note: All applications can evaluate functions, but only the Calculator and
Notes applications can run programs.
3. Open the Catalog and use the library tab to find and insert the object.
4. If arguments are required, type them inside the parentheses.
Using a Private Library Object
1. Refresh the libraries.
2. Open the TI-Nspire™ application in which you want to use the variable,
function, or program.
Note: All applications can evaluate functions, but only the Calculator and
Notes applications can run programs.
3. Type the name of the object, such as lib1\func1().
In case of a function or program, always follow the name with parentheses.
To type the “\” character on the handheld, press g p.
4. If arguments are required, type them inside the parentheses.
Creating Shortcuts to Library Objects
You can make the objects in a library more easily accessible by using
libShortcut() to create shortcuts to them. This creates a variable group in the
current problem that contains references to all the objects in the specified
library document. You can choose to include or exclude the private library
objects.
For example, suppose the library document linalg contains functions named
clearmat, cofactor, gausstep, help, inversestep, kernelbasis, rank, and
simultstep. Executing libShortcut(“linalg”,“la”)would create a variable group
containing the following members:
la.clearmat
la.cofactor
la.gausstep
la.help
la.inversestep
la.kernelbasis
la.rank
la.simultstep
You can refer to those library objects from within the current problem by typing
their variable names or by selecting them from the Variables menu.
For more details about using libShortcut(), see the
Reference Guide
.
Included Libraries
To help you get started with libraries, the TI-Nspire™ Software installation
includes a library document with useful Linear Algebra functions. The library is
named linalg or linalgCAS and is installed in the designated library folder.
Note: Updating the handheld’s operating system or reinstalling the computer
software places all included libraries in the default folder. If you have edited an
object in an included library or replaced an included library with your own
document of the same name, updating or reinstalling will overwrite your
changes. This could also happen after batteries are replaced or the handheld
system is reset.
Restoring an Included Library
If you inadvertently delete or overwrite an included library, you can restore it
from the installation DVD.
1. Open the DVD, and navigate to the libs folder.
2. Identify the library file to restore, such as linalg.tns or linalgCAS.tns for the
linear algebra library.
3. Copy the file.
Libraries 543
544 Libraries
- Windows®: Copy the file to your designated library folder. The default
location is MyDocuments\TI-Nspire\MyLib.
- Mac®: Copy the file to your designated library folder. The default
location is Documents/TI-Nspire/MyLib.
- Handheld: Connect the handheld to your computer, open the
TI-Nspire™ software, and copy the library file to the handheld’s MyLib
folder.
4. Activate the new library objects.
- From the TI-Nspire™ Software Tools menu, click Refresh Libraries.
Handheld: Press / b, and click Refresh Libraries.
Getting Started with the Program Editor
You can create user-defined functions or programs by typing definition
statements on the Calculator entry line or by using the Program Editor. The
Program Editor offers some advantages, and it is covered in this section. For
more information, see
Calculator
.
• The editor has programming templates and dialog boxes to help you
define functions and programs using correct syntax.
• The editor lets you enter multiple-line programming statements without
requiring a special key sequence to add each line.
• You can easily create private and public library objects (variables,
functions, and programs). For more information, see
Libraries
.
Launching the Program Editor
▶To add a new Program Editor page in the current problem:
From the toolbar, click Insert > Program Editor > New.
Handheld: Press ~and select Insert > ProgramEditor > New.
Note: The editor is also accessible from the Functions & Programs menu of
a Calculator page.
ÀProgram Editor menu – This menu is available anytime you are in the
Program Editor work area using the Normal view mode.
ÁProgram Editor work area
Getting Started with the Program Editor 545
546 Getting Started with the Program Editor
ÂStatus line shows line-number information and the name of the function or
program being edited. An asterisk (*) indicates that this function is “dirty,”
which means that it has changed since the last time its syntax has been
checked and it has been stored.
Defining a Program or Function
Starting a new Program Editor
1. Make sure you are in the document and problem in which you want to
create the program or function.
2. Click Insert button on the application toolbar, and select ProgramEditor
> New. (On the handheld, press ~and select Insert > Program Editor >
New.)
3. Type a name for the function or program you are defining.
4. Select the Type (Program or Function).
5. Set the Library Access:
- To use the function or program only from the current document and
problem, select None.
- To make the function or program accessible from any document but
not visible in the Catalog, select LibPriv.
- To make the function or program accessible from any document and
also visible in the Catalog, select LibPub (Show in Catalog). For more
information, see
Libraries
.
6. Click OK.
A new instance of the Program Editor opens, with a template matching the
selections you made.
Entering Lines into a Function or Program
The Program Editor does not execute the commands or evaluate expressions
as you type them. They are executed only when you evaluate the function or
run the program.
1. If your function or program will require the user to supply arguments, type
parameter names in the parentheses that follow the name. Separate
parameters with a comma.
2. Between the Func and EndFunc (or Prgm and EndPrgm) lines, type the
lines of statements that make up your function or program.
- You can either type the names of functions and commands or insert
them from the Catalog.
- A line can be longer than the width of the screen; if so, you might have
to scroll to view the entire statement.
- After typing each line, press Enter. This inserts a new blank line and
lets you continue entering another line.
- Use the ◄,►,▲, and ▼arrow keys to scroll through the function or
program for entering or editing commands.
Getting Started with the Program Editor 547
548 Getting Started with the Program Editor
Inserting Comments
A comment symbol (©) lets you enter a remark. Comments can be useful to
someone viewing or editing the program. Comments are not displayed when
the program runs, and they have no effect on program flow.
Define LibPub volcyl(ht,r) =
Prgm
©volcyl(ht,r) => volume of cylinderÀ
Disp “Volume =”, approx(p ¦ r2¦ht)
©This is another comment.
EndPrgm
ÀComment showing required syntax. Because this library object is public
and this comment is the first line in a Func or Prgm block, the comment is
displayed in the Catalog as help. For more information, see
Libraries
.
To insert a comment:
1. Position the cursor at the end of the line in which you want to insert a
comment.
2. From the Actions menu, click Insert Comment.
3. Type the text of the comment after the © symbol.
Checking Syntax
The Program Editor lets you check the function or program for correct syntax.
▶From the CheckSyntax&Store menu, click Check Syntax.
If the syntax checker finds any syntax errors, it displays an error message
and tries to position the cursor near the first error so you can correct it.
Storing the Function or Program
You must store your function or program to make it accessible. The Program
Editor automatically checks the syntax before storing.
An asterisk (*) is displayed in the upper left corner of the Program Editor to
indicate that the function or program has not been stored.
▶From the CheckSyntax&Store menu, click CheckSyntax&Store.
If the syntax checker finds any syntax errors, it displays an error message
and tries to position the cursor near the first error.
If no syntax errors are found, the message “Stored successfully“is
displayed in the status line at the top of the Program Editor.
Note: If the function or program is defined as a library object, you must also
save the document in the designated library folder and refresh libraries to
make the object accessible to other documents. For more information, see
Libraries
.
Viewing a Program or Function
1. From the Actions menu, click View.
2. If the function or program is a library object, select its library from the
Location list.
3. Select the function or program name from the Name list.
The function or program is displayed in a viewer.
Getting Started with the Program Editor 549
550 Getting Started with the Program Editor
4. Use the arrow keys to view the function or program.
5. If you want to edit the program, click Edit.
Handheld: Press eto highlight Edit, and then press ·.
Note: The Edit selection is available only for functions and programs
defined in the current problem. To edit a library object, you must first open
its library document.
Opening a Function or Program for Editing
You can open a function or program from the current problem only.
Note: You cannot modify a locked program or function. To unlock the object, go
to a Calculator page and use the unLock command.
1. Display the list of available functions and programs.
- From the Actions menu, click Open.
2. Click the item to open.
Importing a Program from a Library
You can import a function or program defined as a library object into a Program
Editor within the current problem. The imported copy is not locked, even if the
original is locked.
1. From the Actions menu, click Import.
2. Select the Library Name.
3. Select the Name of the object.
4. If you want the imported object to have a different name, type the name
under Import As.
Creating a Copy of a Function or Program
When creating a new function or program, you might find it easier to start with a
copy of the current one. The copy that you create is not locked, even if the
original is locked.
1. From the Actions menu, click Create Copy.
2. Type a new name, or click OK to accept the proposed name.
3. If you want to change the access level, select Library Access, and select a
new level.
Renaming a Program or Function
You can rename and (optionally) change the access level of the current
function or program.
1. From the Actions menu, click Rename.
Getting Started with the Program Editor 551
552 Getting Started with the Program Editor
2. Type a new name, or click OK to accept the proposed name.
3. If you want to change the access level, select Library Access, and select a
new level.
Changing the Library Access Level
1. From the Actions menu, click Change Library Access.
2. Select the Library Access:
- To use the function or program only from the current Calculator
problem, select None.
- To make function or program accessible from any document but not
visible in the Catalog, select LibPriv.
- To make the function or program accessible from any document and
also visible in the Catalog, select LibPub.
Finding Text
1. From the Actions menu, click Find.
2. Type the text that you want to find, and click OK.
- If the text is found, it is highlighted in the program.
- If the text is not found, a notification message is displayed.
Finding and Replacing Text
1. From the Actions menu, click Find and Replace.
2. Type the text that you want to find.
3. Type the replacement text.
4. Click Replace to replace the first occurrence after the cursor position.
—or—
Click Replace All to replace every occurrence.
Note: If the text is found in a math template, a message is displayed to
warn you that your replacement text will replace the whole template—not
just the found text.
Closing the Current Function or Program
▶From the Actions menu, click Close.
If the function or program has unstored changes, you are prompted to
check syntax and store before closing.
Running Programs and Evaluating Functions
After defining and storing a function or program, you can use it from an
application. All the applications can evaluate functions, but only the Calculator
and Notes applications can run programs.
The program statements are executed in sequential order (although some
commands alter the program flow). The output, if any, is displayed in the
application’s work area.
• Program execution continues until it reaches the last statement or a Stop
command.
• Function execution continues until it reaches a Return command.
• To stop a program or function manually,
- Windows®: Hold down the F12 key and press Enter repeatedly.
Getting Started with the Program Editor 553
554 Getting Started with the Program Editor
- Mac®: Hold down the F5 key and press Enter repeatedly.
- Handheld: Hold down the ckey and press ·repeatedly.
Using Short and Long Names
Anytime you are in the same problem where an object is defined, you can
access it by entering its short name (the name given in the object’s Define
command). This is the case for all defined objects, including private, public,
and non-library objects.
You can access a library object from any document by typing the object’s long
name. A long name consists of the name of the object’s library document
followed by a backslash “\” followed by the name of the object. For example,
the long name of the object defined as func1 in the library document lib1 is
lib1\func1. To type the “\” character on the handheld, press g p.
Note: If you cannot remember the exact name or the order of arguments
required for a private library object, you can open the library document or use
the Program Editor to view the object. You also can use getVarInfo to view a list
of objects in a library.
Using a Public Library Function or Program
1. Make sure you have defined the object in the document’s first problem,
stored the object, saved the library document in the MyLib folder, and
refreshed the libraries.
2. Open the TI-Nspire™ application in which you want to use the function or
program.
Note: All applications can evaluate functions, but only the Calculator and
Notes applications can run programs.
3. Open the Catalog and use the library tab to find and insert the object.
—or—
Type the name of the object. In the case of a function or program, always
follow the name with parentheses.
libs2\func1()
4. If the program requires you to supply one or more arguments, type the
values or variable names inside the parentheses.
libs2\func1(34,power)
5. Press ·.
Using a Private Library Function or Program
To use a Private library object, you must know its long name. For example, the
long name of the object defined as func1 in the library document lib1 is
lib1\func1.
Note: If you cannot remember the exact name or the order of arguments
required for a private library object, you can open the library document or use
the Program Editor to view the object.
1. Make sure you have defined the object in the document’s first problem,
stored the object, saved the library document in the MyLib folder, and
refreshed the libraries.
2. Open the TI-Nspire™ application in which you want to use the function or
program.
Note: All applications can evaluate functions, but only the Calculator and
Notes applications can run programs.
3. Type the name of the object. In the case of a function or program, always
follow the name with parentheses.
libs2\func1()
4. If the object requires you to supply one or more arguments, type the values
or variable names inside the parentheses.
libs2\func1(34,power)
5. Press ·.
Running a Non-Library Program or Function
1. Make sure you are in the same problem in which the function or program is
defined.
2. Type the name of the function or program on the entry line.
—or—
Press hto select the name from a list.
You must always include a set of parentheses after the name.
prog1()
Getting Started with the Program Editor 555
556 Getting Started with the Program Editor
If the function or program requires you to supply one or more arguments,
type the values or variable names inside the parentheses.
prog1(34,power)
3. Press ·.
Interrupting a Running Program
While a function or program is running, the busy pointer }is displayed.
▶To stop the function or program,
- Windows®: Hold down the F12 key and press Enter repeatedly.
- Mac®: Hold down the F5 key and press Enter repeatedly.
- Handheld: Hold down the ckey and press ·repeatedly.
A message is displayed. To edit the function or program in the Program
Editor, select GoTo. The cursor appears at the command where the break
occurred.
Getting Values into a Program
You can choose from several methods to supply the values that a function or
program uses in calculations.
Embedding the Values Within the Program or Function
This method is useful primarily for values that must be the same each time the
program or function is used.
1. Define the program.
Define calculatearea()=
Prgm
w:=3
h:=23.64
area:=w*h
EndPrgm
2. Run the program.
calculatearea()
:area70.92
Letting the User Assign the Values to Variables
A program or function can refer to variables created beforehand. This method
requires users to remember the variable names and to assign values to them
before using the object.
1. Define the program.
Define calculatearea()=
Prgm
area:=w*h
EndPrgm
2. Supply the variables, and then run the program.
w:=3 : h:=23.64
calculatearea()
:area70.92
Letting the User Supply the Values as Arguments
This method lets users pass one or more values as arguments within the
expression that calls the program or function.
The following program, volcyl, calculates the volume of a cylinder. It requires
the user to supply two values: height and radius of the cylinder.
1. Define the volcyl program.
Definevolcyl(height,radius) =
Prgm
Disp "Volume =", approx(p ¦ radius2¦
height)
EndPrgm
2. Run the program to display the volume of a cylinder with a height of 34 mm
and a radius of 5 mm.
volcyl(34,5)Volume = 534.071
Note: You do not have to use the parameter names when you run the
volcyl program, but you must supply two arguments (as values, variables,
or expressions). The first must represent the height, and the second must
represent the radius.
Getting Started with the Program Editor 557
558 Getting Started with the Program Editor
Requesting the Values from the User (Programs Only)
You can use the Request and RequestStr commands in a program to make the
program pause and display a dialog box prompting the user for information.
This method does not require users to remember variable names or the order
in which they are needed.
You cannot use the Request or RequestStr command in a function.
1. Define the program.
Define calculatearea()=
Prgm
Request "Width: ",w
Request "Height: ",h
area:=w*h
EndPrgm
2. Run the program and respond to the requests.
calculatearea() : area
Width: 3 (3 entered as a response)
Height: 23.64(23.64 entered as a
response)
70.92
Use RequestStr instead of Request when you want the program to interpret the
user’s response as a character string rather than a math expression. This
avoids requiring the user to enclose the response in quotation marks (““).
Displaying Information from a Function or Program
A running function or program does not display intermediate calculated results
unless you include a command to display them. This is an important difference
between performing a calculation on the entry line and performing it in a
function or program.
The following calculations, for example, do not display a result in a function or
program (although they do from the entry line).
©
x:=12•6
cos(π/4)
©
Displaying Information in the History
You can use the Disp command in a program or function to display information,
including intermediate results, in the history.
©
Disp 12•6
Disp "Result:",cos(π/4)
©
Displaying Information in a Dialog Box
You can use the Text command to pause a running program and display
information in a dialog box. The user clicks OK to continue or clicks Cancel to
stop the program.
You cannot use the Text command in a function.
©
Text "Area=" & area
©
Note: Displaying a result with Disp or Text does not store that result. If you
expect to refer later to a result, store it to a global variable.
©
cos(π/4)→maximum
Disp maximum
©
Using Local Variables
A local variable is a temporary variable that exists only while a user-defined
function is being evaluated or a user-defined program is running.
Example of a Local Variable
The following program segment shows a For...EndFor loop (which is discussed
later in this module). The variable iis the loop counter. In most cases, the
variable iis used only while the program is running.
Getting Started with the Program Editor 559
560 Getting Started with the Program Editor
Local iÀ
For i,0,5,1
Disp i
EndFor
Disp i
ÀDeclares variable ias local.
Note: When possible, declare as local any variable that is used only within the
program and does not need to be available after the program stops.
What Causes an Undefined Variable Error Message?
An Undefined variable error message is displayed when you evaluate a user-
defined function or run a user-defined program that references a local variable
that is not initialized (assigned a value).
For example:
Define fact(n)=Func
Local mÀ
While n>1
n¦m&m: n–1&n
EndWhile
Return m
EndFunc
ÀLocal variable mis not assigned an initial value.
Initialize Local Variables
All local variables must be assigned an initial value before they are referenced.
Define fact(n)=Func
Local m: 1&mÀ
While n>1
n¦m&m: n–1&n
EndWhile
Return m
EndFunc
À1 is stored as the initial value for m.
Note (CAS): Functions and programs cannot use a local variable to perform
symbolic calculations.
CAS: Performing Symbolic Calculations
If you want a function or program to perform symbolic calculations, you must
use a global variable instead of a local. However, you must be certain that the
global variable does not already exist outside of the program. The following
methods can help.
• Refer to a global variable name, typically with two or more characters, that
is not likely to exist outside of the function or program.
• Include DelVar within a program to delete the global variable, if it exists,
before referring to it. (DelVar does not delete locked or linked variables.)
Differences Between Functions and Programs
A function defined in the Program Editor is similar to the functions built into the
TI-Nspire™ Software.
• Functions must return a result, which can be graphed or entered in a table.
Programs do not return a result.
• You can use a function (but not a program) within an expression. For
example: 3¦func1(3) is valid, but not 3¦prog1(3).
• You can run programs from Calculator and Notes applications only.
However, you can evaluate functions in Calculator, Notes, Lists &
Spreadsheet, Graphs & Geometry, and Data & Statistics.
• A function can refer to any variable; however, it can store a value to a local
variable only. Programs can store to local and global variables.
Note: Arguments used to pass values to a function are treated as local
variables automatically. If you want to store to any other variables, you
must declare them as Local from within the function.
• A function cannot call a program as a subroutine, but it can call another
user-defined function.
• You cannot define a program within a function.
• A function cannot define a global function, but it can define a local function.
Getting Started with the Program Editor 561
562 Getting Started with the Program Editor
Calling One Program from Another
One program can call another program as a subroutine. The subroutine can be
external (a separate program) or internal (included in the main program).
Subroutines are useful when a program needs to repeat the same group of
commands at several different places.
Calling a Separate Program
To call a separate program, use the same syntax that you use to run the
program from the entry line.
Defining and Calling an Internal Subroutine
To define an internal subroutine, use the Define command with
Prgm...EndPrgm. Because a subroutine must be defined before it can be
called, it is a good practice to define subroutines at the beginning of the main
program.
An internal subroutine is called and executed in the same way as a separate
program.
Define subtest1()=
Prgm
local subtest2À
Define subtest2(x,y)=Á
Prgm
Disp x,y
EndPrgm
©Beginning of main program
For i,1,4,1
subtest2(i,I*1000) Â
EndFor
EndPrgm
ÀDeclares the subroutine as a local variable.
ÁDefines the subroutine.
ÂCalls the subroutine.
Note: Use the Program Editor’s Var menu to enter the Define and
Prgm...EndPrgm commands.
Notes about Using Subroutines
At the end of a subroutine, execution returns to the calling program. To exit a
subroutine at any other time, use Return with no argument.
A subroutine cannot access local variables declared in the calling program.
Likewise, the calling program cannot access local variables declared in a
subroutine.
Lbl commands are local to the programs in which they are located. Therefore, a
Goto command in the calling program cannot branch to a label in a subroutine
or vice versa.
Avoiding Circular-Definition Errors
When evaluating a user-defined function or running a program, you can specify
an argument that includes the same variable that was used to define the
function or create the program. However, to avoid circular-definition errors, you
must assign a value for variables that are used in evaluating the function or
running the program. Forexample:
x+1&xÀ
– or –
For i,i,10,1
Disp iÀ
EndFor
ÀCauses a Circular definition error message if x or i does not have a value.
The error does not occur if x or i has already been assigned a value.
Controlling the Flow of a Function or Program
When you run a program or evaluate a function, the program lines are
executed in sequential order. However, some commands alter the program
flow. For example:
Getting Started with the Program Editor 563
564 Getting Started with the Program Editor
• Control structures such as If...EndIf commands use a conditional test to
decide which part of a program to execute.
• Loop commands such as For...EndFor repeat a group of commands.
Using If, Lbl, and Goto to Control Program Flow
The If command and several If...EndIf structures let you execute a statement or
block of statements conditionally, that is, based on the result of a test (such as
x>5). Lbl (label) and Goto commands let you branch, or jump, from one place to
another in a function or program.
The If command and several If...EndIf structures reside on the Program Editor’s
Control menu.
When you insert a structure such as If...Then...EndIf, a template is inserted at
the cursor location. The cursor is positioned so that you can enter a conditional
test.
If Command
To execute a single command when a conditional test is true, use the general
form:
If x>5
Disp "x is greater than 5"À
Disp xÁ
ÀExecuted only if x>5; otherwise, skipped.
ÁAlways displays the value of x.
In this example, you must store a value to x before executing the Ifcommand.
If...Then...EndIf Structures
To execute one group of commands if a conditional test is true, use the
structure:
If x>5 Then
Disp "x is greater than 5"À
2¦x&xÀ
EndIf
Disp xÁ
ÀExecuted only if x>5.
ÁDisplays the value of:
2x if x>5
x if x{5
Note: EndIf marks the end of the Then block that is executed if the condition is
true.
If...Then...Else...EndIf Structures
To execute one group of commands if a conditional test is true and a different
group if the condition is false, use this structure:
If x>5 Then
Disp "x is greater than 5"À
2¦x&xÀ
Else
Disp "x is less than or equal to 5"Á
5¦x&xÁ
EndIf
Disp xÂ
ÀExecuted only if x>5.
ÁExecuted only if x{5.
ÂDisplays value of:
2x if x>5
5x if x{5
If...Then...ElseIf... EndIf Structures
A more complex form of the If command lets you test for multiple conditions.
Suppose you want a program to test a user-supplied argument that signifies
one of four options.
To test for each option (IfChoice=1, If Choice=2, and so on), use the
If...Then...ElseIf...EndIf structure.
Lbl and Goto Commands
You can also control the flow by using Lbl (label) and Goto commands. These
commands reside on the Program Editor’s Transfers menu.
Use the Lbl command to label (assign a name to) a particular location in the
function or program.
Getting Started with the Program Editor 565
566 Getting Started with the Program Editor
Lbl labelName name to assign to this location (use the
same naming convention as a variable
name)
You can then use the Goto command at any point in the function or program to
branch to the location that corresponds to the specified label.
Goto labelName specifies which Lbl command to branch
to
Because a Goto command is unconditional (it always branches to the specified
label), it is often used with an If command so that you can specify a conditional
test. For example:
If x>5
Goto GT5À
Disp x
--------
-------- Á
Lbl GT5
Disp "The number was > 5"
ÀIf x>5, branches directly to label GT5.
ÁFor this example, the program must include commands (such as Stop) that
prevent Lbl GT5 from being executed if x{5.
Using Loops to Repeat a Group of Commands
To repeat the same group of commands successively, use one of the loop
structures. Several types of loops are available. Each type gives you a different
way to exit the loop, based on a conditional test.
Loop and loop-related commands reside on the Program Editor’s Control and
Transfers menus.
When you insert one of the loop structures, its template is inserted at the cursor
location. You can then begin entering the commands that will be executed
within the loop.
For...EndFor Loops
AFor...EndFor loop uses a counter to control the number of times the loop is
repeated. The syntax of the For command is:
For variable,
À
begin,
Á
end,
Â
increment
Ã
ÀName of a variable to be used as a counter
ÁValue assigned to variable when the For loop begins.
ÂValue compared to the current value of variable at each iteration of the
loop. The loop exits when variable exceeds end.
ÃValue added to variable at each iteration of the loop (This argument is
optional. The default increment is 1.)
At each iteration of the For loop, the variable value is compared to the end
value. If variable does not exceed end, the commands within the For...EndFor
loop are executed and the loop repeats; otherwise, control jumps to the
command following EndFor.
Note: The For command automatically increments the counter variable so that
the function or program can exit the loop after a certain number of repetitions.
At the end of the loop (EndFor), control loops back to the For command, where
the counter variable is incremented and compared to end.
For example:
For i,0,5,1
Disp iÀ
EndFor
Disp iÁ
ÀDisplays 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5.
ÁDisplays 6. When variable increments to 6, the loop is not executed.
Notes:
• You can declare variable as local if it does not need to be saved after the
function or program stops.
Getting Started with the Program Editor 567
568 Getting Started with the Program Editor
• You can set end to a value less than begin, provided you also set
increment to a negative value.
While...EndWhile Loops
AWhile...EndWhile loop repeats a block of commands as long as a specified
condition is true. The syntax of the While command is:
While condition
When While is executed, condition is evaluated. If condition is true, the loop is
executed; otherwise, control jumps to the command following EndWhile.
Note: The While command does not automatically change the condition. You
must include commands that allow the function or program to exit the loop.
At the end of the loop (EndWhile), control jumps back to the While command,
where condition is re-evaluated.
To execute the loop the first time, the condition must initially be true.
• Any variables referenced in the condition must be set before the While
command. (You can build the values into the function or program, or you
can prompt the user to enter the values.)
• The loop must contain commands that change the values in the condition,
eventually causing it to be false. Otherwise, the condition is always true
and the function or program cannot exit the loop (called an infinite loop).
For example:
0&xÀ
While x<5
Disp xÁ
x+1&xÂ
EndWhile
Disp xÃ
ÀInitially sets x.
ÁDisplays 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4.
ÂIncrements x.
ÃDisplays 5. When x increments to 5, the loop is not executed.
Loop...EndLoop Loops
ALoop...EndLoop creates an infinite loop, which is repeated endlessly. The
Loop command does not have any arguments.
Typically, you insert commands in the loop that let the program exit from the
loop. Commonly used commands are: If,Exit,Goto, and Lbl (label). For
example:
0&x
Loop
Disp x
x+1&x
If x>5À
Exit
EndLoop
Disp x  Á
ÀAn If command checks the condition.
ÁExits the loop and jumps to here when xincrements to 6.
Note: The Exit command exits from the current loop.
In this example, the If command can be anywhere in the loop.
When the If
command is:
The loop is:
At the beginning of
the loop
Executed only if the condition is true.
At the end of the loop Executed at least once and repeated only if the
condition is true.
Getting Started with the Program Editor 569
570 Getting Started with the Program Editor
The If command could also use a Goto command to transfer program control to
a specified Lbl (label) command.
Repeating a Loop Immediately
The Cycle command immediately transfers program control to the next iteration
of a loop (before the current iteration is complete). This command works with
For...EndFor,While...EndWhile, and Loop...EndLoop.
Lbl and Goto Loops
Although the Lbl (label) and Goto commands are not strictly loop commands,
they can be used to create an infinite loop. For example:
As with Loop...EndLoop, the loop should contain commands that let the
function or program exit from the loop.
Changing Mode Settings
Functions and programs can use the setMode() function to temporarily set
specific calculation or result modes. The Program Editor’s Mode menu makes it
easy to enter the correct syntax without requiring you to memorize numeric
codes.
Note: Mode changes made within a function or program definition do not
persist outside the function or program.
Setting a Mode
1. Position the cursor where you want to insert the setMode function.
2. From the Mode menu, click the mode to change, and click the new setting.
The correct syntax is inserted at the cursor location. For example:
setMode(1,3)
Debugging Programs and Handling Errors
After you write a function or program, you can use several techniques to find
and correct errors. You can also build an error-handling command into the
function or program itself.
If your function or program allows the user to select from several options, be
sure to run it and test each option.
Techniques for Debugging
Run-time error messages can locate syntax errors but not errors in program
logic. The following techniques may be useful.
• Temporarily insert Disp commands to display the values of critical
variables.
• To confirm that a loop is executed the correct number of times, use Disp to
display the counter variable or the values in the conditional test.
• To confirm that a subroutine is executed, use Disp to display messages
such as “Entering subroutine” and “Exiting subroutine” at the beginning
and end of the subroutine.
• To stop a program or function manually,
- Windows®: Hold down the F12 key and press Enter repeatedly.
- Mac®: Hold down the F5 key and press Enter repeatedly.
- Handheld: Hold down the ckey and press ·repeatedly.
Error-handling Commands
Command Description
Try...EndTry Defines a block that lets a function or program execute a
command and, if necessary, recover from an error generated
by that command.
ClrErr Clears the error status and sets system variable errCode to
zero. For an example of using errCode, see the Try
command in the
Reference Guide
.
PassErr Passes an error to the next level of the Try...EndTry block.
Getting Started with the Program Editor 571
572
Using the TI-SmartView™ Emulator
With three layout options to choose from, teachers will find that the emulator
facilitates classroom presentations. In the teacher software, layout options are:
• Handheld only
• Keypad plus side screen
• Handheld plus side screen
In the student software, the TI-SmartView™ emulates the keypad, which along
with the handheld view, gives students the ability to drive the software as if
using a handheld.
Opening the TI-SmartView™ Emulator
The TI-SmartView™ emulator is located in the Documents Workspace. To open
the emulator view:
1. Open the Documents Workspace.
2. Click , which is located in the Documents Toolbox.
In the teacher software, the handheld is displayed with Handheld and
SideScreen panels open in computer mode as shown in the following
illustration. You can use the keypad on the emulated handheld, but the
document won’t appear on the emulated handheld screen until you switch
to Handheld mode.
Using the TI-SmartView™ Emulator 573
574 Using the TI-SmartView™ Emulator
In the student software, the TI-Nspire™ CX keypad is displayed with the side
screen open in computer mode. You can use the keypad on the emulated
handheld to work with the document in the side screen in either computer
mode or handheld mode.
3. Click View > Handheld.
—or—
Click in the status bar to switch to handheld mode.
Choosing a Keypad
An open document is not affected by changing the keypad. You can switch
between keypads anytime you want. To select a keypad:
1. In the emulator panel, click to open the menu and select one of the
following options:
• TI-Nspire™ CX
• TI-Nspire™ with Touchpad
• TI-Nspire™ with Clickpad
2. Click ¢to select a faceplate option:
• Normal
• High Contrast
• Outline
Choosing Display Options
In the teacher software, use this option to choose how to display the emulator
in the software window.
1. In the emulator panel, click .
—or—
Click File > Settings > TI-SmartView™.
2. Select one of the following options:
•Handheld Only. Displays the emulated handheld and hides the
workspace and other panels.
Note: To keep the Handheld Only display in front of other application
windows, click Always in Front at the top right of the TI-SmartView™
panel.
•Keypad + SideScreen. Opens a larger view of the keypad along with
the side screen.
•Handheld + SideScreen. Opens the entire emulated handheld along
with the side screen.
Using the TI-SmartView™ Emulator 575
576 Using the TI-SmartView™ Emulator
Changing the Width of the TI-SmartView™ Panel
To change the width of the TI-SmartView™ emulator panel:
▶Click the right edge of the panel and drag it until it is the width you want.
Changing the Size of the Screen in the Workspace
When in handheld mode, use the Scale to change the size of the screen.
▶Drag the slider to the appropriate scale percentage. The scale slider is
located on the far right side of the status bar, at the bottom of the TI-Nspire™
window. Scale percentages range from 100% to 200%. The default scale is
150%.
Note: If computer mode is selected, you cannot change the size of the
workspace.
Working with the Emulated Handheld
To input data and work with files on the emulator, you can use the computer
keyboard, TI-SmartView™ keypad, TI-Nspire™ menus and icons, or any
combination of these.
Note: Within one command, you cannot use a combination of both the keypad
and the keyboard. For example, you cannot press Ctrl on the keyboard and
click bon the emulator to open a context menu.
For the most part, you can perform any function in the TI-SmartView™ emulator
that you can perform on the handheld. Keys and applications operate the same
way.
Note: If you switch to Computer mode, you can still use most of the keys on the
emulated handheld or keypad and all keystrokes are reflected in the
workspace. However, some key combinations may only work in Handheld
mode.
As you click keys on the emulator or press keys on the keyboard that activate
keys on the emulator, those keys change color, making it easy for your
audience to follow along. The last key selected stays highlighted.
In the teacher software, the emulator screen and the side screen are both
interactive. You can click on icons and menu items on both screens. You can
also right-click to display menus on both screens.
All handheld shortcuts and arrow functionality work from the computer
keyboard. For example, to save a document, you can click / S on the
emulator keypad or you can press Ctrl + S on the computer keyboard. When
using a Mac®, press “+S.
Using the Touchpad
You can operate the Touchpad on the TI-Nspire™ Touchpad keypad using
either the touchpad on a laptop or by using the mouse to click the Touchpad.
Areas of the Touchpad are highlighted as you click the arrow zones.
An arrow is highlighted when you press or tap it.
• Clicking the ¡,¢,£, or ¤keys on the Touchpad moves through menus
one item at a time.
• Clicking and holding down an arrow on the Touchpad causes continual
movement in the selected direction.
• Clicking and sliding the mouse across the Touchpad area enables you to
move the mouse pointer.
• Clicking the middle of the Touchpad selects the highlighted menu option.
Using the Clickpad
You can use the Clickpad on the TI-Nspire™ Clickpad keypad using either the
touchpad on a laptop or by using the mouse to click the Clickpad. Areas of the
Clickpad are highlighted as you click the arrow zones.
Using the TI-SmartView™ Emulator 577
578 Using the TI-SmartView™ Emulator
• Clicking the ¡,¢,£, or ¤keys on the Clickpad moves through menus one
item at a time.
• Clicking and holding down an arrow on the Clickpad causes continual
movement in the selected direction.
• Clicking the middle of the Clickpad selects the highlighted menu option.
Using Settings and Status
When working with the TI-SmartView™ emulator, you can change General
Settings and Document Settings. For more information, see
Using the
Documents Workspace
.
You can view all other settings, but you cannot change them in the
TI-SmartView™ emulator. However, the ability to view these options provides
teachers with an instructional tool when they need to show students how to set
up a handheld.
To view settings and status:
1. Click cto access the Home screen.
2. Click Settings.
Setting
or
Settings
Description
Language You can open the languages menu and select a language, but
you cannot save changes. To change the language, use the
TI-Nspire™ menu File > Settings > Change Language option.
Handheld
Setup
You can open the menus and select items to demonstrate
which items to choose, but you cannot save any changes.
Handheld
Status
You can access the screen. The # symbol replaces any
numeric values that would be displayed on the handheld.
Setting
or
Settings
Description
About You can open the About screen and view the software version.
Other information that pertains only to the handheld hardware
is marked as "Not Applicable."
Login You can display the Login to Class screen and type in the
User Name and Password fields. Login is not available.
Changing TI-SmartView™ Options
You can change the emulator options, even when the emulator panel is closed.
1. In the teacher software, click File> Settings> TI-SmartView™ Options.
The TI-SmartView™ Options dialog box opens.
In the student software, click File > Settings > Keypad Options.
The Keypad Options dialog box opens.
Using the TI-SmartView™ Emulator 579
580 Using the TI-SmartView™ Emulator
2. Click Browse to change the folder where documents are saved and
accessed in the My Documents folder when using the emulator.
Important: If you change the TI-SmartView™ location, you must also copy
or move the MyLib folder and paste it to the new location to see library
objects.
The default location of MyLib is:
• Windows®: Documents\TI-Nspire\MyLib.
• Mac®: Documents/TI-Nspire/MyLib.
Note: Close and reopen the TI-Nspire™ application for the libraries to
reflect the change.
3. Click ¤to open the menu and select a keypad.
4. Click ¤to open the menu and select a faceplate.
5. In the teacher software, click ¤to open the menu and select a view. If
selecting Handheld only, select Always in Front to keep this window on top
of all other open applications.
6. Click OK to save the settings.
Working with Documents
You can open multiple documents in the workspace by selecting File>Open
Document from the menu or using keyboard shortcuts. When you switch
between these documents, the emulated handheld shows only the current
document. You can insert pages and problems using either the TI-Nspire™
menus or icons, keyboard shortcuts, or TI-SmartView™ menus or shortcuts.
Note: You cannot work with PublishView™ documents using the TI-SmartView™
emulator. When you create or open a PublishView™ document, the document
opens in Computer mode.
Opening a Document
You can open a document by navigating to it on the emulator, the same way
you open a document on the handheld, or you click File>OpenDocument.
When you open a document using the emulator, you can only open documents
that are in the folder displayed on the emulator (usually the My Documents
folder, unless you specified a different folder in your TI-SmartView™ settings).
When you open a document using the menu path, you can browse to find any
TI-Nspire™ document on your computer or network. If you open a document
using the emulated handheld, it replaces the document that was previously
open.
Note: If the number of characters in the document’s file path name exceeds 256
characters, the document cannot be opened and an error message is
displayed. To avoid this error, keep file and folder names short or move files up
in the file path.
Saving a Document
When you save a document using the File>Save Document menu or icon,
keyboard shortcuts, keypad shortcuts, or emulator menus, the document is
saved in the same location where the file was opened. To save the file in
another location or with a different name, click File>Save As.
Using Screen Capture
To capture the current page, press Ctrl+J (Mac®: ì“+J) on your keyboard or
on the emulated handheld. The image is automatically placed in the Clipboard
and in the TI-Nspire™ Screen Capture window. You can paste the image into
another application without having to take additional steps. This feature is only
available when the TI-SmartView™ panel is active and the workspace is in
Handheld mode.
All other screen capture features work the same way they do in other areas of
TI-Nspire™ software. For more information, see
Capturing Screens
.
Using the TI-SmartView™ Emulator 581
582
Writing Lua Scripts
The Script Editor allows you to create and deliver dynamically linked
simulations, powerful and flexible utilities, and other educational content for
exploring math and science concepts. When you open a document containing
a script, the script runs automatically as programmed. To see the running script
application, the page containing the script application must be active.
The Script Editor is directed toward teachers and other authors who are
comfortable working in a Lua scripting environment. Lua is a powerful, fast,
lightweight scripting language that is fully supported in TI-Nspire™ and
PublishView™ documents. Documents containing script applications can be
opened on TI-Nspire™ handhelds and in the TI-Nspire™ Document Player. The
script application runs on a handheld or in Document Player, but you cannot
view or edit the script.
Note these resources for using the Script Editor and creating scripts:
• Press F1 to access the TI-Nspire™ help, which includes the Script Editor
help.
• Press F2 for additional TI-Nspire™ resources such as scripting samples
and a link to the TI-Nspire™ Scripting API library. (This information is also
available at education.ti.com/nspire/scripting.)
• Go to lua.org for more information about Lua.
Overview of the Script Editor
With the Script Editor, you can insert, edit, save, run, and debug script
applications inTI-Nspire™ (.tns files) and Publishview™ (.tnsp files) documents.
• Script applications function within documents, problems, and pages the
same way that other TI-Nspire™ applications do.
• When you create a new document or open an existing document, you can
insert or edit a script application within a page or within a work area of a
split page.
• In a split page layout, you can add a script application to each work area of
a page. A page can be split into a maximum of four quadrants.
• Images can be added to script applications. See the
Inserting Images
section.
Writing Lua Scripts 583
584 Writing Lua Scripts
• All work done in the Script Editor is lost if you close the TI-Nspire™ or
PublishView™ document without saving it.
Exploring the Script Editor Interface
The Script Editor window opens when you insert a new script application or
edit an existing script application in a TI-Nspire™ or PublishView™ document.
Select options for creating new scripts or editing scripts from the Insert menu in
the Documents Workspace when a document is open.
Note: Although not labeled, the Documents Workspace is the default
workspace in the TI-Nspire™ Student Software and TI-Nspire™ CAS Student
Software.
The following figure shows the Script Editor with an existing script.
ÀMenu bar. Contains options for working with the Script Editor.
ÁToolbar. Provides tools for common Script Editor functions. See the
Using
the Toolbar
section.
ÂScript title. Shows script title. Right-click the title to change it or by clicking
Edit >Set Script Title.
ÃText box.Provides a space to type script text.
ÄTools panel. Shows script data. See the
Using the Tools Panel
section.
ÅStatus bar. Displays the operational state of the script. See the
Using the
Status Bar
section.
Using the Toolbar
The following table describes the toolbar options.
Tool name Tool function
Suspend
Script
Pauses the script execution.
Resume
Script
Resumes the script execution.
While debugging, the script continues to execute
until the next breakpoint or the end of the script.
Set Script Starts the script execution.
Focus Script Sets the focus to the page in the document where
the script application is attached:
• In a TI-Nspire™ document, sets the focus to
the page.
• In a PublishView™ document, sets the focus
to the frame on the page.
Step Into While debugging, executes the current statement.
If the statement calls any functions, the debugger
stops at the first line of each function.
Step Over While debugging, executes the current statement.
If the statement calls any functions, the debugger
does not stop within the function unless the
function contains a breakpoint.
Enable
Breakpoints
Switches from normal mode to debugging mode.
Writing Lua Scripts 585
586 Writing Lua Scripts
Tool name Tool function
Disable
Breakpoints
Switches back from debugging mode to normal
mode and resumes the script.
Set
Permissions
Sets permission levels to Protected, View Only, or
Unprotected and allows you to set a password for
the script.
Using the Tools Panel
At the bottom of the window, the Tools panel shows the scripting data. For more
information, see the
Debugging Scripts
section.
Tab Window Display
Console Script errors are printed here.
Print statements embedded in the script also print here.
Globals Selected global variables are displayed.
To select a global variable for display, select Click to add new
watch variable at the bottom of the Tools panel.
Call Stack Displays the call tree for the currently executing function.
Locals Local variables in the current function’s scope are displayed.
Resources Upload, insert, and manage images here.
Using the Status Bar
The status bar at the bottom of the window shows basic script data, as
described in this example: stopwatch, 1.1,4:1,Running.
• Name of the document that the script application is attached to
(stopwatch)
• Problem and page number (1.1)
• Script line and character, (4:1 describing line 4 and character 1)
• Operational state of the script (Running). Note the possible states:
- Normal mode: Running, Paused, or Error
- Debugging mode: Running (debugging), Paused, or Error
Inserting New Scripts
To insert a new script application and script, follow these steps.
1. Open the document where you want to insert the script. It can be a new or
existing document.
2. Click Insert > Script Editor > Insert Script.
A script application is inserted, and the Script Title dialog box opens.
Note: The TI-Nspire™ Student Software and the TI-Nspire™ CAS Student
Software open automatically within the Documents Workspace.
3. Type a script title. (The maximum number of characters is 32.)
4. Click OK.
The Script Editor window opens showing a blank script.
5. Type your text in the script lines.
Note: Some nonstandard UTF-8 wide characters may not be displayed
correctly. For these characters, it is highly recommended that you use the
string.uchar function.
6. When the script is complete, click Set Script to execute it.
• In a TI-Nspire™ document, the script application is inserted in a new
page. When the page containing the script application is active, the
Documents Toolbox is empty.
• In a PublishView™ document, a frame containing the script application
is added to the active page. You can move or size this frame just as
you would any other PublishView™ object, and you can add other
PublishView™ objects to the page.
7. To view the script application, click Focus Script.
Editing Scripts
To edit an existing script, follow these steps.
1. Open the TI-Nspire™ or PublishView™ document that contains the script.
The page containing the script must be active.
2. Select the page and the work area that contains the script.
Writing Lua Scripts 587
588 Writing Lua Scripts
3. Click Insert > Script Editor > EditScript.
The Script Editor opens showing the script. If the selected work area on the
page does not contain a script, Edit Script is dimmed.
If the script is password protected, the Password Protected dialog box
opens prompting for a password.
4. Make any desired changes.
• To designate comments, use double hyphens (--) at the start of each
comment line.
• To change the title, click Edit >Set Script Title or right-click the title and
click Set Script Title.
Notes:
• Some nonstandard UTF-8 characters may not be displayed correctly.
For these characters, it is highly recommended that you use the
string.uchar function.
• The print function may yield unexpected results for non–UTF-8
characters.
• Some nonprintable characters returned by the on.save function will be
discarded.
5. To execute the script, click Set Script.
Any errors are displayed in the Console area in the Tools panel.
6. To view the script application (running script), click Focus Script.
Changing View Options
To change viewing options:
▶To clear the scripting data in the Tools panel and restore the editor defaults,
click View >Restore Editor to Defaults.
▶To view the script title in the document and before each print statement in
the Console, click View >Title in Document View.
▶To hide or show toolbar labels, click View >Toolbar Text Labels.
▶To show or hide the Tools panel or its areas, click View >Tools Panel and
click the appropriate option.
▶To create tab groups when multiple scripts are open, right-click one of the
titles and click New Horizontal Group or New Vertical Group.
Setting Minimum API Level
Each release of the T-Nspire™ software includes API support for a specific set
of Lua scripting features. Setting the minimum API level for a script lets you
specify a minimum set of features that you require for your script.
If a user tries to run the script on a system that does not meet the script's
minimum API level, a message notifies the user and prevents the script from
running.
To Set the Minimum API Level for a Script:
1. Determine the minimum level that you want your script to require.
- Setting the level too low for the script's feature set can result in a script
error on older software.
- Setting the level too high can result in the script refusing to start on
older software that supports the feature set.
2. On the Script Editor File menu, select Set Minimum API Level.
3. In the dialog box, type the minimum level using the format major.minor.
For example, you might type 2.3.
This API level or higher will be required for running the script.
Saving Script Applications
Clicking Set Script resets (updates) a script application in a TI-Nspire™ or
PublishView™ document. However, the script and script application are not
saved until you save the document. If you close the document or close the
TI-Nspire™ software without saving, work on the script is lost.
To ensure the script application is saved after all work is complete, follow these
steps.
1. From the Script Editor window, click Set Script to reset (update) the script
application in the document.
2. From an open document, click File > Save Document to save changes to
the TI-Nspire™ or PublishView™ document.
Note: To ensure work is backed up, set the script and save the document
frequently.
Writing Lua Scripts 589
590 Writing Lua Scripts
Managing Images
To insert an image into a script application, follow these steps.
Add an Image to Resources
1. Click the Resource tab.
2. Click the button.
3. Click on an image file name.
4. Click Open.
5. Accept the default image name or rename the image by typing a new
name into the box. (Ex: newimage)
6. Click OK.
Note: You will see the image thumbnail in the bottom-right corner of your
screen. Your image file name will appear in a list of images at the bottom-
left of your screen.
7. Right-click an image name to Rename, Copy Name, Preview, or Remove
the image. You may also click the button to remove an image.
Add Multiple Images to Resources
1. Click the Resource tab.
2. Click the button.
3. Select Comma Separated Values (*.csv) from the Files of Type menu.
4. Select your .csv file.
Note: The .csv format consists of two comma-separated columns. The first
column is the local name of the image resource used in the code. The
second column is the absolute path to the image on the current system.
Example for Windows:
bridge,C:\images\bridge.jpg
house,C:\images\house.jpg
5. Click Open.
6. Right-click an image name to Rename, Copy Name, Preview, or Remove
the image. You may also click the button to remove an image.
Create a Script to Call Up an Image
1. Type a script in the script line box as follows:
myimage = image.new(_R.IMG.img_1)
function on.paint (gc)
gc:drawImage (myimage, 30, 30)
end
Note:Replace img_1 (above) with the name of your image.
2. Click Set Script to save the script. You will see your image in the Document
Preview screen.
3. Click Focus Script to set the focus to the page in the document where you
want to attach the script application.
Note: A TI-Nspire document sets the focus to the page; A PublishView™
document sets the focus to the frame on the page.
Create a Script to Call Up Multiple Images
1. Type a script in the script line box as follows:
myimg = {}
for name, data in pairs (_R.IMG)
myimg [name] = image.new(data)
end
function on.paint (gc)
gc:drawImage (myimg[imagename], 30, 30)
end
2. Click Set Script to save the script. You will see your image in the Document
Preview screen.
3. Click Focus Script to set the focus to the page in the document where you
want to attach the script application.
Note: A TI-Nspire document sets the focus to the page; A PublishView™
document sets the focus to the frame on the page.
Writing Lua Scripts 591
592 Writing Lua Scripts
Setting Script Permissions
You can set permission levels for a script and specify a password to protect a
script. Follow these steps.
1. In the Script Editor window, click File >Set Permissions.
The Set Permissions dialog box opens.
2. In the Permissions Level area, select the appropriate security level:
•Protected. The script can be run, but not viewed or edited.
•View only. The script can be viewed, but not edited.
•Unprotected. The script can be viewed and edited.
3. To secure a script, designate a password in the Security area.
Note: Use caution when setting passwords because they cannot be
recovered.
4. Click OK.
The next time you click Insert > Script Editor > EditScript, a Password Protected
dialog box opens prompting for the password. Choose one of these options:
• To edit the script, enter the password and click OK.
• To view the script only, do not enter the password and click View.
Debugging Scripts
You can debug your script to investigate runtime errors and trace the execution
flow. While debugging, data is displayed in the Tools panel.
▶To enable debugging mode or disable it and return to normal mode, click
Debug >Enable Breakpoints or Disable Breakpoints.
Note: Disabling breakpoints always resumes the script execution.
▶While debugging, click Step Into and Step Over as appropriate. See the
Exploring the Script Editor interface
section.
▶To set breakpoints, double-click in the space to the far left of the line
number. Breakpoints are disabled until you click EnableBreakpoints.
▶Note these factors when debugging:
• Breakpoints in coroutines are not supported.
• If a breakpoint is set in a function that is a callback, the debugger may
not stop at the breakpoint.
• The debugger may not stop at functions such as on.save, on.restore,
and on.destroy.
On the toolbar, Step Into and Step Over are enabled when breakpoints are
enabled.
▶To suspend and resume the script execution, click Suspend Script and
Resume Script. When the script resumes, it runs until the next breakpoint is
encountered or to the end of the script. A script can be suspended in normal
mode or debugging mode.
Writing Lua Scripts 593
594
Using the Help Menu
Use the Help menu to find useful information to help you use the software more
productively. You can:
• Open the PDFhelp file (press F1 or click Help).
• Open the web-based help file (press F2 or click Online Help).
• Activate your software license.
• Register your TI product.
• Explore TI resources such as Activities Exchange, where you can find
lessons, quizzes, and other instructive activities shared by educators.
• Explore online troubleshooting or run TI-Nspire™ diagnostics.
• Check for updates to the software or updates to operating systems for
TI-Nspire™ handhelds and the TI-Nspire™ Lab Cradle.
• Check to see which version of the software you are using.
Activating Your Software License
1. Ensure that your computer is connected to the Internet.
2. From the Help menu, select Activate to open the Texas Instruments
Activation Wizard.
3. Click Activate your License, and then click Next.
The Complete Software Activation dialog box opens.
Using the Help Menu 595
596 Using the Help Menu
4. Complete the name and email fields, and then select the region where you
live if different from the default entry. If you want to receive emails from TI
about updates, support, and promotions, ensure the check box is selected.
5. Click Next.
The Activate your software dialog box opens.
6. Type the license number.
7. Click Next.
The License Agreement dialog box opens.
8. In the Country field, select your country from the drop-down list if it is
different from the default entry.
9. Review the license agreement, and then select to accept the agreement.
10. Click Activate. The license number is validated against the TI database to
ensure it is valid.
If the license number is valid, the Successful Activation dialog box opens. If
the license number is not valid, check to make sure the numbers are
entered correctly. If the problem persists, contact TI Support.
11. Click Next to continue, or select Finish to complete the installation with
default settings.
12. When prompted, click OK to accept the default location for your TI-Nspire™
folder. If needed, navigate to the location on your computer where you
want to store your TI-Nspire™ documents and files.
13. Select whether or not to replace any documents that have the same name.
The software launches and the Welcome Screen opens.
Registering Your Product
1. Ensure that your computer is connected to the Internet.
2. From the Help menu, select Register to access the TI Product Registration
site.
3. Follow the instructions on the website.
Downloading the Latest Guidebook
1. Ensure that your computer is connected to the Internet.
Using the Help Menu 597
598 Using the Help Menu
2. From the Help menu, select Download latest Guidebook.
The Education Technology website opens with the Guidebooks tab active.
3. Click the title of the Guidebook that you want to download.
A PDF version of the Guidebook opens on your desktop.
Exploring TI Resources
The Help menu also provides links to TI resources and websites.
▶Select Help > Visit education.ti.com to access the Texas Instruments
Education Technology website.
▶Select Help > Visit Activities Exchange to access the Texas Instruments
Activities Exchange, site, a forum where you can browse by subject to find
ready-to-use math and science learning activities appropriate for middle
grades through college.
Note: Activities available for download may vary depending on your
geographical region.
▶Select Help > Explore Online Troubleshooting to access the TI Knowledge
Base where you can find general information, troubleshooting help, product
usage tips, and information specific to TI products.
Running TI-Nspire™ Diagnostics
If you have trouble with your software, this option enables you to run a short
diagnostics program that will help TI support personnel troubleshoot the
problem. You do not need Internet access to run diagnostics; however, Internet
access is required to send the log file to TI Support. To run diagnostics:
1. From the Help menu, select Run TI-Nspire™ Diagnostics.
The Software Diagnostic Tool dialog box opens.
2. Click Start to run the program.
The log file is created and the Save as dialog box opens.
3. Navigate to the folder where you want to save the file, and then click Save
As.
The Diagnostic Report dialog box opens providing the name of the zip file
created and the location where it was saved.
4. Click OK.
5. From the Software Diagnostic Tool dialog box:
• Click Send to TI to send the file to TI Support.
• Click Restart to run the diagnostics program again.
• Click Cancel to quit, and then click OK to confirm and close the dialog
box.
Updating the TI-Nspire™ Software
Update the Software
1. Ensure that your computer is connected to the Internet.
2. Close any open documents.
3. From the Help menu, select Check for Upgrades and Notifications.
• If your software is current, a confirmation message appears.
• If your software is not current, you are prompted to update.
Using the Help Menu 599
600 Using the Help Menu
4. Click Update to download and install the update, or click Close to cancel.
A progress indicator shows the download progress. If you receive a
connection error, check your Internet connection and try again.
Note for users updating TI-Nspire™ Navigator™ Teacher Software or TI-Nspire™
Navigator™NC Teacher Software: Your portfolio and class records reside on
your computer as a database. Because the new software might have features
that are not supported in the old database structure, the old data might need to
be converted. When conversion is necessary, a Database Update tool helps
you make a backup of the old database. The tool appears during the first
startup of the updated software.
Manage Automatic Checking
Automatic checking uses the Internet to check for upgrades each time you
open the TI-Nspire™ software. If your system is not up-to-date, you receive a
notification. You can turn automatic checking on or off.
1. From the Help menu, select Check for Upgrades and Notifications.
2. Check or clear the Automaticallycheckforupdates check box.
3. Click Close.
Updating the OS on a Connected Handheld
Note: To avoid losing unsaved data, close all documents on the handheld
before updating its operating system.
1. Ensure that your computer is connected to the Internet.
2. In the Documents Toolbox, click the Content Explorer tab to show
connected handhelds.
3. Select the handheld that you are updating.
4. From the Help menu, select Check for OSUpdates.
• If the operating system is current, a confirmation message appears.
• If the operating system is not current, the TI-Nspire™ software prompts
you to install the latest OS now. If the updated OS file is not already
available on your computer, you can choose a location for it.
5. Click Continue and follow the prompts to install the OS on the handheld, or
click Close to cancel.
When the update is complete, the handheld restarts automatically.
Viewing Software Version and Legal Information
1. From the Help menu, select About TI-Nspire™ <Product Name>Software.
Note: You do not need an Internet connection to open this screen.
Using the Help Menu 601
602 Using the Help Menu
2. Click OK to close the window.
Helping Improve the Product
This product includes a feature that can help TI improve the product by
automatically collecting anonymous information about product usage and
reliability.
Note: Depending on how your software was installed, you might see the
following screen the first time you start the software. You also can access the
feature manually.
1. From the Help menu, select Product Improvements.
2. Read the information on the screen, and click one of the buttons:
- To allow information to be collected, click Yes, I want to help.
- To prevent collection, click No thanks.
Support and Service
Texas Instruments Support and Service
General Information: North and South America
Home Page: education.ti.com
KnowledgeBase and e-mail inquiries: education.ti.com/support
Phone: (800) TI-CARES / (800) 842-2737
For North and South America and
U.S. Territories
International contact information: education.ti.com/support/worldwide
For Technical Support
Knowledge Base and support by e-mail: education.ti.com/support or
ti-cares@ti.com
Phone (not toll-free): (972) 917-8324
For Product (Hardware) Service
Customers in the U.S., Canada, Mexico, and U.S. territories: Always contact
Texas Instruments Customer Support before returning a product for service.
For All Other Countries:
For general information
For more information about TI products and services, contact TI by e-mail or
visit the TIInternet address.
E-mail inquiries: ti-cares@ti.com
Home Page: education.ti.com
Service and Warranty Information
For information about the length and terms of the warranty or about product
service, refer to the warranty statement enclosed with this product or contact
your local Texas Instruments retailer/distributor.
Support and Service 603
604
Index
3
3D aspect ratio, changing 317
3D functions
graphing 311
3D graph
changing appearance 315
3D Graphing view 311, 313
3D graphs
animating with sliders 319
editing expressions 314
plot colors 315
range settings 318
rotating 313
setting background colors 317
showing/hiding 317
shrinking/magnifying 317
3D parametric equations
graphing 312
A
activating software licenses 595
activities
copying 34
filtering 32
keyword searches 32
opening 32
saving 33
adding
(x,y) numerical input questions 185
applications 86
applications (PublishView™ documents) 114
Index 605
606 Index
colors 81
copyrights 173
copyrights to documents (.tns) 93
drop points questions 188
equation questions 181
files to lesson bundles 147
files to transfer list 52
images in Quick Poll 167
images to pages 167
images to questions 176
links 28
lists questions 189
open response questions 180
pages 90
problems 90
questions 176, 178
shortcuts 27
shortcuts to lesson bundles 154
text (PublishView™ documents) 128
titles to graphs 522
alternative hypothesis 411
analysis options
removing 513
analyzing data
integral 510
model 513
tangent 510
angles
measuring 293, 342
animating
points 303, 357
animations
changing points direction 304, 357
pausing 303, 357
resetting 304, 357
resuming 303, 357
API level, setting for scripts 589
appearance
of 3D graph 315
application
tools menu 17
applications
adding 86
Calculator 201
Data & Statistics 415
deleting 89
Geometry 321
Graphs & Geometry 237
grouping 89
inserting images 167
Lists & Spreadsheet 363
Notes 463
Program Editor 545
Question 171
swapping 87
approximate or exact results 377
arcs, drawing 281, 330
area, measuring 292, 341
arguments, user-supplied values 557
arithmetic calculations 308, 360
aspect ratio, changing in 3D graphing 317
attributes
changing for objects 290, 339
for variables 223
axes
adjusting 449
changing attributes in Graphing view 268
dilating 444
moving (translation) 444
scaling 444
setting values (Data & Statistics) 450
Index 607
608 Index
axis ranges
setting in graphs 523
B
backup
of class data 600
bar charts
creating 433-434, 436
borders (PublishView™ documents), hiding/showing 123
box plots 422
breaking long calculations 472
C
Calculate output option 391
calculating distributions (Lists & Spreadsheet) 399
calculations
arithmetic 308, 360
breaking 472
derivative settings 533
types available 396
using variables 230
Calculator
menus 201
Calculator application 201
calculated results variables 235
Calculator history
copying 219-220
deleting 221
reusing 220
viewing 219
captions, viewing variable names 416
capture page option 158
Capture Selected Handheld option 159
capturing
active pages in documents 158
data (Lists & Spreadsheet) 388
handheld current screens 157
images in handheld mode 157
pages in active documents 157
capturing images
DragScreen 164
caseplots (default) 416
Catalog
converting measurement units 210
inserting items from 204, 207, 372, 391
cell references
absolute and relative 371
using in formulas 372
cells
body 366
copying in tables 372
deleting contents 372
entering text 367
exact or approximate results 377
formulas 366
inserting ranges in formulas 368
linking to variables 374
navigating in tables 370
repeating formulas 373
selecting a block of 372
selecting a range 368
sharing table cells 373
changing
General Settings 69
Graphs & Geometry settings 71
language 18
links 29
changing screen size 576
Index 609
610 Index
charts
bar 433
dot 431
pie 435
scatter 418
chemical equation boxes 473
circle arcs, creating 281, 330
circles, drawing 282, 331
Circular definition error 563
class data
backup 600
Clickpad, navigating in emulator 577
closing
functions and programs 553
Transfer Tool 58
closing documents (.tns) 79
closing the Welcome screen 14
collected data
deleting 509
viewing details 509
collecting and managing data sets 507
color
setting grid color in Graphs 268
colors
3D graph background 317
applying to backgrounds 467
changing 289, 315, 338, 371, 456-457, 466
changing for points 528
colors, adding 81
columns
based on other columns 379
copying 376
defining options 517
deleting 375
deleting data from 377
generating data in tables 379
inserting 206, 375
linking to list variables 365
moving 377
resizing 375
selecting 374, 529
sharing table columns as lists 364
commands
If, Lbl, Goto 564
comments, inserting in Notes 468
comparing
data sets 507
comparing collected data sets 507
confidence intervals available 405
conic by five points 286, 335
conics, graphing 248
constructions
locus 288, 337
content
viewing on handhelds 35
Content Explorer 66
content workspace
exploring 20
Content workspace 15
Content Workspace 20
context menu in Lists & Spreadsheet 375
converting
.tns files to .tnsp files 143
.tnsp files to .tns files 142
measurement units 210
page size; page size, converting; preview, setting document; setting
document preview 81
text to hyperlinks 136
copying
activities 34
Calculator history 219-220
Index 611
612 Index
cells from Excel® spreadsheets 387
handheld images 157
images 158
images in handheld mode 157
lesson bundles 153
screens 163
table cells 372
table data 386
table rows or columns 376
copying problems 90
copyrights
adding 173
adding to documents (.tns) 93
creating
bar charts 433-434, 436
copies of functions and programs 549
histograms 426
lesson bundles 145-146, 153
lists from table columns 364
matrices 206
pie charts 435
plots 421
probability plots 428
PublishView™ documents 96
scatter plots 429
summary plots 384
system of equations 209
user-defined units 211
variables 224-225, 227
creating documents (.tns) 75
curve fit options 512
customizing
Graphs work area 267
D
data
backup of class data 600
capturing (Lists & Spreadsheet) 388
capturing object data (Graphs & Geometry) 388
copying to other applications 386
deleting from columns 377
displaying values 417, 421
exact or approximate results 377
generating columns of 379
graphing table data 382
raw and summary overview 420
retrieving remote 505
selecting ranges 526
sorting in tables 378
sorting plotted categories 441
Data & Statistics
getting started with 415
data analysis
interpolation 511
data collections
remote sensors 503
scaling graphs 525
setting sensor parameters 493
thresholds 505
data plots
finding curve fit 512
data sets
comparing 507
deleting collected 509
renaming 508
selecting for replays 532
selecting to plot 524
storing 507
Index 613
614 Index
data sets, collecting and managing 507
debugging information 571
displaying in dialog boxes 559
displaying values 558
programs 571
defined functions, recalling 216
defining
functions 208, 212-213
settings 18
units 211
deleting
applications 89
Calculator history 221
collected data sets 509
contents of table cells 372
data from columns 377
documents (.tns) 78
elements from lists 366
files 55
global variables 561
hyperlinks (PublishView™ documents) 137
images 169
images (PublishView™ documents) 139
lesson bundles 153-154
linked variables 236
pages 89
parts of expressions 217
problems 90
PublishView™ objects 112
shortcuts 27
table rows and columns 375
derivative settings
adjusting 533
Destination folder
editing 54
diagnostics programs 598
differential equations, graphing 259
dilating axes 444
displaying
data values 417, 421
Graph 1 516
graphs 515
graphs in Page Layout view 516
grid in Graphs 268
TI-SmartView™ emulator in teacher software 575
two graphs simultaneously 516
variable values 225
distribution, calculating 399
documents
creating .tnsp files 96
printing .tnsp files 144
saving .tnsp files 100
documents (.tns)
changing General Settings 69
closing 79
creating 75
deleting 78
opening 39, 76
opening with TI-SmartView™ emulator 580
printing 91
properties 92
protecting 94
read-only 94
saving 39, 77-78
saving in emulator 581
switching between 83
viewing 83
documents (.tns, .tnsp)
opening (Content Workspace) 32
documents workspace 16
Documents Workspace 59
domain restrictions 243
Index 615
616 Index
dot charts 431
DragScreen feature 157, 164
drawing
arcs 281, 330
rectangles 283, 332
statistics plots 461
triangles 282, 331
drawing geometric shapes 282, 331
drawing shapes
ellipse 284, 333
drop points questions
adding 188
E
editing 263
Destination folder 54
expressions 216
functions 263
functions and programs 549
table settings 413
values in lists 365
elements, deleting from lists 366
ellipse
as geometric shape 284, 333
emailing lesson bundles 155
embedding
values in functions or programs 556
emulator, See TI-SmartView™ emulator 62
equation questions
adding 181
equations
differential 259
graphing 248
graphing parametric 251
graphing polar 252
Lotka-Volterra 259
of geometric objects 307
ordinary differential equations (ODE) 259
errors
circular definitions 563
showing (Notes) 472
estimating
values between data points 511
evaluating expressions 205
exact or approximate results 377
Excel® spreadsheets, copying from 387
expanding view details area 509
experiments
basic steps 486
exploring
content workspace 20
resources pane 21
Exploring the Content workspace 15
Exploring the Documents workspace 16
expressions 263
changing functions in tables 413
copying from Calculator history 219-220
deleting parts of 217
editing 216, 314
entering from templates 204-205
entering in tables 367
entering with wizards 207, 391
evaluating 202, 472
selecting (Calculator) 216
selecting (Notes) 468
using symbols 255
F
File transfers
stopping 57
Index 617
618 Index
files
adding to lesson bundles 147, 151
adding to transfer list 52
copying/pasting from lesson bundles 151
deleting from lesson bundles 151
image file types 167
opening in lesson bundles 149, 151
pasting from lesson bundles 151
refreshing list in lesson bundles 151, 153
removing from Transfer List 53
renaming in lesson bundles 151
working with files on connected handhelds 38
Files
deleting 55
filtering activities 32
finance functions 218
Finance Solver 217
finding
area under collected data 510
slope of collected data 510
software version number 601
Flash (.flv) files 140
folders
storing PublishView™ objects 113
footers in PublishView™ documents 122
formatting
results (Calculator) 203
text (PublishView™ documents) 129
formatting text 79
formatting toolbar
hiding 80
showing 80
frequency plots 384
functions
changing expressions in tables 413
defining 208, 212-213
displaying history 265, 314
displaying list of in tables 413
domain restrictions 243
editing 263
evaluating 553
finance 218
graphing 240, 247, 451
hiding table of 263
hiding/showing 269
recalling definitions 216
renaming 264
rotating 240
showing values in tables 412
stretching 240
supported distributions 400
translating 240
user-defined 561
functions and programs
changing modes 570
circular definition errors 563
closing 553
controlling flow 563
creating copies of 549
differences between 561
editing 549
embedding values 556
private libraries 555
public libraries 554
renaming 549
running non-library 555
setting modes 570
stopping 556
storing 549
viewing 549
Index 619
620 Index
G
generating
columns of data 380
geometric objects
equations of 307
geometric shapes
conic by five points 286, 335
hyperbola 286, 335
parabola 285, 334
Geometry
hiding objects 355
Geometry application 321
Geometry application settings 238, 322
global variables 561
graph
changing appearance 315
graphing
3D functions 311
3D parametric equations 312
3D view 311
conic sections 248
equations 248
functions 240, 247, 451
inequality expressions 255
parametric equations 251
polar equations 252
scatter plots 255
sequences 256
table data 382
time plots 256
web plots 256
with the text tool 253
Graphing view
changing axes attributes 268
rescaling work area 266
graphs
adding titles 522
displaying 515
displaying Graph 1 516
displaying in Page Layout view 516
displaying two simultaneously 516
position versus time 534
rescaling 444
scaling 525
setting axis range 523
tracing all 274
velocity versus time 534
Graphs & Geometry application 237
Graphs & Geometry settings 71
grid
appearance in Graphs 268
displaying 268
grouping applications 89
guidebooks, downloading 597
H
handhelds
capturing current screens 157
capturing selected handhelds 159
checking for OS updates 43
copying images 157
installing OS update 44
locating using Identify Selected 47
pasting images 157
renaming 46
transferring files 42
viewing content on connected 35
working with files on connected 38
headers in PublishView™ documents 122
Index 621
622 Index
Help, accessing 595
helping improve the product 602
hiding
3D graphs 317
functions in work areas 269
objects in Geometry 355
table of functions 263
hiding format toolbar 80
histograms
adjusting scale 426
creating 426
exploring data in bins 425
modifying bins 427-428
scale formats 426
history
relation 265, 314
history, See Calculator history 219
hyperbola
as geometric shape 286, 335
hyperlinks (PublishView™ documents)
converting text to 136
editing 136
linking to files 131
linking to websites 134
I
Identify Selected 47
If, Lbl, Goto 564
images
adding to questions 176
deleting 169
file types 167
inserting 167, 467
inserting background 239, 323, 355
moving 168
Quick Poll 167
resizing 169
saving 157-158
selecting 168
TI-Nspire™ applications 167
images (PublishView™ documents) 137, 139
importing
remote data 505
inferential statistics
calculating test results (Calculate) 391
drawing plots 461
graphing test results 391
input descriptions table 392
pooled option 412
initializing variables 560
inserting
background images 239, 323, 355
cell ranges in formulas 368
chemical equations 468
comments in Notes 468
elements in lists (Lists & Spreadsheet) 366
hyperlinks (PublishView™ documents) 131
images 467
images (PublishView™ documents) 137
images in questions 176
images in Quick Poll 167
images to pages 167
math expressions 468
PublishView™ objects 108
rows or columns in tables 375
rows or columns into matrices 206
shape symbols 468
text 458
text (PublishView™ documents) 128
installing
software updates 599
Index 623
624 Index
installing a handheld OS update 44
intercept, changing 446
interfaces
multi-channel sensors 488
single-channel sensors 488
intervals 496
K
keypads, switching between 575
keyword searches 32
L
labeling
point coordinates 306
language
changing 18
LED lights
sensors 504
lesson bundles
adding files 147, 151
adding shortcuts to 154
copying 154
copying/pasting 153-154
copying/pasting files 151
creating 145-146, 153
deleting 153-154
deleting files 151
emailing 155
opening 149-150, 152, 154
opening files 149, 151
packaging 154-155
packaging pages 154
pasting 154
refreshing list of files 151, 153-154
renaming 153-154
renaming files 151
sending 154, 156
libraries 539
changing the access levels 552
Linear Algebra functions 543
private 555
public 554
refreshing 542
restoring 543
library objects
creating shortcuts 542
private 540
public 541
using 541
Linear Algebra library functions 543
lines
adding movable to plots 445
locking intercept at zero 447
rotating movable 446
tracing movable 447
lines (geometric)
creating 278, 327
lines and points, creating 277, 326
linking
columns to symbol table 517
table cells to variables 374
table columns to lists 365
to files 131
to websites 134
values between applications 223
variables 229
links 27
adding 28
changing 29
moving 30
Index 625
626 Index
removing 29
list math in Lists & Spreadsheet 368
lists
deleting elements in tables 366
inserting elements in tables 366
sharing table columns as 364
viewing and editing 365
Lists & Spreadsheet application 363
lists questions
adding 189
locating software updates 599
locking
intercept of movable lines at zero 447
variables 233
locus construction 288, 337
loops
EndLoop 569
For 566
using 566
While 568
Lotka-Volterra equations 259
Lua, scripts 583
M
managing collected data sets 507
math expression boxes 473-475
math expressions, See expressions 202
math templates 204
matrices
creating 206
inserting rows or columns 206
measurement units
changing (Vernier DataQuest ™) 494
measurements, converting units 210
measuring
angles 293, 342
circumference or perimeter 291, 340
distance between objects 291, 340
length 291, 340
sides of objects 292, 341
slope of object 293, 342
measuring objects 290, 339
menus
Calculator 201
minimum API level for scripts 589
models, Pdf distribution 399
modes
changing in functions and programs 570
setting in functions and programs 570
setting in programs 570
motion match
options 534
removing plots 535
moving
images 168
images (PublishView™ documents) 139
links 30
points (Data & Statistics) 440
PublishView™ objects 110
rows and columns (Lists & Spreadsheet) 377
multiple-line functions 212-213
multiple cells, selecting 372
multiple choice questions
adding 178
N
naming
table columns 364
variables (name conflicts) 374
Index 627
628 Index
naming columns 517
navigating in tables 369
normal probability, creating plots 428
Notes
adding shapes 469
formatting text 465
inserting comments 468
selecting text 465
using colors 466
numeric plots, splitting by categories 438
numerical input questions
adding 185
O
objects
(PublishView™ documents) 106, 114
changing attributes 290, 339
changing fill colors 289, 338
dilating 297, 346
duplicating 296, 345
enlarging 297, 346
finding area 292, 341
hiding in Geometry 355
measuring 290, 339
reflecting 295, 344
rotating 297, 346
symmetrical images 295, 344
tracing geometric 352
transformation of 295, 344
open response questions
adding 180
opening
activities 32
documents (.tns) 39
files in lesson bundles 149
lesson bundles 149-150, 152, 154
Transfer Tool 52
opening documents (.tns) 76
options
capture page 158
Capture Selected Handheld 159
organizing PublishView™ sheets 121
OS update
installing on a handheld 44
overlapping PublishView™ objects 111
P
packaging lesson bundles 154
Page Layout view 516
page numbers (PublishView™ documents) 121
Page Sorter 61, 87
pages
adding 90
deleting 89
grouping 89
packaging 154
rearranging 88
selecting 88
ungrouping 89
panes
resource 21
parabola
creating from focus and directrix 285, 334
creating from focus and vertex 285, 334
parametric equations
graphing 251
pasting
handheld images 157
images 158
images in handheld mode 157
Index 629
630 Index
lesson bundles 153
screens 163
table data 386
pasting problems 90
PDF
save document as 91
pie charts, creating 435
piecewise functions 208
playbacks
adjusting rate 532
pausing 531
repeating 533
starting 532
plots
adding a value on existing plot 442
adding movable lines 445
caseplots (default) 416
changing type 443
colors in 3D graphs 315
creating 421
customizing 257
dot plots 421
graphing 255-256
predictive 534
probability 428
removing motion match 535
scatter 429
sorting categories 441
summary 384
X-Y line 430
plotting
dot charts 431
models 513
statistical data 391
table data 382
points
animating 303, 357
changing colors 528
changing direction 304, 357
creating 277, 326
identifying intersections 278, 327
labeling coordinates 306
moving (Data & Statistics) 440
of interest 244
selecting (Data & Statistics) 440
setting markers 529
setting options 527
points and lines, creating 277, 326
polar equations
graphing 252
polygons, drawing 283, 332
pooled variances 412
pre-defined measurement units 210
precision of results 203
predictive plots
drawing and clearing 534
preview, printed document 92
print preview 92
printing
PublishView™ documents 144
printing documents (.tns) 91
probability, creating plots 428
problems
adding 90
copying/pasting 90
deleting 90
renaming 91
problems (PublishView™ documents) 118, 120
product improvements 602
Program Editor application 545
Index 631
632 Index
programs
calling one from another 562
debugging 571
defining 212
editing 549
flows 564
running 553
running diagnostics 598
Proof template 465
protecting documents (.tns) 94
PublishView™ documents 95
applications 114, 118
converting 141, 144
creating 96
hyperlinks 130, 137
images 137, 139
objects 106, 113
printing 144
problems 118
problemsdeleting
problems (PublishView™ documents) 120
saving 100
sheets 121, 127
text 127, 130
video files 140
Q
Q & A template 464
questions
(x,y) numerical input 185
adding 176
adding images 176
drop points 188
equation 181
lists 189
multiple choice 178
open response 180
responding 196
Self Check mode 179
suggested responses 181
using the Question application 171
questions (students)
checking answers 198
toolbar options 195
types of 195
Quick Graph, using 382
Quick Poll
images 167
Quick Poll questions
clearing answers 199
responding 196
types 197
R
random numbers
generating in tables 380
range of cells, inserting in formulas 368
raw data 420
raw data, adjusting histogram scale 426
rays
creating 279, 328
read-only documents (.tns) 94
reducing view details area 509
registering products 597
regression lines, showing 447
relations
displaying history 265, 314
showing table of values 263
remote data
retrieving 505
Index 633
634 Index
removing
hyperlinks from text 137
images 169
linked variables 236
links 29
removing files from Transfer list 53
renaming
data sets 508
functions 264
functions and programs 549
lesson bundles 153-154
problems (PublishView™ documents) 120
renaming problems 91
replays
starting 532
reponses
adding suggested 181
repositioning images 168
rescaling
graphs (dilation) 444
graphs (translation) 444
resizing
images 169
images (PublishView™ documents) 139
PublishView™ objects 110
table rows and columns 375
resources pane
exploring 21
restoring data 531
restoring libraries 543
results
copying from Calculator history 219-220
setting decimal approximation 203
rotating objects 297, 346
rows
copying 376
deleting 375
inserting 206, 375
moving 377
resizing 375
selecting 374
S
Save
document as PDF 91
saving
activities to your computer 33
captured images 157
captured pages 161
documents (.tns) 39
documents (.tns) in emulator 581
handheld screens 161
images 158
PublishView™ documents 100
PublishView™ document as PDF 144
saving documents (.tns) 77-78
scaling graphs 525
scaling Plane Geometry Analytic window 266
scatter plots 429
screen capture tool 157
screen captures
copying 163
pasting 163
scripts
setting API level 589
scripts, Lua 583
scrolling in tables 369
searching for activities 32
segments
creating 279, 328
Index 635
636 Index
selecting
a block of table cells 372
columns 529
data ranges 526
data sets for replays 532
data sets to plot 524
expressions in Calculator 216
images 168
table rows or columns 374
templates 464
text in Notes 465
working folder (PublishView™ objects) 113
selecting pages 88
self-check
document types 174
Self-Check mode 179
sensors
calibrating 495
changing measurement units 494
connecting 493
for computers 490
for handhelds 489
for remote data collections 503
interfaces 488
LED lights 504
reversing reading display 496
setting to zero 496
setting up offline 493
triggering 505
types 489
sequences, generating in table columns 381
sets
renaming data sets 508
sets of data, comparing 507
sets, storing data as 507
setting
minimum API level for scripts 589
settings
defining 18
in Geometry application 238, 322
language 18
TI-SmartView™ emulator 578
shapes
adding in Notes 469
drawing geometric 282, 331
equations of 307
legends 419
shortcuts 27
creating to library objects 542
showing
3D graphs 317
functions in work areas 269
showing format toolbar 80
showing screen details 530
sliders
animating 3D graphs 319
setting variable values 231
slope 510
measuring 293, 342
software
checking for updates 599
installing updates 599
software licenses, activating 595
software version number 601
solving simple math expressions 202
sorting
plotted categories 441
table data 378
splitting numeric plots by categories 438
spreadsheets
navigating 369
Index 637
638 Index
sharing columns as lists 364
starting
transfer 56
statistical tests, supported 407
statistics, drawing plots 461
status bar 17
stopping
file transfers 57
storing
data as sets 507
striking data 530
strip charts 497
subroutines, calling 562
suggested response 174
summary data 420
summary information, displaying 417
summary plots 382, 384
creating 384
symbol table
linking columns to 517
syntax
checking 548
using to prevent naming conflicts 374
system of equations 209
T
table data
graphing 382
sorting 378
using in statistical analysis (Lists & Spreadsheet) 391
table of values 263
tables
changing expressions for functions 413
copying rows or columns 376
deleting contents of cells 372
deleting list elements 366
deleting rows and columns 375
displaying list of functions 413
editing settings 413
generating column data 379
inserting list elements 366
inserting rows or columns 375
linking columns to lists 365
moving rows or columns 377
navigating in 369
restoring data 531
selecting rows or columns 374
sharing columns as lists 364
showing function values 412
striking data 530
working with cells 370
tangents, creating 280, 329
Teacher Tool Palette 173
templates
math 204-205
Notes 464
Proof 465
Q & A 464
selecting 464
text
adding to work areas 239, 267, 323, 356
changing colors 466
entering 367
finding in Program Editor 552
formatting (Notes) 465
selecting in Notes 465
text formatting 79
text tool
using to graph equations 253
threshold values
increasing/decreasing 505
Index 639
640 Index
TI-Nspire(TM) Screen Capture Window 160
zooming in/out 161
TI-Nspire™ SmartView Emulator
capturing images 163
TI-SmartView™
capturing images 157
DragScreen feature 157
TI-SmartView™ emulator 62, 576
capturing screens 581
changing panel width 576
opening 573
opening documents (.tns) 580
options 579
saving documents (.tns) 581
settings 578
TI-SmartView™ Emulator 573
TI websites 598
titles, clicking to see variable names (Data & Statistics) 416
tool palette 17
toolbar 17
text formatting 79
tools
screen capture 157
Touchpad, navigating in emulator 577
tracing
all graphs simultaneously 274
geometric objects 352
Transfer
starting 56
Transfer List
removing files 53
Transfer Tool 49
adding files 52
closing 58
interface 49
opening 52
removing files 53
transferring files to connected handhelds 42
transformation of objects 295, 344
triggering
enabling 506-507
troubleshooting information 598
U
undefined variables 560
ungrouping
applications 89
pages 89
units
converting measurement symbols 210
creating user-defined 211
unlinking variables 236
unlocking
variables 233
user-defined functions 561
Using the Preview Pane 23
Using the Welcome screen 13
V
values
assigning to variables 557
linking between applications 223
requesting for variables 558
user-supplied for arguments 557
variables 211
assigning values 557
attributes 223
calculated results 235
creating 225, 227
creating from table cells 373
Index 641
642 Index
deleting 561
displaying value 225
from calculator values 224
in calculations 230
in Graphs & Geometry 225
in Lists & Spreadsheet 227
initializing 560
linking 229
linking table columns to lists 365
linking to 374
linking to shared 229
locking and unlocking 233
naming 231
preventing naming conflicts 374
removing linked variables 236
requesting values 558
setting values with sliders 231
sharing table columns as lists 364
types of 224
undefined 560
unlinking 236
variances, pooled 412
vectors
creating 280, 329
version number, locating 601
videos (PublishView™ documents)
inserting files 140
video console 141
view
3D Graphing 311
viewing
captured screens 160
documents (.tns) 83
functions and programming 549
values in lists 365
views
3D Graphing 313
Graph 486
Page Layout 516
Table 486
W
warnings, showing (Notes) 472
websites, locating troubleshooting information 598
welcome screen 13
Welcome Screen
closing 14
windows
TI-Nspire(TM) Screen Capture 160
wizards
entering expressions (Calculator) 207
entering expressions (Lists & Spreadsheet) 391
statistics 391
work area
customizing in Graphs and Geometry 267
work areas
adding text to 239, 267, 323, 356
workspace
Content 15
Documents 16
workspaces
Content Workspace 20
Documents Workspace 59
exploring 20
X
X-Y line plots 430
Index 643
644 Index
Z
zooming 266
in 527
in/out 161
out 527
PublishView™ documents 127

Navigation menu